View DSP16411_1234741.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
1 Features
! !
Two IEEE (R) 1149.1 test ports (JTAG boundary scan) Full-speed, in-circuit emulation hardware for each core with eight address and two data watchpoint units for efficient application development Supported by DSP16411 software and hardware development tools 208-ball PBGA package (17 mm x 17 mm; 1.0 mm ball pitch) for small footprint
Twin DSP16000 dual-MAC cores perform up to 1140 million MACs per second at 285 MHz Low power: -- 1.2 V internal supply for power efficiency -- 3.3 V I/O pin supply for compatibility 322K x 16 on-chip RAM Centralized direct memory access unit (DMAU): -- Transparent peripheral-to-memory and memory-to-memory transfers -- Better utilization of DSP MIPS -- Simplifies management of system data flow 16-bit parallel interface unit (PIU) with direct memory access (DMA) provides host access to all DSP memory Two enhanced serial I/O units (SIU0 and SIU1) with DMA: -- Compatible with TDM highways such as T1/E1 and ST-bus -- Hardware support for -law and A-law companding Core messaging units (MGU0 and MGU1) for interprocessor communication On-chip, programmable, PLL clock synthesizer eliminates need for high-speed clock input Two 7-bit control I/O interfaces (BIOs) for increased flexibility and lower system costs 32-bit system and external memory interface (SEMI) supports 16-bit or 32-bit synchronous or asynchronous memories
!
!
!
! !
!
2 Description
The DSP16411 is a digital signal processor (DSP) optimized for communications infrastructure applications. Large, on-chip memory enables it to be programmed to perform numerous fixed-point signal processing functions, including equalization, channel coding, or speech coding. The DSP16411 features twin DSP16000 dual-MAC DSP cores and enhanced DMA capabilities. Together, these features deliver the performance required for second- and third-generation infrastructure equipment. The DSP16411 extends the performance of the DSP16410CG with a higher maximum clock rate and additional on-chip RAM, while maintaining low power consumption, efficient software code density, and small physical size. The DSP16411 is pinout and code compatible with the DSP16410CG to protect investments in hardware and software development.
!
!
!
!
!
!
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
Table of Contents
Contents " " " "
1 2 3 4
Page
"
"
"
"
"
"
2
Features ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 Description...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Notation Conventions ...................................................................................................................................14 Hardware Architecture ..................................................................................................................................14 4.1 DSP16411 Architectural Overview........................................................................................................14 " 4.1.1 DSP16000 Cores ........................................................................................................................17 " 4.1.2 Clock Synthesizer (PLL) .............................................................................................................17 " 4.1.3 Triport RAMs (TPRAM0--1).....................................................................................................17 " 4.1.4 Shared Local Memory (SLM) ......................................................................................................17 " 4.1.5 Internal Boot ROMs (IROM0--1) .............................................................................................17 " 4.1.6 Messaging Units (MGU0--1) ...................................................................................................17 " 4.1.7 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI)..........................................................................18 " 4.1.8 Bit Input/Output Units (BIO0--1) ..............................................................................................18 " 4.1.9 Timer Units (TIMER0_0--1 and TIMER1_0--1) ...................................................................18 " 4.1.10 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU)...........................................................................................18 " 4.1.11 Interrupt Multiplexers (IMUX0--1)............................................................................................18 " 4.1.12 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) ........................................................................................................18 " 4.1.13 Serial Interface Units (SIU0--1) ...............................................................................................18 " 4.1.14 Test Access Ports (JTAG0--1).................................................................................................18 " 4.1.15 Hardware Development Systems (HDS0--1) ..........................................................................18 4.2 DSP16000 Core Architectural Overview...............................................................................................19 " 4.2.1 System Control and Cache (SYS) ..............................................................................................19 " 4.2.2 Data Arithmetic Unit (DAU) .........................................................................................................19 " 4.2.3 Y-Memory Space Address Arithmetic Unit (YAAU) .....................................................................20 " 4.2.4 X-Memory Space Address Arithmetic Unit (XAAU).....................................................................20 " 4.2.5 Core Block Diagram....................................................................................................................21 4.3 Device Reset ........................................................................................................................................23 " 4.3.1 Reset After Powerup or Power Interruption ................................................................................23 " 4.3.2 RSTN Pin Reset..........................................................................................................................23 " 4.3.3 JTAG Controller Reset ................................................................................................................24 4.4 Interrupts and Traps..............................................................................................................................25 " 4.4.1 Hardware Interrupt Logic ............................................................................................................25 " 4.4.2 Hardware Interrupt Multiplexing ..................................................................................................28 " 4.4.3 Clearing Core Interrupt Requests ...............................................................................................30 " 4.4.4 Host Interrupt Output ..................................................................................................................30 " 4.4.5 Globally Enabling and Disabling Hardware Interrupts.................................................................30 " 4.4.6 Individually Enabling, Disabling, and Prioritizing Hardware Interrupts ........................................31 " 4.4.7 Hardware Interrupt Status ...........................................................................................................32 " 4.4.8 Interrupt and Trap Vector Table...................................................................................................32 " 4.4.9 Software Interrupts......................................................................................................................34 " 4.4.10 INT[3:0] and TRAP Pins..............................................................................................................34 " 4.4.11 Nesting Interrupts........................................................................................................................35 " 4.4.12 Interrupts and Cache Usage .......................................................................................................37 " 4.4.13 Interrupt Polling...........................................................................................................................37 4.5 Interprocessor Communication .............................................................................................................38 " 4.5.1 Core-to-Core Interrupts and Traps ..............................................................................................39 " 4.5.2 Message Buffer Data Exchange .................................................................................................39 " 4.5.2.1 Message Buffer Write Protocol ...................................................................................40 " 4.5.2.2 Message Buffer Read Protocol ...................................................................................40 " 4.5.3 DMAU Data Transfer...................................................................................................................41 4.6 Memory Maps .......................................................................................................................................42 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Table of Contents (continued)
Contents " " " " " " " Page
" 4.7 " 4.8 " 4.9 " 4.10 " 4.11 " 4.12 " "
" 4.13 " " "
" "
" " " " " "
" 4.14 "
" " "
"
4.6.1 Private Internal Memory ..............................................................................................................43 4.6.2 Shared Internal I/O......................................................................................................................43 4.6.3 Shared External I/O and Memory................................................................................................43 4.6.4 X-Memory Map ...........................................................................................................................44 4.6.5 Y-Memory Maps ..........................................................................................................................45 4.6.6 Z-Memory Maps ..........................................................................................................................46 4.6.7 Internal I/O Detailed Memory Map ..............................................................................................47 Triport Random-Access Memory (TPRAM) ..........................................................................................48 Shared Local Memory (SLM) ................................................................................................................49 Bit Input/Output Units (BIO0--1) .......................................................................................................50 Timer Units (TIMER0_0--1 and TIMER1_0--1) ............................................................................53 Hardware Development System (HDS0--1) .....................................................................................56 JTAG Test Port (JTAG0--1)...............................................................................................................57 4.12.1 Port Identification ........................................................................................................................57 4.12.2 Emulation Interface Signals to the DSP16411 ............................................................................58 " 4.12.2.1 TCS 14-Pin Header.....................................................................................................58 " 4.12.2.2 JCS 20-Pin Header .....................................................................................................59 " 4.12.2.3 HDS 9-Pin, D-Type Connector....................................................................................60 4.12.3 Multiprocessor JTAG Connections..............................................................................................61 4.12.4 Boundary Scan ...........................................................................................................................62 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU).....................................................................................................64 4.13.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................64 4.13.2 Registers .....................................................................................................................................67 4.13.3 Data Structures ...........................................................................................................................83 " 4.13.3.1 One-Dimensional Data Structure (SWT Channels).....................................................83 " 4.13.3.2 Two-Dimensional Data Structure (SWT Channels) .....................................................84 " 4.13.3.3 Memory-to-Memory Block Transfers (MMT Channels) ...............................................86 4.13.4 The PIU Addressing Bypass Channel.........................................................................................86 4.13.5 Single-Word Transfer Channels (SWT).......................................................................................87 4.13.6 Memory-to-Memory Transfer Channels (MMT)...........................................................................90 4.13.7 Interrupts and Priority Resolution................................................................................................92 4.13.8 Error Reporting and Recovery ....................................................................................................94 4.13.9 Programming Examples..............................................................................................................95 " 4.13.9.1 SWT Example 1: A Two-Dimensional Array ...............................................................95 " 4.13.9.2 SWT Example 2: A One-Dimensional Array ...............................................................97 " 4.13.9.3 MMT Example.............................................................................................................99 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI)..................................................................................100 4.14.1 External Interface ......................................................................................................................101 " 4.14.1.1 Configuration.............................................................................................................102 " 4.14.1.2 Asynchronous Memory Bus Arbitration.....................................................................103 " 4.14.1.3 Enables and Strobes.................................................................................................104 " 4.14.1.4 External Clock...........................................................................................................105 " 4.14.1.5 Address and Data .....................................................................................................106 4.14.2 16-Bit External Bus Accesses ...................................................................................................109 4.14.3 32-Bit External Bus Accesses ...................................................................................................109 4.14.4 Registers ................................................................................................................................... 110 " 4.14.4.1 ECON0 Register ....................................................................................................... 111 " 4.14.4.2 ECON1 Register ....................................................................................................... 112 " 4.14.4.3 Segment Registers ................................................................................................... 114 4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory ............................................................................................................. 116 " 4.14.5.1 Functional Timing...................................................................................................... 116 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 3
Agere Systems Inc.
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
Table of Contents (continued)
Contents Page " 4.14.5.2 Extending Access Time Via the ERDY Pin ...............................................................120 " 4.14.5.3 Interfacing Examples ................................................................................................122
" 4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) ................................................................................................................135 " 4.15.1 Registers ...................................................................................................................................135 " 4.15.2 Hardware Interface ...................................................................................................................139 " 4.15.2.1 Enables and Strobes.................................................................................................140 " 4.15.2.2 Address and Data Pins .............................................................................................141 " 4.15.2.3 Flags, Interrupt, and Ready Pins ..............................................................................142 " 4.15.3 Host Data Read and Write Cycles ............................................................................................143 " 4.15.4 Host Register Read and Write Cycles.......................................................................................145 " 4.15.5 Host Commands .......................................................................................................................147 " 4.15.5.1 Status/Control/Address Register Read Commands..................................................148 " 4.15.5.2 Status/Control/Address Register Write Commands ..................................................148 " 4.15.5.3 Memory Read Commands ........................................................................................149 " 4.15.5.4 Flow Control for Memory Read Commands..............................................................150 " 4.15.5.5 Memory Write Commands ........................................................................................151 " 4.15.5.6 Flow Control for Control/Status/Address Register and Memory Write Commands...151 " 4.15.6 Host Command Examples ........................................................................................................152 " 4.15.6.1 Download of Program or Data ..................................................................................152 " 4.15.6.2 Upload of Data ..........................................................................................................152 " 4.15.7 PIU Interrupts ............................................................................................................................153 " 4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) ...................................................................................................................154 " 4.16.1 Hardware Interface ...................................................................................................................156 " 4.16.2 Pin Conditioning Logic, Bit Clock Selection Logic, and Frame Sync Selection Logic ...............157 " 4.16.3 Basic Input Processing .............................................................................................................159 " 4.16.4 Basic Output Processing...........................................................................................................160 " 4.16.5 Clock and Frame Sync Generation ...........................................................................................161 " 4.16.6 ST-Bus Timing Examples..........................................................................................................166 " 4.16.7 SIU Loopback ...........................................................................................................................168 " 4.16.8 Basic Frame Structure ..............................................................................................................168 " 4.16.9 Assigning SIU Logical Channels to DMAU Channels ...............................................................169 "4.16.10 Frame Error Detection and Reporting .......................................................................................170 "4.16.11 Frame Mode..............................................................................................................................170 "4.16.12 Channel Mode--32 Channels or Less in Two Subframes or Less ...........................................171 "4.16.13 Channel Mode--Up to 128 Channels in a Maximum of Eight Subframes ................................177 "4.16.14 SIU Examples ...........................................................................................................................180 " 4.16.14.1 Single-Channel I/O....................................................................................................180 " 4.16.14.2 ST-Bus Interface .......................................................................................................181 "4.16.15 Registers ...................................................................................................................................184 " 4.17 Internal Clock Selection ......................................................................................................................200 " 4.18 Clock Synthesis ..................................................................................................................................201 " 4.18.1 PLL Operating Frequency .........................................................................................................201
4 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
" 4.14.6 Synchronous Memory ...............................................................................................................124 " 4.14.6.1 Functional Timing......................................................................................................124 " 4.14.6.2 Interfacing Examples ................................................................................................126 " 4.14.7 Performance .............................................................................................................................128 " 4.14.7.1 System Bus...............................................................................................................128 " 4.14.7.2 External Memory, Asynchronous Interface ...............................................................129 " 4.14.7.3 External Memory, Synchronous Interface .................................................................131 " 4.14.7.4 Summary of Access Times .......................................................................................133 " 4.14.8 Priority .......................................................................................................................................134
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Table of Contents (continued)
Contents " " " " " Page
4.18.2 PLL LOCK Flag Generation ......................................................................................................201 4.18.3 PLL Registers ...........................................................................................................................202 4.18.4 PLL Programming Example ......................................................................................................203 4.18.5 Powering Down the PLL ...........................................................................................................203 4.18.6 Phase-Lock Loop (PLL) Frequency Accuracy and Jitter...........................................................203 " 4.19 External Clock Selection .....................................................................................................................204 " 4.20 Power Management............................................................................................................................205 " 5 Processor Boot-Up and Memory Download ...............................................................................................208 " 5.1 IROM Boot Routine and Host Download Via PIU ...............................................................................208 " 5.2 EROM Boot Routine and DMAU Download........................................................................................209 " 6 Software Architecture .................................................................................................................................210 " 6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference .........................................................................................................210 " 6.1.1 Conditions Based on the State of Flags ....................................................................................226 " 6.2 Registers.............................................................................................................................................227 " 6.2.1 Directly Program-Accessible (Register-Mapped) Registers......................................................227 " 6.2.2 Memory-Mapped Registers.......................................................................................................231 " 6.2.3 Register Encodings ...................................................................................................................235 " 6.2.4 Reset States..............................................................................................................................249 " 6.2.5 RB Field Encoding ....................................................................................................................252 " 7 208-Ball PBGA Package Ball Assignments ................................................................................................253 " 8 Signal Descriptions .....................................................................................................................................256 " 8.1 System Interface .................................................................................................................................257 " 8.2 BIO Interface.......................................................................................................................................257 " 8.3 System and External Memory Interface..............................................................................................257 " 8.4 SIU0 Interface .....................................................................................................................................260 " 8.5 SIU1 Interface .....................................................................................................................................261 " 8.6 PIU Interface .......................................................................................................................................262 " 8.7 JTAG0 Test Interface ..........................................................................................................................263 " 8.8 JTAG1 Test Interface ..........................................................................................................................263 " 8.9 Power and Ground..............................................................................................................................264 " 9 Device Characteristics ................................................................................................................................265 " 9.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................................................265 " 9.2 Handling Precautions..........................................................................................................................265 " 9.3 Recommended Operating Conditions.................................................................................................265 " 9.3.1 Package Thermal Considerations .............................................................................................266 "10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements ..............................................................................................267 " 10.1 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels for Bidirectional Signals and Unused Inputs ................................268 " 10.1.1 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels on the SEMI Interface ........................................................268 " 10.1.2 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels on the PIU Interface...........................................................270 " 10.2 Analog Power Supply Decoupling.......................................................................................................271 " 10.3 Power Dissipation ...............................................................................................................................272 " 10.3.1 Internal Power Dissipation ........................................................................................................272 " 10.3.2 I/O Power Dissipation................................................................................................................273 " 10.4 Power Supply Sequencing..................................................................................................................275 " 11 Timing Charateristics and Requirements....................................................................................................276 " 11.1 Phase-Lock Loop ................................................................................................................................277 " 11.2 Wake-Up Latency ...............................................................................................................................278 " 11.3 DSP Clock Generation........................................................................................................................279 " 11.4 Reset Circuit .......................................................................................................................................280 " 11.5 Reset Synchronization ........................................................................................................................281 " 11.6 JTAG ...................................................................................................................................................282 Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 5
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
Table of Contents (continued)
Contents Page
" 11.7 Interrupt and Trap ...............................................................................................................................283 " 11.8 Bit I/O ..................................................................................................................................................284 " 11.9 System and External Memory Interface..............................................................................................285 " 11.9.1 Asynchronous Interface ............................................................................................................286 " 11.9.2 Synchronous Interface ..............................................................................................................289 " 11.9.3 ERDY Interface .........................................................................................................................291 "11.10 PIU ......................................................................................................................................................292 "11.11 SIU ......................................................................................................................................................296 "12 Appendix--Naming Inconsistencies ...........................................................................................................306 "13 Outline Diagram--208-Ball PBGA ..............................................................................................................307 "14 Index ...........................................................................................................................................................308
6
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
List of Figures
Figure Page
" Figure 1. DSP16411 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................15 " Figure 2. DSP16000 Core Block Diagram .........................................................................................................21 " Figure 3. CORE0 and CORE1 Interrupt Logic Block Diagram...........................................................................26 " Figure 4. IMUX Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................................29 " Figure 5. Functional Timing for INT[3:0] and TRAP ...........................................................................................34 " Figure 6. Interprocessor Communication Logic in MGU0 and MGU1................................................................38 " Figure 7. X-Memory Map ...................................................................................................................................44 " Figure 8. Y-Memory Maps .................................................................................................................................45 " Figure 9. Z-Memory Maps..................................................................................................................................46 " Figure 10. Internal I/O Memory Map ....................................................................................................................47 " Figure 11. Interleaved Internal TPRAM ...............................................................................................................48 " Figure 12. Example Memory Arrangement ..........................................................................................................48 " Figure 13. Timer Block Diagram ..........................................................................................................................54 " Figure 14. TCS 14-Pin Connector........................................................................................................................58 " Figure 15. JCS 20-Pin Connector ........................................................................................................................59 " Figure 16. HDS 9-Pin Connector .........................................................................................................................60 " Figure 17. Typical Multiprocessor JTAG Connection with Single Scan Chain.....................................................61 " Figure 18. DMAU Interconnections and Channels...............................................................................................65 " Figure 19. DMAU Block Diagram .........................................................................................................................66 " Figure 20. One-Dimensional Data Structure for Buffering n Channels ................................................................83 " Figure 21. Two-Dimensional Data Structure for Double-Buffering n Channels....................................................84 " Figure 22. Memory-to-Memory Block Transfer ....................................................................................................86 " Figure 23. Example of a Two-Dimensional Double-Buffered Data Structure.......................................................95 " Figure 24. Example of One-Dimensional Data Structure .....................................................................................97 " Figure 25. Memory-to-Memory Block Transfer ....................................................................................................99 " Figure 26. SEMI Interface Block Diagram..........................................................................................................100 " Figure 27. Asynchronous Memory Cycles .........................................................................................................117 " Figure 28. Asynchronous Memory Cycles (RSETUP = 1, WSETUP = 1)..........................................................118 " Figure 29. Asynchronous Memory Cycles (RHOLD = 1, WHOLD = 1)..............................................................119 " Figure 30. Use of ERDY Pin to Extend Asynchronous Accesses ......................................................................120 " Figure 31. Example of Using the ERDY Pin ......................................................................................................121 " Figure 32. 32-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit Asynchronous SRAMs ............................................................123 " Figure 33. 16-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit Asynchronous SRAMs ............................................................123 " Figure 34. Synchronous Memory Cycles ...........................................................................................................125 " Figure 35. 16-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit Pipelined, Synchronous ZBT SRAMs......................................126 " Figure 36. 32-Bit External Interface with 32-Bit Pipelined, Synchronous ZBT SRAMs......................................127 " Figure 37. 32-Bit PA Register Host and Core Access........................................................................................138 " Figure 38. PIU Functional Timing for a Data Read and Write Operation ...........................................................144 " Figure 39. PIU Functional Timing for a Register Read and Write Operation .....................................................146 " Figure 40. SIU Block Diagram ...........................................................................................................................155 " Figure 41. Pin Conditioning Logic, Bit Clock Selection Logic, and Frame Sync Selection Logic.......................158 " Figure 42. Default Serial Input Functional Timing ..............................................................................................159 " Figure 43. Default Serial Output Functional Timing ...........................................................................................160 " Figure 44. Frame Sync to Data Delay Timing ....................................................................................................163 " Figure 45. Clock and Frame Sync Generation with External Clock and Synchronization " Figure 46. Clock and Frame Sync Generation with External Clock and Synchronization
(AGEXT = AGSYNC = IFSA = IFSK = 1 and Timing Requires No Resynchronization) ...................166 (AGEXT = AGSYNC = IFSA = IFSK = 1 and Timing Requires Resynchronization) .........................167
" Figure 47. Basic Frame Structure ......................................................................................................................168 " Figure 48. Basic Frame Structure with Idle Time ...............................................................................................169 " Figure 49. Channel Mode on a 128-Channel Frame .........................................................................................171
Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 7
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
List of Figures (continued)
Figure Page
" Figure 50. Subframe and Channel Selection in Channel Mode .........................................................................176 " Figure 51. Generating Interrupts on Subframe Boundaries ...............................................................................178 " Figure 52. ST-Bus Single-Rate Clock ................................................................................................................183 " Figure 53. ST-Bus Double-Rate Clock...............................................................................................................183 " Figure 54. Internal Clock Selection Logic ..........................................................................................................200 " Figure 55. Clock Synthesizer (PLL) Block Diagram ...........................................................................................201 " Figure 56. Power Management and Clock Distribution......................................................................................206 " Figure 57. Interpretation of the Instruction Set Summary Table ........................................................................211 " Figure 58. DSP16411 Program-Accessible Registers for Each Core ................................................................228 " Figure 59. Example Memory-Mapped Registers ...............................................................................................231 " Figure 60. 208-Ball PBGA Package Ball Grid Array Assignments (See-Through Top View) ............................253 " Figure 61. DSP16411 Pinout by Interface .........................................................................................................256 " Figure 62. Analog Supply Decoupling................................................................................................................271 " Figure 63. Reference Voltage Level for Timing Characteristics and Requirements for Inputs and Outputs......276 " Figure 64. I/O Clock Timing Diagram.................................................................................................................279 " Figure 65. Powerup and Device Reset Timing Diagram ...................................................................................280 " Figure 66. Reset Synchronization Timing ..........................................................................................................281 " Figure 67. JTAG I/O Timing Diagram ...............................................................................................................282 " Figure 68. Interrupt and Trap Timing Diagram...................................................................................................283 " Figure 69. Write Outputs Followed by Read Inputs (cbit = IMMEDIATE; a1 = sbit) Timing Characteristics ....284 " Figure 70. Enable and Write Strobe Transition Timing ......................................................................................285 " Figure 71. Timing Diagram for EREQN and EACKN .........................................................................................286 " Figure 72. Asynchronous Read Timing Diagram (RHOLD = 0 and RSETUP = 0) ............................................287 " Figure 73. Asynchronous Write Timing Diagram (WHOLD = 0, WSETUP = 0) .................................................288 " Figure 74. Synchronous Read Timing Diagram (Read-Read-Write Sequence) ................................................289 " Figure 75. Synchronous Write Timing Diagram .................................................................................................290 " Figure 76. ERDY Pin Timing Diagram ...............................................................................................................291 " Figure 77. Host Data Write to PDI Timing Diagram ...........................................................................................292 " Figure 78. Host Data Read from PDO Timing Diagram .....................................................................................293 " Figure 79. Host Register Write (PAH, PAL, PCON, or HSCRATCH) Timing Diagram ......................................294 " Figure 80. Host Register Read (PAH, PAL, PCON, or DSCRATCH) Timing Diagram ......................................295 " Figure 81. SIU Passive Frame and Channel Mode Input Timing Diagram ........................................................296 " Figure 82. SIU Passive Frame Mode Output Timing Diagram...........................................................................297 " Figure 83. SIU Passive Channel Mode Output Timing Diagram........................................................................298 " Figure 84. SCK External Clock Source Input Timing Diagram ..........................................................................299 " Figure 85. SIU Active Frame and Channel Mode Input Timing Diagram ...........................................................300 " Figure 86. SIU Active Frame Mode Output Timing Diagram .............................................................................302 " Figure 87. SIU Active Channel Mode Output Timing Diagram ..........................................................................303 " Figure 88. ST-Bus 2x Input Timing Diagram......................................................................................................304 " Figure 89. ST-Bus 2x Output Timing Diagram ...................................................................................................305
8
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
List of Tables
Table " Table 1. " Table 2. " Table 3. " Table 4. " Table 5. " Table 6. " Table 7. " Table 8. " Table 9. " Table 10. " Table 11. " Table 12. " Table 13. " Table 14. " Table 15. " Table 16. " Table 17. " Table 18. " Table 19. " Table 20. " Table 21. " Table 22. " Table 23. " Table 24. " Table 25. " Table 26. " Table 27. " Table 28. " Table 29. " Table 30. " Table 31. " Table 32. " Table 33. " Table 34. " Table 35. " Table 36. " Table 37. " Table 38. " Table 39. " Table 40. " Table 41. " Table 42. " Table 43. " Table 44. " Table 45. " Table 46. " Table 47. " Table 48. " Table 49. " Table 50. " Table 51. Page
DSP16411 Block Diagram Legend ..................................................................................................16 DSP16000 Core Block Diagram Legend..........................................................................................22 State of Device Output and Bidirectional Pins During and After Reset ............................................24 Hardware Interrupts .........................................................................................................................27 imux (Interrupt Multiplex Control) Register ......................................................................................28 Global Disabling and Enabling of Hardware Interrupts ....................................................................30 inc0 and inc1 (Interrupt Control) Registers 0 and 1 ........................................................................31 ins (Interrupt Status) Register..........................................................................................................32 Interrupt and Trap Vector Table .......................................................................................................33 psw1 (Processor Status Word 1) Register ......................................................................................35 signal Register ................................................................................................................................39 Full-Duplex Data Transfer Code Through Core-to-Core Message Buffer ........................................40 DMAU MMT Channel Interrupts .......................................................................................................41 DMA Intracore and Intercore Transfers Example.............................................................................41 DSP16411 Memory Components ....................................................................................................42 sbit (BIO Status/Control) Register ...................................................................................................50 cbit (BIO Control) Register ..............................................................................................................51 BIO Operations ................................................................................................................................52 BIO Flags .........................................................................................................................................52 timer0,1c (TIMER0,1 Control) Register.....................................................................................55 timer0,1 (TIMER0,1 Running Count) Register ..........................................................................56 ID (JTAG Identification) Register .....................................................................................................57 TCS 14-Pin Socket Pinout ...............................................................................................................58 JCS 20-Pin Socket Pinout ................................................................................................................59 HDS 9-Pin, Subminiature, D-Type Plug Pinout ................................................................................60 JTAG0 Boundary-Scan Register ......................................................................................................62 JTAG1 Boundary-Scan Register ......................................................................................................63 DMAU Channel Assignment ............................................................................................................64 DMAU Memory-Mapped Registers ..................................................................................................67 DSTAT (DMAU Status) Register ......................................................................................................69 DMCON0 (DMAU Master Control 0) Register..................................................................................71 DMCON1 (DMAU Master Control 1) Register..................................................................................72 Collective Designations Used in Table 34........................................................................................73 CTL0--3 (SWT0--3 Control) Registers .....................................................................................74 Collective Designations Used in Table 36........................................................................................76 CTL4--5 (MMT4--5 Control) Registers .....................................................................................76 SADD0--5 and DADD0--5 (Channels 0--5 Source and Destination Address) Registers ........77 SCNT0--3 (SWT0--3 Source Counter) Registers .....................................................................78 SCNT4--5 (MMT4--5 Source Counter) Registers.....................................................................78 DCNT0--3 (SWT0--3 Destination Counter) Registers ..............................................................79 DCNT4--5 (MMT4--5 Destination Counter) Registers ..............................................................79 LIM0--3 (SWT0--3 Limit) Registers ..........................................................................................80 LIM4--5 (MMT4--5 Limit) Registers..........................................................................................80 SBAS0--3 (SWT0--3 Source Base Address) Registers ...........................................................81 DBAS0--3 (SWT0--3 Destination Base Address) Registers ....................................................81 STR0--3 (SWT0--3 Stride) Registers .......................................................................................82 RI0--3 (SWT0--3 Reindex) Registers .......................................................................................82 SWT-Specific Memory-Mapped Registers .......................................................................................88 MMT-Specific Memory-Mapped Registers .......................................................................................91 DMAU Interrupts ..............................................................................................................................92 Overview of SEMI Pins ..................................................................................................................101 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 9
Agere Systems Inc.
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
List of Tables (continued)
Table " Table 52. " Table 53. " Table 54. " Table 55. " Table 56. " Table 57. " Table 58. " Table 59. " Table 60. " Table 61. " Table 62. " Table 63. " Table 64. " Table 65. " Table 66. " Table 67. " Table 68. " Table 69. " Table 70. " Table 71. " Table 72. " Table 73. " Table 74. " Table 75. " Table 76. " Table 77. " Table 78. " Table 79. " Table 80. " Table 81. " Table 82. " Table 83. " Table 84. " Table 85. " Table 86. " Table 87. " Table 88. " Table 89. " Table 90. " Table 91. " Table 92. " Table 93. " Table 94. " Table 95. " Table 96. " Table 97. " Table 98. " Table 99. " Table 100. " Table 101. " Table 102.
10
Page
Configuration Pins for the SEMI External Interface........................................................................102 Asynchronous Memory Bus Arbitration Pins ..................................................................................103 Enable and Strobe Pins for the SEMI External Interface ...............................................................104 ECKO Output Clock Pin Configuration...........................................................................................105 Address and Data Bus Pins for the SEMI External Interface .........................................................107 16-Bit External Bus Configuration ..................................................................................................109 32-Bit External Bus Configuration ..................................................................................................109 SEMI Memory-Mapped Registers ..................................................................................................110 ECON0 (External Control 0) Register ............................................................................................111 ECON1 (External Control 1) Register ............................................................................................112 ECKO Output Clock Pin Configuration...........................................................................................113 EXSEG0 (CORE0 External X Segment Address Extension) Register...........................................114 EXSEG1 (CORE1 External X Segment Address Extension) Register...........................................114 EYSEG0 (CORE0 External Y Segment Address Extension) Register...........................................115 EYSEG1 (CORE1 External Y Segment Address Extension) Register...........................................115 System Bus Minimum Access Times .............................................................................................128 Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, Asynchronous Interface, 32-Bit Data Bus ...........................133 Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, Asynchronous Interface, 16-Bit Data Bus ...........................133 Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, Synchronous Interface, 32-Bit Data Bus .............................133 Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, Synchronous Interface, 16-Bit Data Bus .............................133 Example Average Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, 32-Bit Data Bus ......................................134 Example Average Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, 16-Bit Data Bus ......................................134 PIU Registers .................................................................................................................................135 PCON (PIU Control) Register ........................................................................................................136 PDI (PIU Data In) Register .............................................................................................................137 PDO (PIU Data Out) Register ........................................................................................................137 HSCRATCH (Host Scratch) Register .............................................................................................137 DSCRATCH (DSP Scratch) Register .............................................................................................137 PA (Parallel Address) Register.......................................................................................................138 PIU External Interface ....................................................................................................................139 Enable and Strobe Pins .................................................................................................................140 Address and Data Pins ..................................................................................................................141 Flags, Interrupt, and Ready Pins....................................................................................................142 Summary of Host Commands ........................................................................................................147 Status/Control/Address Register Read Commands .......................................................................148 Status/Control/Address Register Write Commands .......................................................................148 Memory Read Commands .............................................................................................................149 Memory Write Commands .............................................................................................................151 SIU External Interface ....................................................................................................................156 Control Register Fields for Pin Conditioning, Bit Clock Selection, and Frame Sync Selection ......157 A Summary of Bit Clock and Frame Sync Control Register Fields ................................................164 Examples of Bit Clock and Frame Sync Control Register Fields ...................................................165 Subframe Definition........................................................................................................................172 Location of Control Fields Used in Channel Mode .........................................................................174 Description of Control Fields Used in Channel Mode ....................................................................174 Subframe Selection........................................................................................................................175 Channel Activation Within a Selected Subframe............................................................................175 Channel Masking Within a Selected Subframe ..............................................................................175 Control Register and Field Configuration for ST-Bus Interface ......................................................181 Control Register and Fields That Are Configured as Required for ST-Bus Interface.....................182 SIU Registers .................................................................................................................................184 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
List of Tables (continued)
Table " Table 103. " Table 104. " Table 105. " Table 106. " Table 107. " Table 108. " Table 109. " Table 110. " Table 111. " Table 112. " Table 113. " Table 114. " Table 115. " Table 116. " Table 117. " Table 118. " Table 119. " Table 120. " Table 121. " Table 122. " Table 123. " Table 124. " Table 125. " Table 126. " Table 127. " Table 128. " Table 129. " Table 130. " Table 131. " Table 132. " Table 133. " Table 134. " Table 135. " Table 136. " Table 137. " Table 138. " Table 139. " Table 140. " Table 141. " Table 142. " Table 143. " Table 144. " Table 145. " Table 146. " Table 147. " Table 148. " Table 149. " Table 150. " Table 151. " Table 152. " Table 153. Page
SCON0 (SIU Input/Output General Control) Register ....................................................................185 SCON1 (SIU Input Frame Control) Register ..................................................................................186 SCON2 (SIU Output Frame Control) Register ...............................................................................187 SCON3 (SIU Input/Output Subframe Control) Register .................................................................188 SCON4 (SIU Input Even Subframe Valid Vector Control) Register ...............................................189 SCON5 (SIU Input Odd Subframe Valid Vector Control) Register.................................................189 SCON6 (SIU Output Even Subframe Valid Vector Control) Register.............................................190 SCON7 (SIU Output Odd Subframe Valid Vector Control) Register ..............................................190 SCON8 (SIU Output Even Subframe Mask Vector Control) Register ............................................190 SCON9 (SIU Output Odd Subframe Mask Vector Control) Register .............................................190 SCON10 (SIU Input/Output General Control) Register ..................................................................191 SCON11 (SIU Input/Output Active Clock Control) Register ...........................................................194 SCON12 (SIU Input/Output Active Frame Sync Control) Register.................................................195 SIDR (SIU Input Data) Register .....................................................................................................196 SODR (SIU Output Data) Register.................................................................................................196 STAT (SIU Input/Output General Status) Register .........................................................................197 FSTAT (SIU Input/Output Frame Status) Register .........................................................................197 OCIX0--1 and ICIX0--1 (SIU Output and Input Channel Index) Registers .............................198 OCIX0--1 (SIU Output Channel Index) Registers ......................................................................198 ICIX0--1 (SIU Input Channel Index) Registers ...........................................................................199 Source Clock Selection ..................................................................................................................200 pllcon (Phase-Lock Loop Control) Register ..................................................................................202 pllfrq (Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control) Register ..................................................................202 pllfrq1 (Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control 1) Register .............................................................202 plldly (Phase-Lock Loop Delay Control) Register .........................................................................202 ECKO Output Clock Pin Configuration...........................................................................................204 Wake-Up Latency and Power Consumption for Low-Power Standby Mode ..................................207 Core Boot-Up After Reset ..............................................................................................................208 Contents of IROM0 and IROM1 Boot ROMs .................................................................................208 DSP16411 Instruction Groups .......................................................................................................210 Instruction Set Summary ................................................................................................................212 Notation Conventions for Instruction Set Descriptions ...................................................................218 Overall Replacement Table............................................................................................................219 F1 Instruction Syntax .....................................................................................................................222 F1E Function Statement Syntax ....................................................................................................224 DSP16411 Conditional Mnemonics ...............................................................................................226 Program-Accessible (Register-Mapped) Registers by Type, Listed Alphabetically .......................229 DMAU Memory-Mapped Registers ................................................................................................232 SEMI Memory-Mapped Registers ..................................................................................................233 PIU Registers .................................................................................................................................234 SIU Memory-Mapped Registers .....................................................................................................234 alf (AWAIT Low-Power and Flag) Register ....................................................................................235 auc0 (Arithmetic Unit Control 0) Register ......................................................................................236 auc1 (Arithmetic Unit Control 1) Register ......................................................................................237 cbit (BIO Control) Register ............................................................................................................238 cloop (Cache Loop) Register ........................................................................................................239 csave (Cache Save) Register ........................................................................................................239 cstate (Cache State) Register .......................................................................................................239 imux (Interrupt Multiplex Control) Register ....................................................................................240 ID (JTAG0--1 Identification) Registers .......................................................................................241 inc0 and inc1 (Interrupt Control) Registers 0 and 1 ......................................................................241 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 11
Agere Systems Inc.
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
List of Tables (continued)
Table " Table 154. " Table 155. " Table 156. " Table 157. " Table 158. " Table 159. " Table 160. " Table 161. " Table 162. " Table 163. " Table 164. " Table 165. " Table 166. " Table 167. " Table 168. " Table 169. " Table 170. " Table 171. " Table 172. " Table 173. " Table 174. " Table 175. " Table 176. " Table 177. " Table 178. " Table 179. " Table 180. " Table 181. " Table 182. " Table 183. " Table 184. " Table 185. " Table 186. " Table 187. " Table 188. " Table 189. " Table 190. " Table 191. " Table 192. " Table 193. " Table 194. " Table 195. " Table 196. " Table 197. " Table 198. " Table 199. " Table 200. " Table 201. " Table 202. " Table 203. " Table 204.
12
Page
ins (Interrupt Status) Register........................................................................................................242 mgi (Core-to-Core Message Input) Register .................................................................................242 mgo (Core-to-Core Message Output) Register .............................................................................242 pid (Processor Identification) Register...........................................................................................242 pllcon (Phase-Lock Loop Control) Register ..................................................................................243 pllfrq (Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control) Register ..................................................................243 pllfrq1 (Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control 1) Register .............................................................243 plldly (Phase-Lock Loop Delay Control) Register .........................................................................243 psw0 (Processor Status Word 0) Register ....................................................................................244 psw1 (Processor Status Word 1) Register ....................................................................................245 sbit (BIO Status/Control) Register .................................................................................................246 signal (Core-to-Core Signal) Register ...........................................................................................246 timer0c and timer1c (TIMER0,1 Control) Registers ..................................................................247 timer0 and timer1 (TIMER0,1 Running Count) Registers ..........................................................248 vsw (Viterbi Support Word) Register .............................................................................................248 Core Register States After Reset--40-Bit Registers......................................................................249 Core Register States After Reset--32-Bit Registers......................................................................249 Core Register States After Reset--20-Bit Registers......................................................................250 Core Register States After Reset--16-Bit Registers......................................................................250 Off-Core (Peripheral) Register Reset Values .................................................................................250 Memory-Mapped Register Reset Values--32-Bit Registers ..........................................................251 Memory-Mapped Register Reset Values--20-Bit Registers ..........................................................251 Memory-Mapped Register Reset Values--16-Bit Registers ..........................................................251 RB Field .........................................................................................................................................252 208-Ball PBGA Ball Assignments Sorted Alphabetically by Symbol ..............................................254 Absolute Maximum Ratings ...........................................................................................................265 Minimum ESD Voltage Thresholds ................................................................................................265 Recommended Operating Conditions ............................................................................................265 Package Thermal Considerations ..................................................................................................266 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements .................................................................................267 Effect of EYMODE Pin and BHEDIS Field .....................................................................................269 Typical Internal Power Dissipation at 1.2 V and 285 MHz .............................................................272 Typical I/O Power Dissipation at 3.3 V and 285 MHz ....................................................................274 Reference Voltage Level for Timing Characteristics and Requirements for Inputs and Outputs ...276 PLL Requirements .........................................................................................................................277 Wake-Up Latency...........................................................................................................................278 Timing Requirements for Input Clock .............................................................................................279 Timing Characteristics for Output Clock.........................................................................................279 Timing Requirements for Powerup and Device Reset ...................................................................280 Timing Characteristics for Device Reset ........................................................................................280 Timing Requirements for Reset Synchronization Timing ...............................................................281 Timing Requirements for JTAG I/O ................................................................................................282 Timing Characteristics for JTAG I/O ..............................................................................................282 Timing Requirements for Interrupt and Trap ..................................................................................283 Timing Requirements for BIO Input Read ......................................................................................284 Timing Characteristics for BIO Output ...........................................................................................284 Timing Characteristics for ERWN and Memory Enables................................................................285 Timing Requirements for EREQN ..................................................................................................286 Timing Characteristics for EACKN and SEMI Bus Disable ............................................................286 Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Read Operations ..............................................287 Timing Characteristics for Asynchronous Memory Read Operations ............................................287 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
List of Tables (continued)
Table " Table 205. " Table 206. " Table 207. " Table 208. " Table 209. " Table 210. " Table 211. " Table 212. " Table 213. " Table 214. " Table 215. " Table 216. " Table 217. " Table 218. " Table 219. " Table 220. " Table 221. " Table 222. " Table 223. " Table 224. " Table 225. " Table 226. " Table 227. " Table 228. " Table 229. " Table 230. " Table 231. " Table 232. " Table 233. " Table 234. " Table 235. " Table 236. " Table 237. Page
Timing Characteristics for Asynchronous Memory Write Operations.............................................288 Timing Requirements for Synchronous Read Operations..............................................................289 Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Read Operations ............................................................289 Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Write Operations.............................................................290 Timing Requirements for ERDY Pin...............................................................................................291 Timing Requirements for PIU Data Write Operations ....................................................................292 Timing Characteristics for PIU Data Write Operations ...................................................................292 Timing Requirements for PIU Data Read Operations ....................................................................293 Timing Characteristics for PIU Data Read Operations...................................................................293 Timing Requirements for PIU Register Write Operations...............................................................294 Timing Characteristics for PIU Register Write Operations .............................................................295 Timing Requirements for PIU Register Read Operations ..............................................................295 Timing Characteristics for PIU Register Read Operations .............................................................295 Timing Requirements for SIU Passive Frame Mode Input .............................................................296 Timing Requirements for SIU Passive Channel Mode Input ..........................................................296 Timing Requirements for SIU Passive Frame Mode Output ..........................................................297 Timing Characteristics for SIU Passive Frame Mode Output.........................................................297 Timing Requirements for SIU Passive Channel Mode Output .......................................................298 Timing Characteristics for SIU Passive Channel Mode Output......................................................298 Timing Requirements for SCK External Clock Source ...................................................................299 Timing Requirements for SIU Active Frame Mode Input................................................................300 Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Frame Mode Input ..............................................................300 Timing Requirements for SIU Active Channel Mode Input.............................................................301 Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Channel Mode Input ...........................................................301 Timing Requirements for SIU Active Frame Mode Output .............................................................302 Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Frame Mode Output............................................................302 Timing Requirements for SIU Active Channel Mode Output ..........................................................303 Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Channel Mode Output.........................................................303 ST-Bus 2x Input Timing Requirements ..........................................................................................304 ST-Bus 2x Output Timing Requirements .......................................................................................305 ST-Bus 2x Output Timing Characteristics ......................................................................................305 Pin Name Inconsistencies ..............................................................................................................306 Register Name Inconsistencies......................................................................................................306
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
13
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
3 Notation Conventions
The following notation conventions apply to this data sheet. Table 134 on page 218 specifies the notation conventions for the DSP16000 instruction set. lower-case Registers that are directly writable or readable by DSP16411 core instructions are lower-case.
4 Hardware Architecture
4.1 DSP16411 Architectural Overview
The DSP16411 device is a 16-bit fixed-point programmable digital signal processor (DSP). The DSP16411 consists of two DSP16000 cores together with on-chip memory and peripherals. Advanced architectural features with an expanded instruction set deliver a dramatic increase in performance compared to traditional DSP architectures for signal coding algorithms. This increase in performance, together with an efficient design implementation, results in an extremely costefficient and power-efficient solution for wireless and multimedia applications. Figure 1 on page 15 shows a block diagram of the DSP16411.
UPPER-CASE Device flags, I/O pins, control register fields, and registers that are not directly writable or readable by DSP16411 core instructions are upper-case. boldface Register names and DSP16411 core instructions are printed in boldface when used in text descriptions. Documentation variables that are replaced are printed in italics. DSP16411 program examples or C-language representations are printed in courier font. Square brackets enclose a range of numbers that represents multiple bits in a single register or bus. The range of numbers is delimited by a colon. For example, imux[11:10] are bits 11 and 10 of the program-accessible imux register. Angle brackets enclose a list of items delimited by commas or a range of items delimited by a dash (--), one of which is selected if used in an instruction. For example, SADD0--3 represents the four memory-mapped registers SADD0, SADD1, SADD2, and SADD3, and the general instruction aTEh,l = RB can be replaced with a0h = timer0. In this document, blue text or the blue graphic object " indicates a hypertext link. Click on the text or " to display the referenced item.
italics courier
[]
blue
14
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.1 DSP16411 Architectural Overview (continued)
DSP16411B Block Diagram
SICK0 SIFS0 SOD0 SCK0 PADD[3:0] PODS PRWN POBE PRDY SID0 SOCK0 SOFS0 PD[15:0] PIDS PCSN PRDYMD PIBF PINT
PIU PAB DPI SAB SDB 27 ZSEG ZEAB ZEDB 4 20 32 16 PAB DPI ZSEG ZEAB ZEDB SDB SAB 32 32 20 20 DDO DSI0 DDO 32
SIU0 DSI DDO 16 16 SDB SAB 32 20 SAB SDB DDO SIU1 16 DSI1 20 DSI SICK1 SID1 SIFS1 SOFS1 SOD1 SOCK1 SCK1 32 20 32 ZIDB SDB SAB SLM (2K x 16) ZIAB
16
SDB SAB DMAU ZIDB ZIAB
ED[31:0] ESEG[3:0] EA[18:0] ERAMN EROMN EION ERWN[1:0] ECKO EREQN EACKN ERDY EXM ERTYPE ESIZE
ZIDB SEMI
ZIAB
TPRAM0 (160K x 16) YDB YAB XAB0 XDB0 YAB0 YDB0 XAB1 XDB1 YAB1 YDB1 XDB XAB
TPRAM1 (160K x 16) YDB YAB XDB XAB
IROM0
IROM1
32
20
32
20
32
20
32
20
YDB YAB
XDB XAB
YDB YAB
XDB XAB
CORE0 IDB IMUX0 imux TO IMUX1 32 MGU0 signal pid JTAG0 jiob ID BOUNDARY SCAN HDS0 TO HDS1/MGU1 mgi mgo TIMER0_0 timer0 timer0c TIMER1_0 timer1 timer1c BIO0 cbit sbit 16 16 MGU1 signal pid mgo mgi TIMER0_1 timer0 timer0c TIMER1_1 timer1 timer1c BIO1 cbit sbit
CORE1 IDB 32 IMUX1 imux
INT[3:0]
INT[3:0]
TCK0 TMS0 TDO0 TDI0 TRST0N TRAP
JTAG1 jiob ID BOUNDARY SCAN HDS1 TRAP
TCK1 TMS1 TDO1 TDI1 TRST1N
CKI RSTN CLK
CLOCK/CONTROL pllcon pllfrq pllfrq1 plldly
IO0BIT[6:0] KEY: OFF-CORE REGISTER-MAPPED REGISTERS ACCESSIBLE BY CORE0
IO1BIT[6:0] OFF-CORE REGISTER-MAPPED REGISTERS ACCESSIBLE BY CORE1
Figure 1. DSP16411 Block Diagram Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 15
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.1 DSP16411 Architectural Overview (continued)
Table 1. DSP16411 Block Diagram Legend
Symbol BIO0--1 cbit CLK CORE0 CORE1 DDO DMAU DPI DSI0 DSI1 HDS0--1 ID IDB imux IMUX0--1 IROM0--1 jiob JTAG0--1 mgi mgo MGU0--1 PAB pid PIU pllcon pllfrq pllfrq1 plldly SAB sbit SDB SEMI signal SIU0 SIU1 SLM timer0 TIMER0_0 TIMER0_1 timer0c timer1 TIMER1_0 TIMER1_1 Description Bit I/O Units. One for each core. 16-Bit BIO Control Register. Internal Clock Signal. DSP16000 Core--System Master. DSP16000 Core--System Slave. DMA Data Out. (For transferring data from DMAU to PIU, SIU0, and SIU1.) Direct Memory Access Unit. DMA Parallel In. (For transferring 16-bit data from PIU to DMAU.) DMA Serial Data In Zero. (For transferring data from SIU0 to DMAU.) DMA Serial Data In One. (For transferring data from SIU1 to DMAU.) Hardware Development Systems. One for each core. JTAG Port Identification Register Accessible Via the JTAG Port. One for each of the two JTAG0--1 ports. Internal Data Bus. One for each core. 16-Bit IMUX Control Register. Interrupt Multiplexers. One for each core; selects ten interrupts from DMAU, SIU0, SIU1, PIU, INT[3:0], TIMER0--1, and MGU. Internal Read-Only Memories (one for each core) for Boot and HDS Code. 32-Bit JTAG Test Register. JTAG Test Ports. One for each core. 16-Bit Core-to-Core Message Input Register. 16-Bit Core-to-Core Message Output Register. Core-to-Core Messaging Unit. One for each core. 27-Bit Parallel Address Bus. (For DMAU/PIU communications.) 16-Bit Processor ID Register (CORE0: 0x0000; CORE1: 0x0001). Parallel Interface Unit. (16-bit parallel host interface.) 16-Bit Phase-Lock Loop Control Register. 16-Bit Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control Register. 16-Bit Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control 1 Register. 16-Bit Phase-Lock Loop Delay Control Register. 20-Bit System Address Bus. Address for system bus (S-bus) accesses. 16-Bit BIO Status/Control Register. 32-Bit System Data Bus. Data for system bus (S-bus) accesses. System and External Memory Interface. 16-Bit Signal Register for Core-to-Core Communication. Serial Input/Output Unit Zero. Serial Input/Output Unit One. 2 Kword Shared Local Memory. 16-Bit Timer Running Count Register for TIMER0. Programmable Timer 0 for CORE0. Programmable Timer 0 for CORE1. 16-Bit Timer Control Register for TIMER0. 16-Bit Timer Running Count Register for TIMER1. Programmable Timer 1 for CORE0. Programmable Timer 1 for CORE1.
16
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.1 DSP16411 Architectural Overview (continued)
Table 1. DSP16411 Block Diagram Legend (continued)
Symbol timer1c TPRAM0--1 XAB0--1 XDB0--1 YAB0--1 YDB0--1 ZEAB ZEDB ZIAB ZIDB ZSEG Description 16-Bit Timer Control Register for TIMER1. 160 Kword Three-Port Random-Access Memories (one for each core). Private code (X), data (Y), and DMA (Z). 20-Bit X-Memory Space Address Bus. One for each core. 32-Bit X-Memory Space Data Bus. One for each core. 20-Bit Y-Memory Space Address Bus. One for each core. 32-Bit Y-Memory Space Data Bus. One for each core. 20-Bit External Z-Memory Space Address Bus. Interfaces DMAU to SEMI. 32-Bit External Z-Memory Space Data Bus. Interfaces DMAU to SEMI. 20-Bit Internal Z-Memory Space Address Bus. Interfaces DMAU to TPRAM0 and TPRAM1. 32-Bit Internal Z-Memory Space Data Bus. Interfaces DMAU to TPRAM0 and TPRAM1. External Segment Address Bits Associated with ZEAB. Interfaces DMAU to SEMI.
4.1.1 DSP16000 Cores The two DSP16000 cores (CORE0 and CORE1) are the signal-processing engines of the DSP16411. The DSP16000 is a modified Harvard architecture with separate sets of buses for the instruction/coefficient (X-memory) and data (Y-memory) spaces. Each set of buses has 20 bits of address and 32 bits of data. The core contains data and address arithmetic units and control for on-chip memory and peripherals. 4.1.2 Clock Synthesizer (PLL) The DSP16411 powers up with an input clock (CKI) as the source for the processor clock (CLK). An on-chip clock synthesizer (PLL) that runs at a frequency multiple of CKI can also be used to generate CLK. The clock synthesizer is deselected and powered down on reset. The selection of the clock source is under software control of CORE0. See Section 4.17, beginning on page 200, for details. 4.1.3 Triport RAMs (TPRAM0--1) Each core has a private block of TPRAM consisting of 160 banks (banks 0--159) of zero wait-state memory. Each bank consists of 1K 16-bit words and has three separate address and data ports: one port to the core's instruction/coefficient (X-memory) space, a second port to the core's data (Y-memory) space, and a third port to the DMA (Z-memory) space. TPRAM0 is accessible by CORE0, TPRAM1 is accessible by CORE1, and both TPRAM0 and TPRAM1 are accessible by the DMAU. TPRAM is organized into even and odd interleaved banks for which each even/odd Agere Systems Inc.
address pair is a 32-bit wide module (see Section 4.7 on page 48 for details). The TPRAMs support singleword, aligned double-word, and misaligned doubleword accesses. 4.1.4 Shared Local Memory (SLM) The SLM consists of two banks of memory. Each bank consists of 1K 16-bit words. The SLM can be accessed by both cores and by the DMAU and PIU over the system bus (SAB, SDB). The SLM supports single-word (16-bit) and aligned double-word (32-bit) accesses. Misaligned double-word accesses are not supported. An access to the SLM takes multiple clock cycles to complete, and a core access to the SLM causes the core to incur wait-states. See Section 4.14.7.1 on page 128 for details on system bus performance. 4.1.5 Internal Boot ROMs (IROM0--1) Each core has its own boot ROM that contains a single boot routine and software to support the Agere hardware development system (HDS). The code in IROM0 and IROM1 is identical. See Section 5 on page 208 for details. 4.1.6 Messaging Units (MGU0--1) The DSP16411 provides an MGU for each core: MGU0 for CORE0 and MGU1 for CORE1. The MGUs provide interprocessor (core-to-core) communication and interrupt generation. See Section 4.5 on page 38 for details. 17
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4.1.11 Interrupt Multiplexers (IMUX0--1) The DSP16411 provides an interrupt multiplexer unit for each core: IMUX0 for CORE0 and IMUX1 for CORE1. Each IMUX multiplexes the 26 hardware interrupts into the 20 available hardware interrupt requests for each core. See Section 4.4.2 on page 28 for details. 4.1.12 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) The parallel interface unit (PIU) is a 16-bit parallel port that provides a host processor direct access to the entire DSP16411 memory system (including memorymapped peripheral registers). See Section 4.15, beginning on page 135, for details. 4.1.13 Serial Interface Units (SIU0--1)
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.1 DSP16411 Architectural Overview (continued)
4.1.7 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) The SEMI interfaces both cores and the DMAU to external memory and I/O devices. It interfaces directly to pipelined synchronous ZBT TM SRAMs and asynchronous SRAMs. The SEMI also interfaces the cores and the DMAU to the internal SLM and to memorymapped registers in the DMAU, PIU, SIU0, and SIU1 via the internal system bus or S-bus (SAB and SDB). See Section 4.14, beginning on page 100, for details. 4.1.8 Bit Input/Output Units (BIO0--1) The DSP16411 provides a BIO unit for each core: BIO0 for CORE0 and BIO1 for CORE1. Each BIO unit provides convenient and efficient monitoring and control of seven individually configurable pins. If configured as outputs, the pins can be individually set, cleared, or toggled. If configured as inputs, individual pins or combinations of pins can be tested for patterns. Flags returned by the BIO can be tested by conditional instructions. See Section 4.9 on page 50 for details. 4.1.9 Timer Units (TIMER0_0--1 and TIMER1_0--1) The DSP16411 provides two timer units for each core: TIMER0_0 and TIMER1_0 for CORE0, and TIMER0_1 and TIMER1_1 for CORE1. Each timer can be used to provide an interrupt, either single or repetitive, at the expiration of a programmed interval. More than nine orders of magnitude of interval selection are provided. See Section 4.10 on page 53 for more information. 4.1.10 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) The direct memory access unit (DMAU) manages data transfers in the DSP16411 memory space. Data can be moved between DSP16411 memory and peripherals and between different memory spaces in the DSP16411. Once initiated, DMAU transfers occur without core intervention. The DMAU supports concurrent core execution and I/O processing. See Section 4.13, beginning on page 64, for details.
The DSP16411 provides two identical SIUs. Each SIU is a full-duplex, double-buffered serial port with independent input and output frame and bit clock control. Clock and frame signals can be generated externally (passive) or by on-chip clock and frame generation hardware (active). The SIU features multiple-channel TDM mode for ST-bus (1x and 2x compatible) and T1/E1 compatibility. Each SIU is provided a DMAU interface for data transfer to memory (TPRAM0, TPRAM1, SLM, memory-mapped registers, or external memory) without core intervention. See Section 4.16, beginning on page 154, for details. 4.1.14 Test Access Ports (JTAG0--1) The DSP16411 provides a JTAG unit for each core: JTAG0 for CORE0 and JTAG1 for CORE1. See Section 4.12 on page 57 for details. 4.1.15 Hardware Development Systems (HDS0--1) The DSP16411 provides an HDS unit for each core: HDS0 for CORE0 and HDS1 for CORE1. Each HDS is an on-chip hardware module available for debugging assembly-language programs that execute on the DSP16000 core in real-time. The main capability of the HDS is in allowing controlled visibility into the core's state during program execution. The HDS is enhanced with powerful debugging capabilities such as complex breakpointing conditions, multiple data/address watchpoint registers, and an intelligent trace mechanism for recording discontinuities. See Section 4.11 on page 56 for details.
18
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
rent state of the cache. The 32-bit csave register holds the opcode of the instruction following the loop instruction in program memory. 4.2.2 Data Arithmetic Unit (DAU) The DAU is a power-efficient, dual-MAC (multiply/accumulate), parallel-pipelined structure that is tailored to communications applications. It can perform two double-word (32-bit) fetches, two multiplications, and two accumulations in a single instruction cycle. The dualMAC parallel pipeline begins with two 32-bit registers, x and y. The pipeline treats the 32-bit registers as four 16-bit signed registers if used as input to two signed 16-bit x 16-bit multipliers. Each multiplier produces a full 32-bit result stored into registers p0 and p1. The DAU can direct the output of each multiplier to a 40-bit ALU or a 40-bit 3-input ADDER. The ALU and ADDER results are each stored in one of eight 40-bit accumulators, a0 through a7. Both the ALU and ADDER include an ACS (add/compare/select) function for Viterbi decoding. The DAU can direct the output of each accumulator to the ALU/ACS, the ADDER/ACS, or a 40-bit BMU (bit manipulation unit). The ALU implements 2-input addition, subtraction, and various logical operations. The ADDER implements 2-input or 3-input addition and subtraction. To support Viterbi decoding, the ALU and ADDER have a split mode in which two simultaneous 16-bit additions or subtractions are performed. This mode, available in specialized dual-MAC instructions, is used to compute the distance between a received symbol and its estimate. The ACS provides the add/compare/select function required for Viterbi decoding. This unit provides flags to the traceback encoder for implementing mode-controlled side-effects for ACS operations. The source operands for the ACS are any two accumulators, and results are written back to one of the source accumulators. The BMU implements barrel-shift, bit-field insertion, bitfield extraction, exponent extraction, normalization, and accumulator shuffling operations. ar0 through ar3 are auxiliary registers whose main function is to control BMU operations. The user can enable overflow saturation to affect the multiplier output and the results of the three arithmetic units. Overflow saturation can also affect an accumulator value as it is transferred to memory or other register. These features accommodate various speech coding standards such as GSM-FR, GSM-HR, and GSM-EFR. Shifting in the arithmetic pipeline occurs at several stages to accommodate various standards for mixed-precision and double-precision multiplications. 19
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.2 DSP16000 Core Architectural Overview
The DSP16411 contains two identical DSP16000 cores. As shown in Figure 2 on page 21, each core consists of four major blocks: system control and cache (SYS), data arithmetic unit (DAU), Y-memory space address arithmetic unit (YAAU), and X-memory space address arithmetic unit (XAAU). Bits within the auc0 and auc1 registers configure the DAU mode-controlled operations. See the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual for a complete description of the DSP16000 core. 4.2.1 System Control and Cache (SYS) This section consists of the control block and the cache. The control block provides overall system coordination that is mostly invisible to the user. The control block includes an instruction decoder and sequencer, a pseudorandom sequence generator (PSG), an interrupt and trap handler, a wait-state generator, and lowpower standby mode control logic. An interrupt and trap handler provides a user-locatable vector table and three levels of user-assigned interrupt priority. SYS contains the alf register, which is a 16-bit register that contains AWAIT, a power-saving standby mode bit, and peripheral flags. The inc0 and inc1 registers are 20-bit interrupt control registers, and ins is a 20-bit interrupt status register. Programs use the instruction cache to store and execute repetitive operations such as those found in an FIR or IIR filter section. The cache can contain up to thirty-one 16-bit and 32-bit instructions. The code in the cache can repeat up to 216 - 1 times without looping overhead. Operations in the cache that require a coefficient access execute at twice the normal rate because the XAAU and its associated bus are not needed for fetching instructions. The cache greatly reduces the need for writing in-line repetitive code and, therefore, reduces instruction/coefficient memory size requirements. In addition, the use of cache reduces power consumption because it eliminates memory accesses for instruction fetches. The cache provides a convenient, low-overhead looping structure that is interruptible, savable, and restorable. The cache is addressable in both the X and Y memory spaces. An interrupt or trap handling routine can save and restore cloop, cstate, csave, and the contents of the cache. The cloop register controls the cache loop count. The cstate register contains the curAgere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
See the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual for details.) The YAAU includes a 20-bit stack pointer (sp). The data move group includes a set of stack instructions that consists of push, pop, stack-relative, and pipelined stack-relative operations. The addressing mode used for the stack-relative instructions is register-plus-displacement indirect addressing (the displacement is optional). The displacement is specified as either an immediate value as part of the instruction or a value stored in j or k. The YAAU computes the address by adding the displacement to sp and leaves the contents of sp unchanged. The data move group also includes instructions with register-plus-displacement indirect addressing for the pointer registers r0--r6 in addition to sp. The data move group of instructions includes instructions for loading and storing any YAAU register from or to memory or another core register. It also includes instructions for loading any YAAU register with an immediate value stored with the instruction. The pointer arithmetic group of instructions allows adding of an immediate value or the contents of the j or k register to any YAAU pointer register and storing the result to any YAAU register. 4.2.4 X-Memory Space Address Arithmetic Unit (XAAU) The XAAU contains registers and an adder that control the sequencing of instructions in the processor. The program counter (PC) automatically increments through the instruction space. The interrupt return register pi, the subroutine return register pr, and the trap return register ptrap are automatically loaded with the return address of an interrupt service routine, subroutine, and trap service routine, respectively. High-speed, register-indirect, read-only memory addressing with postincrementing is done with the pt0 and pt1 registers. The signed registers h and i are used to hold a user-defined signed postincrement value. Fixed postincrement values of 0, +1, -1, +2, and -2 are also available. (Postincrement options 0 and -2 are available only if the target of the data transfer is an accumulator. See the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual for details.) The data move group includes instructions for loading and storing any XAAU register from or to memory or another core register. It also includes instructions for loading any XAAU register with an immediate value stored with the instruction. vbase is the 20-bit vector base offset register. The user programs this register with the base address of the interrupt and trap vector table. Agere Systems Inc.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.2 DSP16000 Core Architectural Overview (continued)
4.2.2 Data Arithmetic Unit (DAU) (continued) The DAU contains control and status registers auc0, auc1, psw0, psw1, vsw, and c0--c2. The arithmetic unit control registers auc0 and auc1 select or deselect various modes of DAU operation. These modes include scaling of products, saturation on overflow, feedback to the x and y registers from accumulators a6 and a7, simultaneous loading of x and y registers with the same value (used for single-cycle squaring), and clearing the low half of registers when loading the high half to facilitate fixed-point operations. The processor status word registers psw0 and psw1 contain flags set by ALU/ACS, ADDER, or BMU operations. They also include information on the current status of the interrupt controller. The vsw register is the Viterbi support word associated with the traceback encoder. The traceback encoder is a specialized block for accelerating Viterbi decoding. The vsw controls side-effects for three compare functions: cmp0( ), cmp1( ), and cmp2( ). These instructions are part of the MAC group that utilizes the traceback encoder. The side-effects allow the DAU to store, with no overhead, state information necessary for traceback decoding. Side-effects use the c1 counter, the ar0 and ar1 auxiliary registers, and bits 1 and 0 of vsw. The c1 and c0 counters are 16-bit signed registers used to count events such as the number of times the program has executed a sequence of code. The c2 register is a holding register for counter c1. Conditional instructions control these counters and provide a convenient method of program looping. 4.2.3 Y-Memory Space Address Arithmetic Unit (YAAU) The YAAU supports high-speed, register-indirect, data memory addressing with postincrement of the address register. Eight 20-bit pointer registers (r0--r7) store read or write addresses for the data (Y-memory) space. Two sets of 20-bit registers (rb0 and re0; rb1 and re1) define the upper and lower boundaries of two zerooverhead circular buffers for efficient filter implementations. The j and k registers are two 20-bit signed registers that are used to hold user-defined postincrement values for r0--r7. Fixed increments of +1, -1, 0, +2, and -2 are also available. (Postincrement options 0 and -2 are not available for some specialized transfers. 20
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.2 DSP16000 Core Architectural Overview (continued)
4.2.5 Core Block Diagram
DSP16000 Core Block Diagram
SYS h (20) CACHE 31 INSTRUCTIONS CONTROL ins (20) XAB (20) inc0 (20) inc1 (20) cloop (16) YAB (20) cstate (16) PSG csave (32) PC (20) pt0 (20) pt1 (20) vbase (20) alf (16) MUX i (20)
XAAU IMMEDIATE SINGLE DOUBLE VALUE -1, 0, 1 -2, 0, 2
OFFCORE
TO MEMORY XAB (20) pi (20) pr (20) ptrap(20) XAB (20)
+
FROM MEMORY XDB (32) IDB (32) XDB (32) IDB (32) XDB (32) IDB (32) TO PERIPHERAL
DAU y (32) auc0 (16) auc1 (16) psw0 (16) psw1 (16) vsw (16) c0 (16) c1 (16) c2 (16) ar0 (16) ar1 (16) ar2 (16) ar3 (16) p0 (32) SHIFT(2, 1, 0, -2)/SAT. SHIFT(0, -1) p1 (32) SHIFT(2, 1, 0, -2)/SAT. SHIFT(0, -15, -16) 16 x 16 MULTIPLY 16 x 16 MULTIPLY SHIFT(0, -1) SWAP MUX SHIFT(0, -1) x (32)
DOUBLE SINGLE -2, 0, 2 -1, 0, 1
IMMEDIATE VALUE
j (20) k (20)
YAAU
MUX
YDB (32) TO/FROM MEMORY
MUX
+
DEMUX TO MEMORY re0 (20) re1 (20) rb0 (20) rb1 (20) MUX YAB (20) YAB (20)
TRACEBACK ENCODER
COMPARE SHIFT (0, -14) MUX MUX
MUX r0 (20) r1 (20)
ALU/ACS SAT.
ADDER/ACS SAT. SPLIT/MUX
BMU SAT.
r2 (20) r3 (20) r4 (20) r5 (20) r6 (20) r7 (20) sp (20)
a0 (40) a1 (40) a2 (40) a3 (40) a4 (40) a5 (40) a6 (40) a7 (40)
KEY:
PROGRAM-ACCESSIBLE REGISTERS
MODE-CONTROLLED OPTIONS
SAT.
SAT.
SAT.
SAT.
BUSES
MUX/EXTRACT
Associated with PC-relative branch addressing. Associated with register-plus-displacement indirect addressing.
Figure 2. DSP16000 Core Block Diagram Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 21
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.2 DSP16000 Core Architectural Overview (continued)
4.2.5 Core Block Diagram (continued) Table 2. DSP16000 Core Block Diagram Legend
Symbol 16 x 16 MULTIPLY a0--a7 ADDER/ACS alf ALU/ACS ar0--ar3 auc0, auc1 BMU c0, c1 c2 cloop COMPARE csave cstate DAU h i IDB inc0, inc1 ins j k MUX p0, p1 PC pi pr PSG psw0, psw1 pt0, pt1 ptrap r0--r7 rb0, rb1 re0, re1 SAT SHIFT sp SPLIT/MUX SWAP MUX SYS vbase vsw Name 16-Bit x 16-Bit Multiplier. 40-Bit Accumulators 0--7. 3-Input 40-Bit Adder/Subtractor and Add/Compare/Select Function. Used in Viterbi decoding. 16-Bit AWAIT Low-Power and Flags Register. 40-Bit Arithmetic Logic Unit and Add/Compare/Select Function. Used in Viterbi decoding. 16-Bit Auxiliary Registers 0--3. 16-Bit Arithmetic Unit Control Registers. 40-Bit Manipulation Unit. 16-Bit Counters 0 and 1. 16-Bit Counter Holding Register. 16-Bit Cache Loop Count Register. Comparator. Used for circular buffer addressing. 32-Bit Cache Save Register. 16-Bit Cache State Register. Data Arithmetic Unit. 20-Bit Pointer Postincrement Register for the X-Memory Space. 20-Bit Pointer Postincrement Register for the X-Memory Space. 32-Bit Internal Data Bus. 20-Bit Interrupt Control Registers 0 and 1. 20-Bit Interrupt Status Register. 20-Bit Pointer Postincrement/Offset Register for the Y-Memory Space. 20-Bit Pointer Postincrement/Offset Register for the Y-Memory Space. Multiplexer. 32-Bit Product Registers 0 and 1. 20-Bit Program Counter. 20-Bit Program Interrupt Return Register. 20-Bit Program Return Register. Pseudorandom Sequence Generator. 16-Bit Processor Status Word Registers 0 and 1. 20-Bit Pointers 0 and 1 to X-Memory Space. 20-Bit Program Trap Return Register. 20-Bit Pointers 0--7 to Y-Memory Space. 20-Bit Circular Buffer Pointers 0 and 1 (begin address). 20-Bit Circular Buffer Pointers 0 and 1 (end address). Saturation. Shifting Operation. 20-Bit Stack Pointer. Split/Multiplexer. Routes the appropriate ALU/ACS, BMU, and ADDER/ACS outputs to the appropriate accumulator. Swap Multiplexer. Routes the appropriate data to the appropriate multiplier input. System Control and Cache. 20-Bit Vector Base Offset Register. 16-Bit Viterbi Support Word. Associated with the traceback encoder.
22
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.2 DSP16000 Core Architectural Overview (continued)
4.2.5 Core Block Diagram (continued) Table 2. DSP16000 Core Block Diagram Legend (continued)
Symbol x XAAU XAB XDB y YAAU YAB YDB Name 32-Bit Multiplier Input Register. X-Memory Space Address Arithmetic Unit. X-Memory Space Address Bus. X-Memory Space Data Bus. 32-Bit Multiplier Input Register. Y-Memory Space Address Arithmetic Unit. Y-Memory Space Address Bus. Y-Memory Space Data Bus.
4.3 Device Reset
The DSP16411 has three negative-assertion external reset input pins: RSTN, TRST0N, and TRST1N. RSTN is used to reset both CORE0 and CORE1. The primary function of TRST0N and TRST1N is to reset the JTAG0 and JTAG1 controllers. 4.3.1 Reset After Powerup or Power Interruption At initial powerup or if power is interrupted, a reset is required and RSTN, TRST0N, and TRST1N must all be asserted (low) simultaneously for at least seven CKI cycles (see Section 11.4 on page 280 for details). The TRST0N and TRST1N pins must be asserted even if the JTAG controllers are not used by the application. Failure to properly reset the device on powerup or after a power interruption can lead to a loss of communication with the DSP16411 pins.
4.3.2 RSTN Pin Reset The device is properly reset by asserting RSTN (low) for at least seven CKI cycles and then deasserting RSTN. Reset initializes the state of user registers, synchronizes the internal clocks, and initiates code execution. See Section 6.2.4, beginning on page 249, for the values of the user registers after reset. After RSTN is deasserted, there is a delay of several CKI cycles before the DSP16000 cores begin executing instructions (see Section 11.5 on page 281 for details). The state of the EXM pin on the rising edge of RSTN controls the boot program address for both cores, as described in Section 5 on page 208.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
23
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.3 Device Reset (continued)
4.3.2 RSTN Pin Reset (continued) Table 3 defines the states of the output and bidirectional pins both during and after reset. It does not include the TDO0 and TDO1 output pins because their state is not affected by RSTN. The state of TDO0 and TDO1 are affected only by the JTAG0 and JTAG1 controllers. Table 3. State of Device Output and Bidirectional Pins During and After Reset
Type Output Pin PIBF, PINT PRDY EACKN, EION, ERAMN, EROMN, ERWN0, ERWN1 Condition -- PRDYMD = 0 PRDYMD = 1 INT0 = 0 (deasserted) INT0 = 1 (asserted) -- -- INT0 = 0 (deasserted) INT0 = 1 (asserted) INT0 = 0 (deasserted) INT0 = 1 (asserted) INT0 = 0 (deasserted) INT0 = 1 (asserted) -- -- State of Pin During Reset (RSTN = 0) logic low logic low logic high logic high 3-state logic high 3-state logic low 3-state logic low 3-state logic low 3-state 3-statet 3-state Initial State of Pin After Reset (RSTN = 1) logic low logic low logic high logichigh
logic high
logic high 3-state CKI/2 CKI/2 logic low logic low logic low logic low configured input configured input
POBE SOD0, SOD1 ECKO
EA[18:0]
ESEG[3:0]
Bidirectional (Input/Output)
PD[15:0] IO0BIT[6:0], IO1BIT[6:0] SICK0, SICK1, SIFS0, SIFS1, SOCK0, SOCK1, SOFS0, SOFS1, TRAP ED[31:0]
EYMODE = 0 EYMODE = 1
3-state output
3-state output
The output/bidirectional pins EA[18:0], ESEG[3:0], ED[31:0], and PD[15:0] include bus hold circuits. If BHEDIS (ECON1[12]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, the bus hold circuits on EA[18:0], ESEG[3:0], and ED[31:0] are activated. If BHPDIS (ECON1[13]) = 0, the bus hold circuits on PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0] are activated. The bus hold circuits are enabled and activated (BHEDIS = BHPDIS = 0) during and after reset. Activated bus hold circuits affect the electrical characteristics of the associated pins. See Section 10.1, beginning on page 268, and Table 183 on page 267 for details.
4.3.3 JTAG Controller Reset The recommended method of resetting the JTAG controllers is to assert RSTN, TRST0N, and TRST1N low simultaneously. An alternate method is to clock TCK0,1 through at least five cycles with TMS0,1 held high. Both methods ensure that the user has control of the device pins. JTAG controller reset places it in the test logic reset (TLR) state and does not initialize user registers, synchronize internal clocks, or initiate code execution unless RSTN is also asserted (see Section 6.2.4 on page 249). 24 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
If a hardware interrupt is disabled, the core does not service it. If a hardware interrupt is enabled, the core services it according to its priority. Device reset globally disables hardware interrupts. An application can globally enable or disable hardware interrupts and can individually enable or disable each hardware interrupt. An application globally enables hardware interrupts by executing the ei (enable interrupts) instruction and globally disables them by executing the di (disable interrupts) instruction. Within an interrupt service routine (ISR), the execution of an ireturn instruction also globally enables hardware interrupts. An application can individually enable a hardware interrupt at an assigned priority or individually disable a hardware interrupt by configuring the inc0 or inc1 register (see Table 7 on page 31). Software interrupts emulate hardware interrupts. The core services software interrupts even if hardware interrupts are globally disabled. A trap is similar to an interrupt but has the highest possible priority. An application cannot disable traps by executing a di instruction or by any other means. Traps do not nest, i.e., a trap service routine (TSR) cannot be interrupted or trapped. A trap does not affect the state of the psw1 register. The DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual provides an extensive discussion of interrupts and traps. The remainder of Section 4.4 describes the interrupts and traps for the DSP16411. 4.4.1 Hardware Interrupt Logic Figure 3 on page 26 illustrates the path of each interrupt from its generating peripheral or pin to the interrupt logic of CORE0 and CORE1. Some of the interrupts connect directly to the cores, and others connect via the IMUX0,1 block. Some of the interrupts are specific to a core, and some are common to both cores. The programmer can configure IMUX0,1 using the corresponding imux register. The programmer can divide processing of the multiplexed interrupts PIBF, POBE, SO,IINT0,1, DSINT[3:0], DDINT[3:0], DMINT[5:4], and INT[3:2] between CORE0 and CORE1, or cause some of these interrupts to be common to both cores by defining the fields in each core's imux register. See Section 4.4.2 on page 28 for details on interrupt multiplexing.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps
Each core in the DSP16411 supports the following interrupts and traps:
!
26 hardware interrupts with three levels of userassigned priority: -- 1 core-to-core interrupt. -- 10 general DMAU interrupts. -- 1 DMAU interrupt under control of the other core. -- 4 SIU interrupts. -- 3 PIU interrupts. -- 1 MGU interrupt. -- 2 timer interrupts. -- 4 external interrupt pins. 64 software interrupts for each core, generated by the execution of an icall IM6 instruction. The TRAP pin. The core-to-core trap.
!
! !
Because the DSP16000 core supports a maximum of 20 hardware interrupts and the DSP16411 provides 26 hardware interrupts, each core has an associated programmable interrupt multiplexer (IMUX0,1). The interrupt and trap vectors are in contiguous locations in memory, and the base (starting) address of the vectors is configurable in the core's vbase register. Each interrupt and trap source is preassigned to a unique vector offset that differentiates its service routine. The core must reach an interruptible or trappable state (completion of an interruptible or trappable instruction) before it services an interrupt or trap. If the core services an interrupt or trap, it saves the contents of its program counter (PC) and begins executing instructions at the corresponding location in its vector table. For interrupts, the core saves its PC in its program interrupt (pi) register. For traps, the core saves its PC in its program trap (ptrap) register. After servicing the interrupt or trap, the servicing routine must return to the interrupted or trapped program by executing an ireturn or treturn instruction. The core's ins register (see Table 8 on page 32) contains a 1-bit status field for each of its hardware interrupts. If a hardware interrupt occurs, the core sets the corresponding ins field to indicate that the interrupt is pending. If the core services that interrupt, it clears the corresponding ins field. The psw1 register (see Table 10 on page 35) includes control and status bits for the core's hardware interrupt logic.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
25
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.1 Hardware Interrupt Logic (continued)
Interrupt Block Diagram
INT[1:0] 2 TIMER0_0 TIMER1_0 TIMER0_1 TIMER1_1
INT[1:0] inc0 inc1 ins DMINT[5:4] PHINT
TIME0 CORE0
TIME1
TIME0
TIME1 CORE1
INT[1:0] inc0 inc1 ins DMINT[5:4]
MGIBF SIGINT MXI[9:0] 10
XIO
XIO
MXI[9:0] SIGINT MGIBF 10
PHINT
IMUX0
PIBF (PIU)
IMUX1
POBE (PIU) imux 4 SO,IINT0,1 (SIU0,1) 2 imux
MGU0
MGU1
2 DMAU DSINT[3:0], DDINT[3:0], DMINT[5:4] 10 PIU
INT[3:2] KEY: PROGRAM-ACCESSIBLE REGISTERS
These interrupts are specific to a core, not common to both cores. Each of the MXI[9:0] interrupts can be either specific to a core or common to both cores, determined by how each interrupt is configured in imux (see Table 5 on page 28).
Figure 3. CORE0 and CORE1 Interrupt Logic Block Diagram
26
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.1 Hardware Interrupt Logic (continued) Table 4 summarizes each hardware interrupt in the DSP16411, including whether it is internal or external, which module generates it, and a brief description. For details on the operation of each internal interrupt, see the section that describes the corresponding block. Table 4. Hardware Interrupts
Interrupt Type DSINT0 Internal DDINT0 Internal DSINT1 Internal DDINT1 Internal DSINT2 Internal DDINT2 Internal DSINT3 Internal DDINT3 Internal DMINT4 Internal DMINT5 Internal INT[3:0] External MGIBF PHINT PIBF POBE SIGINT SIINT0 Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Name DMAU Source Interrupt for SWT0 (for SIU0) DMAU Destination Interrupt for SWT0 (for SIU0) DMAU Source Interrupt for SWT1 (for SIU0) DMAU Destination Interrupt for SWT1 (for SIU0) DMAU Source Interrupt for SWT2 (for SIU1) DMAU Destination Interrupt for SWT2 (for SIU1) DMAU Source Interrupt for SWT3 (for SIU1) DMAU Destination Interrupt for SWT3 (for SIU1) DMAU Interrupt for MMT4 DMAU Interrupt for MMT5 External Interrupt Requests MGU Input Buffer Full PIU Host Interrupt PIU Input Buffer Full PIU Output Buffer Empty Signal Interrupt (Core-to-Core) SIU0 Input Interrupt Description Channel source (output) interrupt request. Channel SWT0 destination (input) interrupt request. Channel SWT1 source (output) interrupt request. Channel SWT1 destination (input) interrupt request. Channel SWT2 source (output) interrupt request. Channel SWT2 destination (input) interrupt request. Channel SWT3 source (output) interrupt request. Channel SWT3 destination (input) interrupt request. Channel MMT4 interrupt request. Channel MMT5 interrupt request. An external device has requested service by asserting the corresponding INT[3:0] pin (0-to-1 transition). The MGU input buffer (mgi) is full. The host sets the HINT field (PCON[4]). PDI contains data from a previous host write operation. The data in PDO has been read by the host. The other core sets its signal[0] field. Based on the IINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11]), asserted if: SWT0
!
Input frame sync detected. Input subframe transfer complete. Input channel transfer complete.
SIINT1
Internal
SIU1 Input Interrupt
! ! !
SOINT0
Internal
SIU0 Output Interrupt
Input error occurs. Based on the OINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[14:13]): Output frame sync detected. Output subframe transfer complete. Output channel transfer complete.
!
SOINT1
Internal
SIU1 Output Interrupt
! ! !
TIME0 TIME1 XIO
Internal Internal Internal
TIMER0 Delay/Interval Reached TIMER1 Delay/Interval Reached Core-to-Core DMAU Interrupt
Output error occurs. TIMER0 has reached zero count. TIMER1 has reached zero count. Based on the other core's XIOC[1:0] field:
! ! !
Zero (logic low). DMINT4 (MMT4 transfer complete). DMINT5 (MMT5 transfer complete).
An SWT channel is a single-word transfer channel used for both input and output by an SIU. It transfers single words (16 bits). An MMT channel is a memory-to-memory channel used by the cores to copy a block from any area of memory to any other area of memory. It transfers single words (16 bits) or double words (32 bits).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
27
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.2 Hardware Interrupt Multiplexing The total number of DSP16411 hardware interrupt sources (26) exceeds the number of interrupt requests supported by the DSP16000 core (20). Therefore, each core includes an interrupt multiplexer block (IMUX) and associated control register (imux) to permit the 26 interrupts to be multiplexed into the 20 available hardware interrupt requests. Each core supports ten dedicated interrupt requests. Each core's IMUX block multiplexes the remaining 16 hardware requests into the ten remaining hardware interrupt request lines. Table 5 describes the imux register and Figure 4 on page 29 illustrates the IMUX block. Table 5. imux (Interrupt Multiplex Control) Register
15--14 13--12 11--10 9--8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
XIOC[1:0] Bit
Reserved Field
IMUX9[1:0] Controls Multiplexed Interrupt XIO
IMUX8[1:0] Interrupt Selected
IMUX7 IMUX6 IMUX5 IMUX4 IMUX3 IMUX2 IMUX1 IMUX0 Description R/W Reset Value R/W 00
Value
15--14
XIOC[1:0]
13--12 11--10
Reserved IMUX9[1:0]
-- MXI9
9--8
IMUX8[1:0]
MXI8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IMUX7 IMUX6 IMUX5 IMUX4 IMUX3 IMUX2 IMUX1 IMUX0
MXI7 MXI6 MXI5 MXI4 MXI3 MXI2 MXI1 MXI0
00 01 10 11 0 00 01 10 11 00 01 10 11 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 (logic low) DMINT4 DMINT5 Reserved -- INT3 POBE PIBF Reserved INT2 POBE PIBF Reserved SIINT1 DDINT2 SOINT1 DSINT2 SIINT0 DDINT0 SOINT0 DSINT0 DDINT2 DDINT3 DSINT2 DSINT3 DDINT0 DDINT1 DSINT0 DSINT1
-- DMAU interrupt for MMT4. DMAU interrupt for MMT5. Reserved. Reserved--write with zero. Pin. PIU output buffer empty. PIU input buffer full. Reserved. Pin. PIU output buffer empty. PIU input buffer full. Reserved. SIU1 input interrupt. DMAU destination interrupt for SWT2 (SIU1). SIU1 output interrupt. DMAU source interrupt for SWT2 (SIU1). SIU0 input interrupt. DMAU destination interrupt for SWT0 (SIU0). SIU0 output interrupt. DMAU source interrupt for SWT0 (SIU0). DMAU destination interrupt for SWT2 (SIU1). DMAU destination interrupt for SWT3 (SIU1). DMAU source interrupt for SWT2 (SIU1). DMAU source interrupt for SWT3 (SIU1). DMAU destination interrupt for SWT0 (SIU0). DMAU destination interrupt for SWT1 (SIU0). DMAU source interrupt for SWT0 (SIU0). DMAU source interrupt for SWT1 (SIU0).
R/W R/W
0 00
R/W
00
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The XIOC[1:0] field controls the XIO interrupt for the other core.
28
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.2 Hardware Interrupt Multiplexing (continued)
IMUX Block Diagram
IMUX0 (imux[0])
DSINT0 DSINT1 IMUX1 (imux[1]) DDINT0 DDINT1 IMUX2 (imux[2]) DSINT2 MUX DSINT3 IMUX3 (imux[3]) DDINT2 MUX DDINT3 IMUX4 (imux[4]) SOINT0 DSINT0 IMUX5 (imux[5]) SIINT0 DDINT0 IMUX6 (imux[6]) SOINT1 DSINT2 IMUX7 (imux[7]) SIINT1 DDINT2 IMUX8[1:0] (imux[9:8]) INT2 POBE PIBF IMUX9[1:0] (imux[11:10]) INT3 2 PIBF POBE XIOC[1:0] (imux[15:14]) 0 DMINT4 DMINT5 2 2 MUX MXI7 MUX MXI6 MUX MXI5 MUX MXI4 MXI3 MXI2 MUX MXI1 MUX MXI0
MUX
MXI8
MUX
MXI9
MUX IMUX0,1
XIO (TO OTHER CORE)
Figure 4. IMUX Block Diagram Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 29
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.3 Clearing Core Interrupt Requests Internal hardware interrupt signals are pulses that the core latches into its ins register (see Section 4.4.7 on page 32). Therefore, the user software need not clear the interrupt request. However, in the case of the PIU host interrupt, PHINT, the user software must clear the HINT field (PCON[4]) to allow the host to request a subsequent interrupt. See Section 4.15.7 on page 153 for details. 4.4.4 Host Interrupt Output The DSP16411 provides an interrupt output pin, PINT, that can interrupt a host processor connected to the PIU. A core can assert this pin by setting the PINT field (PCON[3]). The host must clear the PINT field to allow a core to request a subsequent interrupt. See Section 4.15.7 on page 153 for details. 4.4.5 Globally Enabling and Disabling Hardware Interrupts A device reset globally disables interrupts, i.e., the core does not service interrupts by default after reset. The application must execute an ei instruction to globally enable interrupts, i.e., to cause the core to service interrupts that are individually enabled. Section 4.4.6 on page 31 describes individually enabling and disabling interrupts. Executing the di instruction globally disables interrupts. The core automatically globally disables interrupts if it begins servicing an interrupt, i.e., interrupt nesting is disabled by default. When the ireturn instruction that the programmer must place at the end of the ISR is executed, the core automatically globally re-enables interrupts. Therefore, the programmer does not need to explicitly reenable interrupts by executing an ei instruction before exiting the ISR. An interrupt service routine (ISR) can allow nesting, i.e., can be interrupted by a higher-priority interrupt, if it globally enables interrupts in the correct sequence as described in Section 4.4.11 on page 35, Nesting Interrupts. The one-bit IEN field (psw1[14]--see Table 10 on page 35) is cleared if hardware interrupts are globally disabled. The IEN field is set if interrupts are globally enabled. Table 6 summarizes global disabling and enabling of hardware interrupts. Table 6. Global Disabling and Enabling of Hardware Interrupts
Condition Hardware interrupts globally disabled Caused By
! ! !
Device reset Execution of a di instruction The core begins to service an interrupt Execution of an ei instruction Execution of an ireturn instruction
Indicated By IEN (psw1[14]) = 0
Effect Core does not service interrupts.
Hardware interrupts globally enabled
! !
IEN (psw1[14]) = 1
Core services individually enabled interrupts.
With the exception of device reset, CORE0 and CORE1 are independent with respect to global disabling and enabling of hardware interrupts.
30
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.6 Individually Enabling, Disabling, and Prioritizing Hardware Interrupts An application can individually disable a hardware interrupt by clearing both bits of its corresponding 2-bit field in the inc0 or inc1 register (see Table 7). Reset clears the inc0 and inc1 registers, individually disabling all hardware interrupts by default. An application can individually enable a hardware interrupt at one of three priority levels by setting one or both bits of its corresponding 2-bit field in the inc0 or inc1 register. The following are the advantages of interrupt prioritization:
! !
An ISR can service concurrent interrupts according to their priority. Interrupt nesting is supported, i.e., an interrupt can interrupt a lower-priority ISR. See Section 4.4.11 on page 35 for details on interrupt nesting.
If multiple concurrent interrupts with the same assigned priority occur, the core first services the interrupt that has its status field in the relative least significant bit location of the ins register (see Table 8 on page 32), i.e., the core first services the interrupt with the lowest vector address (see Table 9 on page 33). Note: If interrupts are globally enabled (see Section 4.4.5 on page 30), an application must not change inc0--1, because doing so can cause a potential race condition between the detection of the interrupts and the determination of their relative priorities. Prior to changing inc0--1, the application must globally disable interrupts by executing a di instruction. After changing inc0--1, the application can globally re-enable interrupts by executing an ei instruction. The following code segment is an example of properly changing inc0--1: di inc1=0x00001 ei // Globally disable interrupts (default after reset). // Enable MGIBF at level 1 priority. // OK to globally re-enable interrupts.
di inc1=0x00006 ei
// // // //
Before changing inc1, first globally disable interrupts. Change MGIBF priority to level 2... Enable SIGINT at level 1 priority. OK to globally re-enable interrupts.
Table 7. inc0 and inc1 (Interrupt Control) Registers 0 and 1
19--18 17--16 15--14 13--12 11--10 9--8 7--6 5--4 3--2 1--0
inc0 INT1[1:0] INT0[1:0] DMINT5[1:0] DMINT4[1:0] MXI3[1:0] MXI2[1:0] MXI1[1:0] MXI0[1:0] TIME1[1:0] TIME0[1:0] inc1 MXI9[1:0] MXI8[1:0] MXI7[1:0] MXI6[1:0] MXI5[1:0] MXI4[1:0] PHINT[1:0] XIO[1:0] SIGINT[1:0] MGIBF[1:0]
Field
INT0--1[1:0] DMINT4--5[1:0] MXI0--9[1:0] TIME0--1[1:0] PHINT[1:0] XIO[1:0] SIGINT[1:0] MGIBF[1:0]
Value 00 01 10 11
Description Disable the selected interrupt (no priority). Enable the selected interrupt at priority 1 (lowest). Enable the selected interrupt at priority 2. Enable the selected interrupt at priority 3 (highest).
R/W R/W
Reset Value 00
See Table 5 on page 28 for definition of MXI0--9 (IMUX0--9).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
31
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
tor table. If the ISR does not globally enable interrupts by following the procedure specified in Section 4.4.11 on page 35, Nesting Interrupts, and the same interrupt reoccurs while the core is executing the ISR, the interrupt is not latched into ins and is therefore not recognized by the core. 4.4.8 Interrupt and Trap Vector Table The interrupt and trap vectors for a core are in contiguous locations in memory. The base (starting) address of the vectors is configurable in the core's vbase register. Each interrupt and trap source is preassigned to a unique vector offset within a 352-word vector table (see Table 9 on page 33). The programmer can place at the vector location an instruction that branches to an interrupt service routine (ISR) or trap service routine (TSR). After servicing the interrupt or trap, the ISR or TSR must return to the interrupted or trapped program by executing an ireturn or treturn instruction. Alternatively, the programmer can place at the vector location up to four words of instructions that service the interrupt or trap, the last of which must be an ireturn or treturn.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.7 Hardware Interrupt Status If a hardware interrupt occurs, the core sets the corresponding bit in the ins register (Table 8) to indicate that the interrupt is pending. If the core services the interrupt, it clears the ins bit. Alternatively, if the application uses interrupt polling (Section 4.4.13 on page 37), the application program must explicitly clear the ins bit by writing a 1 to that bit and a 0 to every other ins bit. Writing a 0 to an ins bit leaves that bit unchanged. A reset clears the ins register, indicating that no interrupts are pending. If a hardware interrupt occurs, the core sets its ins bit (i.e., latches the interrupt as pending) regardless of whether the interrupt is enabled or disabled. If a hardware interrupt occurs while it is disabled and the interrupt is later enabled, the core services the interrupt after servicing any other pending interrupts of equal or higher priority. Note: The DSP16000 core globally disables interrupts when it begins executing instructions in the vecTable 8. ins (Interrupt Status) Register
19 18 17 16 15 14
13
12
11
10
MXI9
9
MXI8
8
MXI7
7
MXI6
6
MXI5
5
MXI4
4
PHINT
3
XIO
2
SIGINT
1
MGIBF
0
INT1 Field MXI0--9 PHINT XIO SIGINT MGIBF INT0--1 DMINT4--5 TIME0--1
INT0 Value 0
DMINT5
DMINT4
MXI3
MXI2
MXI1
MXI0
TIME1 R/W R/Clear
TIME0 Reset Value 0
Description Read--corresponding interrupt not pending. Write--no effect.
1
Read--corresponding interrupt is pending. Write--clears bit and changes corresponding interrupt status to not pending.
See Table 5 on page 28 for definition of MXI0--9 (IMUX0--9).
32
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.8 Interrupt and Trap Vector Table (continued) Table 9. Interrupt and Trap Vector Table
Vector Description Reserved PTRAP UTRAP Reserved TIME0 TIME1 MXI0 (DSINT0 or DSINT1) MXI1 (DDINT0 or DDINT1) MXI2 (DSINT2 or DSINT3) MXI3 (DDINT2 or DDINT3) DMINT4 DMINT5 INT0 INT1 MGIBF SIGINT XIO PHINT MXI4 (SOINT0 or DSINT0) MXI5 (SIINT0 or DDINT0) MXI6 (SOINT1 or DSINT2) MXI7 (SIINT1 or DDINT2) MXI8 (INT2, POBE, or PIBF) MXI9 (INT3, POBE, or PIBF) icall 0 icall 1 Vector Address Hexadecimal Decimal vbase + 0x0 vbase + 0 vbase + 0x4 vbase + 4 vbase + 0x8 vbase + 8 vbase + 0xC vbase + 12 vbase + 0x10 vbase + 16 vbase + 0x14 vbase + 20 vbase + 0x18 vbase + 24 vbase + 0x1C vbase + 28 vbase + 0x20 vbase + 32 vbase + 0x24 vbase + 36 vbase + 0x28 vbase + 40 vbase + 0x2C vbase + 44 vbase + 0x30 vbase + 48 vbase + 0x34 vbase + 52 vbase + 0x38 vbase + 56 vbase + 0x3C vbase + 60 vbase + 0x40 vbase + 64 vbase + 0x44 vbase + 68 vbase + 0x48 vbase + 72 vbase + 0x4C vbase + 76 vbase + 0x50 vbase + 80 vbase + 0x54 vbase + 84 vbase + 0x58 vbase + 88 vbase + 0x5C vbase + 92 vbase + 0x60 vbase + 96 vbase + 0x64 vbase + 100 Priority -- 6 (Highest) 5 -- 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 0--3 -- -- -- -- --
...
...
icall 62 icall 63

vbase + 0x158 vbase + 0x15C
vbase + 344 vbase + 348
vbase contains the base address of the 352-word vector table. Driven by TRAP pin (see Section 4.4.10 on page 34) or core-to-core trap (see Section 4.5.1 on page 39). Reserved for HDS. The programmer specifies the relative priority levels 0--3 for hardware interrupts via inc0 and inc1 (see Table 7 on page 31). Level 0 indicates a disabled interrupt. If multiple concurrent interrupts with the same assigned priority occur, the core first services the interrupt that has its status field in the relative least significant bit location of the ins register (see Table 8 on page 32); i.e., the core first services the interrupt with the lowest vector address. The choice of interrupt is selected by the imux register (see Table 5 on page 28). Reserved for system services.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
...
33
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4.4.10 INT[3:0] and TRAP Pins The DSP16411 provides four positive-assertion edgedetected interrupt pins (INT[3:0]) and a bidirectional positive-assertion edge-detected trap pin (TRAP). The TRAP pin is used by an application to gain control of both processors for asynchronous event handling, typically for catastrophic error recovery. It is a 3-state bidirectional pin that connects to both cores and both HDS blocks. TRAP is connected directly to both cores via the PTRAP signal. After reset, TRAP is configured as an input; it can be configured as an output under JTAG control to support HDS multiple-device debugging. Figure 5 is a functional timing diagram for the INT[3:0] and TRAP pins. A low-to-high transition of one of these pins asserts the corresponding interrupt or trap. INT[3:0] or TRAP must be held high for a minimum of two CLK cycles and must be held low for at least two CLK cycles before being reasserted. If INT[3:0] or TRAP is asserted and stays high, the core services the interrupt or trap only once. A minimum of four cycles1 after INT[3:0] or PTRAP is asserted, the core services the interrupt or trap by executing instructions starting at the vector location as defined in Table 9 on page 33. In the case of PTRAP, a maximum of three instructions are allowed to execute before the core services the trap.
Functional Timing for INT[3:0] and TRAP
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.9 Software Interrupts Software interrupts emulate hardware interrupts. A software interrupt is always enabled and has no assigned priority and no corresponding field in the ins register. A program causes a software interrupt by executing an icall IM6 instruction, where IM6 is replaced with 0--63. When a software interrupt is serviced, the core saves the contents of PC in the pi register and transfers control to the interrupt vector defined in Table 9 on page 33. CAUTION: If a software interrupt is inserted into an ISR, it is explicitly nested in the ISR and therefore the ISR must be structured for nesting. See Section 4.4.11 on page 35 for more information about nesting interrupts.
ECKO
INT[3:0]/TRAP A B
ECKO is programmed to be the internal clock CLK (the ECKOB[1:0] field (ECON1[3:2]--see Table 61 on page 112) which is programmed to 00 and the ECKOA[1:0] field (ECON1[1:0]) is programmed to 01). The INT[3:0] or TRAP pin must be held high for a minimum of two CLK cycles and must be held low for a minimum of two CLK cycles before being reasserted. Notes: A. The DSP16411 synchronizes INT[3:0] or TRAP on the falling edge of the internal clock CLK. B. A minimum four-cycle delay before the core services the interrupt or trap (executes instructions starting at the vector location). For a trap, the core executes a maximum of three instructions before it services the trap.
Figure 5. Functional Timing for INT[3:0] and TRAP
1. The number of cycles depends on the number of wait-states incurred by the interrupted or trapped instruction.
34
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.11 Nesting Interrupts The psw1 register (see Table 10) contains the IPLC[1:0] and IPLP[1:0] fields that are used for interrupt nesting. See the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual for details on these fields. Table 10. psw1 (Processor Status Word 1) Register
15 14 13--12 11--10 9--7 6 5--0
Reserved Bit 15 14 13--12
IEN Field
IPLC[1:0] Value 0 0 1 00 01 10 11
IPLP[1:0]
Reserved
EPAR
a[7:2]V R/W R/W R R/W
Description Reserved--write with zero. Hardware interrupts are globally disabled. Hardware interrupts are globally enabled. Current hardware interrupt priority level is 0; core handles pending interrupts of priority 1, 2, or 3. Current hardware interrupt priority level is 1; core handles pending interrupts of priority 2 or 3. Current hardware interrupt priority level is 2; core handles pending interrupts of priority 3 only. Current hardware interrupt priority level is 3; core does not handle any pending interrupts. Previous hardware interrupt priority level was 0. Previous hardware interrupt priority level was 1. Previous hardware interrupt priority level was 2. Previous hardware interrupt priority level was 3. Reserved--write with zero. Most recent BMU or special function shift result has odd parity. Most recent BMU or special function shift result has even parity. The current contents of a7 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a7 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a6 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a6 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a5 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a5 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a4 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a4 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a3 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a3 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a2 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a2 are mathematically overflowed.
Reset Value
0 0 00
Reserved IEN IPLC[1:0]
11--10
IPLP[1:0]
9--7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved EPAR a7V a6V a5V a4V a3V a2V
00 01 10 11 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
R/W
XX
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
X X X X X X X X
In this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. The user clears this bit by executing a di instruction and sets it by executing an ei or ireturn instruction. The core clears this bit whenever it begins to service an interrupt. Previous interrupt priority level is the priority level of the interrupt most recently serviced prior to the current interrupt. This field is used for interrupt nesting. The most recent DAU result that was written to that accumulator resulted in mathematical overflow (LMV) with FSAT = 0.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
35
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.11 Nesting Interrupts (continued) Caution: The procedure for nesting interrupts described below is different than that described in Section 5.4.9 of the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual. The DSP16411 contains version 2 of the DSP16000 core, and the manual describes version 1 of the core. See the DSP16K V2 Core Nested Interrupt Design Exception Advisory (AY01-033WINF) for details. The DSP16000 core automatically globally disables interrupts when it begins servicing an interrupt, disabling interrupt nesting by default. To allow interrupt nesting, the interrupt service routine (ISR) must perform the steps specified in the following ISR code example. The code segment highlighted in bold globally enables interrupts in the proper sequence. This code segment replaces the ei instruction in the ISR code example described in Section 5.4.11 of the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual. (The code example in Section 5.4.11 of the information manual contains additional instructions needed if the main body of the ISR uses cache loops. These instructions have been omitted from the following example for simplicity.) // Save Context: ISR: push pi // Save pi to stack - needed for nesting. push psw1 // Save psw1 to stack - needed for nesting. push cstate // Save cstate to stack - needed for nesting. cstate=0 // Clear cstate - needed for nesting. // (The cstate register must be saved and cleared so that, if this ISR has interrupted // a cache loop and this ISR is interrupted by a higher-priority interrupt, the ireturn // in the higher-priority ISR returns to this ISR and not to the cache loop.) // Save (push) any other registers to stack that will be used in BODY below. // If required, execute noninterruptible user code here. // Globally enable interrupts -- replaces ei instruction and is needed for nesting. push psw1 // Save current state of IPLC and IPLP. pi=JMP // Set jump location for ireturn. psw1=0x3C00 // Set IPLC=IPLP=3 (set core to highest priority level) so that // no interrupts will be accepted until psw1 is restored. ireturn // Globally enable interrupts and goto pi (JMP). JMP: pop psw1 // Restore psw1 -- restore core to correct priority level. //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// // BODY -- Main body of ISR that services the interrupt. Can be interrupted // // by an interrupt of higher priority. // //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// di // Globally disable interrupts for restoring state.
// If required, execute noninterruptible user code here. // Restore (pop) any other registers from stack that have been saved (pushed). pop cstate // Restore cstate from stack. pop psw1 // Restore psw1 from stack. pop pi // Restore pi from stack. ireturn // Return from interrupt and globally enable interrupts.
36
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.4 Interrupts and Traps (continued)
4.4.12 Interrupts and Cache Usage If an ISR or TSR uses cache (do or redo) loops, then it must first save the state of the cache and then restore it before returning to normal program execution. This is necessary because the interrupt or trap can occur during the execution of a cache loop. See Section 3.5.2.7 and Section 5.4.11 of the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual for details on saving and restoring the state of the cache. 4.4.13 Interrupt Polling If a core disables an interrupt and tests its ins field, it can poll that interrupt instead of automatically servicing it. This procedure, however, costs in the amount of code that must be written and executed to replace what the DSP16000 core does by design. The programmer can poll an interrupt source by checking its pending status in ins. The program can clear an interrupt and change its status from pending to not pending by writing a 1 to its corresponding ins field. This clears the field and leaves the remaining fields of ins unchanged. The example code segment below polls the MGU input buffer full (MGIBF): poll: a0=ins a0=a0&0x00000400 if eq goto poll ... ins=0x00400 // // // // // Copy ins register contents to a0. Mask out all but bit 10. If bit 10 is zero, then MGIBF not pending. Interrupt is now pending -- service it. Clear MGIBF; don't change other interrupts.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
37
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
The following mechanisms support data access:
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.5 Interprocessor Communication
Effective interprocessor (core-to-core) communication requires synchronization and access to required data. The following hardware mechanisms support access synchronization:
! !
The MGU can control the occurrence of a synchronizing event (interrupt/trap) for information/status transfer. The MGU provides data transfer through its fullduplex message buffers (mgi and mgo). The DMAU can copy data from one core's TPRAM to the other core's TPRAM. Cores can directly share data in external memory (ERAM, EROM, or EIO spaces). Cores can directly share data in the SLM.
!
!
The MGU provides core-to-core interrupts and traps. The MGU provides message buffer interrupts and flags. DMAU interrupts.
!
!
!
Figure 6 illustrates the interprocessor communication logic provided by MGU0 and MGU1.
Inter-Processor Communication Logic in MGU0 and MGU1
CORE0 FLAGS INTERRUPTS XIO SIGINT PTRAP PTRAP SIGINT
CORE1 INTERRUPTS XIO FLAGS
MGOBF MGIBE MGIBF
MGIBF MGIBE MGOBF
imux 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 signal MUX 2 0 IMUX0 mgi mgo MGU0 pid
imux 2 MUX 0 IMUX1 mgi mgo 16 pid MGU1 2 BIT 0 BIT 1 signal
16
TRAP
DMINT[5:4] (INTERRUPTS FROM DMAU)
KEY:
PROGRAM-ACCESSIBLE REGISTERS
Figure 6. Interprocessor Communication Logic in MGU0 and MGU1
38
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
The code segment below illustrates the code running on one core to assert the SIGINT interrupt of the other core: signal=1 // interrupt other core
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.5 Interprocessor Communication (continued)
Note: Sharing data directly through external memory (ERAM, EROM, or EIO spaces) or the SLM is the least efficient means of interprocessor communication involving large blocks of data. It is more efficient to perform block memory-to-memory moves using a DMAU MMT channel. See Section 4.8 on page 49 for details on SLM and Section 4.6.3 on page 43 for details on ERAM, EROM, or EIO. 4.5.1 Core-to-Core Interrupts and Traps Software executing on one core can interrupt the other core by writing a 1 to its own MGU signal register bit 0 (Table 11). This causes the assertion of the other core's SIGINT interrupt signal. Table 11. signal Register
15--11
Software executing on one core can trap the other core by writing a 1 to its own signal register bit 1. This causes the assertion of the other core's PTRAP. As shown in Figure 6 on page 38, the signal register bit 1 is logically ORed with the TRAP pin and the result is input to the other core's PTRAP signal. (See Section 4.4.10 on page 34 for more information on PTRAP.) See the code segment below: signal=2 // trap other core
To ensure correct operation, the execution of the signal register write instruction must be followed by the execution of any instruction other than another signal register write instruction.
1
0
Reserved Bit 15--11 1 0 Field Reserved SIGTRAP SIGINT Value 0 0 1 0 1 Description Reserved--write with zero. No effect. Trap the other core by asserting its PTRAP signal. No effect. Interrupt the other core by asserting its SIGINT interrupt.
SIGTRAP R/W W W W
SIGINT Reset Value 0 0 0
Note: If the program sets the SIGTRAP or SIGINT field, the MGU automatically clears the field after asserting the trap or interrupt. Therefore, the program must not explicitly clear the field.
4.5.2 Message Buffer Data Exchange Each core can use its MGU message buffers to transmit and receive status information to and from the other core. A core can send a message to another core by writing to its own 16-bit output message register mgo. A core can receive a message from another core by reading its own 16-bit input message register mgi. If the transmitting core writes mgo, the following steps occur: 1. After two instruction cycles of latency, the transmitting core's message output buffer full (MGOBF) condition flag is set. 2. After an additional two instruction cycles of latency:
!
The DSP16411 copies the contents of the transmitting core's mgo to the receiving core's input message register mgi. The DSP16411 clears the receiving core's message input buffer empty (MGIBE) condition flag. The DSP16411 asserts the receiving core's message input buffer full (MGIBF) interrupt.
! !
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
39
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4.5.2.2 Message Buffer Read Protocol The receiving core can detect an incoming message by enabling the MGIBF interrupt in the inc1 register (Table 153 on page 241). The following is an example of a simple interrupt service routine for the receiving core: ISR: a0h=mgi *r0++=a0h ireturn As an alternative to the interrupt-directed message buffer read protocol described above, the receiving core can poll its MGIBE flag for the arrival of a new message. The example code segment below is executed by the receiving core: if mgibe goto . // Wait for new // message.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.5 Interprocessor Communication (continued)
4.5.2 Message Buffer Data Exchange (continued) The receiving core can use interrupts or polling to detect the presence of an incoming message. When the receiving core reads mgi, the following steps occur: 1. After one instruction cycle of latency, the DSP16411 sets the receiving core's MGIBE flag. 2. After an additional instruction cycle of latency, the DSP16411 clears the transmitting core's MGOBF flag. 4.5.2.1 Message Buffer Write Protocol To ensure an older message has been processed by the receiving core, the transmitting core must not write a new message to mgo until its MGOBF flag is cleared. The example code segment below is executed by the transmitting core: if mgobf goto . mgo=*r0++ // Wait for old message // to be read. // Write new message.
// Read new message and // clear MGIBF.
a0h=mgi *r0++=a0h
// Read new message.
The DSP16411 can operate a full-duplex communication channel between CORE0 and CORE1, with each core using its own mgi and mgo registers and its own MGOBF and MGIBE flags. Table 12 illustrates two code segments for a full-duplex data exchange of N words between CORE0 and CORE1. This segment exchanges two words (one input, one output) between the two cores every 18 CLK cycles.
Table 12. Full-Duplex Data Transfer Code Through Core-to-Core Message Buffer
CORE0 Message Buffer Transfer Code c0=1-N xfer: if mgobf goto . mgo=*r0++ CORE1 Message Buffer Transfer Code c0=1-N xfer: if mgobf goto . mgo=*r0++
if mgibe goto . a0h=mgi *r1++=a0h
//Write message to //CORE1 and set MGOBF. //4 cycles latency //until CORE1's MGIBE //is cleared. //Wait for CORE1 //message to arrive.
if mgibe goto . a0h=mgi *r0++=a0h
//Write message to //CORE0 and set MGOBF. //4 cycles latency //until CORE0's MGIBE //is cleared. //Wait for CORE0 //message to arrive.
//Read CORE1 message //and clear CORE1's //MGOBF. if c0lt goto xfer
//Read CORE0 message //and clear CORE0's //MGOBF. if c0lt goto xfer
40
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
If an MMT channel is dedicated to intercore transfers and not used for intracore transfers, the transmitting and receiving cores can use the DMINT4 and DMINT5 interrupts directly to synchronize transfers. For example, MMT4 can be dedicated to CORE0-to-CORE1 transfers and MMT5 can be dedicated to CORE1-toCORE0 transfers. In this case, DMINT4 interrupts CORE1 if a message block from CORE0 is in memory, and likewise, DMINT5 interrupts CORE0 if a message block from CORE1 is in memory. If an MMT channel is used for both intracore and intercore transfers, DMINT4 or DMINT5 is used for synchronizing intracore transfers and the XIO interrupt is used for synchronizing intercore transfers. Each core programs the XIO interrupt for the other core via its imux register (Table 5 on page 28). The XIOC[1:0] field (imux[15:14]) selects XIO for the other core as either zero (XIOC[1:0] = 0), DMINT4 (XIOC[1:0] = 1), or DMINT5 (XIOC[1:0] = 2). Table 14 illustrates an example configuration for intracore and intercore transfers via DMA. This example assigns CORE0 to MMT4 and CORE1 to MMT5.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.5 Interprocessor Communication (continued)
4.5.3 DMAU Data Transfer The most efficient mechanism for synchronously transferring large data blocks between the two cores is through the two DMAU memory-to-memory (MMT) channels, MMT4 and MMT5, described in detail in Section 4.13.6, beginning on page 90. For example, one core uses one MMT channel to transfer data and the other core uses the other channel. In this way, a transmitting core writes a message block via its MMT channel and an interrupt notifies the receiving core after the DMA transfer is complete. Table 13 summarizes the MMT interrupts, DMINT4 and DMINT5, used to synchronize DMAU transfers. Both cores can monitor both DMINT4 and DMINT5. Table 13. DMAU MMT Channel Interrupts
DMAU Channel MMT4 MMT5 Name DMINT4 DMINT5 Interrupt Description MMT4 transfer complete. MMT5 transfer complete.
Table 14. DMA Intracore and Intercore Transfers Example
DMAU Channel MMT4 MMT5 Core CORE0 CORE1 Intracore Interrupt DMINT4 DMINT5 imux[XIOC[1:0]] 0 (CORE1's XIO = 0) 0 (CORE0's XIO = 0) Core CORE0 CORE1 Intercore (Core-to-Core) Transmitting Receiving imux[XIOC[1:0]] Core Interrupt 1 CORE1 XIO (DMINT4) (CORE1's XIO = DMINT4) 2 CORE0 XIO (DMINT5) (CORE0's XIO = DMINT5)
If a core uses an MMT channel for intracore transfers, i.e., not for transfers with the other core, it must first program its XIOC[1:0] field (imux[15:14]) to zero. This prevents the MMT interrupt from disturbing the other core via its XIO interrupt. The core must enable the corresponding MMT interrupt (DMINT4 or DMINT5) in its inc0 register (Table 153 on page 241). If a core uses its MMT channel for intercore transfers, i.e., for transmitting to the other core, it must first program its XIOC[1:0] field (imux[15:14]) to either 1 or 2 (DMINT4 or DMINT5). The receiving core must enable its XIO interrupt in its inc1 register (Table 153 on page 241). The transmitting core must disable the corresponding MMT interrupt (DMINT4 or DMINT5) in its own inc0 register.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
41
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.6 Memory Maps
The DSP16000 core is a modified Harvard architecture with separate program and data memory spaces (X-memory space and Y-memory space). The core differentiates between the X- and Y-memory spaces by the addressing unit used for the access (XAAU vs. YAAU) and not by the physical memory accessed. The core accesses its X-memory space via its 20-bit X address bus (XAB) and 32-bit X data bus (XDB). The core accesses its Y-memory space via its 20-bit Y address bus (YAB) and 32-bit Y data bus (YDB). The DMAU accesses private internal memory (TPRAM0--1) via its 20-bit internal Z address bus (ZIAB) and 32-bit internal Z data bus (ZIDB) and shared external memory1 (EIO and ERAM) via its 20-bit external Z address bus (ZEAB) and 32-bit external Z data bus (ZEDB). Although DSP16411 memory is 16-bit word-addressable, data or instruction widths can be either 16 bits or 32 bits and applications can access the memories 32 bits at a time. Table 15 summarizes the components of the DSP16411 memory. The table specifies the name and size of each component, whether it is internal or external, whether it is private to a core or shared by both cores, and in which memory space(s) it resides. The five memory spaces are CORE0's X-memory space, CORE0's Y-memory space, CORE1's X-memory space, CORE1's Y-memory space, and the DMAU's Z-memory space. Table 15. DSP16411 Memory Components
Type Memory Component TPRAM0 CACHE0 IROM0 TPRAM1 CACHE1 IROM1 Shared Internal Shared External Internal EIO ERAM EROM I/O Size CORE0 X-Memory Y-Memory Space Space CORE1 X-Memory Y-Memory Space Space DMAU Z-Memory Space
Private Internal
160 Kwords 62 words 4 Kwords 160 Kwords 62 words 4 Kwords 128 Kwords 128 Kwords 512 Kwords 512 Kwords
# # #
# # # # # # # # # # # # # #
# # # # #
#
Assumes that WEROM is 0 for normal operation. If WEROM is 1, ERAM is replaced by EROM in the memory space, allowing the normally read-only EROM section to be written. WEROM is discussed in detail in Section 4.6.3 on page 43. The internal I/O section consists of 2 Kwords of SLM and memory-mapped registers in the SEMI, DMAU, PIU, SIU0, and SIU1 blocks. Only a small portion of the 128 Kwords reserved for internal I/O is actually populated with memory or registers.
The remainder of this section consists of the following:
! ! ! ! ! ! !
Section 4.6.1, Private Internal Memory, on page 43. Section 4.6.2, Shared Internal I/O, on page 43. Section 4.6.3, Shared External I/O and Memory, on page 43. Section 4.6.4, X-Memory Map, on page 44. Section 4.6.5, Y-Memory Maps, on page 45. Section 4.6.6, Z-Memory Maps, on page 46. Section 4.6.7, Internal I/O Detailed Memory Map, on page 47.
1. ZEAB and ZEDB connect to EIO and ERAM through the SEMI.
42
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4.6.3 Shared External I/O and Memory External I/O and memory consists of three shared components: EIO, ERAM, and EROM. EIO and ERAM are accessible in the Y-memory spaces of both cores and also in the DMAU's Z-memory space. EROM is normally read-only and accessible only in the X-memory spaces of both cores. If the programmer sets the WEROM field in the memory-mapped ECON1 register (see Table 61 on page 112), EROM takes the place of ERAM in the Y-memory spaces of both cores and in the DMAU's Z-memory space (see Section 4.6.5 on page 45 and Section 4.6.6 on page 46 for details). This allows the EROM component to be written for program downloads to external X memory. The physical size of the EIO, ERAM, and EROM components can be expanded from the sizes defined in Table 15 on page 42 by employing the ESEG[3:0] pins. The external memory system can use ESEG[3:0] in either of the following ways: 1. ESEG[3:0] can be interpreted by the external memory system as four separate decoded address enable signals. Each ESEG[3:0] pin individually selects one of four segments for each memory component. This results in four glueless 512 Kword (1 Mbyte) ERAM segments, four glueless 512 Kword (1 Mbyte) EROM segments, and four glueless 128 Kword (256 KB) EIO segments. 2. ESEG[3:0] can be interpreted by the external memory system as an extension of the address bus, i.e., the ESEG[3:0] pins can be concatenated with the EAB[18:0] pins to form a 23-bit address. This results in one glueless 8 Mword (16 Mbytes) ERAM segment, one glueless 8 Mword (16 Mbytes) EROM segment, and one glueless 2 Mword (4 Mbytes) EIO segment. See Section 4.14.1.5 on page 106 for details on configuring the ESEG[3:0] pins.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.6 Memory Maps (continued)
4.6.1 Private Internal Memory Each core has its own private internal memories for program and data storage. CORE0 has IROM0, CACHE0, and TPRAM0. CORE1 has IROM1, CACHE1, and TPRAM1. A core cannot directly access the other core's private memory. However, the DMAU can access both TPRAM0 and TPRAM1 and can move data between these two memories to facilitate core-tocore communication (see Section 4.5 on page 38). TPRAM is described in more detail in Section 4.7 on page 48. Cache memory is described in detail in the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual. IROM contains boot and HDS code and is described in Section 5 on page 208. 4.6.2 Shared Internal I/O The 128 Kword internal I/O memory component is accessible by both cores in their Y-memory spaces and by the DMAU in its Z-memory space. Any access to this memory component is made over the system bus and is arbitrated by the SEMI. The internal shared I/O memory component consists of:
!
2 Kwords of shared local memory (SLM). SLM can be used for core-to-core communication (see Section 4.5 on page 38). SLM is described in Section 4.1.4 on page 17. Memory-mapped control and data registers within the following peripherals: -- DMAU -- SEMI -- PIU -- SIU0 -- SIU1
!
Only a small portion of the 128 Kwords reserved for internal I/O is actually populated with memory or registers. Any access to the internal I/O memory component takes multiple cycles to complete. DSP core or DMAU writes take a minimum of two CLK cycles to complete. DSP core or DMAU reads take a minimum of five CLK cycles to complete.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
43
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.6 Memory Maps (continued)
4.6.4 X-Memory Map
XMAP 0x00000
0x27FFF RESERVED 0x30000 0x30FFF IROMn (PRIVATE) 4 Kwords
0x3FFC0 0x3FFFD
0x80000
0xFFFFF 16 bits n is 0 for CORE0 or 1 for CORE1. Private memory can be accessed by the core with which it is associated. TPRAM0, CACHE0, and IROM0 cannot be accessed directly by CORE1. TPRAM1, CACHE1, and IROM1 cannot be accessed directly by CORE0. Both TPRAM0 and TPRAM1 can be accessed by the DMAU and PIU. EROM can be configured as four glueless 512 Kword (1 Mbyte) segments or one 8 Mword (16 Mbytes) segment. See Section 4.14.4.3 beginning on page 114 for details. EROM is shared, i.e., is accessible by both CORE0 and CORE1, and is also accessible by the DMAU and the PIU.
.................... ... ..................................................
TPRAMn (PRIVATE) 160 Kwords
0x28000 0x2FFFF
0x31000
.......
RESERVED CACHEn (PRIVATE) 62 words
0x3FFBF 0x3FFFE
.......................................
RESERVED
INTERNAL
0x7FFFF
EXTERNAL
EROM (SHARED)
512 Kwords
Figure 7. X-Memory Map
44
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.6 Memory Maps (continued)
4.6.5 Y-Memory Maps
YMAP (WEROM = 0) 0x00000 0x00000 YMAP (WEROM = 1)
0x27FFF 0x28000
0x3FFC0 0x3FFFD 0x40000
0x5FFFF 0x60000
0x80000
0xFFFFF 16 bits
n is 0 for CORE0 or 1 for CORE1. Private memory can be accessed by the core with which it is associated. TPRAM0, CACHE0, and IROM0 cannot be accessed directly by CORE1. TPRAM1, CACHE1, and IROM1 cannot be accessed directly by CORE0. Both TPRAM0 and TPRAM1 can be accessed by the DMAU and PIU. Internal I/O consists of shared local memory (SLM) and internal memory-mapped registers. See Section 4.6.7 on page 47 for details. A shared memory space is accessible by both CORE0 and CORE1, and is also accessible by the DMAU and the PIU. EROM and ERAM can each be configured as four glueless 512 Kword (1 Mbyte) segments or one 8 Mword (16 Mbytes) segment. EIO can be configured as four glueless 128 Kword (256 Mbytes) segments or one glueless 2 Mword (4 Mbytes) segment. (See Section 4.14.4.3 on page 114.)
Agere Systems Inc.
...................
...................
TPRAMn (PRIVATE) 160 Kwords
TPRAMn (PRIVATE) 160 Kwords
0x27FFF 0x28000
...................
...................
RESERVED
RESERVED
0x3FFBF CACHEn (PRIVATE) 62 words RESERVED 0x3FFFE 0x3FFFF INTERNAL
0x3FFC0 0x3FFFD 0x40000
0x3FFBF CACHEn (PRIVATE) 62 words RESERVED 0x3FFFE 0x3FFFF
..............
...........................................
..............
INTERNAL I/O (SHARED) 128 Kwords
INTERNAL I/O (SHARED) 128 Kwords
0x5FFFF 0x60000
..............
..............
EIO (SHARED) 128 Kwords
EXTERNAL
EIO (SHARED) 128 Kwords
0x7FFFF 0x80000
0x7FFFF
...........................................
ERAM (SHARED) 512 Kwords
EROM (SHARED) 512 Kwords
0xFFFFF 16 bits
Figure 8. Y-Memory Maps Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 45
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.6 Memory Maps (continued)
4.6.6 Z-Memory Maps
ZMAP (WEROM = 0) 0x00000 0x00000 ZMAP (WEROM = 1)
0x27FFF 0x28000
0x40000
0x5FFFF 0x60000
0x80000
0xFFFFF 16 bits
The CMP[2:0] field in the DMAU address register (SADD0--5 or DADD0--5--Table 37 on page 77) or in the parallel address register (PA--Table 80 on page 138) selects either TPRAM0 or TPRAM1. Internal I/O consists of shared local memory (SLM) and internal memory-mapped registers. See Section 4.6.7 on page 47 for details. A shared memory space is accessible by both CORE0 and CORE1, and is also accessible by the DMAU and the PIU. EROM and ERAM can each be configured as four glueless 512 Kword (1 Mbyte) segments or one 8 Mword (16 Mbytes) segment. EIO can be configured as four glueless 128 Kword (256 Mbytes) segments or one glueless 2 Mword (4 Mbytes) segment. (See Section 4.14.1.3 on page 104.)
...................
...................
TPRAM0 (160 Kwords) or TPRAM1 (160 Kwords)
TPRAM0 (160 Kwords) or TPRAM1 (160 Kwords)
0x27FFF 0x28000
.............................
.............................
RESERVED
RESERVED
0x3FFFF INTERNAL I/O (SHARED) 128 Kwords INTERNAL
0x40000
0x3FFFF INTERNAL I/O (SHARED) 128 Kwords
..............
........................................... 46
0x5FFFF 0x60000
..............
..............
..............
EIO (SHARED) 128 Kwords
EXTERNAL
EIO (SHARED) 128 Kwords
0x7FFFF 0x80000
0x7FFFF
...........................................
ERAM (SHARED) 512 Kwords
EROM (SHARED) 512 Kwords
0xFFFFF 16 bits
Figure 9. Z-Memory Maps Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.6 Memory Maps (continued)
4.6.7 Internal I/O Detailed Memory Map Figure 10 is a detailed view of the 128 Kword internal I/O memory component shown in Figures 8 and 9. It consists of a 4 Kword block for the memory-mapped registers of each peripheral and a 2 Kword block for the SLM. The internal I/O memory component is directly accessible by both cores and by the DMAU and PIU. The SEMI controls access to the internal I/O memory component, which is subject to wait-state and contention penalties. The SEMI permits only 16-bit and aligned 32-bit accesses to the internal I/O memory component. The SEMI does not support misaligned 32-bit accesses (double-word accesses with an odd address) for the internal I/O memory component because they produce undefined results. An access to the internal I/O memory component takes multiple clock cycles to complete and a core access to the internal I/O memory component causes that core to incur waitstates. See Section 4.14.7.1 on page 128 for details on system bus performance.
0x40000 0x40FFF
PIU REGISTERS (4 Kwords) 0x42000 0x42FFF
0x41FFF
DMAU REGISTERS (4 Kwords) SIU0 REGISTERS (4 Kwords)
0x43FFF
0x44000 0x44FFF 0x45800
SIU1 REGISTERS (4 Kwords) SLM (2 Kwords) 0x45000 0x457FF
RESERVED (106 Kwords)
0x5FFFF 16 bits Although 4 Kwords are reserved for the memory-mapped registers of each peripheral, not all of the 4 Kwords are actually used.
Figure 10. Internal I/O Memory Map The memory-mapped registers located in their associated peripherals are each mapped to an even address. The sizes of these registers are 16 bits, 20 bits, or 32 bits. A register that is 20 bits or 32 bits must be accessed as an aligned double word. A register that is 16 bits can be accessed as a single word with an even address or as an aligned double word. If a register that is 16 bits or 20 bits is accessed as a double word, the contents of the register are right-justified. Section 6.2.2 on page 231 details the memory-mapped registers.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
......
0x43000
......
...... ...... ...... ...........................
SEMI REGISTERS (4 Kwords) 0x41000
47
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.7 Triport Random-Access Memory (TPRAM)
Each core has a private block TPRAM (TPRAM0 and TPRAM1) consisting of 160 banks (banks 0--159) of zero wait-state memory. Each bank consists of 1K 16-bit words and has three separate address and data ports: one port to the core's instruction/coefficient (X-memory) space, a second port to the core's data (Y-memory) space, and a third port to the DMAU's (Z-memory) space. TPRAM is organized into even and odd interleaved banks for which each even/odd address pair is a 32-bit wide module as illustrated in Figure 11. The core's data buses (XDB and YDB) and the DMAU's data bus (ZIDB) are each 32 bits wide, and therefore 32-bit data in the TPRAM with an aligned (even) address can be accessed in a single cycle. Typically, a misaligned double word is accessed in two cycles.
11 LSBs OF ADDRESS EVEN BANK ODD BANK 11 LSBs OF ADDRESS
0x000 0x002
0x001 0x003 TPRAM MODULE 1K x 32 bits (2 Kwords)
0x7FE 16 bits 32 bits 16 bits
0x7FF
Figure 11. Interleaved Internal TPRAM Figure 12 illustrates an example arrangement of single words (16 bits) and double words (32 bits) in memory. It also illustrates an aligned double word and a misaligned double word. See the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual for details on word alignment and misalignment wait-states.
Example Memory Arrangement
ADDRESS
EVEN BANK
ODD BANK
ADDRESS
0 2 4 6
SINGLE WORD MORE SIGNIFICANT WORD MOST SINGLE WORD LEASTSIGNIFICANT WORD LESS SIGNIFICANT WORD 16 bits 32 bits
SINGLE WORD LEASTSIGNIFICANT WORD LESS SIGNIFICANT WORD MOST SIGNIFICANT WORD SINGLE WORD
1 3 5 7
KEY:
ALIGNED DOUBLE WORD AND DOUBLE-WORD ADDRESS MISALIGNED DOUBLE WORD AND DOUBLE-WORD ADDRESS
Figure 12. Example Memory Arrangement
48
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4.8 Shared Local Memory (SLM)
Each core, the DMAU, and the PIU can access SLM (shared local memory) through the SEMI and the system buses (SAB and SDB). SLM is a 2 Kword block located in the internal I/O memory component. SLM supports both 16-bit and aligned 32-bit accesses, but not 32-bit misaligned accesses. The SEMI controls access to the SLM, which is subject to wait-state and contention penalties; see Section 4.14.7.1 on page 128 for details. Because access to the SLM is subject to wait-state and contention penalties, it is not an efficient method for transferring large blocks of data between the cores. (An efficient method is to use the DMAU memory-to-memory (MMT) channel.)
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.7 Triport Random-Access Memory (TPRAM) (continued)
The core's X and Y ports and the DMAU's Z port can access separate modules within a TPRAM simultaneously with no wait-states incurred by the core. If the same module of TPRAM is accessed from multiple ports simultaneously, the TPRAM automatically sequences the accesses in the following priority order: X port (instruction/coefficient), Y port (data), then Z port (DMAU). This sequencing can cause the core to incur a conflict wait-state. Because the core must complete any consecutive accesses to a module of TPRAM before the DMAU can access that module, the DMAU can be blocked from accessing that module for a significant number of cycles.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
49
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
output. If IO0,1BIT[n] is configured as an input, the fields are MASK[n] and PAT[n]. If IO0,1BIT[n] is configured as an output, the fields are MODE[n] and DATA[n]. Table 18 on page 52 summarizes the function of the MODE[6:0]/MASK[6:0] and DATA[6:0]/PAT[6:0] fields. If the software configures an IO0,1BIT[n] pin as an output and:
s
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.9 Bit Input/Output Units (BIO0--1)
The DSP16411 has two bit I/O units, BIO0 for CORE0 and BIO1 for CORE1. Each BIO unit connects to seven bidirectional pins, IO0BIT[6:0] for BIO0 and IO1BIT[6:0] for BIO1. User software running in CORE0 controls and monitors BIO0 via its sbit and cbit registers. User software running in CORE1 controls and monitors BIO1 via its sbit and cbit registers. The software can:
s s s s
If the software clears MODE[n] and clears DATA[n], the BIO0,1 drives the pin low. If the software clears MODE[n] and sets DATA[n], the BIO0,1 drives the pin high. If the software sets MODE[n] and clears DATA[n], the BIO does not change the state of the pin. If the software sets MODE[n] and sets DATA[n], the BIO0,1 toggles (inverts) the state of the pin.
s
Individually configure each pin as an input or output. Read the current state of the pins. Test the combined state of input pins. Individually set, clear, or toggle output pins.
s
s
The DIREC[6:0] field (sbit[14:8]--see Table 16) controls the direction of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin; a logic 0 configures the pin as an input or a logic 1 configures it as an output. Reset clears the DIREC[6:0] field, configuring all BIO pins as inputs by default. The read-only VALUE[6:0] field (sbit[6:0]) contains the current state of the corresponding pin, regardless of whether the pin is configured as an input or output. The cbit register (Table 17 on page 51) contains two 7-bit fields, MODE[6:0]/MASK[6:0] and DATA[6:0]/PAT[6:0]. The meaning of the individual bits in these fields, MODE[n]/MASK[n] and DATA[n]/PAT[n], is based on whether the corresponding IO0,1BIT[n] pin is configured as an input or an Table 16. sbit (BIO Status/Control) Register
15 14--8
If an IO0,1BIT[n] pin is configured as an input and the software sets MASK[n], the BIO0,1 tests the state of the pin by comparing it to the PAT[n] (pattern) field. BIO0,1 sets or clears its flags based on the result of the comparison of all its tested inputs:
s
ALLT (all true) is set if all of the tested inputs match the test pattern. ALLF (all false) is set if all of the tested inputs do not match the test pattern. SOMET (some true) is set if some or all of the tested inputs match the test pattern. SOMEF (some false) is set if some or all of the tested inputs do not match the test pattern.
s
s
s
7
6--0
Reserved Bit 15 14--8 Field Reserved DIREC[6:0] (Controls direction of pins) Reserved VALUE[6:0] (Current value of pins) Value X 0 1 X 0 1
DIREC[6:0]
Reserved Description
VALUE[6:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W 0
Reserved--writing to this field has no functional effect. Configure the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin as an input. Configure the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin as an output. Reserved--value is read-only and is undefined. The current state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is logic 0. The current state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is logic 1.
7 6--0
R R
0 P
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. This field is read-only; writing the VALUE[6:0] field of sbit has no effect. If the user software toggles a bit in the DIREC[6:0] field, there is a latency of one cycle until the VALUE[6:0] field reflects the current state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin. If an IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is configured as an output (DIREC[6:0] = 1) and the user software writes cbit to change the state of the pin, there is a latency of two cycles until the VALUE[6:0] field reflects the current state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. The IO0,1BIT[6:0] pins are configured as inputs after reset. If external circuitry does not drive an IO0,1BIT[n] pin, the VALUE[n] field is undefined after reset.
50
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.9 Bit Input/Output Units (BIO0--1) (continued)
Table 17. cbit (BIO Control) Register
15 14--8 7 6--0
Reserved Bit 15 14--8 Field Reserved MODE[6:0] (outputs)
MODE[6:0]/MASK[6:0] Value 0 0 1
Reserved Description
DATA[6:0]/PAT[6:0] R/W Reset Value 0 0
Reserved--write with zero. R/W The BIO drives the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin to the correR/W sponding value in DATA[6:0]. s If the corresponding DATA[6:0] field is 0, the BIO does not change the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. If the corresponding DATA[6:0] field is 1, the BIO toggles (inverts) the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. The BIO does not test the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] input pin to determine the state of the BIO flags. The BIO compares the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] input pin to the corresponding value in the PAT[6:0] field to determine the state of the BIO flags; true if pin matches or false if pin doesn't match. Reserved--write with zero. R/W s If the corresponding MODE[6:0] field is 0, the BIO drives the corresponding R/W IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin to logic 0.
s s
MASK[6:0] (inputs)
0 1
7 6--0
Reserved DATA[6:0] (outputs)
0 0
0 0
1
s
If the corresponding MODE[6:0] field is 1, the BIO does not change the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. If the corresponding MODE[6:0] field is 0, the BIO drives the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin to logic 1.
PAT[6:0] (inputs)
0
1
If the corresponding MODE[6:0] field is 1, the BIO toggles (inverts) the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. If the corresponding MASK[6:0] field is 1, the BIO tests the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] input pin to determine the state of the BIO flags; true if pin is logic 0 or false if pin is logic 1. If the corresponding MASK[6:0] field is 1, the BIO tests the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] input pin to determine the state of the BIO flags; true if pin is logic 1 or false if pin is logic 0.
s
An IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is configured as an output if the corresponding DIREC[6:0] field (sbit[14:8]) has been set by the user software. An IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is configured as an input if the corresponding DIREC[6:0] field has been cleared by the user software or by device reset. The BIO flags are ALLT, ALLF, SOMET, and SOMEF. See Table 19 on page 52 for details on BIO flags.
If all the IO0,1BIT[6:0] pins are configured as outputs or if the MASK[n] field is cleared for all pins that are configured as inputs, the BIO0,1 sets the ALLT and ALLF flags and clears the SOMET and SOMEF flags. Table 19 on page 52 summarizes the BIO flags, which software can test with conditional instructions (see Table 138 on page 226). Software can test, save, or restore the state of the flags by reading or writing the alf register (see Table 144 on page 235). As illustrated in Table 19 on page 52, ALLT is the logical inverse of SOMEF and ALLF is the logical inverse of SOMET. If an IO0,1BIT[n] pin is configured as an input and the software writes cbit to change the MASK[n] or Agere Systems Inc.
PAT[n] field, there is a latency of two cycles until the DSP16411 updates the BIO flags to reflect the change. The following code segment illustrates this latency by the use of the two nop instructions: sbit=0 cbit=0 ... cbit=0x0302 2*nop if allt goto OK // All pins are inputs. // Test no inputs. // // // // Test IOBIT[1:0]. Any 2 instructions. Branch if IOBIT1... is 1 and IOBIT0 is 0.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
51
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
The following code segment illustrates the latency described in the previous paragraph: sbit=0x0F00 cbit=0x000A cbit=0x0101 // // // // // // // // // // // // IOBIT[3:0] - output. IOBIT[3:0] = 1010 ...after 1 cycle. Toggle IOBIT0... IOBIT[3:0] = 1011 ...after 1 cycle. IOBIT[3:0] - input. IOBIT[3:0] - output. IOBIT[3:0] = 1011 ...after 0 cycles. Any instruction. a0h[3:0] = 1011.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.9 Bit Input/Output Units (BIO0--1) (continued)
If an IO0,1BIT[n] pin is configured as an output and the software writes cbit to change the state of the pin, there is a latency of one cycle until the DSP16411 changes the state of the pin and a latency of an additional cycle until the VALUE[n] field (sbit[6:0]) reflects the change. The use of two nop instructions in the following code segment illustrates this latency: sbit=0x1000 cbit=0x0010 nop nop a0h=sbit // // // // // IOBIT4 is an output. Drive IOBIT4 high. IOBIT4 goes high. VALUE4 is updated. Bit 4 of a0h is 1.
sbit=0 sbit=0x0F00
nop a0h=sbit
Table 18. BIO Operations
..
DIREC[n]
If the software writes sbit to change an IO0,1BIT[n] pin from an input to an output or from an output to an input, there is a latency of one cycle before the VALUE[n] field of sbit is updated to reflect the state of the pin. If the software writes sbit to change an IO0,1BIT[n] pin from an output to an input and back to an output, the BIO drives the pin with its original output value.
1 (Output)
MODE[n]/ DATA[n]/ BIO Action MASK[n] PAT[n] 0 0 Clear IO0,1BIT[n]. 1 Set IO0,1BIT[n]. 1 0 1 Do not change IO0,1BIT[n]. Toggle IO0,1BIT[n]. Do not test IO0,1BIT[n]. Test IO0,1BIT[n] for logic zero. Test IO0,1BIT[n] for logic one.
0 (Input)
0 1
X 0 1
0 n 6. The BIO tests the state of input pins to determine the states of the BIO flags. See Table 19 for details on the BIO flags.
Table 19. BIO Flags
Condition All or some of the IO0,1BIT[6:0] pins are configured as inputs. All tested inputs match the pattern. All tested inputs do not match the pattern. Some (but not all) of the tested inputs match the pattern. All of the inputs are not tested. ALLT (alf[0]) 1 0 0 1 1 ALLF (alf[1]) 0 1 0 1 1 SOMET SOMEF (alf[2]) (alf[3]) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
All IO0,1BIT[6:0] pins are configured as outputs.

For at least one pin IO0,1BIT[n], DIREC[n] = 0. For every pin IO0,1BIT[n] with DIREC[n] = 0 and MASK[n] = 1, IO0,1BIT[n] = PAT[n]. For every pin IO0,1BIT[n] with DIREC[n] = 0 and MASK[n] = 1, IO0,1BIT[n] PAT[n]. For at least one pin IO0,1BIT[n] with DIREC[n] = 0 and MASK[n] = 1, IO0,1BIT[n] = PAT[n], and for at least one pin IO0,1BIT[n] with DIREC[n] = 0 and MASK[n] = 1, IO0,1BIT[n] PAT[n]. For all pins IO0,1BIT[n] with DIREC[n] = 0, MASK[n] = 0. DIREC[6:0] are all ones.
52
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
s
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.10 Timer Units (TIMER0_0--1 and TIMER1_0--1)
The DSP16411 provides two timer units for each core: TIMER0_0 and TIMER1_0 for CORE0 and TIMER0_1 and TIMER1_1 for CORE1. Each TIMER provides a programmable single interval interrupt or a programmable periodic interrupt. Figure 13 on page 54 is a block diagram of a TIMER that contains:
s
Write timer0,1c to program its fields as follows: -- Write 0 to the PWR_DWN field. -- Write 0 to the RELOAD field (timer0,1c[5]) for a single interval interrupt or write 1 to the RELOAD field for periodic interrupts. -- Write 1 to the COUNT field (timer0,1c[4]) to enable the prescaler output clock. -- Program the PRESCALE[3:0] field to configure the frequency of the prescaler output clock. Write a nonzero value to timer0,1 to enable the down counter input clock.
s
A 16-bit control register timer0,1c (see Table 20 on page 55). A running count register timer0,1 (see Table 21 on page 56) consisting of a 16-bit down counter and a 16-bit period register. A prescaler that divides the internal clock (CLK) by one of 16 programmed values in the range 2 to 65536. The prescaler output clock decrements the timer0,1 down counter. The programmed prescale value and the value written to timer0,1 determine the interrupt interval or period.
The software can perform the above steps in either order, and the TIMER starts after the second step. If the TIMER is operating and the timer0,1 down counter reaches zero, the TIMER asserts its interrupt request pulse TIME0,1 (see Section 4.4, beginning on page 25, for details on interrupts). The interval from starting the TIMER to the occurrence of the first interrupt is the following: timer0,1 x 2 -----------------------------------------------fCLK
N+1
s
s
By default after device reset1, the DSP16411 clears timer0,1c and powers up the TIMER. To save power if the TIMER is not in use, the software can set the PWR_DWN field (timer0,1c[6]). Until the user software writes to timer0,1c and timer0,1, the TIMER does not operate or generate interrupts. Note: The software can read or write timer0,1 only if the TIMER is powered up (PWR_DWN = 0). If the software reads timer0,1, the value read is the output of the down counter. If the software writes timer0,1, the TIMER loads the write value into the down counter and into the period register simultaneously. The prescaler consists of a 16-bit up counter and a multiplexer controlled by the PRESCALE[3:0] field (timer0,1c[3:0]). PRESCALE[3:0] contains a value N that selects the period of the prescaler output clock as: 2 -----------fCLK
N+1
If the down counter reaches zero and RELOAD is 0, the TIMER disables the input clock to the down counter, causing the down counter to hold its current value of zero. The user software can restart the TIMER by writing a nonzero value to timer0,1. If the down counter reaches zero and RELOAD is 1, a prescale period elapses and the TIMER reloads the down counter from the timer0,1 period register. Another prescale period elapses and the prescaler decrements the down counter. Therefore, the subsequent interval between periodic interrupts is the following: ( timer0,1 + 1 ) x 2 -------------------------------------------------------------fCLK
N+1
Software can read or write timer0,1 while the timer is running. If the software writes timer0,1, the TIMER loads the write value into the down counter and period register and initializes the prescaler by clearing the 16-bit up counter. Because the TIMER initializes the prescaler if the software writes timer0,1, the interval from writing timer0,1 to decrementing the down counter is one complete prescale period. Clearing COUNT disables the clock to the prescaler, causing the down counter to hold its current value and the prescaler to retain its current state. If the TIMER remains powered up (PWR_DWN = 0), software can stop and restart the TIMER at any time by clearing and setting COUNT.
where fCLK is the frequency of the internal clock (see Section 4.17 on page 200). To operate the TIMER (i.e., for the prescaler to decrement the timer0,1 down counter), the user software must perform the following steps.
1. After device reset, the DSP16411 clears the down counter of timer0,1 and leaves the period register of timer0, 1 unchanged.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
53
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.10 Timer Units (TIMER0_0--1 and TIMER1_0--1) (continued)
16
timer0,1c 15--7 RESERVED 6 PWR_DWN 5 RELOAD 4 COUNT 3--0 PRESCALE[3:0]
16 timer0,1 LD 16-bit RELOAD VALUE (PERIOD) REGISTER CLK 4
N
16
16
PRESCALER CLK
1 MUX 16
0 15 14 MUX
------------2
N+1
15 14 16-bit UP COUNTER
LD 16-bit DOWN COUNTER
16
0
0
CLR
COUNTER = 0 (LEVEL)
IDB[15:0]
LOAD timer0,1 REGISTER TO CORE
TIME 0,1 INTERRUPT PULSE
KEY:
PROGRAM-ACCESSIBLE REGISTER
Figure 13. Timer Block Diagram
54
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.10 Timer Units (TIMER0_0--1 and TIMER1_0--1) (continued)
Table 20. timer0,1c (TIMER0,1 Control) Register
15--7 6 5 4 3--0
Reserved Bit 15--7 6 5 Field
PWR_DWN Value 0 0 1 0 1
RELOAD
COUNT Description
PRESCALE[3:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0 0
Reserved PWR_DWN RELOAD
4 3--0
COUNT PRESCALE[3:0]
0 1 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
Reserved--write with zero. Power up the timer. Power down the timer. Stop decrementing the down counter after it reaches zero. Automatically reload the down counter from the period register after the counter reaches zero and continue decrementing the counter indefinitely. Hold the down counter at its current value, i.e., stop the timer. Decrement the down counter, i.e., run the timer. fCLK/2 Controls the counter prescaler to determine the frequency of the timer, i.e., the frequency of the clock fCLK/4 applied to the timer down counter. This frequency is a fCLK/8 ratio of the internal clock frequency fCLK. fCLK/16 fCLK/32 fCLK/64 fCLK/128 fCLK/256 fCLK/512 fCLK/1024 fCLK/2048 fCLK/4096 fCLK/8192 fCLK/16384 fCLK/32768 fCLK/65536
R/W R/W
0 0000
If TIMER0,1 is powered down, timer0,1 cannot be read or written. While the timer is powered down, the state of the down counter and period register remain unchanged.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
55
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.10 Timer Units (TIMER0_0--1 and TIMER1_0--1) (continued)
Table 21. timer0,1 (TIMER0,1 Running Count) Register
15--0
TIMER0,1 Down Counter TIMER0,1 Period Register
Bit 15--0
Field
Down Counter
Description
R/W Reset Value
R/W 0
If the COUNT field (timer0,1c[4]) is set, TIMER0,1 decrements this portion of the timer0,1 register every prescale period. When the down counter reaches zero, TIMER0,1 generates an interrupt. both set and the down counter contains zero, TIMER0,1 reloads the down counter with the contents of this portion of the timer0,1 register.
15--0
Period Register If the COUNT field (timer0,1c[4]) and the RELOAD field (timer0,1c[5]) are
W
X
If the user program writes to the timer0,1 register, TIMER0,1 loads the 16-bit write value into the down counter and into the period register simultaneously. If the user program reads the timer0,1 register, TIMER0,1 returns the current 16-bit value from the down counter. To read or write the timer0,1 register, TIMER0,1 must be powered up, i.e., the PWR_DWN field (timer0,1c[6]) must be cleared. For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
4.11 Hardware Development System (HDS0--1)
The DSP16411 provides an on-chip hardware development module for each of the two cores (HDS0--1). Each HDS is available for debugging assemblylanguage programs that execute on the DSP16000 core at the core's rated speed. The main capability of the HDS is allowing controlled visibility into the core's state during program execution. The fundamental steps in debugging an application using the HDS include the following: 1. Setup: Download program code and data into the correct memory regions and set breakpointing conditions. 2. Run: Start execution or single step from a desired starting point (i.e., allow device to run under simulated or real-time conditions). 3. Break: Break program execution on satisfying breakpointing conditions; upload and allow user accessibility to internal state of the device and its pins. 4. Resume: Resume execution (normally or single step) after hitting a breakpoint and finally upload internal state at the end of execution. A powerful debugging capability of the HDS is the ability to break program execution on complex breakpointing conditions. A complex breakpoint condition, for example, can be an instruction that executes from a particular instruction-address location (or from a partic56
ular instruction-address range such as a subroutine) and accesses a coefficient/data element from a specific memory location (or from a memory region such as inside an array or outside an array). Complex conditions can also be chained to form more complex breakpoint conditions. For example, a complex breakpoint condition can be defined as the back-to-back execution of two different subroutines. The HDS also provides a debugging feature that allows a number of complex breakpoints to be ignored. The number of breakpoints ignored is programmable by the user. An intelligent trace mechanism for recording discontinuity points during program execution is also available in the HDS. This mechanism allows unambiguous reconstruction of program flow involving discontinuity points such as gotos, calls, returns, and interrupts. The trace mechanism compresses single-level (nonnested) loops and records them as a single discontinuity. This feature prevents single-level loops from filling up the trace buffers. Also, cache loops do not get registered as discontinuities in the trace buffers. Therefore, two-level loops with inner cache loops are registered as a single discontinuity. The HDS provides a 32-bit cycle counter for accurate code profiling during program development. The cycle counter records processor CLK cycles between a userdefined start point and end point. The cycle counter can optionally be used to break program execution after a user-specified number of clock cycles. Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
select, TMS0--1, test clock, TCK0--1, and test reset, TRST0--1N. The set of test registers includes the JTAG identification register (ID), the boundary-scan register, and the scannable peripheral registers. 4.12.1 Port Identification Each JTAG port has a read-only identification register, ID, as defined in Table 22. As specified in the table, the contents of the ID register for JTAG0 is 0x1C815321 and the contents of the ID register for JTAG1 is 0x0C815321.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.12 JTAG Test Port (JTAG0--1)
The DSP16411 provides an on-chip IEEE 1149.1 compliant JTAG port for each of the two cores (JTAG0--1). JTAG is an on-chip hardware module that controls the HDS. All communication between the HDS software, running on the host computer, and the on-chip HDS is in a bit-serial manner through the JTAG port. The JTAG port pins consist of test data input, TDI0--1, test data output, TDO0--1, test mode
Table 22. ID (JTAG Identification) Register
31--28 27--19 18--12 11--1 0
DEVICE OPTIONS Bit 31--28 27--19 18--12 11--1 0 Field DEVICE OPTIONS ROMCODE PART ID AGERE ID One
ROMCODE Value 0x1 0x0 0x190 0x15 0x190 1
PART ID Description JTAG0--device options. JTAG1--device options. ROMCODE of device. Part ID--DSP16411. Agere identification. Logic one.
AGERE ID R/W R
One
Reset Value 0x1 0x0 0x190 0x15 0x190 1
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
57
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4.12.2.1 TCS 14-Pin Header The TCS interface pod provides a 14-pin, dual-row (0.10 in. x 0.10 in.) socket (female) for connection to the user's target hardware. Figure 14 illustrates the pinout of this connector. Table 23 describes the signal names and their relationship to the DSP16411 signals.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.12 JTAG Test Port (JTAG0--1) (continued)
4.12.2 Emulation Interface Signals to the DSP16411 For in-circuit emulation and application software debugging, the Agere TargetViewTM Communication System (TCS) provides communication between a host PC and one or more DSP16411 devices. Users of the TCS hardware have the option of using one of three connectors to interface this tool with DSP16411 devices on the target application. The pinouts for these connectors are described in the following three sections.
PIN 1
PIN 13
PIN 2
PIN 14
5-7333 (F)
Figure 14. TCS 14-Pin Connector
Table 23. TCS 14-Pin Socket Pinout
TCS Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 TCS Signal Name TCK NC Ground Ground TMS VTARG NC NC TDO TDI Ground Ground NC NC Description Test clock No connect System ground System ground Test mode select Target I/O voltage No connect No connect Test data output Test data input System ground System ground No connect No connect TCS I/O O NA G G O I NA NA I O G G NA NA DSP16411 Pin Number F4 and L13 NA See Section 7 on page 253 See Section 7 on page 253 G2 and K15 See Section 7 on page 253 NA NA F1 or L16 (not both) G1 or K16 (not both) See Section 7 on page 253 See Section 7 on page 253 NA NA DSP16411 Signal Name TCK0 and TCK1 NA VSS VSS TMS0 and TMS1 VDD2 NA NA TDO0 or TDO1 (not both) TDI0 or TDI1 (not both) VSS VSS NA NA DSP16411 I/O I NA G G I P NA NA O I G G NA NA
58
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
connector. Table 24 describes the signal names and their relationship to the DSP16411 signals. This connector is also compatible with the Agere JTAG communications system (JCS) tools.
PIN 1 PIN 19
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.12 JTAG Test Port (JTAG0--1) (continued)
4.12.2 Emulation Interface Signals to the DSP16411 (continued) 4.12.2.2 JCS 20-Pin Header
PIN 2
PIN 20
5-7334 (F)
The TCS tools provide an interface adapter to convert the 14-pin interface pod to a 20-pin dual-row (0.05 in. x 0.10 in.) socket (female, 3M (R) part number 82020-6006) for connection to the user's target hardware. Figure 15 illustrates the pinout of this Table 24. JCS 20-Pin Socket Pinout
JCS Pin JCS Signal Description JCS I/O Number Name 1 NC No connect NA 2 Ground System ground G 3 NC No connect NA 4 NC No connect NA 5 NC No connect NA 6 TMS Test mode select O 7 Ground System ground G 8 VTARG Target I/O voltage I 9 NC No connect NA 10 Ground System ground G 11 NC No connect NA 12 TDI Test data input O 13 Ground System ground G 14 TCK Test clock O 15 Ground System ground G 16 TDO Test data output I 17 NC No connect NA 18 Ground System ground G 19 NC No connect NA 20 NC No connect NA
Figure 15. JCS 20-Pin Connector
DSP16411 DSP16411 DSP16411 I/O Pin Number Signal Name NA NA NA G See Section 7 on page 253 VSS NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA G2 and K15 TMS0 and TMS1 I See Section 7 on page 253 VSS G See Section 7 on page 253 VDD2 P NA NA NA See Section 7 on page 253 VSS G NA NA NA G1 or K16 (not both) TDI0 or TDI1 (not both) I See Section 7 on page 253 VSS G F4 and L13 TCK0 and TCK1 I See Section 7 on page 253 VSS G F1 or L16 (not both) TDO0 or TDO1 (not both) O NA NA NA See Section 7 on page 253 VSS G NA NA NA NA NA NA
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
59
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
their relationship to the DSP16411 signals. This connector is also compatible with the Agere JTAG communications system (JCS) and hardware development system (HDS) tools.
PIN 1 PIN 5
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.12 JTAG Test Port (JTAG0--1) (continued)
4.12.2 Emulation Interface Signals to the DSP16411 (continued) 4.12.2.3 HDS 9-Pin, D-Type Connector
PIN 6
PIN 9
5-7335 (F)
The TCS tools also provide an interface adapter to convert the 14-pin interface pod to a 9-pin, subminiature, D-type plug (male) for connection to the user's target hardware. Figure 16 illustrates the pinout of this connector. Table 25 describes the signal names and Table 25. HDS 9-Pin, Subminiature, D-Type Plug Pinout
HDS Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 HDS Signal Name Ground TCK NC TMS Ground TDO TDI VTARG NC Description System ground Test clock No connect Test mode select System ground Test data output Test data input Target I/O voltage No connect HDS I/O G O NA O G I O I NA
Figure 16. HDS 9-Pin Connector
DSP16411 Pin Number See Section 7 on page 253 F4 and L13 NA G2 and K15 See Section 7 on page 253 F1 or L16 (not both) G1 or K16 (not both) See Section 7 on page 253 NA
DSP16411 Signal Name VSS TCK0 and TCK1 NA TMS0 and TMS1 VSS TDO0 or TDO1 (not both) TDI0 or TDI1 (not both) VDD2 NA
DSP16411 I/O G I NA I G O I P NA
60
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
first JTAG port in the chain is then connected to TDI of the TCS connector on the user's board, TDO of the first JTAG port is connected to TDI of the next JTAG port in the chain, and so on. TDO of the last JTAG port in the chain is then tied to TDO of the TCS connector. If more than six JTAG ports are in the same scan chain, TMS and TCK must be buffered to ensure compatibility with t155 and t156 (see Table 195 on page 282). In the typical application, the user's board ties the DSP16411 JTAG reset signals, TRST0N and TRST1N, to the device reset, RSTN. Figure 17 illustrates a typical daisy-chain connection between the TCS hardware and the two cores of a single DSP16411.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.12 JTAG Test Port (JTAG0--1) (continued)
4.12.3 Multiprocessor JTAG Connections The DSP16411 has two JTAG ports, one for each DSP16000 core. The user can daisy chain these ports onto the same scan chain, potentially with other DSP16411 devices, or interface to each JTAG port individually for debugging. If multiple JTAG ports are interfaced together on the same scan chain, TMS and TCK are broadcast to all DSPs in the scan chain. TDI of the
RESET
RSTN TRST1N
DSP16411
TRST0N
CORE0
CORE1
TCK0
TMS0
TDI0
TDO0
TCK1
TMS1
TDI1
TDO1
TCK
TMS
TDI JCS/TCS
TDO
Note: CORE0 is DSP1 on the scan chain and CORE1 is DSP2 on the scan chain. For multiple DSP16411 devices on a single scan chain, maintain the CORE0-to-CORE1 daisy-chain.
Figure 17. Typical Multiprocessor JTAG Connection with Single Scan Chain
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
61
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.12 JTAG Test Port (JTAG0--1) (continued)
4.12.4 Boundary Scan JTAG0 contains a full boundary-scan register as described in Table 26 and JTAG1 contains a single-bit boundaryscan register as described in Table 27 on page 63. As described in Section 4.12.3 on page 61, JTAG0 and JTAG1 of multiple DSP16411 devices can be chained together with full boundary-scan capabilities. Table 26. JTAG0 Boundary-Scan Register
Cell 0 1 2 3 4 20--5 21 37--22 38 39 41--40 42 43 44 45 64--46 65 69--66 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 Type I I I I I I/O DC I/O DC O O O O O OE O OE O OE OE O OE O I I DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC Signal Name/ Function ERTYPE EXM ESIZE EREQN ERDY ED[15:0] ED[15:0] direction control ED[31:16] ED[31:16] direction control EACKN ERWN[1:0] EROMN ERAMN EION EION, ERAMN, EROMN, ERWN[1:0] 3-state control EA[18:0] EA[18:0] 3-state control ESEG[3:0] ESEG[3:0] 3-state control ECKO and EACKN 3-state control ECKO SOD1 3-state control SOD1 SID1 SCK1 SOFS1 direction control SOFS1 SOCK1 direction control SOCK1 SIFS1 direction control SIFS1 SICK1 direction control SICK1 IO1BIT[0] direction control Control Cell -- -- -- -- -- 21 -- 38 -- 65 45 45 45 45 -- 65 -- 70 -- -- 71 -- 73 -- -- -- 77 -- 79 -- 81 -- 83 -- Cell 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 104--101 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 130--115 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 Type DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O I I I I I I O O O O OE I/O DC I DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O Signal Name/ Function IO1BIT[1] direction control IO1BIT[1] IO1BIT[2] direction control IO1BIT[2] IO1BIT[3] direction control IO1BIT[3] IO1BIT[4] direction control IO1BIT[4] IO1BIT[5] direction control IO1BIT[5] IO1BIT[6] direction control IO1BIT[6] IO1BIT[7] direction control IO1BIT[7] PADD[3:0] PCSN PRWN PIDS PODS PRDYMD PINT PRDY PIBF POBE PINT, PRDY, PIBF, POBE 3-state control PD[15:0] PD[15:0] direction control EYMODE IO0BIT[0] direction control IO0BIT[0] IO0BIT[1] direction control IO0BIT[1] IO0BIT[2] direction control IO0BIT[2] Control Cell -- 87 -- 89 -- 91 -- 93 -- 95 -- 97 -- 99 -- -- -- -- -- -- 114 114 114 114 -- 131 -- -- -- 132 -- 134 -- 136
Key to this column: I = input; OE = 3-state control cell; O = output; DC = bidirectional control cell; I/O = input/output. There is no pin associated with this signal. This is a pad only and is not connected in the package.
62
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.12 JTAG Test Port (JTAG0--1) (continued)
4.12.4 Boundary Scan (continued) Table 26. JTAG0 Boundary-Scan Register (continued)
Cell 86 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 Type I/O I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O OE O I I Signal Name/ Function IO1BIT[0] IO0BIT[3] IO0BIT[4] direction control IO0BIT[4] IO0BIT[5] direction control IO0BIT[5] IO0BIT[6] direction control IO0BIT[6] IO0BIT[7] direction control IO0BIT[7] SOD0 3-state control SOD0 SID0 SCK0 Control Cell 85 138 -- 140 -- 142 -- 144 -- 146 -- 148 -- -- Cell 139 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 164--161 165 166 167 168 Type DC DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O DC I/O I DC I/O I I Signal Name/ Function IO0BIT[3] direction control SOFS0 direction control SOFS0 SOCK0 direction control SOCK0 SIFS0 direction control SIFS0 SICK0 direction control SICK0 INT[3:0] TRAP direction control TRAP RSTN CKI Control Cell -- -- 152 -- 154 -- 156 -- 158 -- -- 164 -- --
Key to this column: I = input; OE = 3-state control cell; O = output; DC = bidirectional control cell; I/O = input/output. There is no pin associated with this signal. This is a pad only and is not connected in the package.
Table 27. JTAG1 Boundary-Scan Register
Cell 0 Function Internal Cell Control Cell --
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
63
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
Figure 18 on page 65 is a functional overview of the DMAU channels and their interconnections to the peripherals and memory buses. The DMAU arbitrates among the seven channels for access to the memory. For an SWT channel, a core can define a data structure (array) in DSP16411 memory by programming DMAU memory-mapped registers. The DMAU can then perform source or destination transfers. A source transfer is defined as a series of read operations from the memory array to an SIU. A destination transfer is defined as a series of write operations to the memory array from an SIU. A transfer consists of a series of transactions in response to SIU requests. A source transaction is defined as reading a word (16 bits) from the array, writing the word to the SIU output data register (SODR), and updating the appropriate DMAU registers. A destination transaction is defined as reading a word from the SIU input data register (SIDR), writing the word to the array, and updating the appropriate DMAU registers. See Section 4.13.5, beginning on page 87, for details on SWT transactions. The DMAU also provides two channels for memory-tomemory transfers (MMT). These channels allow a user-defined block of data to be transferred between any two DSP16411 memory blocks, including external memory. Each MMT channel transfers data between a source block and a destination block. The DMAU can perform a block transfer either a single word (16 bits) at a time or a double word (32 bits) at a time. See Section 4.13.6, beginning on page 90, for details on memory-to-memory block transfers. Finally, the DMAU provides an addressing bypass channel that is dedicated to the PIU. This channel bypasses the DMAU address generation, compare, and update processes. The DMAU relies on the PIU to provide the memory address for each PIU transaction (data transfer between a host and the DSP16411). The addressing bypass channel provides a host with fast access to any DSP16411 memory space. See Section 4.13.4 on page 86 for more details.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU)
The DMAU (direct memory access unit) manages movement of data to or from the DSP16411 internal or external memory with minimal core intervention:
!
The DMAU can move data between memory and the I/O units: -- The DMAU provides four single-word transfer (SWT) channels for moving data between memory and SIU0--1. A core initially defines the data structure and the DMAU provides address generation, compare, and update functions. Twodimensional array capability facilitates applications such as TDM channel multiplexing/demultiplexing. Each SWT channel allows an SIU to access memory one word (16 bits) at a time. -- The DMAU provides a single addressing bypass channel for moving data between memory and the PIU. Unlike the SWT channels, the bypass channel does not provide address generation, compare, and update functions. The bypass channel allows a host to address and access memory one word (16 bits) at a time. The DMAU can move data between two blocks of memory. It provides two memory-to-memory (MMT) channels for which a core initially defines the data structure. The DMAU provides address generation, compare, and update functions for each channel. The DMAU can perform a block transfer either a single word (16 bits) at a time or a double word (32 bits) at a time.
!
4.13.1 Overview The DMAU has six independent channels and an addressing bypass channel as detailed in Table 28. These channels can access any DSP16411 memory component, including TPRAM0, TPRAM1, and external memory. Table 28. DMAU Channel Assignment
DMAU Channel SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 Bypass
Description Single-word (16-bit) transfers Single-word (16-bit) transfers Single-word (16-bit) transfers Single-word (16-bit) transfers Single-word (16-bit) or double-word (32-bit) transfers Single-word (16-bit) or double-word (32-bit) transfers Single-word (16-bit) transfers
Associated With SIU0 SIU1 Memory PIU
64
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.1 Overview (continued)
DMAU Channels
DESTINATION DATA 16 SIU0 SOURCE DATA 16 DESTINATION DATA 16 SIU1 SOURCE DATA 16 SWT2 CHANNEL SWT3 CHANNEL ZIDB SWT0 CHANNEL SWT1 CHANNEL
DMAU
TPRAM0
32 TPRAM1
DATA PIU 16
BYPASS CHANNEL
Z-BUS ARBITER DESTINATION DATA 16/32
MMT4 CHANNEL
SOURCE DATA 16/32 DESTINATION DATA 16/32 ZEDB 32 SEMI
MMT5 CHANNEL
SOURCE DATA 16/32
Figure 18. DMAU Interconnections and Channels Figure 19 is a block diagram of the DMAU. The DMAU includes 55 memory-mapped registers that it uses in processing source transfers, destination transfers, and memory-to-memory block transfers. These registers are configured by programs running in the cores that access the registers. The registers control the DMAU and contain its current status. See Section 4.13.2, beginning on page 67, for details on these registers. Although the DMAU registers are memory-mapped, they are physically located in the DMAU and are accessible by either core via the SEMI and the SDB (system data bus).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
65
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.1 Overview (continued)
DMAU Block Diagram
SEMI SAB SDB
SEMI ZSEG ZEAB ZEDB
TPRAM0,1 ZIAB ZIDB
8 CONTROL REGISTERS CTL0--5 DMCON0--1 16 bits 20 32 1 STATUS REGISTER DSTAT 32 bits 4 STRIDE REGISTERS STR0--3 16 bits 4 REINDEX REGISTERS RI0--3 20 bits 8 BASE REGISTERS SBAS0--3 DBAS0--3 20 bits 6 LIMIT REGISTERS LIM0--5 20 bits 12 COUNTER REGISTERS SCNT0--5 DCNT0--5 20 bits 12 ADDRESS REGISTERS SADD0--5 DADD0--5 32 bits 20 27 10 20 20 ADDRESS COMPARE & UPDATE Z-BUS ARBITER MMT SOURCE LOOK-AHEAD BUFFER (6 x 32 FIFO) 4 20 20 32 32
DMAU
16 16
14
DSI0 DDO SICIX0 SIU0
20 16 16
SOCIX0 DSI1 DDO SIU1 SICIX1 SOCIX1
20 20 REQUEST 32 16 PIU ADDRESSING BYPASS CHANNEL 27 PAB DDO DPI PIU
DSINT[3:0], DDINT[3:0], DMINT[5:4] (TO CORES)
Figure 19. DMAU Block Diagram
66
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers Table 29 lists the DMAU memory-mapped registers in functional order, not in address order. Section 6.2.2 on page 231 describes addressing of memory-mapped registers. The DMAU contains a status register and two master control registers for all SWT and MMT channels: DMCON0, DMCON1, and DSTAT. Every DMAU channel has a corresponding control register CTL0--5, source and destination address register (SADD0--5 and DADD0--5), source and destination counter register (SCNT0--5 and DCNT0--5), and limit register (LIM0--5). In addition, each SWT channel has a corresponding source and destination base address register (SBAS0--3 and DBAS0--3), reindex register (RI0--3), and stride register (STR0--3). Table 29. DMAU Memory-Mapped Registers
Type DMAU Status DMAU Master Control 0 DMAU Master Control 1 Channel Control Register Name DSTAT DMCON0 DMCON1 CTL0 CTL1 CTL2 CTL3 CTL4 CTL5 SADD0 DADD0 SADD1 DADD1 SADD2 DADD2 SADD3 DADD3 SADD4 DADD4 SADD5 DADD5 SCNT0 DCNT0 SCNT1 DCNT1 SCNT2 DCNT2 SCNT3 DCNT3 SCNT4 DCNT4 SCNT5 DCNT5 Channel All All All SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 Address 0x4206C 0x4205C 0x4205E 0x42060 0x42062 0x42064 0x42066 0x42068 0x4206A 0x42000 0x42002 0x42004 0x42006 0x42008 0x4200A 0x4200C 0x4200E 0x42010 0x42012 0x42014 0x42016 0x42020 0x42022 0x42024 0x42026 0x42028 0x4202A 0x4202C 0x4202E 0x42030 0x42032 0x42034 0x42036 Size (Bits) 32 16 16 R/W R R/W R/W Type status control control Signed/ Unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned Reset Value X 0 X
Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count
32
R/W
address
unsigned
X
20
R/W
data
unsigned
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. Any reserved fields within the register are reset to zero. The reindex registers are in sign-magnitude format.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
67
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 29. DMAU Memory-Mapped Registers (continued)
Type Limit Register Name LIM0 LIM1 LIM2 LIM3 LIM4 LIM5 SBAS0 DBAS0 SBAS1 DBAS1 SBAS2 DBAS2 SBAS3 DBAS3 STR0 STR1 STR2 STR3 RI0 RI1 RI2 RI3 Channel SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 Address 0x42050 0x42052 0x42054 0x42056 0x42058 0x4205A 0x42040 0x42042 0x42044 0x42046 0x42048 0x4204A 0x4204C 0x4204E 0x42018 0x4201A 0x4201C 0x4201E 0x42038 0x4203A 0x4203C 0x4203E Size (Bits) 20 R/W R/W Type data Signed/ Unsigned unsigned Reset Value X
Source Base Destination Base Source Base Destination Base Source Base Destination Base Source Base Destination Base Stride
20
R/W
address
unsigned
X
16
R/W
data
unsigned
X
Reindex
20
R/W
data
signed
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. Any reserved fields within the register are reset to zero. The reindex registers are in sign-magnitude format.
Note: The remainder of Section 4.13.2 describes the detailed encoding for each register.
68
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) The DMAU status register (DSTAT) reports current DMAU channel activity for both source and destination operations and reports channel errors. This register can be read by the user software executing in either core to determine if a specific DMAU channel is already in use, or if an error has occurred that may result in data corruption. The ERR[5:0] fields of the DSTAT register reflect DMAU protocol errors. See Section 4.13.8 on page 94 for information on error reporting and recovery. Table 30. DSTAT (DMAU Status) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4206C.
31 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 ERR2 25 9 24 8 23 7 22 6 21 5 20 4 19 3 18 2 17 1 16 0 ERR0 RBSY5 RBSY4 SBSY5 DBSY5 SRDY5 DRDY5 ERR5 SBSY4 DBSY4 SRDY4 DRDY4 ERR4 SBSY3 DBSY3 SRDY3 DRDY3 ERR3 SBSY2 DBSY2 SRDY2 DRDY2 SBSY1 DBSY1 SRDY1 DRDY1 ERR1 SBSY0 DBSY0 SRDY0 DRDY0
Bits 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Field RBSY5 RBSY4 SBSY5 DBSY5 SRDY5 DRDY5 ERR5
Value 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Description
R/W
24 23 22 21 20
SBSY4 DBSY4 SRDY4 DRDY4 ERR4
19 18
SBSY3 DBSY3
MMT5 is busy completing a reset operation. R MMT5 is not completing a reset operation. MMT4 is busy completing a reset operation. R MMT4 is not completing a reset operation. MMT5 is reading memory. R MMT5 is not reading memory. MMT5 is writing memory. R MMT5 is not writing memory. MMT5 has a source transaction pending. R MMT5 does not have a source transaction pending. MMT5 has a destination transaction pending. R MMT5 does not have a destination transaction pending. MMT5 has detected a protocol error (source or destination). Error report is cleared by R/Clear writing a 1 to this bit. MMT5--no errors. MMT4 is reading memory. R MMT4 is not reading memory. MMT4 is writing memory. R MMT4 is not writing memory. MMT4 has a source transaction pending. R MMT4 does not have a source transaction pending. MMT4 has a destination transaction pending. R MMT4 does not have a destination transaction pending. MMT4 has detected a protocol error (source or destination). Error report is cleared by R/Clear writing a 1 to this bit. MMT4--no errors. SWT3 is reading memory. R SWT3 is not reading memory. SWT3 is writing memory. R SWT3 is not writing memory.
Reset Value X X X X X X X
X X X X X
X X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. A core resets MMT5 by setting the RESET5 field (DMCON1[5]--Table 32 on page 72) and resets MMT4 by setting the RESET4 field (DMCON1[4]).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
69
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 30. DSTAT (DMAU Status) Register (continued)
Bits 17 16 15 Field SRDY3 DRDY3 ERR3 Value 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Description SWT3 has a source transaction pending. SWT3 does not have a source transaction pending. SWT3 has a destination transaction pending. SWT3 does not have a destination transaction pending. SWT3 has detected a protocol error (source or destination). Error report is cleared by writing a 1 to this bit. SWT3--no errors. SWT2 is reading memory. SWT2 is not reading memory. SWT2 is writing memory. SWT2 is not writing memory. SWT2 has a source transaction pending. SWT2 does not have a source transaction pending. SWT2 has a destination transaction pending. SWT2 does not have a destination transaction pending. SWT2 has detected a protocol error (source or destination). Error report is cleared by writing a 1 to this bit. SWT2--no errors. SWT1 is reading memory. SWT1 is not reading memory. SWT1 is writing memory. SWT1 is not writing memory. SWT1 has a source transaction pending. SWT1 does not have a source transaction pending. SWT1 has a destination transaction pending. SWT1 does not have a destination transaction pending. SWT1 has detected a protocol error (source or destination). Error report is cleared by writing a 1 to this bit. SWT1--no errors. SWT0 is reading memory. SWT0 is not reading memory. SWT0 is writing memory. SWT0 is not writing memory. SWT0 has a source transaction pending. SWT0 does not have a source transaction pending. SWT0 has a destination transaction pending. SWT0 does not have a destination transaction pending. SWT0 has detected a protocol error (source or destination). Error report is cleared by writing a 1 to this bit. SWT0--no errors. R/W R R R/Clear Reset Value X X X
14 13 12 11 10
SBSY2 DBSY2 SRDY2 DRDY2 ERR2
R R R R R/Clear
X X X X X
9 8 7 6 5
SBSY1 DBSY1 SRDY1 DRDY1 ERR1
R R R R R/Clear
X X X X X
4 3 2 1 0
SBSY0 DBSY0 SRDY0 DRDY0 ERR0
R R R R R/Clear
X X X X X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. A core resets MMT5 by setting the RESET5 field (DMCON1[5]--Table 32 on page 72) and resets MMT4 by setting the RESET4 field (DMCON1[4]).
70
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) The DMAU master control registers, DMCON0 and DMCON1, control the reset, enable, or disable of individual DMAU channels. DMCON0 also controls the enabling of the source look-ahead buffer for pipelined MMT reads of a source block. Table 31. DMCON0 (DMAU Master Control 0) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4205C.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7--4 3--0
HPRIM Bits 15
MINT Field HPRIM
XSIZE5 Value 0 1
XSIZE4
TRIGGER5
TRIGGER4 Definition
SLKA5
SLKA4
DRUN[3:0]
SRUN[3:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0
14
MINT
0
1
13 12 11
XSIZE5 XSIZE4 TRIGGER5
0 1 0 1 0
10
TRIGGER4
1 0
9
SLKA5
1 0 1
8
SLKA4
0 1
If MMT channel interruption is enabled (if MINT is set), this bit indicates MMT4 is the higher-priority channel. If MMT channel interruption is enabled (if MINT is set), this bit indicates MMT5 is the higher-priority channel. If the DMAU has begun processing an MMT channel, it transfers all the data for that MMT channel without interruption by the other MMT channel. Any SWT or PIU bypass channel requests interrupt the active MMT channel. The higher-priority MMT channel indicated by HPRIM can preempt the lower-priority MMT channel. If the DMAU has begun processing the higher-priority MMT channel, it transfers all the data for that MMT channel without interruption by the lower-priority MMT channel. Any SWT or PIU bypass channel requests interrupt the active MMT channel. MMT5 transfers single words (16-bit values). MMT5 transfers aligned double words (32-bit values). MMT4 transfers single words (16-bit values). MMT4 transfers aligned double words (32-bit values). If the DMAU begins a block transfer using MMT5, it automatically clears this bit. If a core writes a 0 to this bit position, it has no effect and does not change the DMAU activity. The cores can cause the DMAU to terminate channel activity by setting the RESET5 field (DMCON1[5]--Table 32 on page 72). Set by core software to request the DMAU to begin a block transfer using MMT5. If the DMAU begins a block transfer using MMT4, it automatically clears this bit. If a core writes a 0 to this bit position, it has no effect and does not change the DMAU activity. The cores can cause the DMAU to terminate channel activity by setting the RESET4 field (DMCON1[4]--Table 32 on page 72). Set by core software to request the DMAU to begin a block transfer using MMT4. Force source and destination accesses for MMT5 to occur in order (source lookahead disabled). Permit source reads for MMT5 to be launched before older destination writes (source look-ahead enabled). This maximizes block transfer throughput. Force source and destination accesses for MMT4 to occur in order (source lookahead disabled). Permit source reads for MMT4 to be launched before older destination writes (source look-ahead enabled). This maximizes block transfer throughput.
R/W
0
R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
The corresponding source and destination addresses must be even. Each bit of DRUN[3:0] corresponds to one of the SWT0--3 channels. For example, DRUN3 corresponds to SWT3. Each bit of SRUN[3:0] corresponds to one of the SWT0--3 channels. For example, SRUN2 corresponds to SWT2.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
71
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 31. DMCON0 (DMAU Master Control 0) Register (continued)
Bits 7--4 Field DRUN[3:0] Value 0 R/W Reset Value The DMAU clears this field if it has completed a destination transfer and the corre- R/ 0 sponding AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]--Table 34 on page 74) is cleared. If a Set core writes a 0 to this bit position, it has no effect and does not change the DMAU activity. The cores can cause the DMAU to terminate channel activity by setting the corresponding RESET[3:0] field (DMCON1[3:0]--Table 32 on page 72). The software running in a core sets this field to cause the DMAU to initiate a new destination transfer for the corresponding SWT channel. The DMAU clears this field if it has completed a source transfer and the correR/ 0 sponding AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]--Table 34 on page 74) is cleared. If a Set core writes a 0 to this bit position, it has no effect and does not change the DMAU activity. The cores can cause the DMAU to terminate channel activity by setting the corresponding RESET[3:0] field (DMCON1[3:0]--Table 32 on page 72). The software running in a core sets this field to cause the DMAU to initiate a new source transfer for the corresponding SWT channel. Definition
1 3--0 SRUN[3:0] 0
1
The corresponding source and destination addresses must be even. Each bit of DRUN[3:0] corresponds to one of the SWT0--3 channels. For example, DRUN3 corresponds to SWT3. Each bit of SRUN[3:0] corresponds to one of the SWT0--3 channels. For example, SRUN2 corresponds to SWT2.
Table 32. DMCON1 (DMAU Master Control 1) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4205E.
15--7 6 5--4 3--0
Reserved Bits 15--7 6 5--4 Field Reserved PIUDIS RESET[5:4] Value 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
PIUDIS Definition
RESET[5:4]
RESET[3:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0 0
3--0
RESET[3:0]
Reserved--write with zero. The DMAU processes PIU requests. The DMAU ignores PIU requests. The corresponding MMT channel is unaffected. The software running in a core sets this field to cause the DMAU to unconditionally terminate all channel activity for the corresponding MMT channel. The corresponding SWT channel is unaffected. The software running in a core sets this field to cause the DMAU to unconditionally terminate all channel activity for the corresponding SWT channel.
R/W
0
RESET5 corresponds to MMT5 and RESET4 corresponds to MMT4. Setting RESET[5:4] does not affect the state of any DMAU registers. RESET[5:4] is typically used for error recovery--see Section 4.13.8 on page 94 for details. Each bit of RESET[3:0] corresponds to one of the SWT0--3 channels. For example, RESET3 corresponds to SWT3. Setting a RESET[3:0] field does not affect the state of any DMAU registers, including the state of the SRUN[3:0]/DRUN[3:0] fields (DMCON0[7:0]--Table 31). RESET[3:0] is typically used for error recovery--see Section 4.13.8 on page 94 for details.
72
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
tents of the base register after an entire array has been processed. 3. The point in the operation when a DMAU interrupt request is generated. The control register for a specific SWT channel determines these attributes for both the source and destination transfers for that channel. Therefore, if the SWT channel is used for bidirectional transfers, the source and destination data must have the same array size and structure. As a result, each SWT channel has only one stride (STR0--3) and one reindex (RI0--3) register. Therefore, references to fields in Table 34 are common to both SWT source and destination transfers and are given as common references. Table 33 maps the common references used in Table 34 to their specific attribute.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 34 on page 74 describes the SWT0--3 control registers, CTL0--3. Each of the CTL0--3 registers controls the behavior of the corresponding SWT channel and determines the following: 1. Whether the access takes place in row-major (twodimensional array) or column-major (one-dimensional array) order. 2. Whether the autoload feature is enabled or disabled. If enabled, this feature causes the DMAU to automatically reload the address registers with the conTable 33. Collective Designations Used in Table 34
Collective Designation RUN ADD ROW COL LASTROW LASTCOL BAS STR RI Description Source Channel Enable for SWT3--0 Destination Channel Enable for SWT3--0 Source Address Destination Address Source Row Counter Destination Row Counter Source Column Counter Destination Column Counter Row Limit Column Limit Source Base Register Destination Base Register Stride Register Reindex Register
Register or Register Field SRUN[3:0] (DMCON0[3:0]) DRUN[3:0] (DMCON0[7:4]) SADD0--3 DADD0--3 SROW[12:0] (SCNT0--3[19:7]) DROW[12:0] (DCNT0--3[19:7]) SCOL[6:0] (SCNT0--3[6:0]) DCOL[6:0] (DCNT0--3[6:0]) LASTROW[12:0] (LIM0--3[19:7]) LASTCOL[6:0] (LIM0--3[6:0]) SBAS0--3 DBAS0--3 STR0--3 RI0--3
See Table 31 on page 71 Table 37 on page 77 Table 38 on page 78 Table 40 on page 79 Table 38 on page 78 Table 40 on page 79 Table 42 on page 80 Table 44 on page 81 Table 45 on page 81 Table 46 on page 82 Table 47 on page 82
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
73
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 34. CTL0--3 (SWT0--3 Control) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
15--6 5--4 3--1 0
Reserved Bit 15--6 5--4 Field Reserved POSTMOD[1:0] Value 0 00 01
POSTMOD[1:0] Definition
SIGCON[2:0]
AUTOLOAD R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 XX
Reserved--write with zero. The DMAU performs no pointer or counter update operations. Select two-dimensional array accesses. After every transaction:
!
If the column counter has not expired, the DMAU increments it by one and increments the address by the contents of the stride register. (If COLLASTCOL, then COL=COL+1 and ADD=ADD+STR.) If the row counter has not expired and the column counter has expired, the DMAU increments the row counter by one, clears the column counter, and increments the address by the contents of the sign-magnitude reindex register. (If ROW LASTROW and COL= LASTCOL, then ROW=ROW+1, COL=0, and ADD=ADD+RI.) If both the row counter and the column counter have expired and the AUTOLOAD field is set, the DMAU clears the row and column counters and reloads the address with the base value. (If ROW= LASTROW and COL= LASTCOL and AUTOLOAD=1, then ROW=0, COL=0, and ADD=BAS.)
!
!
10
If both the row counter and the column counter have expired and the AUTOLOAD field is cleared, the DMAU deactivates the channel. (If ROW= LASTROW and COL= LASTCOL and AUTOLOAD=0, then RUN=0.) Select one-dimensional array accesses. After every transaction:
! !
If the row counter has not expired, the DMAU increments the counter and the address. (If ROWLASTROW, then ROW=ROW+1 and ADD=ADD+1.) If the row counter has expired and the column counter has not expired, the DMAU clears the row counter and increments the column counter and the address. (If ROW= LASTROW and COLLASTCOL, then ROW=0, COL=COL+1, and ADD=ADD+1.) If both the row counter and the column counter have expired and the AUTOLOAD field is set, the DMAU clears the row and column counters and reloads the address with the base value. (If ROW= LASTROW and COL= LASTCOL and AUTOLOAD=1, then ROW=0, COL=0, and ADD=BAS.)
!
!
!
11
If both the row counter and the column counter have expired and the AUTOLOAD field is cleared, the DMAU clears the row and column counters, reloads the address with the base value, and deactivates the channel. (If ROW= LASTROW and COL= LASTCOL and AUTOLOAD=0, then ROW=0, COL=0, ADD=BAS, and RUN=0.) Reserved.
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. The DMAU hardware performs the division as a one-bit right shift. Therefore, the least significant bit is truncated for odd values of LASTROW or LASTCOL.
74
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 34. CTL0--3 (SWT0--3 Control) Registers (continued)
Bit 3--1 Field SIGCON[2:0] Value 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 0 Definition The DMAU generates an interrupt request after each single word has been transferred. The DMAU generates an interrupt request following completion of a transfer with ROW equal to LASTROW/2. The DMAU generates an interrupt request following completion of a transfer with COL equal to LASTCOL. The DMAU generates an interrupt request following completion of a transfer with COL equal to LASTCOL and ROW equal to LASTROW/2. The DMAU generates an interrupt request following completion of a transfer with ROW equal to LASTROW. The DMAU generates an interrupt request following completion of a transfer with COL equal to LASTCOL and ROW equal to LASTROW. The DMAU generates an interrupt request following completion of a transfer with COL equal to LASTCOL/2 and ROW equal to LASTROW. Reserved. After the DMAU transfers an entire array, it deactivates the channel. (If ROW= LASTROW and COL= LASTCOL, then RUN=0.) The software can reactivate the channel by setting the RUN field. After the DMAU transfers an entire array, it reloads the channel's counter and address registers with their base values and initiates another array transfer without core intervention. (If ROW= LASTROW and COL= LASTCOL, then ROW=0, COL=0, and ADD=BAS.) R/W R/W Reset Value XXX
0
AUTOLOAD
R/W
X
1
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. The DMAU hardware performs the division as a one-bit right shift. Therefore, the least significant bit is truncated for odd values of LASTROW or LASTCOL.
MMT block transfers are unidirectional only, but are listed as common references for consistency with the SWT channels. Each of the CTL4--5 registers described in Table 36 on page 76 controls the behavior of the corresponding MMT channel. The control register of a specific MMT channel determines the point in the block transfer when a DMAU interrupt request is generated. Table 35 on page 76 maps the common references used in Table 36 on page 76 to their specific attribute.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
75
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 35. Collective Designations Used in Table 36
Collective Designation XSIZE Description Transfer Size for MMT4 Transfer Size for MMT5 ADD ROW LASTROW Source Address Destination Address Source Row Counter Destination Row Counter Row Limit Register or Register Field XSIZE4 (DMCON0[12]) (0 for 16 bits or 1 for 32 bits) XSIZE5 (DMCON0[13]) (0 for 16 bits or 1 for 32 bits) SADD4--5 DADD4--5 SROW[12:0] (SCNT4--5[19:7]) DROW[12:0] (DCNT4--5[19:7]) LASTROW[12:0] (LIM4--5[19:7]) See Table 31 on page 71
Table 37 on page 77 Table 39 on page 78 Table 41 on page 79 Table 43 on page 80
Table 36. CTL4--5 (MMT4--5 Control) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
15--6 5--4 3--1 0
Reserved Bit 15--6 5--4 Field Reserved POSTMOD[1:0] Value 0 00 01 10
POSTMOD[1:0] Definition
SIGCON[2:0]
Reserved R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 XX
Reserved--write with zero. The DMAU performs no pointer or counter update operations. Reserved. After every transaction:
!
If the row counter has not expired, the DMAU increments it and increments the address by the element size. (If ROWLASTROW, then ROW=ROW+1 and ADD=ADD+1+XSIZE.)
3--1
SIGCON[2:0]
0
Reserved
If the row counter has expired, the DMAU clears the row counter, increments the address by the element size, and deactivates the channel. (If ROW= LASTROW, then ROW=0 and ADD=ADD+1+XSIZE.) 11 Reserved. 000 The DMAU generates an interrupt request after each element has been transferred. 001 The channel generates an interrupt request following completion of a transfer with ROW equal to LASTROW/2. 01X Reserved. 100 The channel generates an interrupt request following completion of a transfer with ROW equal to LASTROW. 101 Reserved. 11X Reserved. 0 Reserved--write with zero.
!
R/W
XXX
R/W
0
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. The element size is 1 for single-word transactions (XSIZE = 0) or 2 for double-word transactions (XSIZE = 1).
76
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 37. SADD0--5 and DADD0--5 (Channels 0--5 Source and Destination Address) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
31--27 26--23 22--20 19--0
Reserved Bit 31--27 26--23 Field Reserved ESEG[3:0]
ESEG[3:0] Value 0 0x0 to 0xF 000 001 01X 100 101 11X 0x00000 to 0xFFFFF
CMP[2:0] Description
ADD[19:0] R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 X
22--20
CMP[2:0]
19--0
ADD[19:0]
Reserved--write with zero. External memory address extension. If the DMAU accesses external memory (CMP[2:0] = 100), it causes the SEMI to place the value in this field onto the ESEG[3:0] pins. The selected memory component is TPRAM0. The selected memory component is TPRAM1. Reserved. The selected memory component is ERAM, EIO, or internal I/O. Reserved. Reserved. The address within the selected memory component. For an MMT4--5 channel, if the corresponding XSIZE[5:4] field (DMCON0[13:12]--see Table 31 on page 71) is set, this value must be even.
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
XXX
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. If the WEROM field (ECON1[11]--Table 61 on page 112) is set, EROM is selected in place of ERAM.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
77
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 38. SCNT0--3 (SWT0--3 Source Counter) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19--7 6--0
SROW[12:0] Bit 19--7 Field SROW[12:0] Description
SCOL[6:0] R/W R/W Reset Value X
6--0
SCOL[6:0]
The row counter of the one-dimensional or two-dimensional source array for the corresponding SWT channel (read data). The DMAU updates this field as the transfer proceeds and automatically clears it upon the completion of the transfer. The column counter of the one-dimensional or two-dimensional source array for the corresponding SWT channel (read data). The DMAU updates this field as the transfer proceeds and automatically clears it upon the completion of the transfer.
R/W
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. SCNT0--3 are not cleared by a reset of the DMAU channel via the DMCON1 register (Table 32 on page 72). Before an SWT channel can be used, the program must clear the corresponding SCNT0--3 register after a DSP16411 device reset. Otherwise, the value of this register is undefined.
Table 39. SCNT4--5 (MMT4--5 Source Counter) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19--7 6--0
SROW[12:0] Bit 19--7 Field SROW[12:0] Description
SCOL[6:0] R/W R/W Reset Value X
6--0
SCOL[6:0]
The row counter of the source block for the corresponding MMT channel (read data). The DMAU increments this field as the transfer proceeds and automatically clears it upon the completion of the transfer. The column counter of the source block for the corresponding MMT channel (read data). Typically, the user has programmed the LASTCOL[6:0] field (LIM4--5[6:0]--Table 43 on page 80) with zero, and therefore, the DMAU does not update this field.
R/W
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. SCNT4--5 are not cleared by a reset of the DMAU channel via the DMCON1 register (Table 32 on page 72). Before an MMT channel can be used, the program must clear the corresponding SCNT4--5 register after a DSP16411 device reset. Otherwise, the value of this register is undefined.
78
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 40. DCNT0--3 (SWT0--3 Destination Counter) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19--7 6--0
DROW[12:0] Bit 19--7 Field DROW[12:0] Description
DCOL[6:0] R/W R/W Reset Value X
6--0
DCOL[6:0]
The row counter of the one-dimensional or two-dimensional destination array for the corresponding SWT channel (write data). The DMAU updates this field as the transfer proceeds and automatically clears it upon the completion of the transfer. The column counter of the one-dimensional or two-dimensional destination array for the corresponding SWT channel (write data). The DMAU updates this field as the transfer proceeds and automatically clears it upon the completion of the transfer.
R/W
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. DCNT0--3 are not cleared by a reset of the DMAU channel via the DMCON1 register (Table 32 on page 72). Before an SWT channel can be used, the program must clear the corresponding DCNT0--3 register after a DSP16411 device reset. Otherwise, the value of this register is undefined.
Table 41. DCNT4--5 (MMT4--5 Destination Counter) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19--7 6:0
DROW[12:0] Bit 19--7 Field DROW[12:0] Description
DCOL[6:0] R/W R/W Reset Value X
6--0
DCOL[6:0]
The row counter of the destination block for the corresponding MMT channel (write data). The DMAU increments this field as the transfer proceeds and automatically clears it upon the completion of the transfer. The column counter of the destination block for the corresponding MMT channel (write data). Typically, the user has programmed the LASTCOL[6:0] field (LIM4--5[6:0]--Table 43 on page 80) with zero, and therefore, the DMAU does not update this field.
R/W
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. DCNT4--5 are not cleared by a reset of the DMAU channel via the DMCON1 register (Table 32 on page 72). Before an MMT channel can be used, the program must clear the corresponding DCNT4--5 register after a DSP16411 device reset. Otherwise, the value of this register is undefined.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
79
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 42. LIM0--3 (SWT0--3 Limit) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19--7 6--0
LASTROW[12:0] Bit 19--7 Field Description
LASTCOL[6:0] R/W R/W Reset Value X
6--0
LASTROW[12:0] The last row count for both the source and destination arrays for the corresponding SWT channel. The source and destination arrays are either onedimensional or two-dimensional. For a single-buffered array, this field is programmed with the number of rows in each single buffer minus one (r - 1). For a double-buffered two-dimensional array, this field is programmed with two times the number of rows in each single buffer minus one ((2 x r) - 1). LASTCOL[6:0] The last column count for both the source and destination arrays for the corresponding SWT channel. The source and destination arrays are either onedimensional or two-dimensional. This field is programmed with the number of columns minus one (n - 1).
R/W
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
Table 43. LIM4--5 (MMT4--5 Limit) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19--7 6--0
LASTROW[12:0] Bit 19--7 Field Description
LASTCOL[6:0] R/W R/W Reset Value X
6--0
LASTROW[12:0] The last row count for both the source and destination blocks for the corresponding MMT channel. This field is typically programmed with the number of rows in the block minus one (r - 1). LASTCOL[6:0] The last column count for both the source and destination blocks for the corresponding MMT channel. The user typically programs this field with zero.
R/W
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. Each row contains one element. The element size is either 16 bits or 32 bits, based on the programming of the XSIZE4 or XSIZE5 field (DMCON0[13:12]--Table 31 on page 71). This document assumes that the LASTCOL[6:0] field is programmed with zero.
80
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 44. SBAS0--3 (SWT0--3 Source Base Address) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19--0
Source Base Address Bit 19--0 Field Description R/W Reset Value X
Source Base The program must initialize the SBAS0--3 register with the starting address of the R/W Address one-dimensional or two-dimensional source array for the corresponding channel (read data). If the corresponding AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]) is set, the DMAU copies the contents of SBAS0--3 to the corresponding SADD0--3 register after the transfer of an entire array is complete. The DMAU does not modify SBAS0--3.
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
Table 45. DBAS0--3 (SWT0--3 Destination Base Address) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19--0
Destination Base Address Bit 19--0 Field Description R/W Reset Value X
Destination The program must initialize the DBAS0--3 register with the starting address of the R/W Base Address one-dimensional or two-dimensional destination array for the corresponding channel (write data). If the corresponding AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]) is set, the DMAU copies the contents of DBAS0--3 to the corresponding DADD0--3 register after the transfer of an entire array is complete. The DMAU does not modify DBAS0--3.
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
81
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.2 Registers (continued) Table 46. STR0--3 (SWT0--3 Stride) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
15--14 13--0
Reserved Bit Field Value
Stride Description R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W X
15--14 Reserved 0 Reserved--write with zero. 13--0 Stride 16,383 If the corresponding SWT channel is programmed for one-dimensional array accesses (if the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL0--3[5:4]) is 0x2), this field is ignored. If the corresponding SWT channel is programmed for two-dimensional array accesses (if the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL0--3[5:4]) is 0x1), the DMAU adds the contents of this register to the corresponding source and destination address registers (SADD0--3 and DADD0--3) until it processes the last column in the array. The program must initialize this register with the number of memory locations between corresponding rows (elements) of consecutive columns (buffers). Typically, the columns (buffers) are back-to-back (contiguous) in memory, and this register is programmed with the number of rows per column.
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
Table 47. RI0--3 (SWT0--3 Reindex) Registers See Table 29, starting on page 67, for the memory addresses of these registers.
19 18--0
Sign Bit Bit 19 Field Sign Bit Value 1
Magnitude Description If the corresponding SWT channel is programmed for one-dimensional array accesses (if the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL0--3[5:4]) is 0x2), this field is ignored. Reset Value R/W X R/W
18--0
Magnitude
If the corresponding SWT channel is programmed for two-dimensional array accesses (if the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL0--3[5:4]) is 0x1), this bit must be set. This causes the reindex value to be negative and the DMAU to subtract the reindex magnitude from SADD0--3 and DADD0--3. 262,143 If the corresponding SWT channel is programmed for one-dimensional array accesses (if the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL0--3[5:4]) is 0x2), this field is ignored. If the corresponding SWT channel is programmed for two-dimensional array accesses (if the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL0--3[5:4]) is 0x1), the DMAU subtracts this value from the corresponding address register (SADD0--3 or DADD0--3) after accessing the last column in the array. For a single-buffered array of r rows and n columns (n > 1), the magnitude of the reindex value is (r x (n - 1)) - 1. For a double-buffered array of r rows and n columns (n > 1), the magnitude of the reindex value is (2r x (n - 1)) - 1.
R/W
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
82
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.3 Data Structures The DMAU moves data in one-dimensional array, two-dimensional array, and block transfer patterns. The following sections outline these three types of data structures and the methods for programming the DMAU registers to establish them. 4.13.3.1 One-Dimensional Data Structure (SWT Channels) Figure 20 illustrates the structure of a one-dimensional array for an SWT channel. The array consists of n columns (buffers), each containing r rows (elements). The columns must be contiguous (back-to-back) in memory. See Section 4.13.5, beginning on page 87, for more information about SWT channels. See Section 4.13.9.2, beginning on page 97, for an example of a transfer using a one-dimensional array.
A One-Dimensional Data Structure for Buffering n Input Channels
OUTPUT SOURCE ARRAY SBAS0--3 SOURCE BUFFER COMPLETE ROW =0 ROW =1
INPUT DESTINATION ARRAY DBAS0--3 COL=0 DESTINATION BUFFER COMPLETE ROW =0 ROW =1
AUTOLOAD
ROW=r-1
ROW=r-1
COL=n-1
SOURCE BUFFER COMPLETE
DESTINATION BUFFER COMPLETE
ROW=r-1
ROW=r-1
Figure 20. One-Dimensional Data Structure for Buffering n Channels One-dimensional data structures for data transfers use the address, base, limit, counter, and control registers associated with the SWT channel carrying the data between an SIU and memory. CTL0--3: The user software must initialize the corresponding control register with the POSTMOD[1:0] field programmed to 0x2 to enable one-dimensional array accesses, the SIGCON[2:0] field programmed to a value that defines when interrupts are generated, and the AUTOLOAD field set to one so that no further core interaction is needed. DADD0--3 and SADD0--3: The user software must initialize the corresponding destination and source address registers to the top of the input (destination) and output (source) arrays located in memory. The DMAU automatically increments these registers as the transfer proceeds. DBAS0--3 and SBAS0--3: The user software must also initialize the corresponding destination and source base registers to the top of the input (destination) and output (source) arrays located in Agere Systems Inc. memory. These registers are used with the autoload feature of the associated SWT channel. LIM0--3: The user software must initialize the corresponding limit register with the dimensions of the array. The number of rows (or elements) is r; therefore, the LASTROW[12:0] field is programmed to r - 1. The number of columns, n, is the same as the number of buffers; therefore, LASTCOL[6:0] field is programmed to n - 1. DCNT0--3 and SCNT0--3: The corresponding destination and source count registers contain the row and column counters for one-dimensional array accesses. The user software must initially clear these registers. The DMAU automatically clears these registers upon the completion of an SWT transfer, and increments the row and column counter fields of these registers as the transfer proceeds. DMCON0: The user software must set the corresponding SRUN[3:0] and DRUN[3:0] fields in DMCON0 to enable source and destination transfers.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
COL=n-1
ROW =0 ROW =1
ROW =0 ROW =1
AUTOLOAD
COL=0
83
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.3 Data Structures (continued) 4.13.3.2 Two-Dimensional Data Structure (SWT Channels) Figure 21 illustrates the structure of a two-dimensional double-buffered array for an SWT channel. This structure is useful for TDM channel multiplexing and demultiplexing. The array consists of n columns (double buffers), each containing 2r rows (elements). The columns are typically contiguous (back-to-back) in memory, but this is not required. See Section 4.13.5, beginning on page 87, for more information about SWT channels. See Section 4.13.9.1, beginning on page 95, for an example of a transfer using a two-dimensional array.
A Two-Dimensional Data Structure for Double-Buffering n Channels
OUTPUT SOURCE ARRAY SBAS0--3 STR0--3 ROW =0 ROW =1 ROW=r-1 ROW =2r-1 RI0--3 AUTOLOAD ROW =0 ROW =1 ROW=r-1 ROW =2r-1 SOURCE FRAME COMPLETE SOURCE BUFFER COMPLETE SOURCE ARRAY COMPLETE
INPUT DESTINATION ARRAY DBAS0--3 ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=r-1 ROW=2r-1 RI0--3 AUTOLOAD ROW=0 ROW=1 COL=1 ROW=r-1 ROW=2r-1 DESTINATION FRAME COMPLETE (SIGCON=0x2) COL=n-1 DESTINATION BUFFER COMPLETE (SIGCON=0x3) DESTINATION ARRAY COMPLETE (SIGCON=0x5)
SINGLE BUFFER DOUBLE BUFFER
SINGLE BUFFER DOUBLE BUFFER
COL=0
STR0--3
ROW=r-1 ROW =2r-1
ROW=r-1 ROW=2r-1
Figure 21. Two-Dimensional Data Structure for Double-Buffering n Channels Two-dimensional data structures for data transfers use address, base, limit, counter, stride, reindex, and control registers associated with the SWT channel carrying the data between an SIU and memory. CTL0--3: The user software must initialize the corresponding control register with the POSTMOD[1:0] field programmed to 0x1 to enable two-dimensional array accesses, the SIGCON[2:0] field programmed to a value that defines when interrupts are generated, and the AUTOLOAD field set to one so that no further core interaction is needed. DADD0--3 and SADD0--3: The user software must initialize the corresponding destination and source address registers to the top of the input (destination) and output (source) arrays located in 84 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc. memory. The DMAU automatically updates these registers in a row-major order as the transfer proceeds. DBAS0--3 and SBAS0--3: The user software must also initialize the corresponding destination and source base registers to the top of the input (destination) and output (source) arrays located in memory. These registers are used with the autoload feature of the associated SWT channel.
COL=n-1
ROW =0 ROW =1
ROW=0 ROW=1
COL=1
COL=0
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
STR0--3: The user software must initialize the corresponding stride register with the number of memory locations between common rows (elements) of different columns (buffers). Typical data structures have buffers that are contiguous in memory. In this case, the stride is the same as the buffer length (number of rows per column). If the current column is not the last column, the DMAU increments the contents of DADD0--3 and SADD0--3 by the stride value after each transaction, i.e., increments the address registers in rowmajor order. This causes DADD0--3 and SADD0--3 to address the common row in the next column. RI0--3: The user software must initialize the corresponding reindex register to the sign-magnitude pointer postmodification value to be applied to SADD0--3 and DADD0--3 after the DMAU has accessed the last column. For a single-buffered array of r rows and n columns (n > 1), the magnitude of the reindex value is (r x (n - 1)) - 1. For a double-buffered array of r rows and n columns (n > 1), the magnitude is (2r x (n - 1)) - 1. Because the reindex value is always negative for a two-dimensional array, the user software must set the sign bit of RI0--3. DMCON0: The user software must set the corresponding SRUN[3:0] and DRUN[3:0] fields in DMCON0 to enable source and destination transfers.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.3 Data Structures (continued) 4.13.3.2 Two-Dimensional Data Structure (SWT Channels) (continued) LIM0--3: The user software must initialize the corresponding limit register with the dimensions of the array. The number of rows (or elements) is r. For a singlebuffered array, the LASTROW[12:0] field is programmed to r - 1. For a double-buffered array (Figure 21 on page 84), the LASTROW[12:0] field is programmed to (2 x r ) - 1. The number of columns (n) is the same as the number of buffers. Therefore, the LASTCOL[6:0] field is programmed to n - 1. DCNT0--3 and SCNT0--3: The corresponding destination and source count registers contain the row and column counters for two-dimensional array access. The user software must initially clear these registers. The DMAU automatically clears these registers upon the completion of an SWT transfer and increments the row and column counter fields of these registers as the transfer proceeds.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
85
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
memory. The DMAU automatically updates these registers as the transfer proceeds. LIM4--5: The user software must initialize the corresponding limit register with the dimensions of the array. The number of rows (or elements) is r. Therefore, the user software writes r - 1 to LASTROW[12:0]. The array is structured as one column (one buffer). Therefore, the user software writes zero to LASTCOL[6:0]. DCNT4--5 and SCNT4--5: The corresponding destination and source count registers contain the row and column counters for memory-to-memory block transfers. The user software must initially clear these registers. The DMAU automatically clears these registers upon the completion of an MMT source transfer, and updates these registers as the source transfer proceeds. CTL4--5: The user software must write the control register with SIGCON[2:0] set to a value that defines when interrupts are generated. DMCON0: The user software must set the corresponding TRIGGER[5:4] field in DMCON0 to enable MMT transfers.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.3 Data Structures (continued) 4.13.3.3 Memory-to-Memory Block Transfers (MMT Channels) Figure 22 illustrates a memory-to-memory block transfer using an MMT channel. See Section 4.13.6, beginning on page 90, for more information about MMT channels. See Section 4.13.9.3 on page 99 for an example of a memory-to-memory block data transfer using an MMT channel. Memory-to-memory block data structures for data transfers use address, limit, counter, and control registers associated with the MMT channel transferring the data between two memories. DADD4--5 and SADD4--5: The user software must initialize the corresponding destination and source address registers to the top of the input (destination) and output (source) blocks located in
SOURCE ARRAY INITIAL VALUE OF SADD4--5
Memory-to-Memory Block Transfer
DESTINATION ARRAY TRANSFER ROW=0 ROW=1 COL=0 COL=0 ROW=(r -1)>>1 ROW=r -1 INITIAL VALUE OF DADD4--5 TRANSFER 1/2 COMPLETE
ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=(r -1)>>1 ROW=r -1
Figure 22. Memory-to-Memory Block Transfer 4.13.4 The PIU Addressing Bypass Channel If the PIUDIS field (DMCON1[6]--Table 32 on page 72) is cleared, a host microprocessor connected to the DSP16411 PIU port can gain access to the entire memory space of the DSP16411. The access is arbitrated by the DMAU. If PIUDIS is set to one, PIU requests are ignored by the DMAU. All PIU transactions are handled through the addressing bypass channel. Host requests are independent of both cores and add no overhead to core processing. The host can issue commands, read status information, read and write DSP16411 memory, and send messages via the host parallel port. Specific transactions are accomplished by host commands issued to the PIU. See Section 4.15.5, beginning on page 147, for more details.
86
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
The SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL0--3[3:1]) registers define the exact meaning associated with both the source and destination transfer interrupts. See Table 50 on page 92 for a list of DMAU interrupts and Table 34 on page 74 for the CTL0--3 bit field definitions. The following steps are taken during a source transaction: 1. One of the cores sets the appropriate SRUN[3:0] field (DMCON0[3:0]--Table 31 on page 71) to initiate transfers. 2. If the SIU 16-bit output data register (SODR) is empty, the SIU requests data from the DMAU. The DMAU reads one data word over the Z-bus from the appropriate DSP16411 memory location using the SWT channel's source address register, SADD0--3. 3. The DMAU transfers the data word to the corresponding SODR register over the peripheral data bus, DDO. 4. The DMAU updates the SWT channel's source address register, SADD0--3, and the source counter register, SCNT0--3. 5. The DMAU can generate a core interrupt, based on the value of the SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL0--3[3:1]). 6. If this is not the last location of the source array (SCNT0--3 LIM0--3), the DMAU returns to step 2. If this is the last location of the source array:
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.5 Single-Word Transfer Channels (SWT) The DMAU provides a total of four SWT channels. SWT0 and SWT1 are dedicated to SIU0, and SWT2 and SWT3 are dedicated to SIU1. Each SWT channel is bidirectional and can transfer data to/from either TPRAM0, TPRAM1, or external memory as defined by the associated channel's source and destination address registers (SADD0--3 and DADD0--3). Two SWT channels are dedicated to each SIU so that data from a single SIU can be routed to separate memory spaces at any time. Each SIU's ICIX0--1 and OCIX0--1 control registers define the mapping of serial port data to one of the two SWT channels dedicated to that SIU. For example, this provides a method for routing logical channel data on a TDM bit stream to/from either TPRAM on a time-slot basis. If a specific SIU issues a request for service (input buffer full or output buffer empty), an SWT channel performs a transaction. SWT channels provide both source and destination transfers. A source transaction is defined as a read from DSP16411 memory and write to an SIU output register with the update of the appropriate DMAU registers. A destination transaction is defined as the read of an SIU input register and write to DSP16411 memory with the update of the appropriate DMAU registers. For a specific SWT channel, the size and structure of the data to be transferred to/from the SIU must be the same. As an alternative, the source or destination transfer for a specific channel can be disabled, allowing separate DMAU channels to be used for the source and destination transfers. For example, SWT0 can be used to service SIU0 input and SWT1 for SIU0 output. The DMAU supports address and counter hardware for one- and two-dimensional memory accesses for each SWT channel. The basic data structure is called an array, which consists of columns (or buffers) and rows (or elements). An array can be traversed in either row-major (two-dimensional array) or columnmajor (one-dimensional array) order, as defined by the DMAU control registers for that channel (CTL0--3--Table 34 on page 74). Each SWT channel has two dedicated interrupt signals; one to represent the status of a source transfer and another to represent the status of a destination transfer. These signals can be used to create interrupt sources to either core. (See Section 4.13.7, beginning on page 92, for details.) Agere Systems Inc.
If the AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]--Table 34 on page 74) is cleared, the DMAU clears SCNT0--3, clears the corresponding SRUN[3:0] field (DMCON0[3:0]--Table 31 on page 71), and terminates the source transfer. If the AUTOLOAD field is set: -- The DMAU reloads SADD0--3 with the value in the source base address register, SBAS0--3. -- The DMAU clears the value in the source counter register (SCNT0--3 is written with 0). -- The DMAU initiates a new source transfer without core intervention.
!
The steps taken for a destination transaction are: 1. One of the cores sets the appropriate DRUN[3:0] field (DMCON0[7:4]) to initiate transfers. 2. If the SIU 16-bit input data register (SIDR) is full, the SIU requests that the DMAU read the data. After the DMAU acknowledges the request, the SIU places the contents of SIDR onto the data bus (DSI).
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
87
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
step 2. If this is the last location of the destination array:
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.5 Single-Word Transfer Channels (SWT) (continued)
If the AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]--Table 34 on page 74) is cleared, the DMAU clears DCNT0--3, clears the corresponding DRUN[3:0] field (DMCON0[7:4]--Table 31 on page 71), and terminates the destination transfer. If the AUTOLOAD field is set: -- The DMAU reloads DADD0--3 with the value in the destination base address register, DBAS0--3. -- The DMAU clears the value in the destination counter register (DCNT0--3 is written with 0). -- The DMAU initiates a new destination transfer without core intervention.
!
3. The DMAU transfers this data word over the Z-bus to the appropriate DSP16411 memory location as defined by the channel's destination address register, DADD0--3. 4. The DMAU updates the channel's destination address register, DADD0--3, and the destination counter, DCNT0--3. 5. The DMAU can generate a core interrupt, based on the value of the SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL0--3[3:1]--Table 34 on page 74). 6. If this is not the last location of the destination array (DCNT0--3 LIM0--3), the DMAU returns to Table 48. SWT-Specific Memory-Mapped Registers
Register SADD0--3 Type Source Address
The DMAU's control and address registers determine the data structure and access pattern supported by a particular channel and reflect the status of the transfer. These SWT channel registers are described in Table 48, with additional detail provided in Section 4.13.2, beginning on page 67.
SBAS0--3
Source Base Address
SCNT0--3
Source Counter
Size Description 32-bit The program must initialize the SADD0--3 register with the starting address of the source array for the corresponding channel (read data). The DMAU updates the register with the address of the next memory location to be read by the corresponding SWT channel as the transfer proceeds. Table 37 on page 77 describes the bit fields of the SADD0--3 registers. 20-bit The program must initialize the SBAS0--3 register with the starting address of the source array for the corresponding channel (read data). If the corresponding AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]) is set, the DMAU copies the contents of SBAS0--3 to the corresponding SADD0--3 register after the transfer of an entire array is complete. The DMAU does not modify SBAS0--3. 20-bit This register contains the row and column counter of the source array for the corresponding channel (read data). The DMAU updates the register as the transfer proceeds and automatically clears the register upon the completion of the transfer. The source row (SROW) is encoded in SCNT0--3[19:7], and the source column (SCOL) is encoded in SCNT0--3[6:0]. Note: SCNT0--3 are not cleared by a reset of the DMAU channel via the DMCON1 register (Table 32 on page 72). Before an SWT channel can be used, the program must clear the corresponding SCNT0--3 register after a DSP16411 device reset. Otherwise, the value of this register is undefined. 32-bit The program must initialize the DADD0--3 register with the starting address of the destination array for the corresponding channel (write data). The DMAU updates the register with the address of the next memory location to be written by the corresponding SWT channel as the transfer proceeds. Table 37 on page 77 describes the bit fields of the DADD0--3 registers. 20-bit The program must initialize the DBAS0--3 register with the starting address of the destination array for the corresponding channel (write data). If the corresponding AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]) is set, the DMAU copies the contents of DBAS0--3 to the corresponding DADD0--3 register after the transfer of an entire array is complete. The DMAU does not modify DBAS0--3.
DADD0--3
Destination Address
DBAS0--3
Destination Base Address
The array can be either one-dimensional or two-dimensional.
88
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.5 Single-Word Transfer Channels (SWT) (continued) Table 48. SWT-Specific Memory-Mapped Registers (continued)
Register DCNT0--3 Type Destination Counter Size Description 20-bit This register contains the row and column counter of the destination array for the corresponding channel (write data). The DMAU updates the register as the transfer proceeds and automatically clears the register upon the completion of the transfer. The destination row (DROW) is encoded in DCNT0--3[19:7], and the destination column (DCOL) is encoded in DCNT0--3[6:0]. Note: DCNT0--3 are not cleared by a reset of the DMAU channel via the DMCON1 register (Table 32 on page 72). Before an SWT channel can be used, the program must clear the corresponding DCNT0--3 register after a DSP16411 device reset. Otherwise, the value of this register is undefined. 20-bit The user programs LIM0--3 with the last row count and the last column count for both the source and destination arrays for the corresponding channel. For a single-buffered array, LIM0--3[19:7] is programmed with the number of rows in each single buffer minus one (r - 1). For a double-buffered two-dimensional array, LIM0--3[19:7] is programmed with two times the number of rows in each single buffer minus one ((2 x r) - 1). The number of columns minus one (n - 1) is encoded in LIM0--3[6:0]. Refer to Section 4.13.9 on page 95 for examples. 16-bit For an SWT channel with one-dimensional array accesses, the program must clear the corresponding STR0--3 register. For an SWT channel with two-dimensional array accesses, the user software assigns the number of memory locations between common rows (elements) of different columns (buffers). Typically, this value equals the number of rows per column, which places the buffers back-to-back (contiguous) in memory. Refer to Section 4.13.9.1 on page 95 for details. 20-bit For an SWT channel with one-dimensional array accesses, the program must clear the corresponding RI0--3 register. For an SWT channel with two-dimensional array accesses, the DMAU adds the signmagnitude value in the corresponding RI0--3 register to the corresponding address register (SADD0--3 for source transactions and DADD0--3 for destination transactions) after the last column has been accessed. The magnitude of the reindex value for an array of r rows and n columns (n > 1) is (r x (n - 1)) - 1. The magnitude of the reindex value for a two-dimensional array that employs double buffers like that shown in Figure 21 on page 84 is (2r x (n - 1)) - 1. Because the reindex value is always negative, set the sign bit (bit 19) of RI0--3. 16-bit CTL0--3 controls the following items for the corresponding SWT channel:
! ! !
LIM0--3
Limit
STR0--3
Stride Register
RI0--3
Reindex
CTL0--3
Control
Enabling or disabling of AUTOLOAD for the starting address. Determining the point in the transaction when a DMAU interrupt request is generated. Determining whether the access takes place in row-major (two-dimensional array) or column-major (one-dimensional array) order.
CTL0--3 determines these attributes for both the source and destination arrays for the corresponding SWT channel. See Table 34 on page 74 for the field descriptions of CTL0--3.
The array can be either one-dimensional or two-dimensional.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
89
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
an MMT channel by setting the corresponding SLKA5 or SLKA4 field (DMCON0[9,8]). Assuming that source look-ahead is disabled, the DMAU performs the following steps during an MMT block transfer: 1. The user software executing in one of the cores writes a one to the corresponding TRIGGER5 or TRIGGER4 field (DMCON0[11,10]) to initiate the block transfer. The DMAU automatically clears the TRIGGER5 or TRIGGER4 field. 2. The DMAU initiates a read operation from the source block using the address in the channel's source address register, SADD4--5 (see Table 37 on page 77). If the corresponding XSIZE5 or XSIZE4 field (DMCON0[13,12]) is cleared, the read operation is 16 bits. If the corresponding XSIZE5 or XSIZE4 field is set, the read operation is 32 bits. 3. If the read operation is 16 bits, the DMAU increments SADD4--5 by one. If the read operation is 32 bits, the DMAU increments SADD4--5 by two. The DMAU updates the source counter register (SCNT4--5--Table 39 on page 78) by incrementing its SROW[12:0] field by one. 4. When the read data from step 2 becomes available, the DMAU places it into the source look-ahead buffer. 5. The DMAU writes the data in the source look-ahead buffer to the destination block using the address in the channel's destination address register, DADD4--5. If the corresponding XSIZE5 or XSIZE4 field (DMCON0[13,12]) is cleared, the write operation is 16 bits. If the corresponding XSIZE5 or XSIZE4 field is set, the write operation is 32 bits. 6. If the write operation is 16 bits, the DMAU increments DADD4--5 by one. If the write operation is 32 bits, the DMAU increments DADD4--5 by two. The DMAU updates the destination counter register (DCNT4--5) by incrementing its DROW[12:0] field by one. 7. Depending on the SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL4--5[3:1]), the DMAU can generate an interrupt. 8. If this is the last location of the block (DCNT4--5 = LIM4--5), the DMAU stops processing for the channel. If this is not the last location of the block, the DMAU returns to step 2.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.5 Single-Word Transfer Channels (SWT) (continued) The two 16-bit DMAU master control registers, DMCON0 and DMCON1, also influence the operation of the SWT channels. The 32-bit DMAU status register, DSTAT, reflects the status of any SWT transfer. The bit field definition of the DMAU control and status registers is given in Section 4.13.2, beginning on page 67. 4.13.6 Memory-to-Memory Transfer Channels (MMT) The DSP16411 DMAU provides two MMT channels for block transfers called MMT4 and MMT5. Each MMT channel moves data between a source block and a destination block. Both the source and destination blocks must be one-dimensional arrays with the same size and structure, as defined by the MMT channel's control register, CTL4--5 (see Table 36 on page 76). The user software initiates an MMT block transfer request by writing a one to the corresponding TRIGGER5 or TRIGGER4 field (DMCON0[11,10]--see Table 31 on page 71). Each transfer can be 16 bits or 32 bits, as determined by the corresponding XSIZE5 or XSIZE4 field (DMCON0[13,12]). If the transfers are 32 bits, the source and destination addresses as specified by SADD4--5 and DADD4--5 must both be even. Once initiated, MMT channel block transfers proceed to completion and then stop. The DMAU pauses an MMT block transfer to allow an SWT or bypass channel transaction to complete, and then automatically resumes the MMT block transfer. This prevents I/O latencies and possible data overwrites due to long MMT blocks. Each MMT channel has a dedicated interrupt request that can be enabled in either core. The SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL4--5[3:1]) determines the exact meaning associated with the interrupt. See Table 50 on page 92 and Table 34 on page 74 for more information. To optimize throughput, MMT channel read operations can be pipelined. This allows the DMAU to initiate multiple fetches from the source block before an associated write to the destination block is performed. The DMAU stores the data from the multiple fetches into an internal source look-ahead buffer. The user enables multiple fetches into the source look-ahead buffer for 90
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.6 Memory-to-Memory Transfer Channels (MMT) (continued) If source look-ahead is enabled, the DMAU performs the same steps as above except that it initially repeats steps 2--4 multiple times in a pipelined manner. It then performs reads and writes to the source and destination blocks as access cycles become available. It is strongly recommended that the user enable source look-ahead. See Section 4.14.7.4 on page 133 for a performance comparison. The DMAU's control and address registers determine the data size and location supported by a particular channel and reflect the status of the request. These MMT channel registers are described in Table 49 on page 91 with additional detail provided in Section 4.13.2, beginning on page 67. Table 49. MMT-Specific Memory-Mapped Registers
Register SADD4--5 Type Source Address Size Description 32-bit Prior to each MMT block move, the program must initialize the corresponding SADD4--5 register with the starting address in memory for the source block (read data). The DMAU updates the register with the address of the next memory location to be read by the specified MMT channel as the block move proceeds. Table 37 on page 77 describes the bit fields of SADD4--5. 20-bit This register contains the source row and column counter for the corresponding channel. The DMAU updates the register as the block move proceeds and automatically clears the register upon the completion of the block move. The source row (SROW) is encoded in SCNT4--5[19:7], and the source column (SCOL) is encoded in SCNT4--5[6:0]. Note: SCNT4--5 are not cleared by a reset of the DMAU channel via the DMCON1 register (Table 32 on page 72). Before an MMT channel can be used, the program must clear the corresponding SCNT4--5 register after a DSP16411 device reset. Otherwise, the value of this register is undefined. 32-bit Prior to each MMT block move, the program must initialize the corresponding DADD4--5 register with the starting address in memory for the destination block (write data). The DMAU updates the register with the address of the next memory location to be written by the specified MMT channel as the block move proceeds. Table 37 on page 77 describes the bit fields of DADD4--5. 20-bit This register contains the destination row and column counter for the corresponding channel. The DMAU updates the register as the block move proceeds and automatically clears the register upon the completion of the block move. The destination row (DROW) is encoded in DCNT4--5[19:7] and the destination column (DCOL) is encoded in DCNT4--5[6:0]. Note: DCNT4--5 are not cleared by a reset of the DMAU channel via the DMCON1 register (Table 32 on page 72). Before an MMT channel can be used, the user program must clear the corresponding DCNT4--5 register after a DSP16411 device reset. Otherwise, the value of this register is undefined. 20-bit The user programs LIM4--5 with the last row count and the last column count for both the source and destination blocks for the corresponding channel. The last row count is the number of rows minus one and is encoded in the LASTROW field (LIM4--5[19:7]). The last column count is the number of columns minus one and is encoded in the LASTCOL field (LIM4--5[6:0]). Typically, LASTCOL is zero for a block move. 16-bit CTL4--5 controls interrupt generation for both the source and destination block moves.
SCNT4--5
Source Counter
DADD4--5
Destination Address
DCNT4--5
Destination Counter
LIM4--5
Limit
CTL4--5
Control
The two 16-bit DMAU master control registers, DMCON0 and DMCON1, influence the operation of the MMT channels. The 32-bit DMAU status register, DSTAT, reflects the status of any MMT transfer. The bit field definition of the DMAU control and status registers is given in Section 4.13.2, beginning on page 67. Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 91
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.7 Interrupts and Priority Resolution The DMAU provides information to both cores of the DSP16411 in the form of status and interrupts. A core can determine status by reading the DMAU's memory-mapped DSTAT register, which reflects the current state of any DMAU channel. The field definitions for DSTAT are defined in Table 30 on page 69. A core can configure the DMAU interrupts by programming the corresponding SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL0--3[3:1]--Table 34 on page 74 and CTL4--5[3:1]--Table 36 on page 76). Several DMAU interrupt signals are multiplexed to each core, so not all DMAU interrupt requests can be monitored by a core simultaneously. Refer to Section 4.4.2, beginning on page 28, regarding the interrupt multiplexer, IMUX. Table 50 provides a list of the DMAU interrupt signals and their descriptions. Table 50. DMAU Interrupts
DMAU Channel SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 Description SIU0 source (output) transaction complete SIU0 destination (input) transaction complete SIU0 source (output) transaction complete SIU0 destination (input) transaction complete SIU1 source (output) transaction complete SIU1 destination (input) transaction complete SIU1 source (output) transaction complete SIU1 destination (input) transaction complete Memory-to-memory transfer complete Memory-to-memory transfer complete DSP Core Interrupt Name DSINT0 DDINT0 DSINT1 DDINT1 DSINT2 DDINT2 DSINT3 DDINT3 DMINT4 DMINT5
The SIGCON[2:0] field of the channel's CTL0--5 register determines the condition under which the DMAU asserts the interrupt. See Table 34 on page 74 for a description of CTL0--3, or Table 36 on page 76 for a description of CTL4--5).
92
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
MMT channel priority can be changed by the user software. The default priority of the MMT channels is listed above. If both MMT4 and MMT5 require service at the same time, an MMT4 request has higher priority than the corresponding MMT5 request. The default operation does not allow a new MMT request to interrupt an MMT block transfer already in progress, i.e., the DMAU's default condition is to start and complete an MMT block transfer before a new MMT block transfer can begin. Any MMT block transfer can be interrupted by any SWT or PIU bypass channel transaction. The default operation of the MMT channels can be changed. The HPRIM field (DMCON0[15]--Table 31 on page 71) is used to select the relative priority of MMT4 and MMT5. If HPRIM is cleared (the default), MMT4 has higher priority than MMT5. If HPRIM is set, MMT5 has the higher priority. A higher-priority MMT channel can be made to interrupt a lower-priority MMT channel block transfer already in progress. The MINT field (DMCON0[14]) controls this feature. If MINT is cleared, MMT channels do not interrupt each other, as stated above, and an MMT block transfer already in progress completes before another MMT channel request is taken. If MINT is set, the higher-priority MMT channel can interrupt the lower-priority channel as determined by the HPRIM field setting. In a typical application, the higher-priority channel is assigned to moving small, time-critical data blocks, and the lower-priority channel is assigned to large, less time-critical blocks. This feature alleviates latency that can be incurred due to the transfer of large data blocks.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.7 Interrupts and Priority Resolution (continued) The DMAU provides arbitration for requests from many sources. If multiple requests are pending simultaneously, the DMAU completes its current transaction1 and then provides access to the source that has the highest priority. The order of priority, from highest to lowest, is as follows: 1. SWT0 source transaction (SIU0 output) (highest) 2. SWT0 destination transaction (SIU0 input) 3. SWT1 source transaction (SIU0 output) 4. SWT1 destination transaction (SIU0 input) 5. SWT2 source transaction (SIU1 output) 6. SWT2 destination transaction (SIU1 input) 7. SWT3 source transaction (SIU1 output) 8. SWT3 destination transaction (SIU1 input) 9. PIU 10. MMT4 destination write 11. MMT5 destination write 12. MMT4 source fetch 13. MMT5 source fetch (lowest) MMT channel block transfers that are in progress are paused if any SWT or PIU bypass channel request occurs. The single SWT or bypass channel transaction completes, and then the paused MMT channel block transfer resumes.
1. A request to the DMAU can result in more than one transaction, a transaction being the transfer of one single (16-bit) or double (32-bit) word.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
93
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
For the MMT4--5 channels, the DMAU sets the corresponding ERR[5:4] field if:
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.8 Error Reporting and Recovery Each of the ERR[5:0] fields of the DSTAT register (Table 30 on page 69) reflects a DMAU protocol failure that indicates a loss of data for the corresponding channel. For the SWT0--3 channels, the DMAU sets the corresponding ERR[3:0] field if:
!
The user software attempts to set the TRIGGER[5:4] field by writing 1 to DMCON0[11:10] and the TRIGGER[5:4] field is already set. The user software attempts to set the TRIGGER[5:4] field by writing 1 to DMCON0[11:10] and the RESET[5:4] field (DMCON1[5:4]) is set.
!
An SIU0--1 requests DMAU service for a channel before the DMAU has accepted the previous request from that SIU0--1 for that channel. An SIU0--1 requests DMAU service for a channel, and that channel's RESET[3:0] field (DMCON1[3:0]--Table 32 on page 72) is set. An SIU0--1 requests DMAU destination/source service for a channel, and that channel's DRUN[3:0]/SRUN[3:0] field (DMCON0[7:0]--Table 31 on page 71) is cleared. An SIU0--1 requests DMAU service for a channel, and that channel's source/destination transfer is complete (SCNT0--3/DCNT0--3 = LIM0--3), and that channel's AUTOLOAD field (CTL0--3[0]--Table 34 on page 74) is cleared.
If servicing a DMAU channel interrupt, the user software should poll DSTAT to determine whether an error has occurred. If so, the user software must perform the following steps: 1. Set the corresponding RESET[5:0] field (DMCON1[5:0]) to terminate all channel activity. 2. Write a 1 to the corresponding ERR[5:0] field to clear the field and the error condition. 3. Reinitialize the corresponding channel address and count registers. 4. Clear the corresponding RESET[5:0] field to reallow channel activity. 5. For an MMT channel, re-enable a channel transfer by setting the appropriate TRIGGER[5:4] field (DMCON0[11:10]).
!
!
!
94
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.9 Programming Examples This section illustrates three typical DMAU applications. 4.13.9.1 SWT Example 1: A Two-Dimensional Array This example describes the input and output of four channels of full-duplex TDM speech data from SIU0 with the following assumptions:
! ! !
The data is double-buffered to avoid latencies and the potential of missing samples. Input and output data have the same array size and structure and are processed by the SWT0 channel. There are four logical channels (time slots) grouped in four contiguous double buffers, corresponding to the number of columns (n) in a two-dimensional array. Each single buffer has 160 elements, or rows (r), and each double buffer has a length of 320 (0x140). CORE0 begins processing data after 160 samples have been input for all four logical channels. SIU0 input (destination) data begins at address 0x01000 in TPRAM0. SIU0 output (source) data begins at address 0x02000 in TPRAM0. The autoload feature is used to minimize core intervention.
! ! ! ! !
Figure 23 illustrates this data structure. This example does not discuss the setup and control of SIU0.
A Two-Dimensional Data Structure for Double-Buffering n Channels
OUTPUT SOURCE ARRAY SINGLE BUFFER DOUBLE BUFFER 0x02000 (SBAS0) STR0 (0x140) ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=159 ROW=319 ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=159 ROW=319 ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=159 ROW=319 ROW=0 ROW=1 COL=3 ROW=159 ROW=319
INPUT DESTINATION ARRAY SINGLE BUFFER DOUBLE BUFFER RI0 = -959 (0x803BF) AUTOLOAD 0x01000 (DBAS0) COL=0 STR0 (0x140) ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=159 ROW=319 ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=159 ROW=319 ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=159 ROW=319 ROW=0 ROW=1 ROW=159 ROW=319 COL=3
RI0 = -959 (0x803BF) AUTOLOAD
0x02140
0x01140 COL=1
0x02280
0x01280 COL=2
0x023C0
0x013C0
SOURCE BUFFER COMPLETE SOURCE ARRAY COMPLETE
DESTINATION BUFFER COMPLETE (SIGCON=0x3) DESTINATION ARRAY COMPLETE (SIGCON=0x5)
Figure 23. Example of a Two-Dimensional Double-Buffered Data Structure Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 95
COL=2
COL=1
COL=0
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
two-dimensional array accesses, writes 0x3 to the SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL0[3:1]), and writes 1 to the AUTOLOAD field (CTL0[0]) so that no further core interaction is needed. The user software writes 0x0017 to CTL0. 8. Finally, the user software sets both the SRUN0 and DRUN0 fields (DMCON0[0] and DMCON0[4]-- Table 31 on page 71) to enable SWT0 source and destination transfers. The user software writes 0x0011 to DMCON0. The DMAU begins processing the SWT0 input and output channels. For the output channel, the DMAU performs the following steps: 1. It reads the single word at the TPRAM0 location pointed to by SADD0 (0x00002000) and transfers the data to SIU0. This data is the first output sample for the first logical channel (ROW = 0 and COL = 0). 2. It increments SADD0 by the contents of STR0, so SADD0 contains 0x00002140 and points to the first output sample for the second logical channel (ROW = 0 and COL = 1). It updates SCNT0 by incrementing the column counter, so SCNT0 contains 0x00001. 3. It reads the data at 0x02140 and transfers it to SIU0. 4. It increments SADD0 by the contents of STR0, so SADD0 contains 0x00002280 and points to the first output sample for the third logical channel (ROW = 0 and COL = 2). It updates SCNT0 by incrementing the column counter, so SCNT0 contains 0x00002. 5. As in steps 3 and 4, the DMAU continues to read data, transfer the data to SIU0, and update SADD0 and SCNT0 until the column counter equals the last column (SCNT0[6:0] = LIM0[6:0] = 3). SADD0 contains 0x000023C0 and points to the first row of the last column. 6. The DMAU subtracts the magnitude of the contents of RI0 from SADD0 (0x000023C0 - 0x3BF) and places the result into SADD0 (0x00002001). SADD0 points to the second output sample for the first logical channel (ROW = 1 and COL = 0). The DMAU continues processing in this manner until it processes row 159 of column 3. At this point, ROW = LASTROW/2 and COL = LASTCOL. Because this condition is met and SIGCON[2:0] = 0x3, the DMAU asserts the DSINT0 interrupt to CORE0. CORE0's ISR changes SIGCON[2:0] to 0x5 so that the DMAU asserts DSINT0 again after it has processed the remaining samples in the buffers. CORE0 can overwrite the already processed samples while the DMAU continues to process the remaining samples. The steps performed by the DMAU for the input channel are similar to those for the output channel. Agere Systems Inc.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.9 Programming Examples (continued) 4.13.9.1 SWT Example 1: A Two-Dimensional Array (continued) The user software running in CORE0 must perform the following steps to properly initialize SWT0: 1. The user software sets the source address (SADD0--Table 37 on page 77) and the source base address (SBAS0--Table 44 on page 81) to the top of the output (source) array located in TPRAM0. The user software writes 0x00002000 to SADD0 and 0x02000 to SBAS0. 2. The user software sets the destination address (DADD0--Table 37 on page 77) and the destination base address (DBAS0--Table 45 on page 81) to the top of the input (destination) array located in TPRAM0. The user software writes 0x00001000 to DADD0 and 0x01000 to DBAS0. 3. The user software clears the source and destination counter registers SCNT0 and DCNT0 (Table 38 on page 78 and Table 40 on page 79). 4. The user software initializes the limit register (LIM0--Table 42 on page 80) with the dimensions of the array. The number of rows (or elements) is 2r (320), so the user software writes 319 (2r - 1) into the LASTROW[12:0] field (LIM0[19:7]). The number of columns is 4, so the user software writes 3 (n - 1) into the LASTCOL[6:0] field (LIM0[6:0]). The user software writes 0x09F83 into LIM0. 5. The user software initializes the stride register (STR0--Table 46 on page 82) with the distance between corresponding rows of consecutive columns. Because the buffers are contiguous in this example, the stride is the same as the buffer length and the user software writes 0x0140 into STR0. 6. The user software initializes the reindex register (RI0--Table 47 on page 82) with the sign-magnitude postmodification value to be applied to SADD0 and DADD0 after each time that the last column has been accessed. The magnitude of the reindex value is ((2r x (n - 1)) - 1) or (320 x 3) - 1 = 959 = 0x3BF. The sign must be negative, so the user software writes 0x803BF into RI0. 7. The user software writes the control registers to enable SWT0 and begin I/O processing. First, the user software writes one into the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL0[5:4]--Table 34 on page 74) to enable 96
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.9 Programming Examples (continued) 4.13.9.2 SWT Example 2: A One-Dimensional Array This example describes the input of four blocks of speech data from SIU1 with the following assumptions:
! ! !
The data is single-buffered. Data is processed by the SWT3 channel. There are four blocks of data grouped in four contiguous buffers, corresponding to the number of columns (n) in a one-dimensional array. Each single buffer has 160 elements, or rows (r = 0xA0). The DMAU fills four buffers in sequential order, i.e., it receives all 160 samples of one buffer and then all 160 samples of the next buffer, etc. The DMAU places the data in ascending linear order in memory, beginning at TPRAM1 address 0x01000. CORE1 begins processing data after 160 samples have been input. The autoload feature is used to minimize core intervention.
! !
! ! !
Figure 24 illustrates the data structure for this example.
A One-Dimensional Data Structure for Buffering n Input Channels
INPUT DESTINATION ARRAY 0x01000 (DBAS3) DESTINATION BUFFER COMPLETE ROW =159 ROW=0 ROW=1 AUTOLOAD ROW=0 ROW=1
0x010A0 DESTINATION BUFFER COMPLETE
0x01140 DESTINATION BUFFER COMPLETE
0x011E0 DESTINATION BUFFER COMPLETE
ROW =159
Figure 24. Example of One-Dimensional Data Structure
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
COL=3
ROW =159 ROW=0 ROW=1
COL=2
ROW =159 ROW=0 ROW=1
COL=1
COL=0
97
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.9 Programming Examples (continued) 4.13.9.2 SWT Example 2: A One-Dimensional Array (continued) The user software running in CORE1 must perform the following steps to properly initialize SWT3: 1. The user software sets the destination address (DADD3--Table 37 on page 77) and the destination base address (DBAS3--Table 45 on page 81) to the top of the input (destination) array located in TPRAM1. The user software writes 0x00101000 to DADD3 and 0x01000 to DBAS3. 2. The user software clears the destination counter (DCNT3--Table 40 on page 79). 3. The user software initializes the limit register (LIM3--Table 42 on page 80) with the dimensions of the array. The number of rows (or elements) is 160, so the user software writes 159 (r - 1) into the LASTROW[12:0] field (LIM3[19:7]). The number of columns is 4, so the user software writes 3 (n - 1) into the LASTCOL[6:0] field (LIM3[6:0]). The user software writes 0x04F83 to LIM3. 4. The user software writes the control registers to enable SWT3 and begin I/O processing. First, the user software writes two into the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL3[5:4]--Table 34 on page 74) to enable one-dimensional array accesses, writes 0x4 to the SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL3[3:1]), and writes 1 to the AUTOLOAD field (CTL3[0]) so that no further core interaction is needed. The user software writes 0x0029 to CTL3. 5. Finally, the user software sets the DRUN3 field (DMCON0[7]--Table 31 on page 71) to enable SWT3 destination transfers. The user software writes 0x0080 to DMCON0. The DMAU begins processing the SWT3 input channel and performs the following steps: 1. It receives data from SIU1 and writes it to the singleword TPRAM1 location pointed to by DADD3 (0x00101000). This data is the first input sample for the first buffer (ROW = 0 and COL = 0). 2. It increments DADD3 by one, so DADD3 contains 0x00101001 and points to the second input sample for the first buffer (ROW = 1 and COL = 0). It updates SCNT3 by incrementing the row counter, so SCNT3 contains 0x00080. 3. It receives data from SIU1 and writes it to the singleword TPRAM1 location pointed to by DADD3 (0x00101001). The DMAU continues processing in this manner until it fills row 159 of column 0. At this point, ROW = LASTROW and COL = 0. Because this condition is met and SIGCON[2:0] = 0x4, the DMAU asserts the DDINT3 interrupt to CORE1. CORE1 can begin processing the first buffer while the DMAU continues to fill the second buffer.
98
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.13 Direct Memory Access Unit (DMAU) (continued)
4.13.9 Programming Examples (continued) 4.13.9.3 MMT Example This example illustrates the use of MMT4 to move a source block of 100 rows or elements (r = 100) in TPRAM0 to a destination block in TPRAM1, as Figure 25 illustrates. For this example, the source address in TPRAM0 is 0x01000 and the destination address in TPRAM1 is 0x02000.
Memory-to-Memory Block Transfer
SOURCE ARRAY TRANSFER (SADD4) 0x0001000 0x0001002 ROW =0 ROW =1 COL=0
DESTINATION ARRAY ROW=0 ROW=1 COL=0 0x0102000 (DADD4) 0x0102002 TRANSFER 1/2 COMPLETE
ROW=49
ROW=49
ROW=99
ROW =99
Figure 25. Memory-to-Memory Block Transfer The user software running in one of the cores must perform the following steps to properly initialize MMT4: 1. The user software writes the source address (SADD4--Table 37 on page 77) with the top of the output (source) block located in TPRAM0. The user software writes 0x00001000 to SADD4. 2. The user software writes the destination address (DADD4--Table 37 on page 77) with the top of the input (destination) block located in TPRAM1. The user software writes 0x00102000 to DADD4. 3. The user software clears the source and destination counter registers SCNT4 and DCNT4 (Table 39 on page 78 and Table 41 on page 79). 4. The user software initializes the limit register (LIM4--Table 43 on page 80) with the dimensions of the array. The number of rows (or elements) is 100, so the user software writes 99 (r - 1) into the LASTROW[12:0] field (LIM4[19:7] = 0x63). The number of columns is one, so the user software writes zero into the LASTCOL[6:0] field (LIM4[6:0]). The user software writes 0x03180 to LIM4. 5. The user software writes the control registers to enable MMT4 and begin block processing. First, the user software writes two into the POSTMOD[1:0] field (CTL4[5:4]--Table 36 on page 76) to enable pointer and counter update operations, and writes 0x1 to the SIGCON[2:0] field (CTL4[3:1]). The user software writes 0x0022 to CTL4. 6. Finally, the user software sets the SLKA4 field (DMCON0[8]--Table 31 on page 71) to enable source lookahead, sets the XSIZE4 field (DMCON0[12]) to transfer 32-bit words, and sets the TRIGGER4 field (DMCON0[10]) to initiate MMT4 block transfers. The user software writes 0x1500 to DMCON0. The DMAU begins processing the MMT4 channel. For each read operation from TPRAM0 starting at address 0x01000, the DMAU increments SADD4 by two and increments the SROW[12:0] field of SCNT4 by one. The DMAU performs multiple fetches from TPRAM0 and places the data into the source look-ahead buffer. For each write operation to TPRAM1 starting at address 0x02000, the DMAU increments DADD4 by two and increments the SROW[12:0] field of DCNT4 by one. Because SIGCON[2:0] = 0x1, the DMAU interrupts the cores when the transfer is half complete (DROW[12:0] = LASTROW/2 = LASTROW[12:0]>>1 = 0x31 or DCNT4 = 0x1880). The ISR then changes SIGCON[2:0] to 0x4 to cause the DMAU to interrupt the cores again when the transfer is complete (DROW[12:0] = LASTROW[12:0] or DCNT4 = LIM4 = 0x3180).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
99
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI)
The system and external memory interface (SEMI) is the DSP16411 interface to external memory and memory-mapped off-chip peripherals:
!
The SEMI provides the ability to enable or disable bus hold circuits on the address and data pins.
These features are controlled via a combination of SEMI pins and control registers. Some additional features of the SEMI are the following:
!
The SEMI arbitrates and prioritizes accesses from both cores and from the DMAU. The SEMI allows the cores to boot from internal or external memory controlled by the state of an input pin. The SEMI controls the internal system bus, which allows the cores, the DMAU, and the PIU to access the shared internal I/O memory component. This component includes the SLM and the internal memory-mapped registers within the DMAU, SIU0, SIU1, PIU, and SEMI.
The SEMI supports a maximum total external memory size of 18 Mwords (16-bit words) through a combination of an address bus, an address bus extension, and decoded enables. The SEMI can configure the external data bus as either 16 bits or 32 bits. The SEMI can support a mix of asynchronous memory and synchronous, pipelined ZBT (zero bus turnaround) SRAMs1. The SEMI provides support for bus arbitration logic for shared-memory systems. The SEMI provides programmable enable assertion, setup, and hold times for external asynchronous memory.
!
!
!
!
!
!
Figure 26 depicts the internal and external interfaces to the SEMI. The SEMI interfaces directly to the X-memory space buses and Y-memory space buses for both cores and to the DMAU's external Z-memory space buses. This allows:
SEMI Interface Block Diagram
DSP16411
YDB CORE1 YAB XDB XAB YDB YAB CORE0 XDB XAB ZEDB DMAU ZEAB ZSEG SYSTEM BUS (TO SLM, PIU, SIU0, AND SIU1) SAB SDB 32 20 32 20 32 20 32 20 32 20 4 YDB1 YAB1 XDB1 XAB1 YDB0 YAB0 XDB0
EXTERNAL SIGNALS EYMODE ED[31:0] EA[18:0] ESEG[3:0] ERAMN EROMN EION ENABLES AND STROBES ADDRESS AND DATA
SEMI
XAB0 ZEDB ZEAB ZSEG SAB
ERWN[1:0] ESIZE ERTYPE EXM ERDY EREQN EACKN BUS ARBITRATION CONFIGURATION
SDB ECKO CLOCK
Figure 26. SEMI Interface Block Diagram
1 If asynchronous and synchronous memories share the SEMI interface, ECKO must be configured for CLK/2. See Table 61 on page 112 and Table 62 on page 113.
100
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.1 External Interface Table 51 provides an overview of the SEMI pins. These pins are described in detail in the remainder of this section. Table 51. Overview of SEMI Pins
Function Configuration Pin ESIZE Type I Size of external SEMI data bus: ESIZE = 0 selects 16-bit data bus. ESIZE = 1 selects 32-bit data bus. EROM type: ERTYPE = 0 selects asynchronous memory for the EROM component. ERTYPE = 1 selects synchronous pipelined ZBT SRAM for the EROM component. Boot source: EXM = 0 selects IROM. EXM = 1 selects EROM. External request for SEMI bus (negative assertion). SEMI acknowledge for external request (negative assertion). External device ready. Used to stall an asynchronous access. ERAM component enable (negative assertion). EROM component enable (negative assertion). EIO component enable (negative assertion). External read/write not: If ESIZE = 0 (16-bit external bus): ERWN1: Inactive (logic high). ERWN0: Write enable (negative assertion). If ESIZE = 1 (32-bit external bus): ERWN1: Odd word (least significant 16 bits) write enable (negative assertion). ERWN0: Even word (most significant 16 bits) write enable (negative assertion). External clock. Can be programmed as CKI, CLK, CLK/2, CLK/4, or logic 0. Bidirectional 32-bit external data bus. External address bus bits 18--1. If ESIZE = 0: External address bus bit 0. If ESIZE = 1 and the external component is synchronous: Write strobe (negative assertion). External segment address. This pin determines the mode of the external data bus. It must be static and tied to VSS (if the SEMI is used) or VDD2 (if the SEMI is not used). If EYMODE = 0, the external data bus ED[31:0] operates normally as described above. If EYMODE = 1, ED[31:0] are statically configured as outputs (regardless of the state of RSTN) and must not be connected externally. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. Description
ERTYPE
I
EXM
I
Bus Arbitration for Asynchronous Memory Enables and Strobes
EREQN EACKN ERDY ERAMN EROMN EION ERWN[1:0]
I O I O/Z O/Z O/Z O/Z
External Clock Address and Data
ECKO ED[31:0] EA[18:1] EA0
O I/O O/Z O/Z
ESEG[3:0] EYMODE
O/Z I
These address and data bus pins contain internal bus hold circuits. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. The EROM component is synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic 1. The ERAM component is synchronous if the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is set, and the EIO component is synchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is set. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
101
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.1 External Interface (continued) 4.14.1.1 Configuration The SEMI configuration pins are inputs that are individually tied high or low based on system requirements. The ESIZE and ERTYPE pins reflect the configuration of the external memory system. The EXM pin specifies the memory boot area for the DSP16000 cores. Table 52 details the SEMI configuration pins. Table 52. Configuration Pins for the SEMI External Interface
F
Pin Value ESIZE 0 Configures external data bus as 16 bits: (input) ! ED[31:16] is active and ED[15:0] is 3-state.
! !
Description
EA[18:0] provides the address. For a single-word (16-bit) access, the SEMI places the address onto EA[18:0]: -- For a read, the SEMI transfers the word from ED[31:16]. -- For a write, the SEMI drives the word onto ED[31:16] and asserts ERWN0.
1
For a double-word (32-bit) access, the SEMI performs two single-word (16-bit) accesses: -- First, the SEMI accesses the most significant half of the double word at the original address (see singleword (16-bit) access described above). -- Second, the SEMI increments the address and accesses the least significant half of the double word (see single-word (16-bit) access described above). Configures external data bus as 32 bits:
! ! !
EA[18:1] provides the even address. For a single-word (16-bit) access to an even location: -- For a read, the SEMI transfers the word from ED[31:16] and ignores ED[15:0]. -- For a write, the SEMI drives the word onto ED[31:16] and asserts ERWN0. For a single-word (16-bit) access to an odd location: -- For a read, the SEMI transfers the word from ED[15:0] and ignores ED[31:16]. -- For a write, the SEMI drives the word onto ED[15:0] asserts ERWN1. For a double-word (32-bit) aligned access, i.e., an access to an even address: -- For a read, the SEMI transfers the double word from ED[31:0]. -- For a write, the SEMI drives the double word onto ED[31:0] and asserts ERWN0 and ERWN1.
!
!
ERTYPE (input)
0 1
EXM (input)
0 1
For a double-word (32-bit) misaligned access, the SEMI performs two single-word (16-bit) accesses: -- First, the SEMI accesses the most significant half of the double word at the original address (see singleword (16-bit) access to an odd location described above). -- Second, the SEMI increments the address and accesses the least significant half of the double word (see single-word (16-bit) access to an even location described above). The EROM component is populated with ROM or asynchronous SRAM, and the SEMI performs asynchronous accesses to the EROM component. The EROM component is populated with synchronous ZBT SRAM, and the SEMI performs synchronous accesses to the EROM component. If EXM is logic low when the RSTN pin makes a low-to-high transition, both cores begin program execution from their internal ROM (IROM) memory at location 0x30000. If EXM is logic high when the RSTN pin makes a low-to-high transition, both cores begin program execution from external ROM (EROM) memory at location 0x80000. The SEMI arbitrates the accesses from the two cores.
!
For a synchronous write, the SEMI also asserts EA0 as a write strobe. The EROM component is synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic high. The ERAM component is synchronous if the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is set. The EIO component is synchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is set. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112.
102
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.1 External Interface (continued) 4.14.1.2 Asynchronous Memory Bus Arbitration The SEMI allows an external device to request direct access to an asynchronous external memory by asserting the EREQN pin. The SEMI acknowledges the external request by asserting its EACKN pin. The SEMI allows an external device to extend the duration of an external asynchronous access by deasserting the ERDY pin. Table 53. Asynchronous Memory Bus Arbitration Pins
Pin EREQN (negativeassertion input) Description An external device asserts EREQN (low) to request direct access to an asynchronous external memory. If the NOSHARE field (ECON1[8]--see Table 61 on page 112) is set, the DSP16411 ignores the request. If NOSHARE is cleared, a minimum of four cycles later the SEMI grants the request by performing the following:
! !
First, the SEMI completes any external access that is already in progress. The SEMI 3-states the address bus and segment address (EA[18:0] and ESEG[3:0]), the data bus (ED[31:0]), and all the external enables and strobes (ERAMN, EROMN, EION, and ERWN[1:0]) until the external device deasserts EREQN. The SEMI continues to drive ECKO. The SEMI acknowledges the request by asserting EACKN.
!
The cores and the DMAU continue processing. If a core or the DMAU attempts to perform an external memory access, it stalls until the external device relinquishes the bus. If the external device deasserts EREQN (changes EREQN from 0 to 1), four cycles later the SEMI deasserts EACKN (changes EACKN from 0 to 1). To avoid external bus contention, the external device must wait for at least ATIMEMAX cycles after it deasserts EREQN (changes EREQN from 0 to 1) before reasserting EREQN (changing EREQN from 1 to 0). The software can read the state of the EREQN pin in the EREQN field (ECON1[4]--see Table 61 on page 112). EACKN (negativeassertion output) ERDY (positiveassertion input) Note: If EREQN is not in use by the application, it must be tied high. The SEMI acknowledges the request of an external device for direct access to an asynchronous external memory by asserting EACKN. See the description of the EREQN pin above for details. The software can read the state of the EACKN pin in the EACKN field (ECON1[5]--see Table 61 on page 112). An external device instructs the SEMI to extend the duration of the current asynchronous external memory access by driving ERDY low. See Section 4.14.5.2 on page 120 for details. The software can read the state of the ERDY pin in the EREADY field (ECON1[6]--see Table 61 on page 112). Note: If this pin is not in use by the application or if all external memory is synchronous, ERDY must be tied high.
ATIMEMAX is the greatest of IATIME (ECON0[11:8]), YATIME (ECON0[7:4]), and XATIME (ECON0[3:0]).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
103
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.1 External Interface (continued) 4.14.1.3 Enables and Strobes The SEMI provides a negative-assertion external memory enable output pin for each of the three external memory components: ERAM, EIO, and EROM. These pins are the active-low enables for the external memory components ERAM (external RAM), EROM (external ROM), and EIO (external I/O). Refer to the memory maps described in Section 4.6 on page 42 and shown in Figures 7, 8, 9, and 10 for details about these memory components. The SEMI provides two negative-assertion write strobe output pins, ERWN[1:0]. Table 54 details the SEMI enables and strobe pins. The SEMI 3-states the enables and strobes if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). Table 54. Enable and Strobe Pins for the SEMI External Interface
Pin Value Description ERAMN 0 The SEMI is selecting the ERAM memory component for an access. The SEMI asserts this enable (negativefor a duration based on whether the ERAM memory component is configured as asynchronous or assertion output) synchronous:
!
If the ERAM memory component is configured as asynchronous (the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]--see Table 61 on page 112) is cleared), the SEMI asserts ERAMN for the number of CLK cycles specified by the YATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[7:4]--see Table 60 on page 111).
1 Z EION (negativeassertion output) 0
If the ERAM memory component is configured as synchronous (the YTYPE field is set), the SEMI asserts ERAMN for one ECKO cycle for a read or write operation. The SEMI is not selecting the ERAM memory component for an access. The SEMI 3-states ERAMN if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). The SEMI is selecting the EIO memory component for an access. The SEMI asserts this enable for a duration based on whether the EIO memory component is configured as asynchronous or synchronous:
! !
If the EIO memory component is configured as asynchronous (the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]--see Table 61 on page 112) is cleared), the SEMI asserts EION for the number of CLK cycles specified by the IATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[11:8]--see Table 60 on page 111).
1 Z EROMN (negativeassertion output) 0
If the EIO memory component is configured as synchronous (the ITYPE field is set), the SEMI asserts EION for one ECKO cycle for a read or write operation. The SEMI is not selecting the EIO memory component for an access. The SEMI 3-states EION if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). The SEMI is selecting the EROM memory component for an access. The SEMI asserts this enable for a duration based on whether the EROM memory component is configured as asynchronous or synchronous:
! !
If the EROM memory component is configured as asynchronous (the ERTYPE pin is low), the SEMI asserts EROMN for the number of CLK cycles specified by the XATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[3:0]--see Table 60 on page 111).
1 Z
If the EROM memory component is configured as synchronous (the ERTYPE pin is high), the SEMI asserts EROMN for one ECKO cycle for a read or write operation. The SEMI is not selecting the EROM memory component for a read access. The SEMI 3-states EROMN if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103).
!
If any memory component is configured as synchronous, ECKO must be programmed as CLK/2 or CLK/4 (see the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields of ECON1--Table 61 on page 112). The SEMI can write the EROM component only if the WEROM field (ECON1[11]--see Table 61 on page 112) is set.
104
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.1 External Interface (continued) 4.14.1.3 Address and Data (continued) Table 56. Address and Data Bus Pins for the SEMI External Interface (continued)
Pin Value Description ERWN1 0 The external memory is configured for 32-bit data (the ESIZE pin is high), and the SEMI is perform(negativeing an external write access over the least significant half of the external data bus (ED[15:0]). assertion output) 1 The external memory is configured for 16-bit data (the ESIZE pin is low) or the external memory is configured for 32-bit data (the ESIZE pin is high), and the SEMI is not performing an external write access over the least significant half of the external data bus (ED[15:0]). Z The SEMI 3-states ERWN1 if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). ERWN0 0 The SEMI is performing an external write access over the most significant half of the external data (negativebus (ED[31:16]). assertion output) 1 The SEMI is not performing an external write access over the most significant half of the external data bus (ED[31:16]). Z The SEMI 3-states ERWN0 if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103).
If any memory component is configured as synchronous, ECKO must be programmed as CLK/2 or CLK/4 (see the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields of ECON1--Table 61 on page 112). The SEMI can write the EROM component only if the WEROM field (ECON1[11]--see Table 61 on page 112) is set.
4.14.1.4 External Clock The ECKO output pin provides an external clock for interfacing the SEMI to external synchronous memory. The ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields (ECON1[3:0]--Table 61 on page 112) select one of several configurations for ECKO, as specified in Table 55. See Section 4.19 on page 204 for additional detail. Table 55. ECKO Output Clock Pin Configuration
ECKOB[1:0] ECON1[3] ECON1[2] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 ECKOA[1:0] ECON1[1] ECON1[0] 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X X X X X X State CLK/2 CLK CKI 0 Reserved Reserved CLK/4 ECKO Pin Description Frequency of CLK divided by two. Frequency of CLK. Input clock pin. Logic zero. -- -- Frequency of CLK divided by four.
Default after reset. After reset, CLK = CKI, so ECKO = CKI/2. CLK is the internal (core) clock. See Section 4.17 on page 200 for details.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
105
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
The SEMI 3-states ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0] if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). The SEMI provides the ESEG[3:0] pins to expand the size of each of the external memory components, using one of the following methods: 1. ESEG[3:0] can be interpreted by the external memory system as four separate decoded address enable signals. Each ESEG[3:0] pin individually selects one of four segments for each memory component. This results in four glueless 512 Kword (1 Mbyte) ERAM segments, four glueless 512 Kword (1 Mbyte) EROM segments, and four glueless 128 Kword (256 Kbytes) EIO segments. 2. ESEG[3:0] can be interpreted by the external memory system as an extension of the address bus, i.e., the ESEG[3:0] pins can be concatenated with the EAB[18:0] pins to form a 23-bit address. This results in one glueless 8 Mword (16 Mbytes) ERAM segment, one glueless 8 Mword (16 Mbytes) EROM segment, and one glueless 2 Mword (4 Mbytes) EIO segment. For external accesses by either core, the SEMI places the contents of a field in one of four segment address extension registers onto the ESEG[3:0] pins. The four segment address extension registers are described in Section 4.14.4.3 on page 114. For external accesses by the DMAU or PIU, the contents of address registers within those units determine the state of the ESEG[3:0] pins. See Table 56, beginning on page 107, for more detail.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.1 External Interface (continued) 4.14.1.5 Address and Data The SEMI provides a 32-bit external data bus, ED[31:0]. If the external memory is configured for 16-bit data (the ESIZE input pin is low), the SEMI uses only the upper half of the data bus (ED[31:16]). The SEMI provides a 19-bit external address bus, EA[18:0], to select a location within the selected external memory component (ERAM, EIO, or EROM). If the external memory is configured for 16-bit data, the SEMI uses EA[18:0] to address single (16-bit) words within the selected memory component. If the external memory is configured for 32-bit data (the ESIZE input pin is high), the SEMI uses EA[18:1] to address double (32-bit) words within the selected memory component and does not use EA0 as an address bit. For more detail, see Section 4.14.2 and Section 4.14.3 on page 109. Note: The data and address bus pins (ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0]) contain internal bus hold circuits. If BHEDIS (ECON1[12]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, these bus hold circuits are activated. If BHEDIS = 0 and neither the SEMI nor an external device is driving these pins, the bus hold circuits hold them at their previous valid logic level. This eliminates the need for external pull-up or pull-down resistors on these pins. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details.
106
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.1 External Interface (continued) 4.14.1.5 Address and Data (continued) Table 56 details the address and data buses (ED[31:0]), EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0]) and the EYMODE signal. Table 56. Address and Data Bus Pins for the SEMI External Interface
Pins ED[31:16] (input/output)
!
Description If the external memory is configured for 16-bit data (the ESIZE pin is low), the SEMI uses ED[31:16] for all external accesses. If the external memory is configured for 32-bit data (the ESIZE pin is high), the SEMI uses ED[31:16] if: -- The SEMI is accessing a single word (16 bits) at an even address. -- The SEMI is accessing a double word at an even (aligned) address. -- The SEMI is accessing the least significant half of a double word at an odd (misaligned) double-word address. If the SEMI is not currently performing one of the above types of accesses, it 3-states ED[31:16]. The SEMI 3-states ED[31:16] if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). If the external memory is configured for 32-bit data (the ESIZE pin is high), the SEMI uses ED[15:0] if: -- The SEMI is accessing a single word (16 bits) at an odd address. -- The SEMI is accessing a double word at an even (aligned) address. -- The SEMI is accessing the most significant half of a double word at an odd (misaligned) double-word address. If the SEMI is not currently performing one of the above types of accesses, it 3-states ED[15:0]. The SEMI 3-states ED[15:0] if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). If the external memory is configured for 16-bit data (the ESIZE pin is low), the SEMI places the 18 most significant bits of the 19-bit external address onto EA[18:1]. If the external memory is configured for 32-bit data (the ESIZE pin is high), the SEMI places the 18-bit external address onto EA[18:1]. After an access is complete and before the start of a new access, the SEMI continues to drive EA[18:1] with its current state. The SEMI 3-states EA[18:1] if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). If the external memory is configured for 16-bit data (the ESIZE pin is low), the SEMI places the least significant bit of the 19-bit external address onto EA0. If the external memory is configured for 32-bit data (the ESIZE pin is high), the SEMI does not use EA0 as an address bit: -- If the selected memory component is configured as asynchronous, the SEMI drives EA0 with its previous value. -- If the selected memory component is configured as synchronous, the SEMI drives a negative-assertion write strobe onto EA0 (the SEMI drives EA0 with the logical AND of ERWN1 and ERWN0). The SEMI 3-states EA0 if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103).
!
!
ED[15:0] (input/output)
!
!
EA[18:1] (output)
! ! ! !
EA0 (output)
! !
!
These address and data bus pins contain internal bus hold circuits. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. The EROM component is synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic 1. The ERAM component is synchronous if YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is set. The EIO component is synchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is set. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
107
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.1 External Interface (continued) 4.14.1.3 Enables and Strobes (continued) Table 54. Enable and Strobe Pins for the SEMI External Interface (continued)
Pins ESEG[3:0] (output)
! ! ! ! ! ! !
Description If CORE0 accesses EROM, the SEMI drives ESEG[3:0] with the contents of the XSEG0[3:0] field (EXSEG0[3:0]--see Table 63 on page 114). If CORE1 accesses EROM, the SEMI drives ESEG[3:0] with the contents of the XSEG1[3:0] field (EXSEG1[3:0]--see Table 64 on page 114). If CORE0 accesses ERAM, the SEMI drives ESEG[3:0] with the contents of the YSEG0[3:0] field (EYSEG0[3:0]--see Table 65 on page 115). If CORE1 accesses ERAM, the SEMI drives ESEG[3:0] with the contents of the YSEG1[3:0] field (EYSEG1[3:0]--see Table 66 on page 115). If CORE0 accesses EIO, the SEMI drives ESEG[3:0] with the contents of the ISEG0[3:0] field (EYSEG0[7:4]--see Table 65 on page 115). If CORE1 accesses EIO, the SEMI drives ESEG[3:0] with the contents of the ISEG1[3:0] field (EYSEG1[7:4]--see Table 66 on page 115). If one of the DMAU SWT0--3 or MMT4--5 channels accesses EROM, ERAM, or EIO, the SEMI places the contents of the ESEG[3:0] field (SADD0--5[26:23] for read operations and DADD0--5[26:23] for write operations--see Table 37 on page 77) onto its ESEG[3:0] pins. If the PIU accesses EROM, ERAM, or EIO via the DMAU bypass channel, the SEMI places the contents of the ESEG[3:0] field (PA[26:23]--see Table 80 on page 138) onto its ESEG[3:0] pins. After an access is complete and before the start of a new access, the SEMI continues to drive ESEG[3:0] with its current state.
! ! !
EYMODE (input)
The SEMI 3-states ESEG[3:0] if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin in Table 53 on page 103). This pin determines the mode of the external data bus. It must be static and tied to VSS (if the SEMI is used) or VDD2 (if the SEMI is not used). If EYMODE = 0, the external data bus ED[31:0] operates normally as described above. If EYMODE = 1, ED[31:0] are statically configured as outputs (regardless of the state of RSTN) and must not be connected externally. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details.
These address and data bus pins contain internal bus hold circuits. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. The EROM component is synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic 1. The ERAM component is synchronous if YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is set. The EIO component is synchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is set. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112.
108
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.2 16-Bit External Bus Accesses Regardless of the configuration of the external data bus via the ESIZE pin, each access by a core or the DMAU can be a 16-bit (single-word) or 32-bit (double-word) access. Table 57 summarizes each type of access for a 16-bit external bus configuration (ESIZE = 0). Table 57. 16-Bit External Bus Configuration
Internal Address Even or Odd Even (aligned) Type of Access Single-Word Read Single-Word Write Double-Word Read Double-Word Write Odd (misaligned) Double-Word Read Double-Word Write External Address Even or Odd EA[18:0] EA[18:0] Even EA[18:0] Odd EA[18:0] Even EA[18:0] Odd EA[18:0] Odd EA[18:0] Even EA[18:0] Odd EA[18:0] Even EA[18:0] External Data ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ERWN1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ERWN0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
The SEMI performs two separate back-to-back 16-bit accesses, even address (most significant data) first and odd address (least significant data) second. The SEMI performs two separate 16-bit accesses, odd address (most significant data) first and even address (least significant data) second. The two accesses are not necessarily back-to-back, i.e., they can be separated by other accesses.
4.14.3 32-Bit External Bus Accesses Regardless of the configuration of the external data bus via the ESIZE pin, each access by a core or the DMAU can be a 16-bit (single-word) or 32-bit (double-word) access. Table 58 summarizes each type of access for a 32-bit external bus configuration (ESIZE = 1). Table 58. 32-Bit External Bus Configuration
Internal Address Even Odd Even (aligned) Odd (misaligned) Type of Access Single-Word Read Single-Word Write Single-Word Read Single-Word Write Double-Word Read Double-Word Write Double-Word Read Double-Word Write External Address EA[18:1] EA[18:1] EA[18:1] EA[18:1] EA[18:1] EA[18:1] EA[18:1] EA[18:1] EA[18:1] EA[18:1] External Data ED[31:16] ED[31:16] ED[15:0] ED[15:0] ED[31:0] ED[31:0] ED[15:0] ED[31:16] ED[15:0] ED[31:16] ERWN1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 ERWN0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
For a write operation to a synchronous memory component, the SEMI also drives the EA0 pin low for use as a write enable. The EROM component is synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic 1. The ERAM component is synchronous if the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is set. The EIO component is synchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is set. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112. The SEMI performs two separate 16-bit accesses. It accesses the most significant data in the odd address first, and then the least significant data in the even address second. The two accesses are not necessarily back-to-back, i.e., they can be separated by other accesses.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
109
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.4 Registers There are six 16-bit memory-mapped control registers that configure the operation of the SEMI, as shown in Table 59. Table 59. SEMI Memory-Mapped Registers
Register Name ECON0 ECON1 EXSEG0 EYSEG0 EXSEG1 EYSEG1 Address 0x40000 0x40002 0x40004 0x40006 0x40008 0x4000A Description SEMI Control SEMI Status and Control External X Segment Register for CORE0 External Y Segment Register for CORE0 External X Segment Register for CORE1 External Y Segment Register for CORE1 Size (Bits) 16 16 16 R/W R/W R/W R/W Type Control Control Address Reset Value 0x0FFF 0 0
Some bits in this register are read-only or write-only. With the following exceptions: ECON1[6,4] are a reflection of the state of external pins and are unaffected by reset, and ECON1[5] is set.
110
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.4 Registers (continued) 4.14.4.1 ECON0 Register ECON0 determines the setup, hold, and assertion times for the three external memory component enables. The programmer needs to use the ECON0 register only if one or more of the external memory components (ERAM, EROM, or EIO) is configured as asynchronous (see Section 4.14.4.2 on page 112 and Section 4.14.1.1 on page 102). Table 60. ECON0 (External Control 0) Register The memory address for this register is 0x40000.
15 14 13 12 11--8 7--4 3--0
WHOLD Bit 15 Field
RHOLD Value 0 1
WSETUP
RSETUP
IATIME[3:0] Description
YATIME[3:0]
XATIME[3:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0
14
13
12
11--8
7--4
3--0
The SEMI does not extend the write cycle. The SEMI extends the write cycle for one CLK cycle, applies the target address, deasserts all enables, deasserts all write strobes, and 3-states ED[31:0]. RHOLD 0 The SEMI does not extend the read cycle. 1 The SEMI extends the read cycle for one CLK cycle, applies the target address, and deasserts all enables. WSETUP 0 The SEMI does not delay the assertion of the write strobe, the memory enable, and the assertion of ED[31:0] for write operations. 1 The SEMI delays the assertion of the write strobe, the memory enable, and ED[31:0] during a write cycle for one CLK cycle. During the setup time, the SEMI applies the target address to EA[18:0], deasserts all enables and ERWN signals, and 3-states ED[31:0]. RSETUP 0 The SEMI does not delay the assertion of the memory enable for read operations. 1 The SEMI delays the assertion of the memory enable during a read cycle for one CLK cycle. During the setup time, the SEMI applies the target address to EA[18:0], deasserts all enables and ERWN signals, and 3-states ED[31:0]. IATIME[3:0] 0--15 The duration in CLK cycles (1--15) that the SEMI asserts EION for an asynchronous access to the EIO component. A value of 0 or 1 corresponds to a 1 CLK cycle assertion time. YATIME[3:0] 0--15 The duration in CLK cycles (1--15) that the SEMI asserts ERAMN for an asynchronous access to the ERAM component. A value of 0 or 1 corresponds to a 1 CLK cycle assertion time. XATIME[3:0] 0--15 The duration in CLK cycles (1--15) that the SEMI asserts EROMN for an asynchronous access to the EROM component. A value of 0 or 1 corresponds to a 1 CLK cycle assertion time.
WHOLD
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W
0xF
R/W
0xF
R/W
0xF
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
111
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.4 Registers (continued) 4.14.4.2 ECON1 Register The ECON1 register (Table 61) reports status information and controls additional features of the SEMI. Table 61. ECON1 (External Control 1) Register The memory address for this register is 0x40002.
15--14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Reserved
7 6
BHPDIS
5
BHEDIS
4
WEROM
3--2
ITYPE
YTYPE
1--0
NOSHARE
Reserved Bit 15--14 13 Field
EREADY Value 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
EACKN
EREQN
ECKOB[1:0] Description
ECKOA[1:0]
Reserved BHPDIS
12
BHEDIS
11
WEROM
10 9 8 7 6
ITYPE YTYPE NOSHARE Reserved EREADY
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
5
EACKN
0 1
4
EREQN
0 1
R/W Reset Value Reserved--write with zero. R/W 0 Enable the bus hold circuits on the PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0] pins (see Section 10.1 R/W 0 on page 268 for details). Disable the bus hold circuits on the PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0] pins. Enable the bus hold circuits on the ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0] pins (see R/W 0 Section 10.1 on page 268 for details). Disable the bus hold circuits on the ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0] pins. The external portion of Y-memory and Z-memory space is ERAM (see R/W 0 Section 4.6.3 on page 43). The external portion of Y-memory and Z-memory space is EROM (see Section 4.6.3 on page 43). EION is asynchronous SRAM. R/W 0 EION is pipelined, synchronous SRAM. ERAMN is asynchronous SRAM. R/W 0 ERAMN is pipelined, synchronous SRAM. SEMI works as a bus-shared interface and asserts EACKN in response to EREQN. R/W 0 SEMI ignores requests for the external bus and does not assert EACKN. Reserved--write with zero. R/W 0 The ERDY pin indicates an external device is requesting the SEMI to extend the R P current asynchronous external memory access (see Table 53 on page 103). The ERDY pin indicates an external device is not requesting the SEMI to extend the current asynchronous external memory access (see Table 53 on page 103). The EACKN pin indicates the SEMI acknowledges a request by an external device R 1 for access to external memory (see Table 53 on page 103). The EACKN pin indicates the SEMI does not acknowledge a request by an external device for access to external memory (see Table 53 on page 103). The EREQN pin indicates an external device is requesting access to external R P memory (see Table 53 on page 103). The EREQN pin indicates an external device is not requesting access to external memory (see Table 53 on page 103).
The state (P) is a reflection of the state of the external pins and is unaffected by reset. The state of this field is ignored unless ECKOB[1:0] = 00.
112
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.4 Registers (continued) 4.14.4.2 ECON1 Register (continued) Table 61. ECON1 Register (continued)
Bit 3--2 Field ECKOB[1:0] Value 00 01 10 11 00 01 10 11 Description The ECKOA[1:0] field determines the configuration of the ECKO pin. Reserved. Reserved. The ECKO pin is CLK/4 for synchronous operation of the SEMI. The ECKO pin is CLK/2 for synchronous operation of the SEMI. The ECKO pin is the internal clock CLK. The ECKO pin is the buffered input clock pin CKI. The ECKO pin is held low. R/W Reset Value R/W 00
1--0
ECKOA[1:0]
R/W
00
The state (P) is a reflection of the state of the external pins and is unaffected by reset. The state of this field is ignored unless ECKOB[1:0] = 00.
The ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields (ECON1[3:0]) determine the state of the ECKO output clock pin as summarized in Table 62. If any of the external memory components (ERAM, EROM, or EIO) are configured as synchronous1, the ECKO pin must be configured as CLK/2 or CLK/4. Asynchronous devices can be used with ECKO = CLK or ECKO = CLK/2 modes. If asynchronous and synchronous memories share the SEMI interface, ECKO must be configured for CLK/2. Table 62. ECKO Output Clock Pin Configuration
ECKOB[1:0] ECON1[3] ECON1[2] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 ECKOA[1:0] ECON1[1] ECON1[0] 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X X X X X X State CLK/2 CLK CKI 0 Reserved Reserved CLK/4 ECKO Pin Description Frequency of CLK divided by two. Frequency of CLK. Input clock pin. Logic zero. -- -- Frequency of CLK divided by four.
Default after reset. After reset, CLK = CKI, so ECKO = CKI/2. CLK is the internal (core) clock. See Section 4.17 on page 200 for details.
1 The EROM component is synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic 1. The ERAM component is synchronous if the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is set. The EIO component is synchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is set. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
113
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
system as an address extension (EA[22:19], for example) or as decoded enables. The SEMI drives bits 3:0 of the 16-bit EXSEG0 register onto the ESEG[3:0] pins at the same time as it drives the address onto EA[18:0] for an external ROM (EROM) access from CORE0. The SEMI drives bits 3:0 (for ERAM) or bits 7:4 (for EIO) of the 16-bit EYSEG0 register onto the ESEG[3:0] pins at the same time as it drives the address onto EA[18:0] for an external RAM (ERAM or EIO) access from CORE0. The SEMI drives bits 3:0 of the 16-bit EXSEG1 register onto the ESEG[3:0] pins at the same time as it drives the address onto EA[18:0] for an external ROM (EROM) access from CORE1. The SEMI drives bits 3:0 (for ERAM) or bits 7:4 (for EIO) of the 16-bit EYSEG1 register onto the ESEG[3:0] pins at the same time as it drives the address onto EA[18:0] for an external RAM (ERAM or EIO) access from CORE1.
4 4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.4 Registers (continued) 4.14.4.3 Segment Registers The external program and data memory components (EROM, ERAM, and EIO) can each be expanded for each core through a combination of registers and pins. The ESEG[3:0] pins (see Section 4.14.1 on page 101) reflect the value of the EXSEG0, EXSEG1, EYSEG0, or EYSEG1 external segment registers for a given external access. A user's program executing in either core can write to these registers to expand the external ERAM and EROM data components. The value written to any one of these registers is driven onto the ESEG[3:0] pins for a corresponding memory component as described below, and can be interpreted by the
Table 63. EXSEG0 (CORE0 External X Segment Address Extension) Register The memory address for this register is 0x40004.
15--4 3--0
Reserved Bit 15--4 3--0 Field Description Reserved Reserved--write with zero. XSEG0[3:0] External segment address extension for X-memory accesses to EROM by CORE0.
XSEG0[3:0] R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0
Table 64. EXSEG1 (CORE1 External X Segment Address Extension) Register The memory address for this register is 0x40008.
15--4 3--0
Reserved Bit 15--4 3--0 Field Description Reserved Reserved--write with zero. XSEG1[3:0] External segment address extension for X-memory accesses to EROM by CORE1.
XSEG1[3:0] R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0
114
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.4 Registers (continued) 4.14.4.3 Segment Registers (continued) Table 65. EYSEG0 (CORE0 External Y Segment Address Extension) Register The memory address for this register is 0x40006.
15--8 7--4 3--0
Reserved Bit 15--8 7--4 3--0
ISEG0[3:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W
YSEG0[3:0] Reset Value 0 0 0
Field Description Reserved Reserved--write with zero. ISEG0[3:0] External segment address extension for Y-memory accesses to EIO by CORE0. YSEG0[3:0] External segment address extension for Y-memory accesses to ERAM by CORE0.
Table 66. EYSEG1 (CORE1 External Y Segment Address Extension) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4000A.
15--8 7--4 3--0
Reserved Bit 15--8 7--4 3--0
ISEG1[3:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W
YSEG1[3:0] Reset Value 0 0 0
Field Description Reserved Reserved--write with zero. ISEG1[3:0] External segment address extension for Y-memory accesses to EIO by CORE1. YSEG1[3:0] External segment address extension for Y-memory accesses to ERAM by CORE1.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
115
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4.14.5.1 Functional Timing The following describes the functional timing for an asynchronous read operation: 1. On a rising edge of the internal clock (CLK), the SEMI asserts ENABLE and drives the read address onto EA. If RSETUP is set, the SEMI asserts ENABLE one CLK cycle later. 2. The SEMI asserts ENABLE for ATIME CLK cycles. 3. The SEMI deasserts ENABLE on a rising edge of CLK and latches the data from ED. 4. The SEMI continues to drive the read address onto EA for a minimum of one CLK cycle to guarantee an address hold time of at least one cycle. If RHOLD is set, the SEMI continues to drive the read address for an additional CLK cycle. The SEMI continues to drive the address until another external memory access is initiated. Another read or a write to the same memory component can immediately follow the read cycle described above. The following describes the functional timing for an asynchronous write operation: 1. On a rising edge of the internal clock (CLK), the SEMI asserts ERWN and drives the write address onto EA. If WSETUP is set, the SEMI asserts ERWN one CLK cycle later. 2. One CLK cycle after the SEMI asserts ERWN, the SEMI asserts ENABLE and drives valid data onto ED to guarantee one CLK cycle of setup time. 3. The SEMI asserts ENABLE for ATIME CLK cycles. 4. The SEMI deasserts ENABLE on a rising edge of CLK. 5. The SEMI continues to drive ED with the write data, drive EA with the write address, and assert ERWN for one additional CLK cycle to guarantee one cycle of hold time. If WHOLD is set, the SEMI continues to drive the write address for an additional CLK cycle. The SEMI continues to drive the address until another external memory access is initiated. Another write to the same memory component can immediately follow the write cycle described above. If a read to the same memory component follows the write cycle described above, the SEMI inserts an idle bus cycle (one CLK cycle).
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory This section describes the functional timing and interfacing for external memory components that are configured as asynchronous. The EROM component is asynchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic 0. The ERAM component is asynchronous if the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is cleared, and the EIO component is asynchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is cleared. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112. In this section:
!
The designation ENABLE refers to the EROMN, ERAMN, or EION pin. The designation ERWN refers to: -- The ERWN0 pin if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The ERWN1 and ERWN0 pins if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high. The designation EA refers to: -- The external address pins EA[18:0] and the external segment address pins ESEG[3:0] if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The external address pins EA[18:1] and the external segment address pins ESEG[3:0] if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high. The designation ED refers to: -- The external data pins ED[31:16] if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The external data pins ED[31:0] if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high. The designation ATIME refers to IATIME (ECON0[11:8]) for accesses to the EIO space, YATIME (ECON0[7:4]) for accesses to the ERAM space, or XATIME (ECON0[3:0]) for accesses to the EROM space. RSETUP refers to the RSETUP field (ECON0[12]--see Table 60 on page 111). RHOLD refers to the RHOLD field (ECON0[14]). WSETUP refers to the WSETUP field (ECON0[13]). WHOLD refers to the WHOLD field (ECON0[15]).
!
!
!
!
!
! ! !
116
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.5.1 Functional Timing (continued) Figures 27 through 30 provide examples of asynchronous memory accesses for various SEMI configurations. These examples assume that the DMAU is performing the external memory accesses. The access rate shown is not achievable if the accesses are performed by one or both cores. For details on SEMI performance for an asynchronous interface, see Section 4.14.7.2 on page 129. For a summary of SEMI performance, see Section 4.14.7.4 on page 133.
Asynchronous Timing
ECKO YATIME ERAMN IATIME EION IATIME YATIME YATIME YATIME YATIME
ERWN
EA
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
ED
Q0 ERAM READ
D1 ERAM WRITE
D2 ERAM WRITE DON'T CARE
Q3
Q4
Q5
D6
ERAM ERAM EIO EIO READ READ READ WRITE IDLE CYCLE: WRITE FOLLOWED IMMEDIATELY BY READ
HIGH-IMPEDANCE OUTPUT
Notes: It is assumed that ECKO is programmed as CLK, i.e., the ECKOB[1:0] field (ECON1[3:2]--Table 61 on page 112) is programmed to 0x0 and the ECKOA[1:0] field (ECON1[1:2]) is programmed to 0x1. It is assumed that the YATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[7:4]--Table 60 on page 111) is programmed to 0x2 and the IATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[11:8]) is programmed to 0x3. It is assumed that the DMAU is performing the external memory accesses. The access rate shown is not achievable if the accesses are performed by one or both cores. ED is high-impedance when not driven if the bus hold circuits are not enabled. See Section 10.1 on page 268.
Figure 27. Asynchronous Memory Cycles
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
117
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.5.1 Functional Timing (continued)
Asynchronous Memory Cycles (RSETUP = 1, WSETUP = 1)
ECKO YATIME ERAM RSETUP EIO RSETUP ERWN WSETUP EA ED A0 Q0 ERAM READ A1
D1 D1
YATIME
YATIME
YATIME RSETUP
IATIME
IATIME
WSETUP A2
D2 D2
WSETUP A3 Q3 A4 Q4 A5 D5
ERAM WRITE
ERAM WRITE
ERAM EIO EIO READ READ WRITE IDLE CYCLE: WRITE FOLLOWED IMMEDIATELY BY READ
HIGH-IMPEDANCE OUTPUT
Notes: It is assumed that ECKO is programmed as CLK, i.e., the ECKOB[1:0] field (ECON1[3:2]--Table 61 on page 112) is programmed to 0x0 and the ECKOA[1:0] field (ECON1[1:2]) is programmed to 0x1. It is assumed that the YATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[7:4]--Table 60 on page 111) is programmed to 0x2 and the IATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[11:8]) is programmed to 0x3. It is assumed that the DMAU is performing the external memory accesses. The access rate shown is not achievable if the accesses are performed by one or both cores. ED is high-impedance when not driven if the bus hold circuits are not enabled. See Section 10.1 on page 268.
Figure 28. Asynchronous Memory Cycles (RSETUP = 1, WSETUP = 1)
118
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.5.1 Functional Timing (continued)
Asynchronous Memory Cycles (RHOLD = 1, WHOLD = 1)
ECKO YATIME ERAM IATIME EIO ERWN EA A0 A1 RHOLD ED Q0 ERAM READ D1 ERAM WRITE WHOLD D2 ERAM WRITE A2 WHOLD Q3 A3 A4 RHOLD Q4 RHOLD D5 A5 WHOLD IATIME YATIME YATIME YATIME
ERAM EIO EIO READ READ WRITE IDLE CYCLE: WRITE FOLLOWED IMMEDIATELY BY READ
HIGH-IMPEDANCE OUTPUT Notes: It is assumed that ECKO is programmed as CLK, i.e., the ECKOB[1:0] field (ECON1[3:2]--Table 61 on page 112) is programmed to 0x0 and the ECKOA[1:0] field (ECON1[1:2]) is programmed to 0x1. It is assumed that the YATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[7:4]--Table 60 on page 111) is programmed to 0x2 and the IATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[11:8]) is programmed to 0x3. It is assumed that the DMAU is performing the external memory accesses. The access rate shown is not achievable if the accesses are performed by one or both cores. ED is high-impedance when not driven if the bus hold circuits are not enabled. See Section 10.1 on page 268.
Figure 29. Asynchronous Memory Cycles (RHOLD = 1, WHOLD = 1)
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
119
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.5.2 Extending Access Time Via the ERDY Pin An external device can delay the completion of an external memory access to an asynchronous memory component by control of the ERDY pin (see Figure 30). If driven low by the external device, the SEMI extends the current external memory access that is already in progress. To guarantee proper operation, ERDY must be driven low at least 4 CLK cycles before the end of the access and the enable must be programmed for at least 5 CLK cycles of assertion (via the YATIME, XATIME, or IATIME field of ECON0--see Table 60 on page 111). The SEMI ignores the state of ERDY prior to 4 CLK cycles before the end of the access. The access is extended by 4 CLK cycles after ERDY is driven high. The state of ERDY is readable in the EREADY field (ECON1[6]--see Table 61 on page 112). This feature of the SEMI provides a convenient interface to peripherals that have a variable access time or require an access time greater than 15 CLK cycles in duration.
Use of ERDY Pin to Extend Asynchronous Accesses
ATIME SEMI SAMPLES ERDY PIN END OF ACCESS (UNSTALLED)
N x T END OF ACCESS (STALLED)
ECKO 4T ENABLE
ERDY N x T 4T
ATIME must be programmed as greater than or equal to five CLK cycles. Otherwise, the SEMI ignores the state of ERDY. T = internal clock period (CLK). N must be greater than or equal to one, i.e., ERDY must be held low for at least one CLK cycle after the SEMI samples ERDY. ECKO reflects CLK, i.e., ECON1[1:0] = 1. The designation ENABLE refers to one of the following pins: EROMN, ERAMN, or EION.
Figure 30. Use of ERDY Pin to Extend Asynchronous Accesses
120
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.5.2 Extending Access Time Via the ERDY Pin (continued) Figure 31 illustrates an example read and write operation using the ERDY pin to extend the accesses.
Use of ERDY Pin to Extend Asynchronous Accesses
ECKO ERAMN YATIME SAMPLE POINT ERDY 4T ERWN EA ED ERAM READ HIGH-IMPEDANCE OUTPUT DON'T CARE Notes: It is assumed that ECKO is programmed as CLK, i.e., the ECKOB[1:0] field (ECON1[3:2]--Table 61 on page 112) is programmed to 0x0 and the ECKOA[1:0] field (ECON1[1:2]) is programmed to 0x1. It is assumed that the YATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[7:4]--Table 60 on page 111) is programmed to 0x7. ED is high-impedance when not driven if the bus hold circuits are not enabled. See Section 10.1 on page 268. A0 Q1 A1 D1 ERAM WRITE 4T STALL YATIME SAMPLE POINT STALL
Figure 31. Example of Using the ERDY Pin
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
121
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.5.3 Interfacing Examples Figures 32 and 33 illustrate two examples of interfacing 16-bit asynchronous SRAMs to the SEMI. The user can individually configure the EROMN, ERAMN, and EION enables to support asynchronous devices. The ERTYPE pin must be at logic low for the EROM component to be configured for asynchronous accesses. Clearing the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) and ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) configures the ERAM and EIO components for asynchronous accesses. The programmer can individually configure the access time (defined as the number of CLK cycles that the enable is asserted) for each enable. The YATIME field (ECON0[7:4]) specifies the number of CLK cycles that the ERAMN enable is asserted. The XATIME field (ECON0[3:0]) specifies the number of CLK cycles that the EROMN enable is asserted. The IATIME field (ECON0[11:8]) specifies the number of CLK cycles that the EION enable is asserted. The range of values for these fields is from 0 to 15 (corresponding to a range of 1 to 15 CLK cycles). A value of 0 or 1 programs a 1 CLK assertion time for the corresponding enable. For a synchronous operation of the SEMI, ECKO must be programmed to operate at CLK or CLK/2. Refer to Table 61 on page 112 and Table 62 on page 113.
122
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.5 Asynchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.5.3 Interfacing Examples (continued)
32-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit Asynchronous SRAMs
DSP16411 SEMI ESIZE ERTYPE EA[16:1] ERWN0 ERAMN ED[31:16] VDD VSS SRAM A[15:0] WE CE DB[15:0] EVEN ADDRESS
SRAM A[15:0] ERWN1 WE CE ED[15:0] DB[15:0] ODD ADDRESS
Figure 32. 32-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit Asynchronous SRAMs
16-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit Asynchronous SRAMs
DSP16411 SEMI ESIZE ERTYPE EA[16:0] ERWN0 ERAMN ED[31:16] VSS VSS SRAM A[16:0] WE CE DB[15:0]
Figure 33. 16-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit Asynchronous SRAMs
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
123
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4.14.6.1 Functional Timing The following describes the functional timing for a synchronous read operation (see Figure 34 on page 125): 1. On a rising edge of the external output clock (ECKO), the SEMI drives the read address onto EA and asserts ENABLE for one ECKO cycle. 2. On the rising edge of the second ECKO cycle, the SEMI deasserts ENABLE. 3. On the rising edge of the third ECKO cycle, a new access can begin because synchronous accesses are pipelined. 4. On the rising edge of the fourth ECKO cycle, the SEMI latches the data from ED. The following describes the functional timing for a synchronous write operation (see Figure 34 on page 125): 1. On a rising edge of the external output clock (ECKO), the SEMI drives the write address onto EA and asserts ERWN and ENABLE for one ECKO cycle. 2. On the rising edge of the second ECKO cycle, the SEMI deasserts ENABLE and ERWN. 3. On the rising edge of the third ECKO cycle, a new access can begin because synchronous accesses are pipelined. On this edge, the SEMI drives ED with the write data for one ECKO cycle. 4. On the rising edge of the fourth cycle, the external memory latches the data from ED.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.6 Synchronous Memory This section describes the functional timing and interfacing for external memory components that are configured as synchronous. The EROM component is synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic 1. The ERAM component is synchronous if the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is set, and the EIO component is synchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is set. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112. If any of the external memory components (EROM, ERAM, or EIO) are configured as synchronous, the SEMI external output clock (ECKO) must be programmed as CLK/2 or CLK/4 (see the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields of ECON1[1:0]). After reset, the default state of ECKO is CLK/2. In this section:
!
The designation ENABLE refers to the EROMN, ERAMN, or EION pin. The designation ERWN refers to: -- The ERWN0 pin if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The ERWN1, ERWN0, and EA01 pins if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high. The designation EA refers to: -- The external address pins EA[18:0] and the external segment address pins ESEG[3:0] if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The external address pins EA[18:1] and the external segment address pins ESEG[3:0] if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high. The designation ED refers to: -- The external data pins ED[31:16] if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The external data pins ED[31:0] if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high.
!
!
!
1 The EA0 pin is a strobe only if the bus is configured for 32 bits and the memory is configured as synchronous.
124
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.6 Synchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.6.1 Functional Timing (continued) Figure 34 illustrates an example of synchronous memory accesses. This example assumes that the DMAU is performing the external memory accesses. The access rate shown is not achievable if the accesses are performed by one or both cores. For details on SEMI performance for a synchronous interface, see Section 4.14.7.3 on page 131. For a summary of SEMI performance, see Section 4.14.7.4 on page 133.
Synchronous Timing
CLK ECKO ERAMN EION ERWN EA ED ERAM READ ERAM WRITE ERAM WRITE HIGH-IMPEDANCE OUTPUT ED is high-impedance when not driven if the bus hold circuits are not enabled. See Section 10.1 on page 268. A0 Q0 A1 D1 A2 D2 ERAM READ ERAM READ EIO READ A3 A4 Q3 A5 Q4 A6 Q5 EIO WRITE D6
Figure 34. Synchronous Memory Cycles
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
125
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
the ERAM and EIO components for synchronous accesses. Figure 35 illustrates interfacing the SEMI to a 16-bit synchronous, pipelined ZBT SRAM. In this example: 1. The SEMI address bus (EA[17:0]) is connected to the SRAM's address bus (A[17:0]). One of the SEMI ESEG[3:0] pins can be optionally connected to the SRAM's active-high chip select input (CE2). 2. The upper 16 bits of the SEMI data bus (ED[31:16]) are connected to the SRAM's bidirectional data bus (DQ[15:0]). 3. The SEMI external clock (ECKO) is programmed for operation at CLK/2 or CLK/4, and is connected to the SRAM's CLK input. 4. The SEMI external data component enable (ERAMN) and external read/write strobe (ERWN0) are connected to the SRAM's active-low chip enable and write enable inputs, respectively. 5. The SRAM's active-low ADV/LD must be tied low. 6. The SEMI's ESIZE pin is tied low to configure the data bus for 16-bit accesses.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.6 Synchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.6.2 Interfacing Examples If any of the external memory components (EROM, ERAM, or EIO) are configured as synchronous, the SEMI external output clock (ECKO) must be programmed as CLK/2 or CLK/4 (see the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields of ECON1--Table 61 on page 112). If the SEMI interface contains a mix of asynchronous and synchronous memories, ECKO must be programmed for CLK/2. After reset, the default state of ECKO is CLK/2. Figures 35 and 36 illustrate examples of interfacing 16-bit and 32-bit pipelined synchronous ZBT SRAMs to the SEMI. The programmer can individually configure EROMN, ERAMN, and EION enables to support this type of synchronous device. The ERTYPE pin must be at logic high for the EROM component to be configured for synchronous accesses. Setting the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) and ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) configures
DSP16411 EA[17:0] ECKO ERAMN ERWN0
16-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit ZBT Pipelined Synchronous SRAMs
16-bit SYNCHRONOUS SRAM A[17:0] CLK CE1 WE VSS ADV/LD DQ[15:0] VSS VDD VSS OE CE2 BWa BWb
ED[31:16] ESIZE ERTYPE
ESEG[3:0]
Figure 35. 16-Bit External Interface with 16-Bit Pipelined, Synchronous ZBT SRAMs
126
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.6 Synchronous Memory (continued) 4.14.6.2 Interfacing Examples (continued)
32-Bit External Interface with 32-Bit ZBT Pipelined Synchronous SRAMs
DSP16411 ERTYPE ESIZE EA[17:1] ECKO ERAMN ERWN0 ERWN1 ED[31:24] ED[23:16] ED[15:8] ED[7:0] EA0 VDD VDD VSS
32-bit SYNCHRONOUS SRAM
OE A[16:0] CLK CE BWa BWb BWc BWd DQa[7:0] DQb[7:0] DQc[7:0] DQd[7:0] RW
SEMI is configured for a 32-bit data bus. In this configuration, EA0 is RWN for 32-bit accesses (logical AND of ERWN0 and ERWN1).
Figure 36. 32-Bit External Interface with 32-Bit Pipelined, Synchronous ZBT SRAMs
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
127
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
Section 4.14.7.2, beginning on page 129, and Section 4.14.7.3, beginning on page 131, describe the performance for all combinations. The DMAU source look-ahead feature takes advantage of the DMAU pipeline and allows the DMAU to read source data before completing the previous write to the destination. Section 4.14.7.4 on page 133 shows performance figures with this feature both enabled and disabled. For an MMT channel, each DMAU access consists of a read of the source location and write to the destination location. Therefore, the DMAU performance values stated in this section assume two operations per transfer. 4.14.7.1 System Bus The SEMI controls and arbitrates accesses to internal I/O segment accessed via the system bus. Only 16-bit and aligned 32-bit transfers are permitted via the system bus. The system bus is used to access all the memory-mapped registers in the DMAU, SIU0, SIU1, PIU, and SEMI. See Section 6.2.2 on page 231 for details on the memory-mapped registers. Misaligned 32-bit accesses to internal I/O space cause undefined results. Table 67 specifies the minimum system bus access time for either a single-word (16-bit) or double-word (32-bit) access by a single requester. The SEMI processes system bus accesses by multiple requesters at a maximum rate of one access per CLK cycle. Table 67. System Bus Minimum Access Times
Access Read Write Minimum Access Time 5 x TCLK 2 x TCLK
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.7 Performance The following terms are used in this section:
!
A requester, a core or the DMAU, requests the SEMI to access external memory or the system bus. Contention refers to multiple requests for the same resource at the same time. The designation ATIME refers to IATIME (ECON0[11:8]--see Table 60 on page 111) for accesses to the EIO space, YATIME (ECON0[7:4]) for accesses to the ERAM space, or XATIME (ECON0[3:0]) for accesses to the EROM space. RSETUP refers to the RSETUP field (ECON0[12]). RHOLD refers to the RHOLD field (ECON0[14]). WSETUP refers to the WSETUP field (ECON0[13]). WHOLD refers to the WHOLD field (ECON0[15]). Misaligned refers to 32-bit accesses to odd addresses. SLKA refers to the SLKA5--4 fields (DMCON0[9:8]--see Table 31 on page 71). TCLK refers to one period of the internal clock CLK.
!
!
! ! ! ! !
!
!
The SEMI controls and arbitrates two types of memory accesses. The first is to external memory. The second is to the internal I/O segment accessed via the system bus. Section 4.14.7.1 describes the SEMI performance for system bus accesses. Section 4.14.7.2 on page 129 describes the SEMI performance for asynchronous external memory accesses and Section 4.14.7.3 on page 131 describes the SEMI performance for synchronous external memory accesses. The performance for all of these types of accesses are summarized in Section 4.14.7.4 on page 133. For the remainder of this section, unless otherwise otherwise stated, the following assumptions apply:
! !
There is only a single requester, i.e., no contention. SEMI requests by the DMAU are from a memory-tomemory (MMT) channel and the user program has enabled the source look-ahead feature by setting the appropriate SLKA field (Section 4.13.6, beginning on page 90).
For example, if a program executing in CORE0 performs a read of the 16-bit DMCON0 register, the read requires a minimum of five CLK cycles. The access could take longer if the SEMI is busy processing a prior request, i.e., if there is contention. As a second example of an S-bus transfer, assume the DMAU is moving data between TPRAM0 and the SLM. The SLM is a memory block accessed via the S-bus. Assuming no contention, the DMAU can read a word from TPRAM0 and write a word to the SLM at an effective rate of two 16-bit words per two CLK cycles.
The source of the request (core vs. DMAU), the configuration of the SEMI data bus size (16-bit vs. 32-bit), and the type of access (read vs. write) determine the throughput of any external memory access. 128 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
The core write access time for a 32-bit asynchronous data bus is the following:
[ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x misaligned x TCLK
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.7 Performance (continued) 4.14.7.2 External Memory, Asynchronous Interface This section describes the performance of the SEMI when configured as an asynchronous interface, as defined in Section 4.14.5. Note that for asynchronous operation, ECKO must be programmed for CLK or CLK/2. External Accesses by Either Core, 32-Bit SEMI Data Bus The following describes the SEMI performance for read and write operations by either core to asynchronous memory with the external data bus configured as 32-bit (the ESIZE pin is logic high): READS--For the cores, 16-bit and 32-bit aligned external asynchronous memory reads occur with a minimum period of the enable assertion time (as programmed in ATIME ), plus a one CLK cycle enforced hold time, plus three CLK cycles for the SEMI pipeline to complete the core access. This assumes that RSETUP and RHOLD are cleared. The core treats misaligned 32-bit reads as two separate 16-bit reads requiring two complete SEMI accesses. The core read access time for a 32-bit asynchronous data bus is the following:
[ATIME + 4 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x misaligned x TCLK
where misaligned has the same definition as for reads. External Accesses by the DMAU, 32-Bit SEMI Data Bus The following describes the SEMI performance for read and write operations by a DMAU MMT channel to asynchronous memory with the external data bus configured as 32-bit (the ESIZE pin is logic high): READS--For the DMAU MMT channels with SLKA = 1, 16-bit and 32-bit aligned external asynchronous memory reads (with corresponding writes to internal TPRAM) occur with a minimum period of the enable assertion time (as programmed in ATIME ), plus a one CLK cycle enforced hold time. This assumes that RSETUP and RHOLD are cleared. Misaligned 32-bit reads are not permitted. The DMAU read access time for a 32-bit asynchronous data bus with SLKA = 1 is the following:
[ATIME + 1 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x TCLK
WRITES--For the DMAU MMT channels with SLKA = 1, 16-bit and 32-bit aligned asynchronous memory writes (with corresponding reads from internal TPRAM) can occur with a minimum period of the enable assertion time (as programmed in ATIME ), plus a one CLK cycle enforced setup time, plus a one CLK cycle enforced hold time. This assumes that WSETUP and WHOLD are cleared. Misaligned 32-bit writes are not permitted. The DMAU write access time for a 32-bit asynchronous data bus with SLKA = 1 is the following:
[ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x TCLK
where: ! misaligned = 1 for 16-bit and aligned 32-bit accesses.
!
misaligned = 2 for misaligned 32-bit accesses.
WRITES--For the cores, 16-bit and 32-bit aligned asynchronous memory writes can occur with a minimum period of the enable assertion time (as programmed in ATIME ), plus a one CLK cycle enforced setup time, plus a one CLK cycle enforced hold time. This assumes that WSETUP and WHOLD are cleared. Unlike read cycles, the core does not wait for the SEMI pipeline to complete the access, so the three CLK cycle pipeline delay is not incurred on core writes. The core treats misaligned 32-bit writes as two separate 16-bit writes requiring two complete SEMI accesses.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
129
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
The core write access time for a 16-bit asynchronous data bus is the following:
[ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x longword x TCLK
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.7 Performance (continued) 4.14.7.2 External Memory, Asynchronous Interface (continued) External Accesses by Either Core, 16-Bit SEMI Data Bus The following describes the SEMI performance for read and write operations by either core to asynchronous memory with the external data bus configured as 16-bit (the ESIZE pin is logic low): READS--For the cores, 16-bit external asynchronous memory reads occur with a minimum period of the enable assertion time (as programmed in ATIME ), plus a one CLK cycle enforced hold time, plus three CLK cycles for the SEMI pipeline to complete the core access. This assumes that RSETUP and RHOLD are cleared. The SEMI coordinates two separate accesses for aligned 32-bit reads, adding two CLK cycles to the above description. The core treats misaligned 32-bit reads as two separate 16-bit reads requiring two complete SEMI accesses. The core read access time for a 16-bit asynchronous data bus is the following:
[ATIME + aligned + RSETUP + RHOLD] x misaligned x TCLK
where: ! longword = 1 for 16-bit accesses.
!
longword = 2 for 32-bit accesses.
External Accesses by the DMAU, 16-Bit SEMI Data Bus The following describes the SEMI performance for read and write operations by a DMAU MMT channel to asynchronous memory with the external data bus configured as 16-bit (the ESIZE pin is logic low): READS--For the DMAU MMT channels with SLKA = 1, 16-bit external asynchronous memory reads (with corresponding writes to internal TPRAM) occur with a minimum period of the enable assertion time (as programmed into ATIME ) plus a one CLK cycle enforced hold time. This assumes that RSETUP and RHOLD are cleared. The SEMI coordinates and treats aligned 32-bit reads as two separate accesses. Misaligned 32-bit reads are not permitted. The DMAU read access time for a 16-bit asynchronous data bus with SLKA = 1 is the following:
[ATIME + 1 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x longword x TCLK
where: ! longword = 1 for 16-bit accesses.
!
longword = 2 for 32-bit aligned accesses.
where: ! aligned = 4 and misaligned = 1 for 16-bit accesses.
!
aligned = 6 and misaligned = 1 for 32-bit aligned accesses. aligned = 4 and misaligned = 2 for 32-bit misaligned accesses.
!
WRITES--For the cores, 16-bit asynchronous memory writes can occur with a minimum period of the enable assertion time (as programmed in ATIME ), plus a one CLK cycle enforced setup time, plus a one CLK cycle enforced hold time. This assumes that WSETUP and WHOLD are cleared. Unlike read cycles, the core does not wait for the SEMI pipeline to complete the access, so the three CLK cycle pipeline delay is not incurred on core writes. The SEMI coordinates and treats aligned 32-bit writes as two separate accesses. The core treats misaligned 32-bit writes as two separate 16-bit writes requiring two complete SEMI accesses.
WRITES--For the DMAU MMT channels with SLKA = 1, 16-bit asynchronous memory writes (with corresponding reads from internal TPRAM) can occur with a minimum period of the enable assertion time (as programmed in ATIME ), plus a one CLK cycle enforced setup time, plus a one CLK cycle enforced hold time. This assumes that WSETUP and WHOLD are cleared. The SEMI coordinates and treats aligned 32-bit writes as two separate accesses. Misaligned 32-bit writes are not permitted. The DMAU write access time for a 16-bit asynchronous data bus with SLKA = 1 is the following:
[ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x longword x TCLK
where longword has the same meaning as for DMAU reads.
130
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
WRITES--For the cores, 16-bit and 32-bit aligned synchronous memory writes can occur with a minimum period of four CLK cycles (two ECKO cycles if ECKO = CLK/2) per transfer. The core treats misaligned 32-bit writes as two separate 16-bit writes requiring two complete SEMI accesses. The core write access time for a 32-bit data bus is the following:
4 x misaligned x TCLK 8 x misaligned x TCLK if ECKO = CLK/2 if ECKO = CLK/4
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.7 Performance (continued) 4.14.7.3 External Memory, Synchronous Interface The primary advantage of synchronous memory is bandwidth, not latency. The cores' unpipelined interface to the SEMI cannot take advantage of this bandwidth. However, the DMAU has a pipelined interface to the SEMI and takes advantage of the synchronous bandwidth. The following sections specify the SEMI performance for accesses by a core or by the DMAU to external synchronous memory. For synchronous operation, the SEMI external output clock (ECKO) must be programmed as CLK/2 or CLK/4 (see the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields of ECON1--Table 61 on page 112). External Accesses by Either Core, 32-Bit SEMI Data Bus The following describes the SEMI performance for read and write operations by either core to synchronous memory with the external data bus configured as 32-bit (the ESIZE pin is logic high): READS--For the cores, 16-bit and 32-bit aligned external synchronous memory reads occur with a minimum period of eight CLK cycles (four ECKO cycles if ECKO = CLK/2), plus three CLK cycles for SEMI to arbitrate the core access, plus one CLK cycle to synchronize ECKO with a rising edge of CLK. The core treats misaligned 32-bit reads as two separate 16-bit reads requiring two complete SEMI accesses. The core read access time for a 32-bit synchronous data bus is the following:
12 x misaligned x TCLK 20 x misaligned x TCLK if ECKO = CLK/2 if ECKO = CLK/4
where misaligned has the same definition as for reads. External Accesses by the DMAU, 32-Bit SEMI Data Bus The following describes the SEMI performance for read and write operations by a DMAU MMT channel to synchronous memory with the external data bus configured as 32-bit (the ESIZE pin is logic high): READS--For the DMAU MMT channels with SLKA = 1, 16-bit and 32-bit aligned external synchronous memory reads (with corresponding writes to internal TPRAM) occur with a minimum period of four CLK cycles (two ECKO cycles if ECKO = CLK/2). Misaligned 32-bit reads are not permitted. The DMAU read access time for a 32-bit synchronous data bus with SLKA = 1 is four CLK cycles.
4 x TCLK 8 x TCLK if ECKO = CLK/2 if ECKO = CLK/4
WRITES--For the DMAU MMT channels with SLKA = 1, 16-bit and 32-bit aligned synchronous memory writes (with corresponding reads from internal TPRAM) can occur with a minimum period of four CLK cycles (two ECKO cycles if ECKO = CLK/2). Misaligned 32-bit writes are not permitted. The DMAU write access time for a 32-bit synchronous data bus and SLKA = 1 is four CLK cycles.
4 x TCLK 8 x TCLK if ECKO = CLK/2 if ECKO = CLK/4
where: ! misaligned = 1 for 16-bit and aligned 32-bit accesses.
!
misaligned = 2 for misaligned 32-bit accesses.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
131
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
where: ! longword = 1 for 16-bit accesses.
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.7 Performance (continued) 4.14.7.3 External Memory, Synchronous Interface (continued) External Accesses by Either Core, 16-Bit SEMI Data Bus The following describes the SEMI performance for read and write operations by either core to synchronous memory with the external data bus configured as 16-bit (the ESIZE pin is logic low): READS--For the cores, 16-bit external synchronous memory reads occur with a minimum period of eight CLK cycles (four ECKO cycles if ECKO = CLK/2), plus three CLK cycles for SEMI to arbitrate the core access, plus one CLK cycle to synchronize ECKO with a rising edge of CLK. The SEMI coordinates and treats aligned 32-bit reads as two separate accesses. The core treats misaligned 32-bit reads as two separate 16-bit reads requiring two complete SEMI accesses. The core read access time for a 16-bit synchronous data bus is the following:
(12 + aligned ) x misaligned x TCLK (20 + aligned ) x misaligned x TCLK where:
! !
longword = 2 for any 32-bit accesses.
External Accesses by the DMAU, 16-Bit SEMI Data Bus The following describes the SEMI performance for read and write operations by a DMAU MMT channel to synchronous memory with the external data bus configured as 16-bit (the ESIZE pin is logic low): READS--For the DMAU MMT channels with SLKA = 1, 16-bit external synchronous memory reads (with corresponding writes to internal TPRAM) occur with a minimum period of four CLK cycles (two ECKO cycles if ECKO = CLK/2). The SEMI coordinates and treats aligned 32-bit reads as two separate accesses. Misaligned 32-bit reads are not permitted. The DMAU read access time for a 16-bit data bus with SLKA = 1 is the following:
4 x longword x TCLK 8 x longword x TCLK if ECKO = CLK/2 if ECKO = CLK/4
where: ! longword = 1 for 16-bit accesses.
!
longword = 2 for any 32-bit aligned accesses.
if ECKO = CLK/2 if ECKO = CLK/4
aligned = 0 and misaligned = 1 for 16-bit accesses. aligned = 4 and misaligned = 1 for 32-bit aligned accesses. aligned = 0 and misaligned = 2 for 32-bit misaligned accesses.
WRITES--For the DMAU MMT channels with SLKA = 1, 16-bit synchronous memory writes (with corresponding reads from internal TPRAM) can occur with a minimum period of four CLK cycles (two ECKO cycles if ECKO = CLK/2). The SEMI coordinates and treats aligned 32-bit writes as two separate accesses. Misaligned 32-bit writes are not permitted. The DMAU write access time for a 16-bit data bus with SLKA = 1 is the following:
4 x longword x TCLK 8 x longword x TCLK if ECKO = CLK/2 if ECKO = CLK/4
!
WRITES--For the cores, 16-bit synchronous memory writes can occur with a minimum period of four CLK cycles (two ECKO cycles if ECKO = CLK/2) per transfer. The SEMI coordinates and treats aligned 32-bit writes as two separate accesses. The core treats misaligned 32-bit writes as two separate 16-bit writes requiring two complete SEMI accesses. The core write access time for a 16-bit synchronous data bus is the following:
4 x longword x TCLK 8 x longword x TCLK if ECKO = CLK/2 if ECKO = CLK/4
where longword has the same meaning as for DMAU reads.
132
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.7 Performance (continued) 4.14.7.4 Summary of Access Times Tables 68 through 71 summarize the information in Section 4.14.7.2, beginning on page 129, and Section 4.14.7.3, beginning on page 131. Table 68. Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, Asynchronous Interface, 32-Bit Data Bus
F
Requester Core
DMAU, SLKA = 1
Access Type Reads Writes 16-bit [ATIME + 4 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x TCLK [ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x TCLK 32-bit aligned 32-bit misaligned [ATIME + 4 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x 2 x TCLK [ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x 2 x TCLK 16-bit [ATIME + 1 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x TCLK [ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x TCLK 32-bit aligned
Table 69. Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, Asynchronous Interface, 16-Bit Data Bus
F
Requester Core
DMAU, SLKA = 1
Access Type Reads Writes 16-bit [ATIME + 4 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x TCLK [ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x TCLK 32-bit aligned [ATIME + 6 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x TCLK [ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x 2 x TCLK 32-bit misaligned [ATIME + 4 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x 2 x TCLK [ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x 2 x TCLK 16-bit [ATIME + 1 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x TCLK [ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x TCLK 32-bit aligned [ATIME + 1 + RSETUP + RHOLD] x 2 x TCLK [ATIME + 2 + WSETUP + WHOLD] x 2 x TCLK
Table 70. Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, Synchronous Interface, 32-Bit Data Bus
F
Requester Core
Access Type 16-bit 32-bit aligned 32-bit misaligned 16-bit 32-bit aligned CLK/2 12 x TCLK 24 x TCLK 4 x TCLK
Reads CLK/4 20 x TCLK 40 x TCLK 8 x TCLK CLK/2 4 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 4 x TCLK
Writes CLK/4 8 x TCLK 16 x TCLK 8 x TCLK
DMAU, SLKA = 1
Value of ECKO, depending on the programming of the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields of ECON1--Table 61 on page 112.
Table 71. Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, Synchronous Interface, 16-Bit Data Bus
F
Requester Core
Access Type 16-bit 32-bit aligned 32-bit misaligned 16-bit 32-bit aligned CLK/2 12 x TCLK 16 x TCLK 24 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 8 x TCLK
Reads CLK/4 20 x TCLK 24 x TCLK 40 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 16 x TCLK CLK/2 4 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 8 x TCLK
Writes CLK/4 8 x TCLK 16 x TCLK 16 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 16 x TCLK
DMAU, SLKA = 1
Value of ECKO, depending on the programming of the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields of ECON1--Table 61 on page 112.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
133
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.14 System and External Memory Interface (SEMI) (continued)
4.14.7 Performance (continued) 4.14.7.4 Summary of Access Times (continued) Tables 72 and 73 show example access times under various conditions, including DMAU accesses with SLKA = 0. These access times are derived from actual measurements. For the asynchronous access times, it is assumed that the programmed enable assertion time is one (ATIME = 1) and that RSETUP = RHOLD = WSETUP = WHOLD = 0. The actual value of these fields is application-dependent. For the synchronous access times, it is assumed that ECKO is programmed as CLK/2. Table 72. Example Average Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, 32-Bit Data Bus
F
Requester Core
Access Type 16-bit 32-bit aligned 32-bit misaligned 16-bit 32-bit aligned 16-bit 32-bit aligned
Asynchronous Reads Writes 5 x TCLK 3 x TCLK 10 x TCLK 2 x TCLK 9 x TCLK 6 x TCLK 3 x TCLK 5 x TCLK
Synchronous (ECKO = CLK/2) Reads Writes 12 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 24 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 14 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 5 x TCLK
DMAU, SLKA = 1 DMAU, SLKA = 0
Table 73. Example Average Access Time Per SEMI Transaction, 16-Bit Data Bus
Requester Core Access Type 16-bit 32-bit aligned 32-bit misaligned 16-bit 32-bit aligned 16-bit 32-bit aligned Asynchronous Reads Writes 5 x TCLK 3 x TCLK 7 x TCLK 6 x TCLK 10 x TCLK 6 x TCLK 2 x TCLK 3 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 6 x TCLK 9 x TCLK 5 x TCLK 11 x TCLK 6 x TCLK Synchronous (ECKO = CLK/2) Reads Writes 12 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 16 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 24 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 4 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 8 x TCLK 14 x TCLK 5 x TCLK 18 x TCLK 8 x TCLK
DMAU, SLKA = 1 DMAU, SLKA = 0
4.14.8 Priority SEMI prioritizes the requests from both cores and the DMAU in the following order: 1. CORE0 program (X) and data (Y) requests have the highest priority. If CORE0 requires a simultaneous X and Y access, X is performed first, then Y. 2. CORE1 program (X) and data (Y) requests have the second-highest priority. If CORE1 requires a simultaneous X and Y access, X is performed first, then Y. 3. DMAU data requests have the lowest priority.
134
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
The PIU provides the following features:
! !
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU)
The parallel interface unit (PIU) is the DSP16411 interface to a host microprocessor or microcontroller. This interface is a 16-bit parallel port that is passive only, i.e., the DSP16411 is the slave to the host for all transactions. The PIU is both Intel (R) and Motorola (R) memory bus compatible and provides select logic for a sharedbus interface. As an additional feature, the host can access the entire DSP16411 memory (internal and external) through the PIU. The PIU control and data registers are memorymapped into the DSP16411 shared internal I/O memory component (Section 4.6.7 on page 47). The host can access all of the PIU data and control registers via external pins. Both cores and the DMAU can access these registers directly via the system bus. The DMAU can directly access the PIU data registers PDI and PDO. The DMAU supports the PIU via a dedicated bypass channel. Unlike the DMAU SWT and MMT channels, the PIU bypass channel must be configured by the host via commands over the PIU address pins, PADD[3:0]. The PIU provides three interrupt signals to the cores. These interrupts indicate a host-generated request or the completion of an input or output transaction.
A high-speed, 16-bit parallel host interface Compatibility with industry-standard microprocessor buses Chip select logic for shared bus system architectures Interrupt output pin for DSP16411-to-host interrupt generation Dedicated host and core scratch registers for convenient messaging Supported by DMAU to access all memory
! !
!
!
4.15.1 Registers As summarized in Table 74, the PIU contains seven memory-mapped registers that are accessible by the host and the cores. The host accesses these registers by issuing commands through the PIU. Please refer to Section 4.15.5 on page 147. All PIU registers are accessed by the host as 16-bit quantities. The cores access the PIU registers as 32-bit memory-mapped locations residing in the shared internal I/O memory component (Section 4.6.7 on page 47). The PIU registers are aligned to even addresses and occupy addresses 0x41000 to 0x4100A, as noted in Table 74. Section 6.2.2 on page 231 provides an overview of memory-mapped registers.
Table 74. PIU Registers
Register Name PCON PDI PDO Address Size Size R/W R/W (Host) (Cores) (Host) (Cores) R/W 0x41000 16 32 R/W 16 16 32 32 W R R R/W
Type
c&s data data
Description PIU control and status. The application must choose one of the cores to write PCON. PIU data in from host. PIU data out to host. For a typical application, the DMAU writes PDO, but either core can also write PDO. The application must choose one of these entities to write PDO. PIU address for host access to DSP16411 memory. The application must choose either the host or one of the cores to write this register. DSP scratch. The application must choose one of the cores to write DSCRATCH. Host scratch.
0x41008 0x4100A
PAH PAL DSCRATCH HSCRATCH
0x41004 (PA) 0x41002 0x41006
16 16 16 16
32
R/W R/W R W
R/W
data
32 32
R/W R
data data
c & s means control and status. All bits of PCON are readable by both the host and the cores. Not all bits are writable--see Table 75 on page 136 for details. PDI is double-buffered (unlike the DSP16XX PHIF PDX register). Therefore, a host write to PDI can be issued (but not completed) before a previous host write to PDI is completed.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
135
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.1 Registers (continued) The PCON register is the PIU status and control register. This register reflects the state of the PIU flags (PIBF and POBE) and provides a mechanism for the host and a core to interrupt each other or reset the PIU. The bit fields of PCON are detailed in Table 75. For each bit field, the table defines what actions can be performed by the host or a core: read, write, clear to zero, or set to one. All the bit fields of PCON can be read by the host and by the cores. If the PCON register is read, only the lower 7 bits contain valid information. The upper bits are undefined. If the host or a core writes PCON, it must write the upper 25 bits with zero. Table 75. PCON (PIU Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x41000. The application must ensure that both cores do not write PCON at the same time.
31--7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Bit Field Name -- DSP Reset Host Reset Interrupt from Host
DRESET Value -- 0 1 0 1 0 1
HRESET
HINT Description
PINT
PREADY
PIBF
POBE
31--7 Reserved 6 DRESET
5
HRESET
4
HINT
3
PINT
PIU Interrupt to Host
0 1
2 1
PREADY PIBF
PIU Ready PIU Input Buffer Full PIU Output Buffer Empty
-- 0 1 0 1
0
POBE
R/W R/W Reset (Cores) (Host) Value Reserved--write with zero; undefined on read. -- -- -- Always read as zero. Write with zero--no effect. Set/ -- 0 The program running in a core resets the PIU by writing a 1 Read to this field. The PIU reset clears this field automatically. Always read as zero. Write with zero--no effect. -- Set/ 0 Read The host resets the PIU by writing a one to this field. The PIU reset clears this field automatically. Read as zero--no outstanding interrupt from host. Clear/ Set/ 0 Write with zero--no effect. Read Read If this field is initially cleared and the host sets it, the PIU asserts the PHINT interrupt. The interrupted core's service routine must clear this field after servicing the PHINT request to allow the host to request a subsequent interrupt. The service routine clears the field by writing one to it. Read as zero--no outstanding interrupt to host. Set/ Clear/ 0 Write with zero--no effect. Read Read If this field is initially cleared and a program running in either core sets it, the PIU asserts the PINT pin to interrupt the host. The host must clear this field after servicing the PINT request to allow a core to request a subsequent interrupt. It clears the field by writing 1 to it. This bit is the logical OR of the PIBF and POBE flags. (It is Read Read 1 not the same as the PRDY pin.) If set, the PIU is not ready. PDI contains data that has already been read by one of the Read Read 0 cores. The host may write PDI with new data. PDI contains data from a prior host write request. To avoid loss of data, the host must not write PDI. PDO contains new data. To avoid loss of data, the cores Read Read 1 must not write PDO. PDO contains data that has already been read by the host. The cores may write PDO with new data.
Device reset or PIU reset. The purpose of the PIU reset is to reinitialize all PIU sequencers and flags to their reset state. If the host and a core attempt to set/clear this bit simultaneously, the PIU clears the bit.
136
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.1 Registers (continued) The PDI and PDO registers (Table 76 and Table 77) are the 16-bit PIU input and output data registers. PDI contains data written by the host at the conclusion of a valid host write cycle. PDO contains data written by a core or the DMAU that is driven onto the PIU data bus during a valid host read cycle. Table 76. PDI (PIU Data In) Register The memory address for this register is 0x41008.
31--16 15--0
Reserved Bit 31--16 15--0 Field Reserved PIU Input Data Description Reserved--read as zero. PIU data in from host.
PIU Input Data R/W (Cores) R/W (Host) R W R W Reset Value 0 0
Table 77. PDO (PIU Data Out) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4100A. For a typical application, the DMAU writes PDO, but the cores can also write PDO. The application must ensure that these entities do not write PDO at the same time.
31--16 15--0
Reserved Bit 31--16 15--0 Field Description Reserved Reserved--write with zero. PIU Output Data PIU data out to host.
PIU Output Data R/W (Cores) R/W (Host) R/W R R/W R Reset Value 0 0
The DSCRATCH and HSCRATCH registers (Table 79 and Table 78) are the DSP and host scratch registers that can be used to pass messaging data between a core and the host. After a core writes 16-bit data to DSCRATCH, the host can read this data by issuing a read_dscratch command. Conversely, the host can write 16-bit data to HSCRATCH by issuing a write_hscratch command. See Section 4.15.5 on page 147 for details on host commands. Table 78. HSCRATCH (Host Scratch) Register The memory address for this register is 0x41006.
31--16 15--0
Reserved Bit 31--16 15--0 Field Reserved Host Scratch Description Reserved--read as zero. Host scratch data to DSP16411.
Host Scratch R/W (Cores) R/W (Host) R W R W Reset Value 0 0
Table 79. DSCRATCH (DSP Scratch) Register The memory address for this register is 0x41002. The application must choose one of the cores to write DSCRATCH.
31--16 15--0
Reserved Bit 31--16 15--0 Field Reserved DSP Scratch Description Reserved--write with zero. DSP scratch data to host.
DSP Scratch R/W (Cores) R/W (Host) R/W R R/W R Reset Value 0 0
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
137
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.1 Registers (continued) The PA register (Table 80) provides the DSP16411 memory address for any host accesses to DSP16411 memory. The host must access this register as two 16-bit quantities: the high half (PAH) and the low half (PAL). A core accesses PA as a double-word (32-bit) location at address 0x41004. See Figure 37 for details. As shown in Table 80, the ADD[19:0] field (PA[19:0]) contains the memory address to be accessed within the selected memory component determined by the CMP[2:0] field (PA[22:20]). The ESEG[3:0] field (PA[26:23]) determines the external segment extension for external memory accesses through the SEMI. The SEMI drives the value in the ESEG[3:0] field onto the ESEG[3:0] pins at the same time that it drives the external memory address onto EA[18:0]. Table 80. PA (Parallel Address) Register The memory address for this register is 0x41004. The application must choose either the host or one of the cores to write this register.
31--27 26--23 22--20 19--0
Reserved Bit 31--27 26--23
ESEG[3:0] Host Access
CMP[2:0] Field Reserved ESEG[3:0] Value 0 0x0 to 0xF 000 001 01X 100
ADD[19:0] Definition R/W R/W R/W
DSP Access PA
Reset Value
0 0x0
PAH[15:0]
22--20
CMP[2:0]
19--16 15--0

ADD[19:0] PAL[15:0]
Reserved--write with zero. External memory address extension. The value of this field is placed directly on the ESEG[3:0] pins for PIU accesses to external memory. The selected memory component is TPRAM0. The selected memory component is TPRAM1. Reserved. The selected memory component is ERAM, EIO, or internal I/O. 101 Reserved. 11X Reserved. 0x00000 The address within the selected memory space. to 0xFFFFF
R/W
000
R/W
0x00000
Memory-mapped to double word at address 0x41004. Write with write_pah command; read with read_pah command. This field is valid only for external memory accesses (CMP[2:0] = 100) and is ignored for internal memory accesses. If the WEROM field (ECON1[11]--Table 61 on page 112) is set, EROM is selected in place of ERAM. Write with write_pal command; read with read_pal command.
32-Bit PA Register Host and DSP Access
CORES ACCESS PA[31:0] AS DOUBLE-WORD MEMORY-MAPPED REGISTER AT LOCATION 0x41004 31--27 Reserved 15 HOST ACCESSES PA[31:16] AS PAH[15:0] VIA THE read_pah AND write_pah COMMANDS 26--23 ESEG[3:0] 22--20 MEM[2:0] ADD[19:16] 0 15 HOST ACCESSES PA[15:0] AS PAL[15:0] VIA THE read_pal AND write_pal COMMANDS 19--0 ADD[15:0] 0
Figure 37. 32-Bit PA Register Host and Core Access
138
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.1 Registers (continued) The host accesses PAH and PAL by executing the read_pah, read_pal, write_pah, and write_pal commands. After certain host commands, the PIU autoincrements the value in PA. See Section 4.15.5 on page 147 for details on host commands. Unlike the DSP1620 and DSP16210 MIOU, the PIU increments the value in the PA register linearly and does not wrap it. 4.15.2 Hardware Interface The host interface to the PIU consists of 29 pins, as summarized in Table 81. The remainder of this section describes these pins in detail. Table 81. PIU External Interface
.
Function Address and Data
Pin PD[15:0]
Type Description I/O 16-bit bidirectional, parallel data bus. 3-stated if PCSN = 1. Note: If BHPDIS (ECON1[13]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, bus hold circuits connected to PD[15:0] are activated. If BHPDIS = 0 and neither the PIU nor an external device is driving PD[15:0], the bus hold circuits hold PD[15:0] at their previous valid logic level. This eliminates the need for external pull-up or pulldown resistors on PD[15:0]. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. PIU 4-bit address and control input. Note: If BHPDIS (ECON1[13]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, bus hold circuits connected to PADD[3:0] are activated. If BHPDIS = 0 and an external device is not driving PADD[3:0], the bus hold circuits hold PADD[3:0] at their previous valid logic level. This eliminates the need for external pull-up or pull-down resistors on PADD[3:0]. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. PIU output data strobe. Intel host: Connect to the host active-low read data strobe. Motorola host: Connect to the host data strobe. PIU input data strobe. Intel host: Connect to the host active-low write data strobe. Motorola host: Connect to logic 0 to program an active-high data strobe. Connect to logic 1 to program an active-low data strobe. PIU read/write not. Intel host: Connect to the host active-low host write strobe. Motorola host: Connect to host RWN strobe. PIU chip select--active-low. PIU output buffer empty flag. PIU input buffer full flag. PIU interrupt (interrupt signal to host). PIU ready. Indicates the status of the current host read operation or previous host write operation. The PRDYMD pin determines the logic level of this pin. PIU ready pin mode. 0: PRDY pin is active-low (PRDY = 0 indicates the PIU is ready). 1: PRDY pin is active-high (PRDY = 1 indicates the PIU is ready).
PADD[3:0]
I
Enables and Strobes
PODS
I
PIDS
I
PRWN
I
Flags, Interrupt, and Ready
PCSN POBE PIBF PINT PRDY
I O O O O
PRDYMD
I
If the system application does not use these pins, they must be tied low. If the system application does not use these pins, they must be tied high.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
139
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.2 Hardware Interface (continued) 4.15.2.1 Enables and Strobes The PIU provides a chip select input pin (PCSN) that allows the host to connect to multiple DSP16411 or other devices. The function of the enable and strobe pins (PODS, PIDS, and PRWN) is based on whether the host type is Intel or Motorola. In order to support both types of hosts, the PIU generates a negative-assertion internal strobe PSTRN that is a logical combination of PCSN, PODS, and PIDS as follows:
PSTRN = PCSN | (PIDS ^ PODS)
The PIU initiates all transactions on the falling edge of PSTRN and completes all transactions on the rising edge of PSTRN. Table 82. Enable and Strobe Pins
Pin PCSN (input) PODS (input) Name PIU Chip Select PIU Output Data Strobe Value Description 0 The host is selecting this device for PIU transfers. 1 The host is not selecting this device for PIU transfers and the PIU 3-states PD[15:0] and ignores any activity on PIDS, PODS, and PRWN. -- ! For an Intel host, PODS functions as an output data strobe and must be connected to the host active-low read data strobe. The host initiates a read transaction by asserting (low) both PCSN and PODS. The host concludes a read transaction by deasserting (high) either PCSN or PODS.
!
PIDS (input)
PIU Input Data Strobe
--
!
For a Motorola host, PODS functions as a data strobe and must be connected to the host data strobe. The state of the PIDS pin determines the active level of PODS. If PIDS = 0, PODS is an active-high data strobe. If PIDS = 1, PODS is an active-low data strobe. The host initiates a read transaction by asserting both PCSN and PODS. The host concludes a read transaction by deasserting either PCSN or PODS. For an Intel host, PIDS functions as an input data strobe and must be connected to the host active-low write data strobe. The host initiates a write transaction by asserting (low) both PCSN and PIDS. The host concludes a write transaction by deasserting (high) either PCSN or PIDS.
PRWN (input)
PIU Read/Write Not Strobe
--
For a Motorola host, the state of PIDS determines the active level of the host data strobe, PODS. The host drives PRWN high during host reads and low during host writes. PRWN must be stable for the entire access (while PCSN and the appropriate data strobes are asserted).
! ! !
For an Intel host, PRWN and PIDS are connected to the host active-low write data strobe. For a Motorola host, PRWN functions as an active read/write strobe and must be connected to the host RWN output.
140
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.2 Hardware Interface (continued) 4.15.2.2 Address and Data Pins The PIU provides a 16-bit external data bus (PD[15:0]). It provides a 4-bit input address bus (PADD[3:0]) that the host uses to select between PIU registers and to issue PIU commands. Table 83. Address and Data Pins
Pin PD[15:0] (input/ output) Name Data Bus
! !
Description If the host issues a read command, the PIU drives the data contained in PDO onto PD[15:0]. If the host issues a write command, it drives the data onto PD[15:0] and the PIU latches the data into PDI. If the PIU is not selected by the host (PCSN is high), the PIU 3-states PD[15:0].
!
Note: If BHPDIS (ECON1[13]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, bus hold circuits connected to PD[15:0] are activated. If BHPDIS = 0 and neither the PIU nor an external device is driving PD[15:0], the bus hold circuits hold PD[15:0] at their previous valid logic level. This eliminates the need for external pull-up or pull-down resistors on PD[15:0]. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. PADD[3:0] Address Bus A 4-bit address input driven by the host to select between various PIU registers and to issue PIU (input) commands. See Section 4.15.5 on page 147 for details. Note: If BHPDIS (ECON1[13]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, bus hold circuits connected to PADD[3:0] are activated. If BHPDIS = 0 and an external device is not driving PADD[3:0], the bus hold circuits hold PADD[3:0] at their previous valid logic level. This eliminates the need for external pull-up or pull-down resistors on PADD[3:0]. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
141
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.2 Hardware Interface (continued) 4.15.2.3 Flags, Interrupt, and Ready Pins The PIU provides buffer status flag pins, an interrupt to the host, and a host ready and mode pin pair. Table 84. Flags, Interrupt, and Ready Pins
Pin POBE (output) PIBF (output) PINT (output) Name PIU Output Buffer Empty PIU Input Buffer Full PIU Interrupt Host Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 Description PDO contains data ready for the host to read. PDO is empty, i.e., there is no data for the host to read. PDI is empty, so the host can safely write another word into PDI. PDI is full with the previous word that was written by the host. If the host writes PDI, the previous data is overwritten. A core has not requested an interrupt to the host. A core has requested an interrupt to the host by setting the PINT field (PCON[3]--Table 75 on page 136). The host acknowledges the interrupt by writing a 1 to the PINT field, clearing it. PRDY is active-low. PRDY is active-high. ! For a host data read operation, the read data in PDO and on PD[15:0] is valid and the host can latch the data and conclude the read cycle.
!
PRDYMD (input) PRDY (output)
PIU Ready Mode PIU Ready
0 1 If PRDYMD = 0 0
1
!
For a host write operation, the previous write operation has been processed by the DSP16411 (PDI is empty) and the host can conclude the current write cycle, i.e., can write PDI with new data. For a host data read operation, the DSP16411 is processing the current read operation (PDO is still empty) and the host must extend the current access until the PIU drives PRDY low before concluding the read cycle. For a host write operation, the DSP16411 is processing the previous write operation (PDI is still full) and the host must extend the current access until the PIU drives PRDY low before concluding the write cycle. For a host data read operation, the DSP16411 is processing the current read operation (PDO is still empty) and the host must extend the current access until the PIU drives PRDY high before concluding the read cycle. For a host write operation, the DSP16411 is processing the previous write operation (PDI is still full) and the host must extend the current access until the PIU drives PRDY high before concluding the write cycle. For a host data read operation, the read data in PDO and on PD[15:0] is valid and the host can latch the data and conclude the read cycle. For a host write operation, the previous write operation has been processed by the DSP16411 (PDI is empty) and the host can conclude the current write cycle, i.e., can write PDI with new data.
!
If PRDYMD = 1
0
!
!
1
!
!
The state of this pin is also readable by the cores in the POBE field (PCON[0]--see Table 75 on page 136). The state of this pin is also readable by the cores in the PIBF field (PCON[1]--see Table 75 on page 136). For the descriptions in this table to be valid, the PIU must be activated, i.e., PSTRN must be asserted. See Section 4.15.2.1 on page 140 for a definition of PSTRN. See description of PIDS and PODS in Table 82 on page 140.

142
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
The following sequence corresponds to the Motorola data read cycle shown in Figure 38. In the figure and in the timing sequences described below, it is assumed that PIDS is tied high, selecting an active-low data strobe (PODS). 1. The host drives a valid address onto PADD[3:0]. The host must hold PRWN high for the duration of the access. 2. The host initiates the cycle by asserting PCSN and PODS (low). 3. When data becomes available in PDO, the PIU drives the data onto PD[15:0]. 4. To notify the host that the data in PDO and on PD[15:0] is valid, the PIU asserts PRDY and deasserts POBE. If the data in PDO is not yet valid, the PIU continues deasserting PRDY and the host must wait until the PIU asserts PRDY. 5. The host concludes the cycle by deasserting PCSN or PODS and latching the data from PD[15:0]. 6. The PIU 3-states PD[15:0]. The following sequence corresponds to the Motorola data write cycle shown in Figure 38. In the figure and in the timing sequences described below, it is assumed that PIDS is tied high, selecting an active-low data strobe (PODS). 1. The host drives a valid address onto PADD[3:0] and drives PRWN low. 2. The host initiates the cycle by asserting PCSN and PODS (low). 3. The host drives data onto PD[15:0]. 4. If PDI is empty, the PIU notifies the host by asserting PRDY and deasserting PIBF. If PDI is still full from a previous host write, the host must wait until the PIU asserts PRDY. 5. The host concludes the cycle by deasserting PCSN or PODS, causing the PIU to latch the data from PD[15:0] into PDI. 6. The host 3-states PD[15:0]. Note: Once the host initiates a data read or data write transaction, it must complete it properly as described above. If the host concludes the transaction before the PIU asserts PRDY, the results are undefined and the PIU must be reset. In this case, the host can reset the PIU by setting the HRESET field (PCON[5]--Table 75 on page 136), or a core can reset the PIU by setting the DRESET field (PCON[6]).
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.3 Host Data Read and Write Cycles This section describes typical host read and write cycles of data for both Intel and Motorola hosts. Figure 38 on page 144 is a functional timing diagram of a data read and a data write cycle for both an Intel and a Motorola host. The address that the host applies to PADD[3:0] during the cycle determines the transaction type, i.e., determines the host command. See Section 4.15.5 on page 147 for details on host commands. The following sequence corresponds to the Intel data read cycle shown in Figure 38: 1. The host drives a valid address onto PADD[3:0]. The host must hold PIDS high for the entire duration of the access. 2. The host initiates the cycle by asserting (low) PCSN and PODS. 3. When data becomes available in PDO, the PIU drives the data onto PD[15:0]. 4. To notify the host that the data in PDO and on PD[15:0] is valid, the PIU asserts PRDY and deasserts POBE. If the data in PDO is not yet valid, the PIU continues deasserting PRDY and the host must wait until the PIU asserts PRDY. 5. The host concludes the cycle by deasserting PCSN or PODS and latching the data from PD[15:0]. 6. The PIU 3-states PD[15:0]. The following sequence corresponds to the Intel data write cycle shown in Figure 38: 1. The host drives a valid address onto PADD[3:0]. The host must hold PODS high for the entire duration of the access. 2. The host initiates the cycle by asserting (low) PCSN, PIDS, and PRWN. 3. The host drives data onto PD[15:0]. 4. If PDI is empty, the PIU notifies the host by asserting PRDY and deasserting PIBF. If PDI is still full from a previous host write, the host must wait until the PIU asserts PRDY. 5. The host concludes the cycle by deasserting PCSN or PIDS, causing the PIU to latch the data from PD[15:0] into PDI. 6. The host 3-states PD[15:0].
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
143
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.3 Host Data Read and Write Cycles (continued)
PIU Functional Timing for a Data Read and Write Operation
PCSN
PIDS/ PRWN INTEL INTERFACE PODS
PRWN MOTOROLA INTERFACE PODS
PSTRN
PADD[3:0]
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
PD[15:0]
DSP DATA
HOST DATA
POBE
PIBF
PRDY
1
2
3 DATA READ
4
5
6
1
2
3
4 DATA WRITE
5
6
For the Motorola interface, it is assumed that PIDS is tied high, selecting an active-low data strobe (PODS). PSTRN is an internal signal that is a logical combination of PCSN, PIDS, and PODS as follows: PSTRN = PCSN | (PIDS ^ PODS). It is assumed that the PRDYMD input pin is logic low, causing PRDY to be active-low.
Figure 38. PIU Functional Timing for a Data Read and Write Operation
144
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
The following sequence corresponds to the Motorola read of the PAH, PAL, PCON, or DSCRATCH register shown in Figure 39. In the figure and in the timing sequences described below, it is assumed that PIDS is tied high, selecting an active-low data strobe (PODS). 1. The host drives a valid address onto PADD[3:0]. The host must hold PRWN high for the duration of the access. 2. The host initiates the cycle by asserting (low) PCSN and PODS. 3. The PIU drives the data in the register onto PD[15:0]. 4. The host concludes the cycle by deasserting PCSN or PODS and latching the data from PD[15:0]. 5. The PIU 3-states PD[15:0]. The following sequence corresponds to the Motorola write of the PAH, PAL, PCON, or DSCRATCH register shown in Figure 39. In the figure and in the timing sequences described below, it is assumed that PIDS is tied high, selecting an active-low data strobe (PODS). 1. The host drives a valid address onto PADD[3:0] and drives PRWN low. 2. The host initiates the cycle by asserting (low) PCSN and PODS. 3. The host drives data onto PD[15:0]. 4. If PDI is empty, the PIU notifies the host by asserting PRDY and deasserting PIBF. If PDI is still full from a previous host write, the host must wait until the PIU asserts PRDY. 5. The host concludes the cycle by deasserting PCSN or PODS, causing the PIU to latch the data from PD[15:0] into PDI. The PIU transfers the data in PDI into PAH, PAL, PCON, or HSCRATCH. 6. The host 3-states PD[15:0]. Note: Once the host initiates a register write transaction, it must complete it properly as described above. If the host concludes the transaction before the PIU asserts PRDY, the results are undefined and the PIU must be reset. In this case, the host can reset the PIU by setting the HRESET field (PCON[5]--Table 75 on page 136) or a core can reset the PIU by setting the DRESET field (PCON[6]).
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.4 Host Register Read and Write Cycles This section describes typical host read and write cycles of PIU registers for both Intel and Motorola hosts. Figure 39 on page 146 is a functional timing diagram of a register read and a register write cycle for both an Intel and a Motorola host. The address that the host applies to PADD[3:0] during the cycle determines how the host accesses the register, i.e., determines the host command. See Section 4.15.5 on page 147 for details on host commands. The following sequence corresponds to the Intel host read of the PAH, PAL, PCON, or DSCRATCH register shown in Figure 39: 1. The host drives a valid address onto PADD[3:0]. The host must hold PIDS high for the entire duration of the access. 2. The host initiates the cycle by asserting (low) PCSN and PODS. 3. The PIU drives the contents of the register onto PD[15:0]. 4. The host concludes the cycle by deasserting PCSN or PODS and latching the data from PD[15:0]. 5. The PIU 3-states PD[15:0]. The following sequence corresponds to the Intel host write of the PAH, PAL, PCON, or HSCRATCH register shown in Figure 39. The PIU uses the PDI register to temporarily hold the write data. 1. The host drives a valid address onto PADD[3:0]. The host must hold PODS high for the entire duration of the access. 2. The host initiates the cycle by asserting (low) PCSN, PIDS, and PRWN. 3. The host drives data onto PD[15:0]. 4. If PDI is empty, the PIU notifies the host by asserting PRDY and deasserting PIBF. If PDI is still full from a previous host write, the host must wait until the PIU asserts PRDY. 5. The host concludes the cycle by deasserting PCSN or PIDS, causing the PIU to latch the data from PD[15:0] into PDI. The PIU transfers the data in PDI into PAH, PAL, PCON, or HSCRATCH. 6. The host 3-states PD[15:0].
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
145
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.4 Host Register Read and Write Cycles (continued)
PIU Functional Timing for a Register Read and Write Operation
PCSN
PIDS/ PRWN INTEL INTERFACE PODS
PRWN MOTOROLA INTERFACE PODS
PSTRN
PADD[3:0]
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
PD[15:0]
DSP DATA
HOST DATA
PIBF
PRDY
1
2
3 REGISTER READ
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
REGISTER WRITE
For the Motorola interface, it is assumed that PIDS is tied high, selecting an active-low data strobe (PODS). PSTRN is an internal signal that is a logical combination of PCSN, PIDS, and PODS as follows: PSTRN = PCSN | (PIDS ^ PODS). It is assumed that the PRDYMD input pin is logic low, causing PRDY to be active-low. PRDY is guaranteed by design to always reflect the ready state during register read operations.
Figure 39. PIU Functional Timing for a Register Read and Write Operation
146
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.5 Host Commands The host commands are summarized in Table 85. A host command is a host read or write cycle with the PADD[3:0] pins configured to select one of several commands. Each command has a corresponding mnemonic as defined in the table. These mnemonics are defined to simplify the explanations that follow and are also used by the DSP16411 model in the LUxWORKSTM debugger. These commands are detailed in the remainder of this section. Table 85. Summary of Host Commands
Command Type Memory Write Pins PRWN PADD[3:0] 0 0000 0 0001 Command Mnemonic write_pdi write_pdi++ Description (PIU/DMAU Response) Write DSP16411 memory location pointed to by PA with data on PD[15:0]. 1. Write DSP16411 memory location pointed to by PA with data on PD[15:0]. Flow Control Yes
PIU Register Write
Memory Read
0 0 0 0 1 1
100X 101X 110X 111X 0000 0001
2. Increment PA by one. write_pah Write high half of PA via PDI with data from PD[15:0]. write_pal Write low half of PA via PDI with data from PD[15:0]. write_pcon Write PCON via PDI with data from PD[15:0]. write_hscratch Write HSCRATCH via PDI with data from PD[15:0]. read_pdo Read DSP16411 memory location pointed to by PA, and place the contents onto PD[15:0]. read_pdo++ 1. Read DSP16411 memory location pointed to by PA, and place the contents onto PD[15:0]. -- rdpf_pdo++ 2. Increment PA by one. Reserved. Perform a memory read operation with prefetch. This is the highest-performance command for host reads of contiguous blocks of memory. See Section 4.15.5.3 on page 149 for details. 1. Read DSP16411 memory location pointed to by PA, and place the contents in PDO. 2. Follow with unld_pdo. 1. Read DSP16411 memory location pointed to by PA, and place the contents in PDO. 2. Increment PA by one. 3. Follow with unld_pdo. Place the contents of PDO onto PD[15:0]. Place the contents of the high half of PA onto PD[15:0]. Place the contents of the low half of PA onto PD[15:0]. Place the contents of PCON onto PD[15:0]. Place the contents of DSCRATCH onto PD[15:0].
Yes
Yes
1 1
0010 0011
-- Yes
1
0100
load_pdo
No
1
0101
load_pdo++
PIU Register Read
1 1 1 1 1
0110 100X 101X 110X 111X
unld_pdo read_pah read_pal read_pcon read_dscratch
Yes No
PRDY is guaranteed by design to always reflect the ready state during register read operations.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
147
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.5 Host Commands (continued) The host issues commands to the PIU through the PIU's external interface. Host commands allow the host to access all DSP16411 internal and external memory locations. Host commands can also read or write PIU scratch and control/status registers. All commands are executed by a combination of actions performed by the PIU and by the DMAU bypass channel. A host command consists of four parts: 1. Read vs. write operation is determined by the state of the PRWN pin. 2. The selection of a PIU internal register (PDI, PDO, PA, PCON, HSCRATCH, or DSCRATCH) is made by PADD[3:1]. 3. The command can be qualified by the state of the PADD[0] pin. This pin determines if a read or write command requires a postincrement of the PA register. 4. Data is read or driven onto PD[15:0] by the host. 4.15.5.1 Status/Control/Address Register Read Commands The host can read the PA, PCON, and DSCRATCH registers by issuing the appropriate command as part of a host read cycle. These commands do not affect the state of the PA, PCON, or PDO registers or the state of the PIBF, POBE, or PRDY pins. No flow control is required for these commands. PRDY is guaranteed by design to always reflect the ready state during register read operations. Table 86. Status/Control/Address Register Read Commands
Command Mnemonic read_pah read_pal read_pcon read_dscratch Description This command causes the PIU to place the upper 16-bit contents of the PA register (PAH) onto PD[15:0]. This command causes the PIU to place the lower 16-bit contents of the PA register (PAL) onto PD[15:0]. This command causes the PIU to place the 16-bit contents of the PCON register onto PD[15:0]. This command causes the PIU to place the 16-bit contents of the DSCRATCH register onto PD[15:0].
4.15.5.2 Status/Control/Address Register Write Commands The host can write the PA, PCON, and HSCRATCH registers by executing the appropriate command as part of a host write cycle. Flow control is required for these commands, i.e., the host must check the status of the PRDY pin to ensure that any previous data write has completed before writing to PA, PCON, or HSCRATCH. For a description of flow control, see the flow control description in Section 4.15.5.5 on page 151. Table 87. Status/Control/Address Register Write Commands
Command Mnemonic write_pah Description
This command causes the PIU to move the contents of the PDI register into the upper 16 bits of the PA register (PAH). The data move begins at the termination of a PIU host write cycle. write_pal This command causes the PIU to move the contents of the PDI register into the lower 16 bits of the PA register (PAL). The data move begins at the termination of a PIU host write cycle. write_pcon This command causes the PIU to move the contents of the PDI register into the PCON register. The data move begins at the termination of a PIU host write cycle. write_hscratch This command causes the PIU to move the contents of the PDI register into the HSCRATCH register. The data move begins at the termination of a PIU host write cycle.
148
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.5 Host Commands (continued) 4.15.5.3 Memory Read Commands The DMAU1 coordinates and executes host data read commands via its PIU bypass channel (Section 4.13.4 on page 86). Prior to issuing a data read command, the host must initialize the PA register with the starting address in memory by executing the write_pah and write_pal commands. Table 88 describes each host read command in detail. Table 88. Memory Read Commands
Command Mnemonic load_pdo Description This command causes the PIU to:
! !
Request the DMAU to fetch the single word (16 bits) pointed to by the contents of PA. Place the word into PDO.
load_pdo++
The host does not wait for the data after issuing this command (flow control can be ignored), but must issue a subsequent unld_pdo command. This command causes the PIU to:
! ! !
Request the DMAU to fetch the single word (16 bits) pointed to by the contents of PA. Place the word into PDO. Postincrement the address in PA by one to point to the next single-word location.
unld_pdo read_pdo
The host does not wait for the data after issuing this command (flow control can be ignored), but must issue a subsequent unld_pdo command. This command causes the PIU to drive the current contents of PDO onto PD[15:0]. The host must use proper flow control with this command (see Section 4.15.5.4 on page 150). This command causes the PIU to:
! ! !
Request the DMAU to fetch the single word (16 bits) pointed to by the contents of PA. Place the word into PDO. Drive the contents of PDO onto PD[15:0].
read_pdo++
The host must use proper flow control with this command (see Section 4.15.5.4 on page 150). This command causes the PIU to:
! ! ! !
Request the DMAU to fetch the single word (16 bits) from the address in PA. Place the word into PDO. Drive the contents of PDO onto PD[15:0]. Postincrement the address in PA by one to point to the next single-word location.
The host must use proper flow control with this command (see Section 4.15.5.4 on page 150).
1. A core can coordinate host data read commands by program control, but this is very inefficient compared to using the DMAU for this purpose.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
149
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.5 Host Commands (continued) 4.15.5.3 Memory Read Commands (continued) Table 88. Memory Read Commands (continued)
Command Mnemonic rdpf_pdo++ Description This command is a host read with prefetch. It is the highest-performance command for host reads of contiguous blocks of memory because it causes the DMAU to fetch the block of data as double words (32 bits). Because the host reads the data as single words (16 bits), the PIU stores the other half of the double word in a prefetch buffer. As a result, the host must adhere to the following rules to use this command:
!
Before the host issues its first rdpf_pdo++ command with a new memory address, it must first issue a read_pdo++ command. This flushes the prefetch buffer from any previously issued rdpf_pdo++ command. The host must not issue a command that reads or writes PA, PCON, HSCRATCH, or DSCRATCH within a series of rdpf_pdo++ commands. The host must use proper flow control with this command (see Section 4.15.5.4). The PIU requests the DMAU to fetch the double word pointed to by the contents of PA. The PIU postincrements PA by two to point to the next double-word location. The PIU places the first word (the single word at the address in PA) into PDO, places the second word (the single word at the address in PA + 1) into the prefetch buffer, and drives the word in PDO onto PD[15:0]. In response to the second rdpf_pdo++ command issued by the host, the PIU places the second word (the contents of the prefetch buffer) into PDO and drives the word in PDO onto PD[15:0].
!
!
For every two rdpf_pdo++ commands issued by the host, the DMAU and PIU perform the following:
! ! !
!
This command achieves an average throughput of one word per seven CLK cycles.
If PA contains an odd address, the PIU requests a single-word access for the first rdpf_pdo++ command in the sequence because the DMAU requires all double-word accesses to have even addresses. All subsequent rdpf_pdo++ commands in the sequence have even addresses and the PIU requests double-word accesses.
4.15.5.4 Flow Control for Memory Read Commands The host performs flow control for memory read commands by one of two methods: 1. The host can monitor the PRDY pin to extend an access that has been initiated and wait for PRDY to be asserted. This method must be used for the read_pdo, read_pdo++, and rdpf_pdo++ commands and can be used for the unld_pdo command. 2. If the host is unable to use the PRDY pin for flow control, it cannot use the read_pdo, read_pdo++, or rdpf_pdo++ command to read memory and must instead use the combination of the load_pdo and unld_pdo commands. The host monitors the POBE field (PCON[0]--see Table 75 on page 136) to determine if PDO is full and can be read with the unld_pdo command, as shown in the following pseudocode: Issue the load_pdo command to the core Do: Issue a read_pcon command to the core Repeat until POBE (PCON [0]) is 0 Issue the unld_pdo command // // // // // Fetch a word from DSP16411 memory and place into PDO register. Host read of PCON. Wait for POBE = 0. Data in PDO now on PD[15:0].
150
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.5 Host Commands (continued) 4.15.5.5 Memory Write Commands The DMAU1 coordinates and executes host data write commands via its PIU bypass channel (Section 4.13.4 on page 86). Prior to issuing a data write command, the host must initialize the PA register with the starting address in memory by executing the write_pah and write_pal commands. Table 89 describes each host write command in detail. Table 89. Memory Write Commands
Command Mnemonic write_pdi Description This command causes the PIU to:
! !
Latch the data from PD[15:0] into PDI. Request the DMAU to write the contents of PDI to the single word pointed to by the contents of PA.
write_pdi++
The host must use proper flow control with this command (see Section 4.15.5.6). This command causes the PIU to:
! ! !
Latch the data from PD[15:0] into PDI. Request the DMAU to write the contents of PDI to the single word pointed to by the contents of PA. Postincrement the address in PA to point to the next single-word location.
The host must use proper flow control with this command (see Section 4.15.5.6).
4.15.5.6 Flow Control for Control/Status/Address Register and Memory Write Commands The host must use proper flow control for write commands (write_pdi, write_pdi++, write_pah, write_pal, write_pcon, or write_hscratch) using one of two methods: 1. After the host initiates a write cycle, it can monitor the PRDY pin to determine if PDI is already full. If so, the host can extend the access and wait for the PIU to assert PRDY. 2. If the host is unable to use the PRDY pin for flow control, it can monitor the PIBF field (PCON[1]--see Table 75 on page 136) before initiating the transaction. For example, the host can execute the following pseudocode: Do: Issue a read_pcon command to the core Repeat until PIBF (PCON [1]) is 0 Issue the write_pdi command // Host read of PCON. // Wait for PIBF = 0. // Write word into PDI.
1. A core can coordinate host data read commands by program control, but this is very inefficient compared to using the DMAU for this purpose.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
151
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.6 Host Command Examples 4.15.6.1 Download of Program or Data This example illustrates a host download to DSP16411 TPRAM1 (CORE1) memory. Download will begin at address 0x0 in TPRAM1 and proceed for 1000 16-bit words. For all the following steps, the host must observe proper flow control. 1. First, the host must write the starting address into the PA register. The starting address is location 0x0 in TPRAM1, so the host issues the following two host write commands: write_pah 0x0010 write_pal 0x0 // Host sets PADD[3:0] to 0x8 and writes 0x0010 to PD[15:0] // Host sets PADD[3:0] to 0xA and writes 0x0 to PD[15:0]
2. Next, the host begins to write the data to TPRAM1. This is done by repeatedly issuing the following command 999 times. Each iteration writes the appropriate data to be loaded to each sequential 16-bit location in TPRAM1. write_pdi++ data // Host sets PADD[3:0] to 0x1 and writes data to PD[15:0]
3. For the write of the last data word (in this example, the 1000th word), the host issues the following command: write_pdi data_ 4.15.6.2 Upload of Data This example illustrates a host upload from DSP16411 TPRAM0 (CORE0) memory. The upload begins at address 0x0200 in TPRAM0 and proceeds for 160 16-bit words. For all the following steps, the host must observe proper flow control. 1. First, the host must write the starting address into the PA register. The starting address is location 0x0200 in TPRAM0, so the host issues the following two host write commands: write_pah 0x0 write_pal 0x0200 // Host sets PADD[3:0] to 0x8 and writes 0x0 to PD[15:0]. // Host sets PADD[3:0] to 0xA and writes 0x0200 to PD[15:0]. // Host sets PADD[3:0] to 0x0 and writes data_ to PD[15:0]
2. Next, the host begins to read the data from TPRAM0, as transferred to the PIU's PDO register via the DMAU. This is done by first issuing the following command, which drives PD[15:0] with the data from TPRAM0 address 0x00200: read_pdo++ // Host sets PADD[3:0]=0x1 and reads data (address 0x00200) on PD[15:0]. // (PIU requests DMAU to fetch single word from address 0x00200.) 3. The host then issues the following commands. Because the address is initially misaligned, the first command causes the PIU to request the DMAU to fetch a single word. For the remaining commands, the PIU requests the DMAU to fetch a double word for every other command. rdpf_pdo++ // // rdpf_pdo++ // // rdpf_pdo++ // Host (PIU Host (PIU Host sets PADD[3:0]=0x3 and reads data (address 0x00201) on PD[15:0]. requests DMAU to fetch single word from address 0x00201.) sets PADD[3:0]=0x3 and reads data (address 0x00202) on PD[15:0]. requests DMAU to fetch double word from address 0x00202.) sets PADD[3:0]=0x3 and reads data(address 0x00203)on PD[15:0].
// Repeat rdpf_pdo++ command 156 more times for a total of 159 times. Note: The host must not issue a command that reads or writes PA, PCON, HSCRATCH, or DSCRATCH within a series of rdpf_pdo++ commands. 152 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
The host can request an interrupt to the cores by setting the HINT field (PCON[4]--see Table 75 on page 136). If this field is initially cleared and the host sets it, the PIU asserts the PHINT interrupt to the cores. The interrupted core's service routine must clear this field after servicing the PHINT request to allow the host to request a subsequent interrupt. It clears the field by writing 1 to it. See Section 4.4, beginning on page 25, for more information on interrupts.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.15 Parallel Interface Unit (PIU) (continued)
4.15.7 PIU Interrupts A core can request an interrupt to the host by setting the PINT field (PCON[3]--see Table 75 on page 136). If this field is initially cleared and the core sets it, the PIU asserts (high) the PINT pin. The host must clear this field after servicing the PINT request to allow a core to request a subsequent interrupt. It clears the field by writing 1 to it.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
153
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
The DSP16411 SIU provides the following features:
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU)
The DSP16411 provides two identical serial interface units (SIU) to interface to codecs and various time-division multiplex (TDM) bit streams. Each SIU is a fullduplex, double-buffered serial port with independent input and output frame and bit clock control. The SIU can generate clocks and frame syncs internally (active), or can use clocks and frame syncs generated externally (passive). The programmable modes of the SIU provide for T1/E1 and ST-bus compatibility. The SIU control registers SCON0--12, the SIU status registers (STAT and FSTAT), and the SIU input and output channel index registers (ICIX0--1 and OCIX0--1) are memory-mapped into the DSP16411 shared I/O memory component (see Section 4.6.7 on page 47). Section 4.16.15 on page 184 provides a detailed description of the encoding of these registers. The DMAU supports each SIU with two bidirectional SWT (single-word transfer) channels. SIU0 is directly connected to DMAU channels SWT0 and SWT1. SIU1 is directly connected to DMAU channels SWT2 and SWT3. The SWT channels provide transfers between the SIU input and output data registers and any DSP16411 memory space with minimal core overhead. Each of the SWT channels can perform two-dimensional memory accesses to support the buffering of TDM data to or from the SIU. Refer to Section 4.13 on page 64 for more information on the DMAU. Each SIU provides two interrupt signals directly to each DSP core, indicating the completion of an input or output transaction. Each core can individually enable or mask these interrupts by programming the core's inc0 register.
Two modes of operation: channel mode and frame mode: -- Both modes support a maximum frame size of 128 logical channels. -- Frame mode selects all channels within a given frame. -- Channel mode with a maximum of 32 channels in two subframes allows minimum core intervention (a core configures the input and output sections independently only once or on frame boundaries). -- Channel mode with a maximum of 128 channels in eight subframes is achievable if a core configures the input and output sections independently on subframe boundaries. Independent input and output sections: -- Programmable data length (4 bits, 8 bits, 12 bits, or 16 bits). -- LSB or MSB first. -- Programmable frame sync active level, frequency, and position relative to the first data bit in the frame. -- Programmable bit clock active level and frequency. -- Programmable active or passive frame syncs and bit clocks. Compatible with T1/E1 and ST-bus framer devices. Hardware for -law and A-law companding.
!
! !
154
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
Figure 40 is a block diagram of an SIU.
SIU Block Diagram
SICK SIFS SOCK SOFS PIN CONDITIONING
CLOCK AND FRAME SYNC SELECTION AGFS AGCKI AGCKO
ICK IFS OCK OFS
INTERNAL BIT CLOCKS AND FRAME SYNCS
SIFSK SCK CLK ACTIVE CLOCK AND FRAME SYNC GENERATOR
SOD SIOLB
1
OUTPUT SHIFT REGISTER 16
OCK
M U X
INPUT SHIFT REGISTER 16 SIB REGISTER 16
ICK
SID
0
IINTSEL[1:0]
OINTSEL[1:0]
SIINT (TO CORES)
INPUT SIGNALING
OPTIONAL EXPANSION (-LAW OR A-LAW) 16
OPTIONAL COMPRESSION (-LAW OR A-LAW) 16 SODR REGISTER 16
OUTPUT SIGNALING
SOINT (TO CORES)
INPUT REQUEST (TO DMAU)
SIDR REGISTER 16
OUTPUT REQUEST
16 MUX 16 SDB 16 CONTROL AND STATUS REGISTERS IFIX[4] SCON0--12 ICIX0--1 STAT FSTAT IFIX[3:0] 16 MUX 16 MUX OFIX[3:0] OCIX0--1 16 INPUT CHANNEL INDEX REGISTERS 16 OUTPUT CHANNEL INDEX REGISTERS 16 16
DSI
DDO
OFIX[4]
TO DMAU
SOCIX SICIX
Note:
The signals within ovals are control/status register bits. SIOLB is SCON10[8]. IFIX[6:0] is FSTAT[6:0]. OFIX[6:0] is FSTAT[14:8].
Figure 40. SIU Block Diagram Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 155
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.1 Hardware Interface The system interface to the SIU consists of seven pins, described in Table 90. Table 90. SIU External Interface
Pin SID SICK Type I I/O Name SIU Input Data SIU Input Bit Clock SIU Input Frame Sync Description The SIU latches data from SID into its input shift register. By default, the SIU latches data from SID on each falling edge of the input bit clock. By default, SICK is configured as an input (passive) that provides the serial input bit clock. Alternatively, the SIU can generate the input bit clock internally and can drive this clock onto the SICK output (active). SIFS specifies the beginning of a new input frame. By default, SIFS is active-high and is configured as an input (passive). Alternatively, the SIU can generate the input frame sync internally and can drive this sync onto the SIFS output (active). To support a 2x ST-bus interface, SIFS can be configured as an input that synchronizes the internally generated (active) input and output bit clocks. The SIU drives data onto SOD from its output shift register. By default, the SIU drives data onto SOD on each rising edge of the output bit clock. The SIU 3-states SOD during inactive or masked channel periods. By default, SOCK is configured as an input (passive) that provides the serial output bit clock. Alternatively, the SIU can generate the output bit clock internally and can drive this clock onto the SOCK output (active). SOFS specifies the beginning of a new output frame. By default, SOFS is active-high and is configured as an input (passive). Alternatively, the SIU can generate the output frame sync internally and can drive this sync onto the SOFS output (active). SCK is an input that provides an external clock source for generating the active mode input and output bit clocks and frame syncs.
SIFS
I/O
SOD
O/Z
SIU Output Data SIU Output Bit Clock SIU Output Frame Sync SIU External Clock Source
SOCK
I/O
SOFS
I/O
SCK
I
The name of the pins has a 0 suffix for SIU0 and a 1 suffix for SIU1.
156
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.2 Pin Conditioning Logic, Bit Clock Selection Logic, and Frame Sync Selection Logic Figure 41 on page 158 diagrams the pin conditioning logic, bit clock selection logic, and frame sync selection logic. This logic is controlled by fields in the SCON10, SCON3, SCON2, and SCON1 registers, as detailed in Table 91. Input functional timing is described in detail in Section 4.16.3 on page 159. Output functional timing is described in detail in Section 4.16.4 on page 160. Active clock and frame sync generation is described in detail in Section 4.16.5 on page 161. SIU loopback is described in detail in Section 4.16.7 on page 168. Table 91. Control Register Fields for Pin Conditioning, Bit Clock Selection, and Frame Sync Selection
SIOLB OCKK OCKA OFSK OFSA ICKK ICKA IFSK IFSA OFSE OCKE IFSE ICKE ORESET OFSDLY[1:0] Field SCON10[8] SCON10[7] SCON10[6] SCON10[5] SCON10[4] SCON10[3] SCON10[2] SCON10[1] SCON10[0] SCON3[15] SCON3[14] SCON3[7] SCON3[6] SCON2[10] SCON2[9:8] Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 00 01 10 0 1 00 01 10 Description Disable SIU loopback mode. Enable SIU loopback mode. The SIU drives output data onto SOD on the rising edge of the output bit clock. The SIU drives output data onto SOD on the falling edge of the output bit clock. The output bit clock is provided externally on the SOCK pin (passive). The output bit clock is internally generated (active). The output frame sync is active-high. The output frame sync is active-low. The output frame sync is provided externally on the SOFS pin (passive). The output frame sync is internally generated (active). The SIU latches input data from SID on the falling edge of the output bit clock. The SIU latches input data from SID on the rising edge of the output bit clock. The input bit clock is provided externally on the SICK pin (passive). The input bit clock is internally generated (active). The input frame sync is active-high. The input frame sync is active-low. The input frame sync is provided externally on the SIFS pin (passive). The input frame sync is internally generated (active). Do not drive internally generated output frame sync onto SOFS. Drive internally generated output frame sync onto SOFS. Do not drive internally generated output bit clock onto SOCK. Drive internally generated output bit clock onto SOCK. Do not drive internally generated input frame sync onto SIFS. Drive internally generated input frame sync onto SIFS. Do not drive internally generated input bit clock onto SICK. Drive internally generated input bit clock onto SICK. Activate output section and begin output processing after next output frame sync. Deactivate output section and initialize bit and frame counters. Do not delay output frame sync. Delay output frame sync by one cycle of the output bit clock. Delay output frame sync by two cycles of the output bit clock. Activate input section and begin input processing after next input frame sync. Deactivate input section and initialize bit and frame counters. Do not delay input frame sync. Delay input frame sync by one cycle of the input bit clock. Delay input frame sync by two cycles of the input bit clock.
IRESET IFSDLY[1:0]
SCON1[10] SCON1[9:8]
Set this field in active mode only, i.e., if the corresponding OCKA/OFSA/ICKA/IFSA field is set.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
157
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.2 Pin Conditioning Logic, Bit Clock Selection Logic, and Frame Sync Selection Logic (continued)
IFSE IFSK ICK ICK DELAY D ACTIVE/PASSIVE SIFS IRESET
0 M U X 0 M 1U X 0
Q
D
Q
2
IFS
IFSK SIFSK (TO ACTIVE CLOCK GENERATOR) AGFS (FROM ACTIVE CLOCK GENERATOR)
1 1
M U X
IFSA
LOOPBACK SIOLB
IFSDLY[1:0]
OFSA
ORESET
OFSDLY[1:0]
OFSK
1 M U X 0 M 1U X
SOFS
0
OFS
ACTIVE/PASSIVE D Q D Q
2
DELAY OFSE ICKE OFSK ICKK OCK OCK
ACTIVE/PASSIVE SICK
0
LOOPBACK
M U X 0 M U X
ICKK AGCKI (FROM ACTIVE CLOCK GENERATOR) AGCKO (FROM ACTIVE CLOCK GENERATOR) OCKK
1 1
ICK
ICKA SIOLB OCKA
1 M U X
OCK
SOCK
0
ACTIVE/PASSIVE
OCKE
OCKK
PIN CONDITIONING
CLOCK AND FRAME SYNC SELECTION
Note:
The signals within ovals are control register fields. SIOLB is SCON10[8], IFSE is SCON3[7], IFSK is SCON10[1], IFSA is SCON10[0], IRESET is SCON1[10], IFSDLY[1:0] is SCON1[9:8], OFSE is SCON3[15], OFSK is SCON10[5], OFSA is SCON10[4], ORESET is SCON2[10], OFSDLY[1:0] is SCON2[9:8], ICKE is SCON3[6], ICKK is SCON10[3], ICKA is SCON10[2], OCKE is SCON3[14], OCKK is SCON10[7], and OCKA is SCON10[6].
Figure 41. Pin Conditioning Logic, Bit Clock Selection Logic, and Frame Sync Selection Logic 158 Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
To vary the functional input timing from the default operation described above, either core can program control register fields as follows:
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.3 Basic Input Processing The SIU begins input processing when the user software clears the IRESET field (SCON1[10]). The system application must ensure that the input bit clock is applied before IRESET is cleared. If an input bit clock is active (internally generated), the user program must wait at least two bit clock cycles between changing AGRESET (SCON12[15]) and clearing IRESET. If the DMAU is used to service the SIU, the user software must activate the DMAU channel before clearing IRESET. Figure 42 illustrates the default functional input timing. SICK (SIU input bit clock) synchronizes all SIU input transactions. The SIU samples SIFS (SIU input frame sync) on the rising edge of SICK. If the SIU detects a rising edge of SIFS, it initiates input processing for a new frame. The SIU latches data bits from SID (SIU input data) on the falling edge of SICK for active channels (i.e., channels selected via software).
Serial Input Functional Timing
If either core sets the ICKK field (SCON10[3]--see Table 113 on page 191), the SIU inverts SICK and: -- Detects the assertion of SIFS on the falling edge of SICK. -- Latches data from SID on each rising edge of SICK. If the software sets the IFSK field (SCON10[1]), SIFS is active-low and the start of a new frame is specified by a high-to-low transition (falling edge) on SIFS, detected by an activating edge1 of the input bit clock. By default, the SIU latches the first data bit of an input frame from SID one phase of SICK after the detection of the input frame sync. Either core can increase this delay by one or two input bit clock cycles by programming the IFSDLY[1:0] field (SCON1[9:8]--see Table 104 on page 186).
!
!
SICK
An externally generated input bit clock can drive SICK (passive mode) or the SIU can generate an internal input bit clock that can be applied to SICK (active mode). An externally generated input frame sync can drive SIFS (passive mode) or the SIU can generate an internal input frame sync that can be applied to SIFS (active mode). See Section 4.16.5 on page 161 for details on clock and frame sync generation. Note: The combination of passive input bit clock and active input frame sync is not supported.
SIFS START OF FRAME SID B0 B1
DATA LATCHED
DATA LATCHED
Figure 42. Default Serial Input Functional Timing
The SIU clocks the data for the selected channel into a 16-bit input shift register (see Figure 40 on page 155). After the SIU clocks in a complete 4 bits, 8 bits, 12 bits, or 16 bits according to the ISIZE[1:0] field (SCON0[4:3]--see Table 103 on page 185), it transfers the data to SIB (serial input buffer register) and sets the SIBV (serial input buffer valid) flag (STAT[1]--see Table 118 on page 197). SIB is not a user-accessible register. Either core can program the IMSB field (SCON0[2]) to select MSB- or LSB-first data transfer from the input shift register to SIB. For data lengths that are less than 16 bits, the SIU right justifies the data (places the data in the lower bit positions) in SIB and fills the upper bits with zeros.
1. The activating edge of the input bit clock is the rising edge of the clock if the ICKK field (SCON10[3]) is cleared and the falling edge of the clock if the ICKK field is set.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
159
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
processing for a new frame. The SIU drives data bits onto SOD (SIU output data) on the rising edge of SOCK for active channels (i.e., channels selected via software). The SIU 3-states SOD for inactive channels and during idle periods. (See Section 4.16.8 on page 168 for details.)
SOCK
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.3 Basic Input Processing (continued) If SIDR (serial input data register) is empty (the SIDV flag (STAT[0]) is cleared), the following actions occur: 1. The SIU formats the data (-law, A-law, or no modification) in SIB according to the IFORMAT[1:0] field (SCON0[1:0]--see Table 103 on page 185). 2. The SIU transfers the formatted data to SIDR. 3. The SIU clears the SIBV (serial input buffer valid) flag (STAT[1]). 4. The SIU sets the SIDV flag to indicate that SIDR is full. 5. The SIU signals the DMAU that serial input data is ready for transfer to memory. 6. If the IINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11]--see Table 113 on page 191) equals two, the SIU asserts the SIINT interrupt to the cores to request service. Data remains in SIDR and SIDV remains set until the data is read by the DMAU or by one of the cores. After SIDR has been read, the DSP16411 clears the SIDV flag. If new data is completely shifted in before the old data in SIB is transferred to SIDR (i.e., while SIBV and SIDV are both set), an input buffer overflow occurs and the new data overwrites the old data. The SIU sets the IOFLOW field (STAT[6]) to reflect this error condition. If the IINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11]) equals three, the SIU asserts the SIINT interrupt to the cores to reflect this condition. 4.16.4 Basic Output Processing The SIU begins output processing when the user software clears the ORESET field (SCON2[10]). The system application must ensure that the output bit clock is applied before ORESET is cleared. If an output bit clock is active (internally generated), the user program must wait at least four bit clock cycles between changing AGRESET (SCON12[15]) and clearing ORESET. If the DMAU is used to service the SIU, the user software must activate the DMAU channel before clearing ORESET. Figure 43 illustrates the default serial functional output timing. SOCK (SIU output bit clock) synchronizes all SIU output transactions. The SIU samples SOFS (SIU output frame sync) on the rising edge of SOCK. If the SIU detects a rising edge of SOFS, it initiates output 160
SOFS START OF FRAME SOD B0 B1
Figure 43. Default Serial Output Functional Timing To vary the serial function output timing from the default operation described above, either core can program control register fields as follows:
!
If either core sets the OCKK field (SCON10[7]--see Table 113 on page 191), the SIU inverts SOCK and: -- Detects the assertion of SOFS on the falling edge of SOCK. -- Drives data onto SOD on each falling edge of SOCK. If either core sets the OFSK field (SCON10[5]), SOFS is active-low and the start of a new frame is specified by a high-to-low transition (falling edge) on SOFS, detected by an activating edge1 of the output bit clock. By default, the SIU drives output data onto SOD immediately after the detection of the output frame sync. Either core can program the OFSDLY[1:0] field (SCON2[9:8]--see Table 105 on page 187) to cause the SIU to delay driving data onto SOD by one or two output bit clock cycles.
!
!
SOCK can provide an externally generated output bit clock (passive mode) or the SIU can generate an internal output bit clock (active mode) that can be applied to SOCK. SOFS can provide an externally generated output frame sync (passive mode) or the SIU can generate an internal output frame sync (active mode) that can be applied to SOFS. See Section 4.16.5 on page 161 for details on clock and frame sync generation. Note: The combination of passive output bit clock and active output frame sync is not supported.
1. The activating edge of the output bit clock is the rising edge if the OCKK field (SCON10[7]) is cleared and the falling edge if the OCKK field is set.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
equals three, the SIU asserts the SOINT interrupt to notify the cores of the underflow condition. 4.16.5 Clock and Frame Sync Generation Generation of the SIU bit clocks (SICK and SOCK) and frame syncs (SIFS and SOFS) can be active or passive. In active mode, these signals can be derived from the DSP clock, CLK, or from an external clock source applied to the SCK pin. In either case, the active clock source is divided down by a programmable clock divider to generate the desired bit clock and frame sync frequencies. In passive mode, the external clock source applied to the SICK pin is used directly as the input bit clock, the signal applied to SIFS is used directly as the input frame sync, the clock source applied to the SOCK pin is used directly as the output bit clock, and the signal applied to SOFS is used as the output frame sync. All of the bit fields that control bit clock and frame sync generation are summarized in Table 92 on page 164. The input section and the output section of each SIU operate independently and require individual clock sources to be specified. Note: The combination of passive input bit clock and active input frame sync is not supported, and the combination of passive output bit clock and active output frame sync is not supported. If the combination of an active bit clock and a passive frame sync is selected, the frame sync must be derived from the bit clock and must meet the timing requirements specified in Section 11.11, beginning on page 296. The default operation specifies that the SIU clocks input data bits from SID on the falling edge of SICK and drive output data bits onto SOD on the rising edge of SOCK. The DSP16411 can invert the polarity (active level) of the SICK pin by setting the ICKK field (SCON10[3]--see Table 113 on page 191) and the polarity (active level) of the SOCK pin by setting the OCKK field (SCON10[7]). The SIU can generate one or both bit clocks internally (active) or externally (passive). Setting the ICKA field (SCON10[2]) puts SICK into active mode, and setting the OCKA field (SCON10[6]) puts SOCK into active mode.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.4 Basic Output Processing (continued) The DMAU or either of the cores writes output data into SODR (serial output data register). See Figure 40 on page 155. If SODR is empty, the SIU clears the SODV flag (serial output data valid, STAT[3]--Table 118 on page 197). This indicates that a core or the DMAU can write new data to SODR. The following describes the sequence of events that follow this condition: 1. The SIU signals the DMAU that it is ready to accept new data. If the OINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[14:13]) equals two, the SIU generates the SOINT interrupt signal to both cores. 2. The DMAU or one of the cores writes SODR with new data. 3. The SIU sets SODV to indicate that SODR is full. 4. At the beginning of the time slot for the next active channel (on an activating edge of the output bit clock), the SIU transfers the contents of SODR to the 16-bit output shift register, clears SODV, and drives the first data bit onto SOD. While transferring the data from SODR to the output shift register, the SIU formats the data (-law, A-law, or no modification) according to the value of the OFORMAT[1:0] field (SCON0[9:8]--see Table 103 on page 185). Based on the value of the OMSB field (SCON0[10]), the SIU shifts the data out LSB-first or MSB-first. Based on the value of the OSIZE[1:0] field (SCON0[12:11]), the SIU drives 4 bits, 8 bits, 12 bits, or 16 bits of the data in the output shift register onto SOD. If OSIZE[1:0] is programmed to select a data size of 4 bits, 8 bits, or 12 bits, the data must be right-justified in (placed in the least significant bits of) the 16-bit SODR register. Output buffer underflow can occur if the DMAU or core does not write new data into SODR before the contents of SODR are to be transferred to the output shift register. Specifically, an output buffer underflow occurs if all three of the following conditions exist:
! ! !
SODR is empty (SODV = 0). The output shift register is empty. The time slot for an active channel is pending.
If output buffer underflow occurs, the SIU sets the OUFLOW field (STAT[7]) and continues to output the old data in SODR (repeats step 4) for any active channels until the DMAU or core writes new data to SODR. If the OINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[14:13]) Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 161
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
Passive frame syncs are externally generated and applied directly to the SIFS or SOFS pins. In this case, the IFSA field (SCON10[0]--see Table 113 on page 191) or the OFSA field (SCON10[4]) is cleared. The program should disable the active clock generator by setting the AGRESET field (SCON12[15]--see Table 115 on page 195) only if both frame syncs and both bit clocks are externally generated. The active clock generator has the ability to synchronize to an external source (SIFS). If the AGSYNC field of (SCON12[14]) is set, the internal clock generator is synchronized by SIFS. This feature is used only if an external clock source is applied to the SCK pin and drives the internal clock generator, i.e., if the program set the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]). A typical application for using external synchronization is an ST-bus interface that employs a 2X external clock source. This feature is discussed in more detail in Section 4.16.6, beginning on page 166. The active clock generator also has the ability to provide additional input data setup time if an external source (the SCK pin, selected by AGEXT = 1) is selected to generate the input and output bit clocks. If the I2XDLY field (SCON1[11]--see Table 104 on page 186) is set, the high phase of the internally generated input bit clock, ICK, is stretched by one SCK phase, providing extra data capture time. This feature is illustrated in Figure 53 on page 183. The relative location of data bit 0 of a new frame can be delayed by a maximum of two bit clock periods with respect to the location of the frame sync. This feature is controlled by the IFSDLY[1:0] field (SCON1[9:8]-- see Table 104 on page 186) for input and the OFSDLY[1:0] field (SCON2[9:8]--see Table 105 on page 187) for output. The location of the leading edge of frame sync is approximately coincident with bit 0 by default. However, bit 0 can be delayed by one or two bit clocks after frame sync as shown in Figure 44.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.5 Clock and Frame Sync Generation (continued) Active bit clocks are generated by dividing down either the internal clock (CLK) or a clock source applied to the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]--see Table 115 on page 195). The active clock generator must also be enabled by clearing the AGRESET field (SCON12[15]) and programming a divide ratio into the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]--see Table 114 on page 194). If either bit clock is internally generated, the corresponding clock pin (SICK or SOCK) is an output that can be turned off by clearing the ICKE field (SCON3[6]--see Table 106 on page 188) or the OCKE field (SCON3[14]--see Table 106 on page 188), placing the corresponding pin into 3-state. Passive bit clocks are externally generated and applied directly to the corresponding SICK or SOCK pins. In this case, the ICKA or OCKA field (SCON10[2] or SCON10[6]) is cleared. The program should disable the active clock generator by setting the AGRESET field (SCON12[15]) only if both clocks and both frame syncs are externally generated. The default operation of the SIU specifies the active level of the input and output frame sync pins to be active-high, so the rising edge of SIFS or SOFS indicates the beginning of an input or output frame, respectively. The program can invert the active level (active-low) by setting the IFSK and OFSK fields (SCON10[1] and SCON10[5]). The program can configure one or both frame syncs as internally generated (active) or externally generated (passive), based on the states of the IFSA and OFSA fields (SCON10[0] and SCON10[4]). The active frame syncs are generated by dividing down the internally generated active mode bit clock. The active clock generator must also be enabled by clearing the AGRESET field (SCON12[15]) and by programming a divide ratio into the AGFSLIM[10:0] field (SCON12[10:0]). If either frame sync is internally generated, the corresponding frame sync pin (SIFS or SOFS) is an output that can be turned off by clearing the IFSE field (SCON3[7]--see Table 106 on page 188) or the OFSE field (SCON3[15]--see Table 106 on page 188), placing the corresponding pin into 3-state.
162
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.5 Clock and Frame Sync Generation (continued)
Frame Sync to Data Delay Timing
SI,OCK
SI,OFS
SI,OD (I,OFSDLY = 0)
Bn - 2
Bn - 1
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
SI,OD (I,OFSDLY = 1)
Bn - 3
Bn - 2
Bn - 1
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
SI,OD (I,OFSDLY = 2)
Bn - 4
Bn - 3
Bn - 2
Bn - 1
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
5-7849 (F)
Figure 44. Frame Sync to Data Delay Timing
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
163
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.5 Clock and Frame Sync Generation (continued) Table 92. A Summary of Bit Clock and Frame Sync Control Register Fields
Bit Field AGRESET AGSYNC SCKK AGEXT AGFSLIM[10:0] AGCKLIM[7:0] SIOLB OCKK OCKA OFSK OFSA ICKK ICKA IFSK IFSA IFSE ICKE OFSE OCKE I2XDLY Register SCON12[15] SCON12[14] SCON12[13] SCON12[12] SCON12[10:0] SCON11[7:0] SCON10[8] SCON10[7] SCON10[6] SCON10[5] SCON10[4] SCON10[3] SCON10[2] SCON10[1] SCON10[0] SCON3[7] SCON3[6] SCON3[15] SCON3[14] SCON1[11] Description Enables the internal active clock divider/generator. Enables synchronization of the internal active clock generator to SIFS. If set, AGEXT must also be set. This feature is enabled for 2x ST-bus operation. Defines the active level of the external clock source, SCK. Defines the clock source to the internal clock divider/generator (either the DSP CLK or external SCK pin). Defines the clock divider ratio for the internal generation of frame syncs (active mode). Defines the clock divider ratio for the internal generation of bit clocks (active mode). Enables SIU loopback mode. See Section 4.16.7 on page 168. Defines the active level of the SOCK pin. Defines SOCK as internally (active mode, SOCK is an output) or externally (passive mode, SOCK is an input) generated. Defines the active level of the SOFS pin. Defines SOFS as internally (active mode, SOFS is an output) or externally (passive mode, SOFS is an input) generated. Defines the active level of the SICK pin. Defines SICK as internally (SICK is an output) or externally (SICK is an input) generated. Defines the active level of the SIFS pin. Defines SIFS as internally (active mode, SIFS is an output) or externally (passive mode, SIFS is an input) generated. For active mode SIFS, this bit determines if the SIFS pin is driven as an output. For active mode SICK, this bit determines if the SICK pin is driven as an output. For active mode SOFS, this bit determines if the SOFS pin is driven as an output. For active mode SOCK, this bit determines if the SOCK pin is driven as an output. If set, the SIU stretches the high phase of the internally generated input bit clock, ICK, by one SCK phase to provide additional serial input data setup (capture) time. This feature is valid only if AGEXT = 1 and ICKA = 1.
The combination of passive output bit clock (OCKA = 0) and active output frame sync (OFSA = 1) is not supported. The combination of passive input bit clock (ICKA = 0) and active input frame sync (IFSA = 1) is not supported.
164
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.5 Clock and Frame Sync Generation (continued) Table 93 offers three typical settings for the SIU control register fields that determine bit clock and frame sync generation. The term as required used in this table refers to the user's system requirements.
!
Example 2 shows the bit field values if both bit clocks and frame syncs are active and generated directly from the internal clock, CLK. This example assumes that the SICK, SOCK, SIFS, and SOFS pins are outputs driven by the SIU. Example 3 shows the bit field values if both bit clocks and the output frame sync are active and generated directly from the external clock source applied to the SCK pin. The SIFS pin is driven by an external source and is used to synchronize the internal frame bit counter. The SICK, SOCK, and SOFS pins are not driven by the SIU, and the high phase of the internal input bit clock is stretched. These settings are valid for a double-rate clock ST-bus interface. The effect of these SIU control register settings is illustrated by Figure 53 on page 183.
!
Example 1 shows the bit field values if both bit clocks and frame syncs are supplied directly from an external serial device (e.g., a codec).
Table 93. Examples of Bit Clock and Frame Sync Control Register Fields
Bit Field Register Example 1 All Passive 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 as required 0 as required 0 as required 0 as required 0 0 0 0 0 0 Example 2 All Active (CLK) 0 0 0 0 as required as required 0 as required 1 as required 1 as required 1 as required 1 1 1 1 1 0 Example 3 All Active (SCK) Double-Rate ST-Bus 0 1 1 1 as required 1 0 as required 1 as required 1 as required 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
AGRESET AGSYNC SCKK AGEXT AGFSLIM[10:0] AGCKLIM[7:0] SIOLB OCKK OCKA OFSK OFSA ICKK ICKA IFSK IFSA IFSE ICKE OFSE OCKE I2XDLY
SCON12[15] SCON12[14] SCON12[13] SCON12[12] SCON12[10:0] SCON11[7:0] SCON10[8] SCON10[7] SCON10[6] SCON10[5] SCON10[4] SCON10[3] SCON10[2] SCON10[1] SCON10[0] SCON3[7] SCON3[6] SCON3[15] SCON3[14] SCON1[11]
The combination of passive output bit clock (OCKA = 0) and active output frame sync (OFSA = 1) is not supported. The combination of passive input bit clock (ICKA = 0) and active input frame sync (IFSA = 1) is not supported.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
165
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.6 ST-Bus Timing Examples Figures 45 and 46 illustrate SIU timing examples for 2x ST-bus compatibility, which requires active clock generation with SCK as the clock source and SIFS synchronization enabled (AGEXT = 1, IFSA = 1, and AGSYNC = 1). The input frame sync, SIFS, is externally generated. Figure 45 illustrates the functional timing of the internally generated bit clocks, ICK and OCK, assuming the bit clock divide ratio is two (AGCKLIM = 1). This results in bit clocks that have a period that is twice the period of SCK. Since the divide ratio is even, the duty cycle of the generated bit clock is 50%. Also shown are the internally generated frame syncs, IFS and OFS. Refer to Figure 40 on page 155 for a block diagram of the internal clock generator.
Clock and Frame Sync Generation with External Clock and Synchronization (AGCKLIM = 1, SCKK = 1, IFSK = 1, SIFS Has No Effect)
SCK SIFS TACKG OCK
ICK
OFS IFS
SOD
BN - 1
BN
B0
B1
Note: The timing reference TACKG is the active clock period determined by the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]).
Figure 45. Clock and Frame Sync Generation with External Clock and Synchronization (AGEXT = AGSYNC = IFSA = IFSK = 1 and Timing Requires No Resynchronization)
166
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.6 ST-Bus Timing Examples (continued) Figure 46 illustrates the functional timing of the internally generated bit clocks and frame syncs, ICK, OCK, IFS, and OFS, assuming the bit clock divide ratio is two (AGCKLIM = 1, same as Figure 45 on page 166) and SIFS is asserted while the internally generated bit clocks are high. In this case, the internal bit clocks are forced to remain high at the falling edge of SIFS. This effectively stretches the internal bit clocks by one SCK cycle, synchronizing the internal bit clocks to the external frame sync, SIFS. As a result, the first frame following synchronization is lost. The SIU 3-states the SOD pin during the lost frame. Subsequent frames are synchronized and function correctly. The dotted lines in this figure show the location of SIFS and the active bit clocks and syncs if SIFS had occurred one SCK cycle later (i.e., if the internal frame bit counter had expired prior to the assertion of SIFS, the same as Figure 45).
Clock and Frame Sync Generation with External Clock and Synchronization (AGCKLIM = 1, SCKK = 1, IFSK = 1, SIFS Causes Resynchronization)
SCK SIFS
OCK
ICK
OFS IFS
SOD
BN - 2
BN - 1
BN
THIS FRAME IS LOST
Figure 46. Clock and Frame Sync Generation with External Clock and Synchronization (AGEXT = AGSYNC = IFSA = IFSK = 1 and Timing Requires Resynchronization)
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
167
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
2. The user's code can define all the SIU clocks and syncs to be passive. See Section 4.16.5, beginning on page 161, for information on configuring the bit clocks and frame syncs as active or passive. The system must supply a bit clock to the SOCK pin and a frame sync to the SOFS pin. 4.16.8 Basic Frame Structure The primary data structure processed by the SIU is a frame, a sequence of bits that is initiated by a frame sync. Each input and output frame is composed of a number of channels, as determined by the IFLIM[6:0] field (SCON1[6:0]--Table 104 on page 186) for input and the OFLIM[6:0] field (SCON2[6:0]--Table 105 on page 187) for output. Each channel consists of 4 bits, 8 bits, 12 bits, or 16 bits, as determined by the ISIZE[1:0] and OSIZE[1:0] fields (SCON0[4:3] and SCON0[12:11]--see Table 103 on page 185), and has a programmable data format (-law, A-law, or linear) as determined by the IFORMAT[1:0] and OFORMAT[1:0] fields (SCON0[1:0] and SCON0[9:8]). All channels in a frame must have the same data length and data format. Figure 47 illustrates the basic frame structure assuming five channels per frame (I,OIFLIM[6:0] = 4) and a channel size of 8 bits (I,OSIZE[1:0] = 0). Figure 48 on page 169 illustrates the same frame structure with idle time. The SIU 3-states the SOD pin during idle time. Note: If the output section is configured for a one-channel frame (OFLIM[6:0] = 0x0) and a passive frame sync (OFSA(SCON10[4]) = 0), the SOFS frame sync interval must be constant and a multiple of the OCK output bit clock.
Basic Frame Structure
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.7 SIU Loopback Each SIU of the DSP16411 includes an internal diagnostic mode to verify functionality of the SIU without requiring system intervention. If the SIOLB field (SCON10[8]--see Table 113 on page 191) is set, the SIU output data pin (SOD) is internally looped back to the SIU input data pin (SID), the output bit clock is internally connected to the input bit clock, and the output frame sync is internally connected to the input frame sync. Any input at the SID pin is ignored while loopback is enabled. There are two ways that SIU loopback can be used: 1. The user's code can define the output bit clock and output frame sync to be active and the input bit clock and input frame sync to be passive. See Section 4.16.5, beginning on page 161, for information on configuring the bit clocks and frame syncs as active or passive. If SIU loopback is enabled, the active signals generate the necessary clocks and frame syncs for the SIU to send and receive data to itself. Unless enabled by the user, the SICK, SOCK, SIFS, and SOFS pins are 3-state. To enable these outputs, set the ICKE, OCKE, IFSE, and OFSE fields (see SCON3 in Table 106 on page 188).
FRAME PERIOD
I,OFS I,OCK
SI,OD
012345670123456701234567012345670123456701234567
CHANNEL
I,OSIZE
CHANNEL 0 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 FRAME CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 4 CHANNEL 0
I,OFLIM + 1 CHANNELS Figure 47. Basic Frame Structure
168
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.8 Basic Frame Structure (continued)
FRAME PERIOD
I,OFS I,OCK
SI,OD
0123456701234567012345670123456701234567000000012345
CHANNEL
I,OSIZE
CHANNEL 0 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 FRAME CHANNEL 3 CHANNEL 4 IDLE CHANNEL 0
I,OFLIM + 1 CHANNELS
The SIU 3-states SOD during idle time.
Figure 48. Basic Frame Structure with Idle Time To assist channel selection within a frame, a frame is partitioned into a maximum of eight subframes. Each subframe has 16 logical channels, for a total channel capacity of 128 channels per frame. 4.16.9 Assigning SIU Logical Channels to DMAU Channels Regardless of the operating mode, the channel index registers for the SIU must be initialized via software if the DMAU is used to transfer data to and from memory. There are a total of four 16-bit channel index registers: two for input (ICIX0--1) and two for output (OCIX0--1). Each bit corresponds to one logical channel within the currently selected even or odd subframe. These bit fields determine the assignment of logical channels within a subframe to a specific DMAU SWT channel dedicated to that SIU. Recall that two bidirectional SWT channels of the DMAU support each SIU so that logical channels can be routed to two separate memory spaces. In channel mode, ICIX0 corresponds to the currently selected even input subframe, as determined by the ISFID_E[1:0] field (SCON3[1:0]--see Table 106 on page 188). ICIX1 corresponds to the currently selected odd input subframe, as determined by the ISFID_O[1:0] field (SCON3[4:3]). OCIX0 corresponds Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 169 to the currently selected even output subframe, as determined by the OSFID_E[1:0] field (SCON3[9:8]--see Table 106 on page 188). OCIX1 corresponds to the currently selected odd output subframe, as determined by the OSFID_O[1:0] field (SCON3[12:11]). In frame mode, ICIX0--1 and OCIX0--1 are circularly mapped to multiple channels in the frame as illustrated by Table 122 on page 199 and Table 121 on page 198. If a bit field of SIU0's ICIX0--1 or OCIX0--1 register is cleared, the corresponding logical channel of SIU0 is assigned to SWT0. If a bit field of these registers is set to one, the corresponding logical channel of SIU0 is assigned to SWT1. If a bit field of SIU1's ICIX0--1 or OCIX0--1 register is cleared, the corresponding logical channel of SIU1 is assigned to SWT2. If a bit field of these same registers is set to one, the corresponding logical channel of SIU1 is assigned to SWT3. For example, to assign SIU0 input channels 0 to 7 to SWT0 and 8 to 15 to SWT1, the value written to ICIX0 is 0xFF00.
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
(SCON1[6:0]) and OFLIM[6:0] field (SCON2[6:0]) define the number of channels in each input and output frame. If using frame mode, the user performs the following steps in software: 1. Configure the number of channels in the frame structure (1 to 128) by programming the IFLIM[6:0] field with the input frame size, and the OFLIM[6:0] field with the output frame size. The input and output frame size is the number of channels minus one. For simple serial communications (one channel per frame), these fields should be programmed to zero. 2. Configure the channel size (4 bits, 8 bits, 12 bits, or 16 bits) by writing the ISIZE[1:0] and OSIZE[1:0] fields (SCON0[4:3] and SCON0[12:11]--Table 103 on page 185). Select LSB-first or MSB-first by programming the IMSB and OMSB fields (SCON0[2] and SCON0[10]). Configure the data format by programming the IFORMAT[1:0] and OFORMAT[1:0] fields (SCON0[1:0] and SCON0[9:8]). 3. Program the 16-bit channel index registers, ICIX0--1 and OCIX0--1 (Table 120 on page 198), to assign specific SIU input and output channels to be routed to one of two DMAU SWT channels (SWT0 or SWT1 for SIU0; SWT2 or SWT3 for SIU1). The maximum number of channels that ICIX0--1 or OCIX0--1 can specify is 32 (two 16-bit registers). If the number of channels is greater than 32, the DMAU routing specified for channels 0--31 is applied to channels 32--63, channels 64--95, etc., as shown in Table 122 on page 199 and Table 121 on page 198. For the special case of simple serial communications (one channel per frame), program channels 0 and 1 to the same value, i.e., program ICIX0--1[1:0] to the same value for input and OCIX0--1[1:0] to the same value for output. 4. Enable frame mode by setting IFRAME (SCON1[7]) and OFRAME (SCON2[7]). 5. Disable channel mode by clearing the ISFIDV_E field (SCON3[2]--see Table 106 on page 188), ISFIDV_O field (SCON3[5]), OSFIDV_E field (SCON3[10]), and OSFIDV_O field (SCON3[13]). 6. Select passive vs. active bit clocks and frame syncs (see Section 4.16.5 on page 161 for details). 7. Program the IINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11]) and OINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[14:13]) as required by the application. 8. Begin input and output processing by clearing the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) and the ORESET field (SCON2[10]). Agere Systems Inc.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.10 Frame Error Detection and Reporting The SIU supports back-to-back frame processing. However, when a frame has completed, the SIU stops processing until the beginning of another frame is detected by sampling a new frame sync. If the new frame sync is detected before a frame has completed, the following actions are taken by the SIU: 1. An interrupt request is generated, if enabled. Specifically, if the occurrence of SIFS is detected before the end of the input frame, an input error has occurred. If enabled via the IINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11]--see Table 113 on page 191), the SIINT interrupt is asserted to the DSP cores. If the occurrence of SOFS is detected before the end of the output frame, an output error has occurred. If enabled via the OINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[14:13]), the SOINT interrupt is asserted to the cores. 2. The IFERR flag (input frame error) or OFERR flag (output frame error) is set in the STAT register (Table 118 on page 197), as appropriate. All subframe, channel, and bit counters are reinitialized and a new input or output frame transaction is initiated. The data from the incomplete frame can be erroneous and the core software should perform error recovery in response to the setting of IFERR or OFERR. 3. If the SIU is in passive mode (clocks and frame sync are externally generated) or in active mode with the AGSYNC field (SCON12[14]) cleared, the new frame transaction begins immediately after the new frame sync is detected. If the SIU is in active mode with AGSYNC set and an externally generated clock is applied to SCK, the new frame transaction begins after the detection of the first frame sync that does not cause resynchronization of the bit clocks. See Section 4.16.6 on page 166 for details on resynchronizing bit clocks in active mode. 4.16.11 Frame Mode Frame mode allows for a high channel capacity, but sacrifices channel selectivity. A program selects frame mode by setting the IFRAME field (SCON1[7]-- Table 104 on page 186) for input and the OFRAME field (SCON2[7]--see Table 105 on page 187) for output. In this mode, the SIU processes all channels in the frame. A maximum of 128 consecutive channels in the frame can be accessed. The IFLIM[6:0] field 170
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.12 Channel Mode--32 Channels or Less in Two Subframes or Less Compared to frame mode, channel mode provides for channel selectivity with minimal core overhead at the expense of channel density. For input, this mode is selected if the following conditions are met:
!
The OSFIDV_E field (SCON3[10]), the OSFIDV_O field (SCON3[13]), or both are set.
In this mode, the SIU processes a maximum of 32 channels within a given frame. The maximum frame size is 128 channels. The IFLIM[6:0] field (SCON1[6:0]--Table 104 on page 186) for input and the OFLIM[6:0] field (SCON2[6:0]--Table 105 on page 187) for output define the number of channels in the frame structure. To assist with channel selection, both input and output frames are divided into eight subframes: four even (0, 2, 4, 6) and four odd (1, 3, 5, 7). The SIU can enable only one even and one odd subframe at any one time. Each subframe contains 16 channels1 that can be individually enabled. Figure 49 shows a 128-channel frame and the relationship between frames, subframes, and logical channels. Table 94 on page 172 specifies the association of channel numbers to even and odd subframes.
The IFRAME field (SCON1[7]--see Table 104 on page 186) is cleared. The ISFIDV_E field (SCON3[2]--see Table 106 on page 188), the ISFIDV_O field (SCON3[5]), or both are set.
!
For output, channel mode is selected if the following conditions are met:
!
The OFRAME field (SCON2[7]--see Table 104 on page 186) is cleared.
Channel Mode on a 128-Channel Frame
128-CHANNEL FRAME
SYNC
I,OFLIM = 0x7F I,OFRAME = 0x0
; DEFINE AS 128-CHANNEL FRAME ; TRANSFER ONLY SELECTED CHANNELS
8 SUBFRAMES PER TDM FRAME 16 CHANNELS PER SUBFRAME EVEN ODD SUBFRAME SUBFRAME DATA [0:15] [16:31] EVEN SUBFRAME [32:47] ODD EVEN SUBFRAME SUBFRAME [48:63] [64:79] ODD EVEN ODD SUBFRAME SUBFRAME SUBFRAME [80:95] [96:111] [112:127]
SUBFRAME 2 0 0 1 2 13 14 15
SUBFRAME 5
16 BITS PER CHANNEL
I,OSFID_E = 1 ; SUBFRAME 2 SELECTED I,OSFIDV_E = 1 ; ALLOW INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL SELECTION I,OSFVEC_E = 0xFFFF ; ALL 16 CHANNELS ACCESSIBLE
OSFMSK_E = 0x7FF9 ; MASK ALL OUTPUT CHANNELS ; EXCEPT 15, 2, 1
0
1
2
13
14
15
I,OSFID_O = 2 ; SUBFRAME 5 SELECTED I,OSFIDV_O = 1 ; ALLOW INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL SELECTION I,OSFVEC_O = 0xFFFF ; ALL 16 CHANNELS ACCESSIBLE
OSFMSK_O = 0xBFFD ; MASK ALL OUTPUT CHANNELS ; EXCEPT 1 AND 14
ACTIVE CHANNELS MASKED CHANNELS CHANNEL DATA BITS 0 1
CHANNEL DATA BITS 2 13 14 15
I,OISIZE = 1 I,OMSB = 1
; 16-BIT CHANNELS ; MSB SHIFTED FIRST
Figure 49. Channel Mode on a 128-Channel Frame
1. It is assumed that for channel mode, the number of channels per frame as determined by the IFLIM[6:0] and OFLIM[6:0] fields is evenly divisible by 16. This results in exactly 16 channels per subframe. If the number of channels per frame is not evenly divisible by 16, the last subframe is a partial subframe of less than 16 channels. If this is the case and if interrupts are programmed to occur on subframe boundaries (see Figure 51 on page 178), then an interrupt is not generated for the partial subframe.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
171
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.12 Channel Mode--32 Channels or Less in Two Subframes or Less (continued) Table 94. Subframe Definition
Even Subframes Subframe 0 2 4 6 Channels 0--15 32--47 64--79 96--111 Subframe 1 3 5 7 Odd Subframes Channels 16--31 48--63 80--95 112--127
For SIU processing of specific logical channels, the user enables at least one active even or odd subframe within the input and output frames and defines the even (0, 2, 4, or 6) or odd (1, 3, 5, or 7) input and output subframe ID. Within each active subframe, active input channels and active output channels are individually selected via the channel activation vectors. These features are controlled by the SIU control memorymapped registers, SCON3--9.
In channel mode, the SIU drives data onto the SOD pin only during the time slots for active output channels. Otherwise, the SIU 3-states SOD. Similarly, in channel mode, the SIU latches input data bits only during the time slots for active input channels. If the DMAU is used to transfer SIU input data to memory, each active input channel (time slot) can be individually routed to a specific SWT channel. See Section 4.16.9 on page 169 for details.
172
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
enabled via the ISFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON5--see Table 108 on page 189). For each enabled channel, assign one of two DMAU SWT channels by setting or clearing the corresponding bit in ICIX1 (Table 122 on page 199). -- To activate an even output subframe, set the OSFIDV_E field (SCON3[10]). Also program the OSFID_E[1:0] field (SCON3[9:8]) with the address of the active even subframe (active subframe number is 2 x OSFID_E). Within the active subframe, up to 16 logical channels can be individually enabled via the OSFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON6--see Table 109 on page 190). Any enabled channel can be individually masked via the OSFMSK_E[15:0] field (SCON8--see Table 111 on page 190). Masking an output channel retains the data structure (the DMAU counters are updated) but does not drive data onto SOD for that channel period. For each enabled channel, assign one of two DMAU SWT channels by setting or clearing the corresponding bit in OCIX0 (Table 121 on page 198). -- To activate an odd output subframe, set the OSFIDV_O field (SCON3[13]). Also program the OSFID_O[1:0] field (SCON3[12:11]) with the address of the active odd subframe (active subframe number is (2 x OSFID_O) + 1). Within the active subframe, up to 16 logical channels can be individually enabled via the OSFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON7--see Table 110 on page 190). Any enabled channel can be individually masked via the OSFMSK_O[15:0] field (SCON9--see Table 112 on page 190). Masking an output channel retains the data structure (the DMAU counters are updated) but does not drive data onto SOD for that channel period. For each enabled channel, assign one of two DMAU SWT channels by setting or clearing the corresponding bit in OCIX1 (Table 121 on page 198). 6. Select passive vs. active bit clocks and frame syncs (see Table 4.16.5 on page 161 for details). 7. Program the IINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11]) OINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[14:13]) as required by the application. 8. Begin processing the active channels by clearing the IRESET field (SCON1[10]--see Table 104 on page 186) and the ORESET field (SCON2[10]--see Table 105 on page 187). Further user software intervention for SIU configuration is only required to redefine the subframe enable, the subframe ID, or the active channels within a subframe and their associated channel index values.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.12 Channel Mode--32 Channels or Less in Two Subframes or Less (continued) If using channel mode, the user performs the following steps in software: 1. Configure the number of channels in the frame structure (1 to 128) by programming the IFLIM[6:0] field (SCON1[6:0]--see Table 104 on page 186) with the frame size for input and the OFLIM[6:0] field (SCON2[6:0]--see Table 105 on page 187) with the frame size for output. 2. Configure the channel size (4 bits, 8 bits, 12 bits, or 16 bits) by writing the ISIZE[1:0] and OSIZE[1:0] fields (SCON0[4:3] and SCON0[12:11]--see Table 103 on page 185). Select LSB-first or MSBfirst by programming the IMSB and OMSB fields (SCON0[2] and SCON0[10]). Configure the data format by programming the IFORMAT[1:0] and OFORMAT[1:0] fields (SCON0[1:0] and SCON0[9:8]). 3. Disable frame mode by clearing the IFRAME field (SCON1[7]--see Table 104 on page 186) and the OFRAME field (SCON2[7]--see Table 105 on page 187). 4. Select the number of subframes (one or two) to be enabled. If two subframes are enabled, one must be even and one must be odd. See step 5. 5. Select the active subframe(s) and channels within each subframe. Tables 95 to 99 further detail the bit fields described below: -- To activate an even input subframe, set the ISFIDV_E field (SCON3[2]--see Table 106 on page 188). Also program the ISFID_E[1:0] field (SCON3[1:0]) with the address of the active even subframe (active subframe number is 2 x ISFID_E). Within the active subframe, up to 16 logical channels can be individually enabled via the ISFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON4--see Table 107 on page 189). For each enabled channel, assign one of two DMAU SWT channels by setting or clearing the corresponding bit in ICIX0 (Table 122 on page 199). -- To activate an odd input subframe, set the ISFIDV_O field (SCON3[5]--see Table 106 on page 188). Also program the ISFID_O[1:0] field (SCON3[4:3]) with the address of the active odd subframe (active subframe number is (2 x ISFID_O) + 1). Within the active subframe, up to 16 logical channels can be individually Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
173
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.12 Channel Mode--32 Channels or Less in Two Subframes or Less (continued) Table 95. Location of Control Fields Used in Channel Mode
Input/ Output Input Even Subframe Control Field Register ISFIDV_E ISFID_E[1:0] ISFVEC_E[15:0] OSFIDV_E OSFID_E[1:0] OSFVEC_E[15:0] OSFMSK_E[15:0] SCON3[2] SCON3[1:0] SCON4[15:0] SCON3[10] SCON3[9:8] SCON6[15:0] SCON8[15:0] Odd Subframe Control Field Register ISFIDV_O ISFID_O[1:0] ISFVEC_O[15:0] OSFIDV_O OSFID_O[1:0] OSFVEC_O[15:0] OSFMSK_O[15:0] SCON3[5] SCON3[4:3] SCON5[15:0] SCON3[13] SCON3[12:11] SCON7[15:0] SCON9[15:0] Description
Output
Subframe ID valid (enable). Subframe ID. Channel activation vector. Subframe ID valid (enable). Subframe ID. Channel activation vector. Channel masking vector.
Table 96. Description of Control Fields Used in Channel Mode
Input/ Output Input Even Subframe Control Field Description ISFIDV_E ISFID_E[1:0] Enable even input subframes. Select one of four even input subframes 0, 2, 4, or 6 (active subframe = 2 x ISFID_E). Bit vector activates up to 16 logical channels independently within selected even input subframe. Enable even output subframes. Select one of four even output subframes 0, 2, 4, or 6 (active subframe = 2 x OSFID_E). Bit vector activates up to 16 logical channels independently within selected even output subframe. Bit vector selects up to 16 logical channels independently within selected even output subframe to be masked. Field ISFIDV_O ISFID_O[1:0] Odd Subframe Control Description Enable odd input subframes. Select one of four odd input subframes 1, 3, 5, or 7 (active subframe = (2 x ISFID_O) + 1). Bit vector activates up to 16 logical channels independently within selected odd input subframe. Enable odd output subframes. Select one of four odd output subframes 1, 3, 5, or 7 (active subframe = (2 x OSFID_O) + 1). Bit vector activates up to 16 logical channels independently within selected odd output subframe. Bit vector selects up to 16 logical channels independently within selected odd output subframe to be masked.
ISFVEC_E[15:0]
ISFVEC_O[15:0]
Output
OSFIDV_E OSFID_E[1:0]
OSFIDV_O OSFID_O[1:0]
OSFVEC_E[15:0]
OSFVEC_O[15:0]
OSFMSK_E[15:0]
OSFMSK_O[15:0]
If an output channel is masked, then the SOD pin is forced to the high-impedance state during that channel's time slot.
174
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.12 Channel Mode--32 Channels or Less in Two Subframes or Less (continued) Table 97. Subframe Selection
Input/ Output Input Even/Odd Subframes Even To Select Subframe 0 2 4 6 1 3 5 7 0 2 4 6 1 3 5 7 Set Control Bit Name Location ISFIDV_E SCON3[2] Configure Control Field Name Location ISFID_E[1:0] SCON3[1:0] Value 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
Odd
ISFIDV_O
SCON3[5]
ISFID_O[1:0]
SCON3[4:3]
Output
Even
OSFIDV_E
SCON3[10]
OSFID_E[1:0]
SCON3[9:8]
Odd
OSFIDV_O
SCON3[13]
OSFID_O[1:0]
SCON3[12:11]
Table 98. Channel Activation Within a Selected Subframe
Input/ Output Input Output Selected Even/Odd Subframe Even Odd Even Odd Name ISFVEC_E[15:0] ISFVEC_O[15:0] OSFVEC_E[15:0] OSFVEC_O[15:0] Control Field Location SCON4[15:0] SCON5[15:0] SCON6[15:0] SCON7[15:0] Description See Figure 50 on page 176. See Figure 50 on page 176. See Figure 50 on page 176. See Figure 50 on page 176.
Table 99. Channel Masking Within a Selected Subframe
Input/ Output Output Selected Even/Odd Subframe Even Odd Control Field Name OSFMSK_E[15:0] OSFMSK_O[15:0] Location SCON8[15:0] SCON9[15:0] See Figure 50 on page 176. See Figure 50 on page 176. Description
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
175
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.12 Channel Mode--32 Channels or Less in Two Subframes or Less (continued)
Subframe and Channel Selection in Channel Mode
EVEN SUBFRAMES
SELECT SUBFRAME 6 (I,OSFID_E = 3) SELECT SUBFRAME 4 (I,OSFID_E = 2) SELECT SUBFRAME 2 (I,OSFID_E = 1) SELECT SUBFRAME 0 (I,OSFID_E = 0) ACTIVATE/MASK CHANNEL CONTROL: ISFVEC_E[15:0] (if ISFIDV_E = 1) OSFVEC_E[15:0] (if OSFIDV_E = 1) OSFMSK_E[15:0] (if OSFIDV_E = 1)
CH 111 CH 79 CH 47 CH 15
CH 110 CH 78 CH 46 CH 14
CH 109 CH 77 CH 45 CH 13
CH 108 CH 76 CH 44 CH 12
CH 107 CH 75 CH 43 CH 11
CH 106 CH 74 CH 42 CH 10
CH 105 CH 73 CH 41 CH 9
CH 104 CH 72 CH 40 CH 8
CH 103 CH 71 CH 39 CH 7
CH 102 CH 70 CH 38 CH 6
CH 101 CH 69 CH 37 CH 5
CH 100 CH 68 CH 36 CH 4
CH 99 CH 67 CH 35 CH 3
CH 98 CH 66 CH 34 CH 2
CH 97 CH 65 CH 33 CH 1
CH 96 CH 64 CH 32 CH 0
BIT 15
BIT 14
BIT 13
BIT 12
BIT 11
BIT 10
BIT 9
BIT 8
BIT 7
BIT 6
BIT 5
BIT 4
BIT 3
BIT 2
BIT 1
BIT 0
ODD SUBFRAMES
SELECT SUBFRAME 7 (I,OSFID_O = 3) SELECT SUBFRAME 5 (I,OSFID_O = 2) SELECT SUBFRAME 3 (I,OSFID_O = 1) SELECT SUBFRAME 1 (I,OSFID_O = 0) ACTIVATE/MASK CHANNEL CONTROL: ISFVEC_O[15:0] (if ISFIDV_O = 1) OSFVEC_O[15:0] (if OSFIDV_O = 1) OSFMSK_O[15:0] (if OSFIDV_O = 1)
CH 127 CH 95 CH 63 CH 31
CH 126 CH 94 CH 62 CH 30
CH 125 CH 93 CH 61 CH 29
CH 124 CH 92 CH 60 CH 28
CH 123 CH 91 CH 59 CH 27
CH 122 CH 90 CH 58 CH 26
CH 121 CH 89 CH 57 CH 25
CH 120 CH 88 CH 56 CH 24
CH 119 CH 87 CH 55 CH 23
CH 118 CH 86 CH 54 CH 22
CH 117 CH 85 CH 53 CH 21
CH 116 CH 84 CH 52 CH 20
CH 115 CH 83 CH 51 CH 19
CH 114 CH 82 CH 50 CH 18
CH 113 CH 81 CH 49 CH 17
CH 112 CH 80 CH 48 CH 16
BIT 15
BIT 14
BIT 13
BIT 12
BIT 11
BIT 10
BIT 9
BIT 8
BIT 7
BIT 6
BIT 5
BIT 4
BIT 3
BIT 2
BIT 1
BIT 0
Figure 50. Subframe and Channel Selection in Channel Mode
176
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
If one of the cores uses this feature in an SIINT or SOINT interrupt service routine (ISR), the SIU can be programmed to individually select channels for input or output anywhere within the frame. The user can take advantage of this feature by updating the input and output subframe and channel control fields after each subframe is processed, allowing channels in more than two subframes to be processed during each frame. This requires the ISR to count the subframe interrupts and program the necessary SIU control registers with the appropriate values to process the next desired subframe. The user also has the option of programming the input and output subframe and channel control fields two subframes in advance, because these bit fields are double-buffered. For example, if the active subframe is even, the user's ISR can reprogram the control bit fields with the appropriate values for the next even subframe without disturbing the processing of the currently active subframe. In channel mode, the SIU drives data onto the SOD pin only during the time slots for active output channels. Otherwise, the SIU 3-states SOD. Similarly, in channel mode, the SIU latches input data bits only during the time slots for active input channels.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.13 Channel Mode--Up to 128 Channels in a Maximum of Eight Subframes The SIU has the ability to process a maximum of 128 channels in channel mode if the SIU control is properly synchronized with core intervention. The steps required for the additional channel processing are the same as for the channel mode discussed in Section 4.16.12, beginning on page 171. However, the SIU control registers must be reconfigured with greater frequency, costing additional core overhead. In this case, subframe activation and channel definition within a subframe can occur as often as every subframe boundary. The SIU has the ability to interrupt either core at frame boundaries, subframe boundaries, channel boundaries, or if an error is detected (overflow or underflow). The interrupt signal trigger is determined by the IINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11]--see Table 113 on page 191) for input processing and by the OINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[14:13]) for output processing. When servicing subframe boundary interrupts generated by SIU0 or SIU1, either CORE0 or CORE1 can modify the input and output subframe and channel control fields without affecting the current subframe being processed. Specifically, the cores can modify the OSFID_E[1:0] and OSFID_O[1:0] fields (SCON3--see Table 106 on page 188), the ISFID_E[1:0] and ISFID_O[1:0] fields (SCON3--see Table 106 on page 188), the ISFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON4--see Table 107 on page 189), the ISFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON5--see Table 108 on page 189), the OSFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON6--see Table 109 on page 190), the OSFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON7--see Table 110 on page 190), the OSFMSK_E[15:0] field (SCON8--see Table 111 on page 190), and the OSFMSK_O[15:0] field (SCON9--see Table 112 on page 190). This is also true for the ICIX0, ICIX1, OCIX0, and OCIX1 registers (see Table 122 on page 199 and Table 121 on page 198). The SIU latches the values in these control bit fields at the beginning of every subframe.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
177
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.13 Channel Mode--Up to 128 Channels in a Maximum of Eight Subframes (continued) Figure 51 illustrates the conditions under which the SIINT or SOINT input or output interrupt is asserted if the IINTSEL[1:0] or OINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11] or SCON10[14:13]--see Table 113 on page 191) is programmed to cause the SIU to generate interrupts on subframe boundaries. The SIU computes the current channel number modulo 16. It compares this value to 15 and generates SIINT or SOINT if there is a match. This notifies the cores of the completion of the subframe.
Generating Interrupts on Subframe Boundaries
EVEN SUBFRAMES
SELECT SUBFRAME 6 (I,OSFID_E = 3) SELECT SUBFRAME 4 (I,OSFID_E = 2) SELECT SUBFRAME 2 (I,OSFID_E = 1) SELECT SUBFRAME 0 (I,OSFID_E = 0)
CH 111 CH 79 CH 47 CH 15
CH 110 CH 78 CH 46 CH 14
CH 109 CH 77 CH 45 CH 13
CH 108 CH 76 CH 44 CH 12
CH 107 CH 75 CH 43 CH 11
CH 106 CH 74 CH 42 CH 10
CH 100 CH 68 CH 36 CH 4
CH 99 CH 67 CH 35 CH 3
CH 98 CH 66 CH 34 CH 2
CH 97 CH 65 CH 33 CH 1
CH 96 CH 64 CH 32 CH 0
(CURRENT CHANNEL NUMBER)MODULO 16 = 15
ODD SUBFRAMES
SELECT SUBFRAME 7 (I,OSFID_O = 3) SELECT SUBFRAME 5 (I,OSFID_O = 2) SELECT SUBFRAME 3 (I,OSFID_O = 1) SELECT SUBFRAME 1 (I,OSFID_O = 0)
CH 127 CH 95 CH 63 CH 31
CH 126 CH 94 CH 62 CH 30
CH 125 CH 93 CH 61 CH 29
CH 124 CH 92 CH 60 CH 28
CH 123 CH 91 CH 59 CH 27
CH 122 CH 90 CH 58 CH 26
CH 116 CH 84 CH 52 CH 20
CH 115 CH 83 CH 51 CH 19
CH 114 CH 82 CH 50 CH 18
CH 113 CH 81 CH 49 CH 17
CH 112 CH 80 CH 48 CH 16
(CURRENT CHANNEL NUMBER)MODULO 16 = 15
Figure 51. Generating Interrupts on Subframe Boundaries
178
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6. Enable the SIINT interrupt (see Section 4.4.6 on page 31) and the SWT0 and SWT1 channels of the DMAU by setting the DRUN[1:0] fields (DMCON0[5:4]--Table 31 on page 71). Create a software-managed subframe counter and initialize the counter to zero. Clear the IRESET field (SCON1[10]--see Table 104 on page 186) to begin input data processing by SIU0. CORE0 can continue to process the user's application. 7. When the SIINT interrupt occurs, CORE0's ISR immediately reads the software-managed subframe counter to determine the current subframe in progress and increments the counter by one. The ISR then reprograms the SIU to process the next even subframe. In this example, the next even subframe is 2, so ISFID_E[1:0] is programmed to 0x1. The active channel for this subframe is 36, so ISVEC_E[15:0] is written with 0x10. ICIX0 also must be reprogrammed to assign channel 36 to either SWT0 or SWT1. If SWT1 is selected, then ICIX0 = 0x10. This active channel setting takes place at the next subframe boundary. This ISR is now complete and CORE0 returns to the previous activity. 8. When the next SIINT interrupt occurs, CORE0's ISR again reads the subframe counter to determine the current subframe in progress. If the counter value is 7, it is reset to zero; otherwise, the value is incremented by one. The ISR then reprograms SIU0 to process the next odd subframe. In this example, the next odd subframe is 3, so ISFID_O[1:0] is programmed to 0x1. The desired active channel for this subframe is 55, so ISVEC_O[15:0] is written with 0x80. ICIX1 must also be reprogrammed to assign channel 55 to either SWT0 or SWT1. If SWT1 is selected, then ICIX1 = 0x80. This active channel setting takes place at the next subframe boundary. This ISR is now complete, and CORE0 returns to the previous activity. 9. Steps 7 and 8 are repeated indefinitely, processing all eight subframes and then beginning again with subframe 0 of the next frame.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.13 Channel Mode--Up to 128 Channels in a Maximum of Eight Subframes (continued) For example, the following steps are performed by software running in CORE0 to use SIU0 to process input channels 2, 3, 18, 20, 36, 55, 78, 100, and 111 as part of a 128-channel input frame. It is assumed that the DMAU SWT0 and SWT1 channels are used to transfer the input data to memory. 1. Initialize the SWT0 and SWT1 channels (see Section 4.13.5 on page 87). 2. Configure the channel size (4 bits, 8 bits, 12 bits, or 16 bits) by writing the ISIZE[1:0] field (SCON0[4:3]--Table 103 on page 185). Select LSB-first or MSB-first by programming the IMSB field (SCON0[2]). Configure the data format by programming the IFORMAT[1:0] field (SCON0[1:0]). 3. Configure SIU0 for a 128-channel input frame structure by programming the IFLIM[6:0] field (SCON1[6:0]--Table 104 on page 186) to 127. Enable channel mode with two active subframes by clearing the IFRAME field (SCON1[7]) and setting the ISFIDV_E and ISFIDV_O fields (SCON3[2,5]--Table 106 on page 188). Program input interrupts to occur at every subframe boundary by programming the IINTSEL[1:0] field (SCON10[12:11]--Table 113 on page 191) to 0x1. 4. Program SIU0 with the active channels for the first even (channels 2 and 3) and odd (18 and 20) subframes. This is accomplished by writing the first subframe IDs (0 and 1) to the ISFID_E[1:0] and ISFID_O[1:0] fields (SCON3--see Table 106 on page 188) and enabling the channels within these subframes via the ISFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON4--see Table 107 on page 189) and ISFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON5--see Table 108 on page 189). In summary, ISFID_E[1:0] = 0, ISFID_O[1:0] = 0, ISVEC_E[15:0] = 0xC, and ISVEC_O[15:0] = 0x14. 5. Program the input channel index registers to assign each channel to either SWT0 or SWT1. The SWT channel chosen determines the destination of the data. In this example, channels 2 and 18 are assigned to SWT0, and channels 3 and 20 are assigned to SWT1. Therefore, ICIX0 = 0x8 and ICIX1 = 0x10.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
179
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.14 SIU Examples The following sections illustrate examples of single-channel I/O and the ST-bus interface. 4.16.14.1 Single-Channel I/O If the SIU is interfaced directly to a single codec, the program typically configures the SIU as follows: 1. Enable frame mode operation, one channel per frame. 2. Configure the data length as required by the external device (4 bits, 8 bits, 12 bits, or 16 bits). 3. Enable passive bit clocks and frame syncs, configured as required by the external device. See Table 93 on page 165. This configuration assumes that the codec device generates the bit clock and frame sync.
180
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.14 SIU Examples (continued) 4.16.14.2 ST-Bus Interface The SIU is compatible with the MITEL(R) ST-bus. Both single-rate and double-rate clock protocols are supported. Table 100 describes the SIU control field settings and resulting signals for both protocols. Table 100. Control Register and Field Configuration for ST-Bus Interface
Control Field Description Value Value (Single-Rate (Double-Rate Clock) Clock) 00 00 00 00 0 1 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 X 0 0 0 0 X 1 X 1 X 1 1 1 1 (ICK and OCK are SCK/2) 0 1 1 1
OSIZE[1:0] ISIZE[1:0] I2XDLY IFSDLY[1:0] OFSDLY[1:0] OFSE OCKE IFSE ICKE SIOLB OCKK OCKA OFSK OFSA ICKK ICKA IFSK IFSA AGCKLIM[7:0]
SCON0[12:11] SCON0[4:3] SCON1[11] SCON1[9:8] SCON2[9:8] SCON3[15]
Clear for 8-bit output data. Clear for 8-bit input data. Set to extend high phase of ICK. Clear for no IFS delay. Clear for no OFS delay. For active OFS, selects whether OFS is driven onto SOFS pin. SCON3[14] Clear to not drive active OCK onto SOCK pin. SCON3[7] For active IFS, selects whether IFS is driven onto SIFS pin. SCON3[6] Clear to not drive active ICK onto SICK pin. SCON10[8] Clear to disable loopback. SCON10[7] Clear to drive output data on rising edge of output bit clock. SCON10[6] Clear to select passive OCK. Set to select active OCK. SCON10[5] Set to invert OFS (active-low frame sync). SCON10[4] Clear to select passive OFS. Set to select active OFS. SCON10[3] Clear to capture input data on falling edge of input bit clock. SCON10[2] Clear to select passive ICK. Set to select active ICK. SCON10[1] Set to invert IFS. SCON10[0] Clear to select passive IFS. Set to select active IFS. SCON11[7:0] Active bit clock divide ratio.
Clear to activate active clock and frame sync generator. Set to synchronize active generated bit clocks to SIFS pin. Set to invert SCK. Clear if AGEXT is cleared. Clear to select CLK as source for active clock and frame sync generator. Set to select SCK as source for active clock and frame sync generator. AGFSLIM[10:0] SCON12[10:0] Active frame sync divide ratio.
AGRESET AGSYNC SCKK AGEXT
SCON12[15] SCON12[14] SCON12[13] SCON12[12]
0 0 0 0
X
0x3FF
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
181
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.14 SIU Examples (continued) 4.16.14.2 ST-Bus Interface (continued) Table 101 describes the SIU control registers and control register fields that must be configured as required by the particular system application using an ST-bus interface. Table 101. Control Register and Fields That Are Configured as Required for ST-Bus Interface
Control Register or Description Field OMSB SCON0[10] Selects LSB- or MSB-first output data. OFORMAT[1:0] SCON0[9:8] Selects linear, -law, or A-law output format. IMSB SCON0[2] Selects LSB- or MSB-first input data. IFORMAT[1:0] SCON0[1:0] Selects linear, -law, or A-law input format. IFRAME SCON1[7] Clear to select input channel mode. Set to select input frame mode. IFLIM[6:0] SCON1[6:0] Program to 127 for 128 channels per input frame. OFRAME SCON2[7] Clear to select output channel mode. Set to select output frame mode. OFLIM[6:0] SCON2[6:0] Program to 127 for 128 channels per output frame. OSFIDV_O SCON3[13] Set to enable odd output subframes. OSFID_O[1:0] SCON3[12:11] Selects odd output subframe 1, 3, 5, or 7. OSFIDV_E SCON3[10] Set to enable even output subframes. OSFID_E[1:0] SCON3[9:8] Selects even output subframe 0, 2, 4, or 6. ISFIDV_O SCON3[5] Set to enable odd input subframes. ISFID_O[1:0] SCON3[4:3] Selects odd input subframe 1, 3, 5, or 7. ISFIDV_E SCON3[2] Set to enable even input subframes. ISFID_E[1:0] SCON3[1:0] Selects even input subframe 0, 2, 4, or 6. ISFVEC_E[15:0] SCON4[15:0] Set to enable corresponding channel of the selected even input subframe. ISFVEC_O[15:0] SCON5[15:0] Set to enable corresponding channel of the selected odd input subframe. OSFVEC_E[15:0] SCON6[15:0] Set to enable corresponding channel of the selected even output subframe. OSFVEC_O[15:0] SCON7[15:0] Set to enable corresponding channel of the selected odd output subframe. OSFMSK_E[15:0] SCON8[15:0] Set to mask corresponding channel of the selected even output subframe. OSFMSK_O[15:0] SCON9[15:0] Set to mask corresponding channel of the selected odd output subframe. OINTSEL[1:0] SCON10[14:13] Selects one of four conditions for which the SIU output interrupt (SOINT) is asserted. IINTSEL[1:0] SCON10[12:11] Selects one of four conditions for which the SIU input interrupt (SIINT) is asserted. ICIX0[15:0] Input channel index for the active even input subframe--selects one of two DMAU SWT channels (SWT0 or SWT1 for SIU0; SWT2 or SWT3 for SIU1) for each logical channel in the active even input subframe. ICIX1[15:0] Input channel index for the active odd input subframe--selects one of two DMAU SWT channels (SWT0 or SWT1 for SIU0; SWT2 or SWT3 for SIU1) for each logical channel in the active odd input subframe. OCIX0[15:0] Input channel index for the active even output subframe--selects one of two DMAU SWT channels (SWT0 or SWT1 for SIU0; SWT2 or SWT3 for SIU1) for each logical channel in the active even output subframe. OCIX1[15:0] Input channel index for the active odd output subframe--selects one of two DMAU SWT channels (SWT0 or SWT1 for SIU0; SWT2 or SWT3 for SIU1) for each logical channel in the active odd output subframe.
182
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.14 SIU Examples (continued) 4.16.14.2 ST-Bus Interface (continued) Figure 52 illustrates ST-bus operation with a single-rate clock.
ST-Bus Single Rate Clock
SIOCK
SIOFS
ICK
OCK
SID
BN - 2
BN - 1
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
SOD
BN - 2
BN - 1
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Figure 52. ST-Bus Single-Rate Clock Figure 53 illustrates ST-bus operation with a double-rate clock applied to SCK, with an active mode bit clock and output frame sync generation for internal use only. In addition, this figure assumes the use of SIFS for external clock synchronization (AGSYNC = 1) of both the input and output bit clocks. ICK, OCK, IFS, and OFS are the internally generated bit clocks and frame syncs. Refer to Figure 40 on page 155 to review the block diagram of the internal clock generator.
ST-Bus Double Rate Clock
SCK
ICK
OCK
SIFS
IFS
OFS CAPTURE SID BN - 2 BN - 1 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
SOD
BN - 2
BN - 1
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Figure 53. ST-Bus Double-Rate Clock Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 183
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
! ! ! !
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers Each SIU contains 21 control, status, and data registers as summarized in Table 102. These can be functionally grouped as:
! !
One read-only input data register (SIDR) One write-only output register (SODR) Two input channel index registers (ICIX0--1) Two output channel index registers (OCIX0--1)
All of these 16-bit registers are aligned on even addresses in DSP16411 shared I/O memory space. The remainder of this section provides detail on each of these registers. Table 102 summarizes all the SIU memory-mapped registers. Tables 103 through 121 describe each register individually.
Thirteen control registers (SCON0--12) Two status registers (STAT and FSTAT)
Table 102. SIU Registers
Register Name Address SIU0 SIU1 SCON0 0x43000 0x44000 SCON1 0x43002 0x44002 SCON2 0x43004 0x44004 SCON3 0x43006 0x44006 SCON4 0x43008 0x44008 SCON5 0x4300A 0x4400A SCON6 0x4300C 0x4400C SCON7 0x4300E 0x4400E SCON8 0x43010 0x44010 SCON9 0x43012 0x44012 SCON10 0x43014 0x44014 SCON11 0x43016 0x44016 SCON12 0x43018 0x44018 SIDR 0x4301A 0x4401A SODR 0x4301C 0x4401C STAT 0x4301E 0x4401E FSTAT 0x43020 0x44020 OCIX0 0x43030 0x44030 OCIX1 0x43032 0x44032 ICIX0 0x43040 0x44040 ICIX1 0x43042 0x44042 Description SIU Input/Output General Control SIU Input Frame Control SIU Output Frame Control SIU Input/Output Subframe Control SIU Input Even Subframe Valid Vector Control SIU Input Odd Subframe Valid Vector Control SIU Output Even Subframe Valid Vector Control SIU Output Odd Subframe Valid Vector Control SIU Output Even Subframe Mask Vector Control SIU Output Odd Subframe Mask Vector Control SIU Input/Output General Control SIU Input/Output Active Clock Control SIU Input/Output Active Frame Sync Control SIU Input Data SIU Output Data SIU Input/Output General Status SIU Input/Output Frame Status SIU Output Channel Index for Even Subframes SIU Output Channel Index for Odd Subframes SIU Input Channel Index for Even Subframes SIU Input Channel Index for Odd Subframes Size (Bits) 16 R/W R/W Type control Reset Value 0x0000 0x0400 0x0400 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x8000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000
16 16 16 16 16
R data W R/W c & s R status R/W control R/W control
The SIU memory-mapped register sizes represent bits used. The registers are right-justified and padded to 32 bits (the unused upper bits are zerofilled). c & s means control and status. All bits of STAT are readable, and some can be written with one to clear them.
184
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 103. SCON0 (SIU Input/Output General Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43000 for SIU0 and 0x44000 for SIU1.
15--13 12--11 10 9--8 7--5 4--3 2 1--0
Reserved Bit 15--13 12--11 Field Reserved OSIZE[1:0]
OSIZE[1:0]
OMSB
OFORMAT[1:0]
Reserved
ISIZE[1:0]
IMSB
IFORMAT[1:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W 0
10 9--8
Value 0 0 1 2 3 OMSB 0 1 OFORMAT[1:0] 00 01 10
11
7--5 4--3
Reserved ISIZE[1:0]
2 1--0
IMSB IFORMAT[1:0]
0 0 1 2 3 0 1 00 01 10
11
Description Reserved--write with zero. The channel size for serial output data is 8 bits. The channel size for serial output data is 16 bits. The channel size for serial output data is 4 bits. The channel size for serial output data is 12 bits. Shift data out onto SOD pin least significant bit (LSB) first. Shift data out onto SOD pin most significant bit (MSB) first. When transferring data from the SODR register to the output shift register, do not format (modify) the data. Reserved. When transferring 16-bit data from the SODR register to the output shift register, convert the most significant 14 bits of SODR (SODR[15:2]) from linear PCM format to 8-bit -law PCM format, place the result into the lower half of the output shift register, and clear the upper half. Ignore the least significant 2 bits of SODR. When transferring 16-bit data from the SODR register to the output shift register, convert the most significant 13 bits of SODR (SODR[15:3]) from linear PCM format to 8-bit A-law PCM format, place the result into the lower half of the output shift register, and clear the upper half. Ignore the least significant 3 bits of SODR. Reserved--write with zero. The channel size for serial input data is 8 bits. The channel size for serial input data is 16 bits. The channel size for serial input data is 4 bits. The channel size for serial input data is 12 bits. Capture input data from SID pin least significant bit (LSB) first. Capture input data from SID pin most significant bit (MSB) first. When transferring 16-bit data from the SIB register to the SIDR register, do not format (modify) the data. Reserved. When transferring data from the SIB register to the SIDR register, convert the lower 8 bits of SIB (SIB[7:0]) from -law PCM format to 14-bit linear PCM format, place the result into the 14 most significant bits of SIDR (SIDR[15:2]), and clear the least significant 2 bits of SIDR (SIDR[1:0]). When transferring data from the SIB register to the SIDR register, convert the lower 8 bits of SIB (SIB[7:0]) from A-law PCM format to 13-bit linear PCM format, place the result into the 13 most significant bits of SIDR (SIDR[15:3]), and clear the least significant 3 bits of SIDR (SIDR[2:0]).
R/W R/W
0 00
R/W R/W
0 0
R/W R/W
0 00
If the ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. The SIU shifts data from the low portion of the output shift register onto the SOD pin and ignores the high portion of the register. If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. The SIU right justifies the received serial input data, i.e., it places the data in the least significant bit positions of the 16-bit serial input buffer register and fills the upper bits with zeros. The SIB register is an intermediate register that holds the contents of the input shift register and is not user accessible.

Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
185
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 104. SCON1 (SIU Input Frame Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43002 for SIU0 and 0x44002 for SIU1.
15--12 11 10 9--8 7 6--0
Reserved Bit 15--12 11 Field Reserved I2XDLY Value 0 0
I2XDLY
IRESET
IFSDLY[1:0] Description
IFRAME
IFLIM[6:0] R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0
10
9--8
7
6--0
Reserved--write with zero. Do not stretch the active generated input bit clock (ICK) relative to the activemode generated output bit clock (OCK), i.e., ICK and OCK are identical and inphase. 1 Stretch the high phase of the active generated input clock (ICK) by one SCK phase relative to the active generated output bit clock (OCK) to provide additional input serial data capture time. IRESET 0 Activate input section and begin input processing at the start of the first active input channel. 1 Deactivate input section and initialize bit and frame counters. 00 No input frame sync delay--capture input data from SID pin starting with the IFSDLY[1:0] same internal bit clock (ICK) that latches the input frame sync (SIFS pin for passive sync or IFS signal for active generated sync). 01 One-cycle input frame sync delay--capture input data from SID pin starting one bit clock (ICK) after the bit clock that latches the input frame sync (SIFS pin for passive sync or IFS signal for active generated sync). 10 Two-cycle input frame sync delay--capture input data from SID pin starting two bit clocks (ICK) after the bit clock that latches the input frame sync (SIFS pin for passive sync or IFS signal for active generated sync). 11 Reserved. IFRAME 0 Channel mode--base the input transfer decision on the ISFIDV_E field (SCON3[2]), the ISFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON4[15:0]), the ISFIDV_O field (SCON3[5]), and the ISFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON5[15:0]). 1 Frame mode--capture all IFLIM + 1 channels in the frame. IFLIM[6:0] 0--127 Input frame channel count limit--the number of channels in the input frame is IFLIM + 1.
R/W
1
R/W
00
R/W
0
R/W
0
If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field.
186
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 105. SCON2 (SIU Output Frame Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43004 for SIU0 and 0x44004 for SIU1.
15--11 10 9--8 7 6--0
Reserved Bit 15--11 10 Field Reserved ORESET Value 0 0
ORESET
OFSDLY[1:0]
OFRAME Description
OFLIM[6:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W 1
9--8
7
6--0
Reserved--write with zero. Activate output section, request output service from the DMAU, and drive SOD pin at the start of the first active output channel. 1 Deactivate output section and initialize bit and frame counters. 00 No output frame sync delay--drive output data onto SOD pin starting with the OFSDLY[1:0] same internal bit clock (OCK) that latches the output frame sync (SOFS pin for passive sync or OFS signal for active generated sync). 01 One-cycle output frame sync delay--drive output data onto SOD pin starting one bit clock (OCK) after the bit clock that latches the output frame sync (SOFS pin for passive sync or OFS signal for active generated sync). 10 Two-cycle output frame sync delay--drive output data onto SOD pin starting two bit clocks (OCK) after the bit clock that latches output frame sync (SOFS pin for passive sync or OFS signal for active generated sync). 11 Reserved. 0 Channel mode--base the output transfer decision on the OSFIDV_E field OFRAME (SCON3[10]), the OSFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON6[15:0]), the OSFIDV_O field (SCON3[13]), and the OSFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON7[15:0]). 1 Frame mode--transmit all OFLIM + 1 channels in the frame. 0--127 Output frame channel count limit--the number of channels in the output frame OFLIM[6:0] is OFLIM + 1.
R/W
00
R/W
0
R/W
0
If the ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
187
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 106. SCON3 (SIU Input/Output Subframe Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43006 for SIU0 and 0x44006 for SIU1.
15 14 13 12--11 10 9--8
OFSE
7
OCKE
6
OSFIDV_O
5
OSFID_O[1:0]
4--3
OSFIDV_E
2
OSFID_E[1:0]
1--0
IFSE Bit 15 14 13
ICKE Field
ISFIDV_O Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 00 01 10 11 0 1 00 01 10 11 0 1 0 1 0 1 00 01 10 11 0 1 00 01 10 11
ISFID_O[1:0] Description
ISFIDV_E
ISFID_E[1:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W R/W 0 0
OFSE (active mode only) OCKE (active mode only) OSFIDV_O (channel mode only) OSFID_O[1:0] (channel mode only)
12--11
10
OSFIDV_E (channel mode only) OSFID_E[1:0] (channel mode only)
9--8
7 6 5
IFSE (active mode only) ICKE (active mode only) ISFIDV_O (channel mode only) ISFID_O[1:0] (channel mode only)
4--3
2
ISFIDV_E (channel mode only) ISFID_E[1:0] (channel mode only)
1--0
Do not drive internally generated frame sync onto SOFS pin. Drive internally generated frame sync onto SOFS pin. Do not drive internally generated clock onto SOCK pin. Drive internally generated clock onto SOCK pin. Odd output subframe vector valid. Disable odd output subframes. In frame mode (OFRAME(SCON2[7]) = 1), this field must be cleared. Odd output subframe vector valid. Enable odd output subframes. For odd subframes, the output subframe ID of the subframe under 1 control of the OSFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON7[15:0]) and the 3 OSFMSK_O[15:0] field (SCON9[15:0]) is: 5 2 x OSFID_O + 1 7 as shown at right. Even output subframe vector valid. Disable even output subframes. In frame mode (OFRAME(SCON2[7]) = 1), this field must be cleared. Even output subframe vector valid. Enable even output subframes. For even subframes, the output subframe ID of the subframe under 0 control of the OSFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON6[15:0]) and the 2 OSFMSK_E[15:0] field (SCON8[15:0]) is: 4 2 x OSFID_E 6 as shown at right. Do not drive internally generated frame sync onto SIFS pin. Active mode only. Drive internally generated frame sync onto SIFS pin. Do not drive internally generated clock onto SICK pin. Active mode only. Drive internally generated clock onto SICK pin. Odd input subframe vector valid. Disable odd input subframes. In frame mode (OFRAME(SCON2[7]) = 1), this field must be cleared. Odd input subframe vector valid. Enable odd input subframes. For odd subframes, the input subframe ID of the subframe under con- 1 trol of the ISFVEC_O[15:0] field (SCON5[15:0]) is: 3 2 x ISFID_O + 1 5 as shown at right. 7 Even input subframe vector valid. Disable even input subframes. In frame mode (OFRAME(SCON2[7]) = 1), this field must be cleared. Even input subframe vector valid. Enable even input subframes. 0 For even subframes, the input subframe ID of the subframe under control of the ISFVEC_E[15:0] field (SCON4[15:0]) is: 2 2 x ISFID_E 4 as shown at right. 6
R/W
00
R/W
0
R/W
00
R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0
R/W
00
R/W
0
R/W
00
188
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 107. SCON4 (SIU Input Even Subframe Valid Vector Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43008 for SIU0 and 0x44008 for SIU1.
15--0
ISFVEC_E[15:0] Bit Field Value 0 1 Description The corresponding channel of the selected even input subframe is disabled. The corresponding channel of the selected even input subframe is enabled. R/W Reset Value R/W 0
15--0 ISFVEC_E[15:0]
Table 108. SCON5 (SIU Input Odd Subframe Valid Vector Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4300A for SIU0 and 0x4400A for SIU1.
15--0
ISFVEC_O[15:0] Bit Field Value 0 1 Description The corresponding channel of the selected odd input subframe is disabled. The corresponding channel of the selected odd input subframe is enabled. R/W Reset Value R/W 0
15--0 ISFVEC_O[15:0]
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
189
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 109. SCON6 (SIU Output Even Subframe Valid Vector Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4300C for SIU0 and 0x4400C for SIU1.
15--0
OSFVEC_E[15:0] Bit Field Value 0 1 R/W Reset Value The corresponding channel of the selected even output subframe is disabled. R/W 0 The corresponding channel of the selected even output subframe is enabled. Description
15--0 OSFVEC_E[15:0]
Table 110. SCON7 (SIU Output Odd Subframe Valid Vector Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4300E for SIU0 and 0x4400E for SIU1.
15--0
OSFVEC_O[15:0] Bit Field Value 0 1 Description The corresponding channel of the selected odd output subframe is disabled. The corresponding channel of the selected odd output subframe is enabled. R/W Reset Value R/W 0
15--0 OSFVEC_O[15:0]
Table 111. SCON8 (SIU Output Even Subframe Mask Vector Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43010 for SIU0 and 0x44010 for SIU1.
15--0
OSFMSK_E[15:0] Bit 15--0 Field OSFMSK_E[15:0] Value 0 1 Description Do not mask the corresponding output channel. For an active even subframe, mask the corresponding output channel (do not drive SOD during the output time slot). R/W Reset Value R/W 0
Table 112. SCON9 (SIU Output Odd Subframe Mask Vector Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43012 for SIU0 and 0x44012 for SIU1.
15--0
OSFMSK_O[15:0] Bit 15--0 Field OSFMSK_O[15:0] Value 0 1 Description Do not mask the corresponding output channel. For an active odd subframe, mask the corresponding output channel (do not drive SOD during the output time slot). R/W Reset Value R/W 0
190
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 113. SCON10 (SIU Input/Output General Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43014 for SIU0 and 0x44014 for SIU1.
15 14--13 12--11 10--9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Bit
OINTSEL[1:0] Field
IINTSEL[1:0]
Reserved
SIOLB OCKK OCKA OFSK OFSA ICKK ICKA IFSK IFSA Description R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W 00
Value 0 00 01 10 11 00 01 10 11 0 0 1 0
15 Reserved 14--13 OINTSEL[1:0]
12--11 IINTSEL[1:0]
10--9 8
Reserved SIOLB
7
OCKK
Reserved--write with zero. Assert output interrupt (SOINT) after output frame sync detected. Assert output interrupt (SOINT) after output subframe transfer complete. Assert output interrupt (SOINT) after output channel transfer complete. Assert output interrupt (SOINT) after output frame error or output underflow error occurs. Assert input interrupt (SIINT) after input frame sync detected. Assert input interrupt (SIINT) after input subframe transfer complete. Assert input interrupt (SIINT) after input channel transfer complete. Assert input interrupt (SIINT) after input frame error or input overflow error occurs. Reserved--write with zero. Normal operation. Place SIU in loopback mode (SOD internally connected to SID, OCK internally connected to ICK, OFS internally connected to IFS). Drive output data onto the SOD pin on the rising edge of the output bit clock pin (SOCK). ! If OCKA is 0 (passive clock), do not invert SOCK to generate the internal output bit clock (OCK). If OCKA is 1 (active clock), do not invert the active generated output bit clock (OCK) before applying to the SOCK pin. Drive output data onto the SOD pin on the falling edge of the output bit clock pin (SOCK). ! If OCKA is 0 (passive clock), invert SOCK to generate the internal output bit clock (OCK).
!
R/W
00
R/W R/W
0 0
R/W
0
1
6
OCKA
0
1
If OCKA is 1 (active clock), invert the active generated output bit clock (OCK) before applying to the SOCK pin. Passive mode output clock--drive the internal output bit clock (OCK) from the external output bit clock pin (SOCK pin modified according to OCKK). The SIU configures SOCK as an input. Active mode output clock--drive the internal output bit clock (OCK) from the active generated output bit clock derived from CLK or SCK. The SIU configures SOCK as an output.
!
R/W
0
To determine the type of error, the program can read the contents of the STAT register (see Table 118 on page 197). If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) or ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. If the ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. The combination of passive output bit clock (OCKA = 0) and active output frame sync (OFSA = 1) is not supported. The combination of passive input bit clock (ICKA = 0) and active input frame sync (IFSA = 1) is not supported. If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
191
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 113. SCON10 (SIU Input/Output General Control) Register (continued)
Bit 5 Field OFSK Value 0 Description The external output frame sync pin (SOFS) is active-high. ! If OFSA is 0 (passive sync), do not invert SOFS to generate the internal output frame sync (OFS). If OFSA is 1 (active sync), do not invert the active generated output frame sync (OFS) before applying to the SOFS pin. The external output frame sync pin (SOFS) is active-low. ! If OFSA is 0 (passive sync), invert SOFS to generate the internal output frame sync (OFS).
!
R/W Reset Value R/W 0
1
4
OFSA
0
1
3
ICKK
0
If OFSA is 1 (active sync), invert the active generated output frame sync (OFS) before applying to the SOFS pin. Passive mode output frame sync--drive the internal output frame sync (OFS) R/W from the external output frame sync pin (SOFS modified according to OFSK and SCON2[OFSDLY]). The SIU configures SOFS as an input. Active mode output frame sync--drive the internal output frame sync (OFS) from the active generated frame sync (AGFS) modified according to SCON2[OFSDLY]. The SIU configures SOFS as an output. Capture input data from the SID pin on the falling edge of the input bit clock pin R/W (SICK). ! If ICKA is 0 (passive clock), do not invert the input bit clock pin (SICK) to generate ICK.
!
0
0
1
If ICKA is 1 (active clock), do not invert the active generated input bit clock (ICK) before applying to the SICK pin. Capture input data from the SID pin on the rising edge of the input bit clock pin (SICK). ! If ICKA is 0 (passive clock), invert SICK to generate the internal input bit clock (ICK).
!
2
ICKA
0
1
If ICKA is 1 (active clock), invert the active generated input bit clock (ICK) before applying to the SICK pin. Passive mode input bit clock--drive the internal input bit clock (ICK) from the R/W external input bit clock pin (SICK pin modified according to ICKK). The SIU configures SICK as an input. Active mode input bit clock--drive the internal input bit clock (ICK) from the active generated input bit clock derived from CLK or SCK. The SIU configures SICK as an output.
!
0
To determine the type of error, the program can read the contents of the STAT register (see Table 118 on page 197). If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) or ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. If the ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. The combination of passive output bit clock (OCKA = 0) and active output frame sync (OFSA = 1) is not supported. The combination of passive input bit clock (ICKA = 0) and active input frame sync (IFSA = 1) is not supported. If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field.
192
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 113. SCON10 (SIU Input/Output General Control) Register (continued)
Bit 1 Field IFSK Value 0 Description The external input frame sync pin (SIFS) is active-high. ! If IFSA is 0 (passive sync), do not invert SIFS to generate the internal input frame sync (IFS). If IFSA is 1 (active sync), do not invert the active generated input frame sync (IFS) before applying to the SIFS pin. The external input frame sync pin (SIFS) is active-low. ! If IFSA is 0 (passive sync), invert the input frame sync pin (SIFS) to generate the internal input frame sync (IFS).
!
R/W Reset Value R/W 0
1
0
IFSA
0
1
If IFSA is 1 (active sync), invert the active generated input frame sync (IFS) before applying to the SIFS pin. Passive mode input frame sync--drive the internal input frame sync (IFS) from the external input frame sync pin (SIFS) modified according to IFSK and SCON1[IFSDLY]. The SIU configures SIFS as an input. Active mode input frame sync--drive the internal input frame sync (IFS) from the active generated frame sync (AGFS) modified according to SCON1[IFSDLY]. If SCON12[AGSYNC] is cleared, the SIU configures SIFS as an output. If SCON12[AGSYNC] is set, the SIU configures SIFS as an input for the purpose of synchronizing the active generated bit clocks.
!
R/W
0
To determine the type of error, the program can read the contents of the STAT register (see Table 118 on page 197). If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) or ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. If the ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. The combination of passive output bit clock (OCKA = 0) and active output frame sync (OFSA = 1) is not supported. The combination of passive input bit clock (ICKA = 0) and active input frame sync (IFSA = 1) is not supported. If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
193
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 114. SCON11 (SIU Input/Output Active Clock Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43016 for SIU0 and 0x44016 for SIU1.
15--8 7--0
Reserved Bit Field Value Description
AGCKLIM[7:0]
R/W Reset Value 15--8 Reserved 0 Reserved--write with zero. R/W 0 7--0 AGCKLIM[7:0] 0--255 Active clock divide ratio--controls the period and duty cycle of the active gener- R/W 0 ated input and output bit clocks (ICK and OCK). The period of ICK and OCK (TAGCK) is the following: TAGCK = TCKAG x (max(1, AGCKLIM[7:0]) + 1) where TCKAG is the period of the clock source for ICK and OCK. The high and low times of ICK and OCK (TAGCKH and TAGCKL) are as follows: TAGCKH = TCKAG x int((max(1, AGCKLIM[7:0]) + 2) / 2) TAGCKL = TCKAG x int((max(1, AGCKLIM[7:0]) + 1) / 2) where TCKAG is the period of the clock source for ICK and OCK and int( ) is the integer function (truncation). The following table illustrates examples: Bit Clock Period TAGCK 2 x TCKAG 3 x TCKAG 4 x TCKAG 5 x TCKAG 6 x TCKAG 7 x TCKAG 255 x TCKAG 256 x TCKAG High Time TAGCKH 1 x TCKAG 2 x TCKAG 2 x TCKAG 3 x TCKAG 3 x TCKAG 4 x TCKAG 128 x TCKAG 128 x TCKAG Low Time TAGCKL 1 x TCKAG 1 x TCKAG 2 x TCKAG 2 x TCKAG 3 x TCKAG 3 x TCKAG 127 x TCKAG 128 x TCKAG
AGCKLIM[7:0] 0 or 1 2 3 4 5 6 254 255
If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) or ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. The clock source is selected by SCON12[AGEXT] as either the SCK pin (modified by SCON12[SCKK]) or the processor clock, CLK.
194
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 115. SCON12 (SIU Input/Output Active Frame Sync Control) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43018 for SIU0 and 0x44018 for SIU1.
15 14 13 12 11 10--0
AGRESET Bit 15 14 Field
AGSYNC Value 0 1 0 1
SCKK
AGEXT
Reserved Description
AGFSLIM[10:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 1 0
AGRESET AGSYNC
13
SCKK
0
1
Activate the active clock and frame sync generator. Deactivate the active clock and frame sync generator. Do not synchronize the active generated input and output bit clocks to an R/W external source. Configure the external input frame sync (SIFS) pin as an input and synchronize the active generated input and output bit clocks to SIFS. Do not invert the SCK pin before applying it to the active clock generator, i.e., R/W if SCK is selected as the active clock source, the rising edge of the active generated input and output bit clocks is generated by the rising edge of SCK. Invert the SCK pin before applying it to the active clock generator, i.e., if SCK is selected as the active clock source, the rising edge of the active generated input and output bit clocks is generated by the falling edge of SCK.
0
Caution: Set this bit only if AGEXT is also set. The processor clock (CLK) is the clock source for the active clock and frame R/W sync generator. 1 The SCK pin (modified according to SCKK) is the clock source for the active clock and frame sync generator. 11 Reserved 0 Reserved--write with zero. R/W 0--2047 Active frame sync divide ratio--controls the period and duty cycle of the R/W 10--0 AGFSLIM[10:0] active generated frame syncs (IFS and OFS). The period of IFS and OFS (TAGFS) is the following: 12 AGEXT 0 TAGFS = TAGCK x (max(1, AGFSLIM[10:0]) + 1) where TAGCK is the period of the clock source for IFS and OFS. The high and low times of IFS and OFS (TAGFSH and TAGFSL) are as follows: TAGFSH = TAGCK x int((max(1, AGFSLIM[10:0]) + 1) / 2) TAGFSL = TAGCK x int((max(1, AGFSLIM[10:0]) + 2) / 2) where TAGCK is the period of the clock source for IFS and OFS and int( ) is the integer function (truncation). The following table illustrates examples: Frame Sync Period AGFSLIM[10:0] TAGFS 15 16 x TAGCK 16 17 x TAGCK 2047 2048 x TAGCK High Time TAGFSH 8 x TAGCK 8 x TAGCK 1024 x TAGCK Low Time TAGFSL 8 x TAGCK 9 x TAGCK 1024 x TAGCK
0
0 0
If the IRESET field (SCON1[10]) or ORESET field (SCON2[10]) is cleared, do not change the value in this field. SCK is selected as the clock source for the active clock generator if AGEXT is 1. The clock source is the active generated bit clock with period TAGCK.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
195
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 116. SIDR (SIU Input Data) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4301A for SIU0 and 0x4401A for SIU1.
15--0
Serial Input Data Bit 15--0 Field Serial Input Data Description Read-only 16-bit serial input data. The SIU can optionally expand the data in the input shift register before latching it into SIDR. The user program controls this optional expansion by configuring the IFORMAT[1:0] field (SCON0[1:0]--Table 103 on page 185). R/W R Reset Value 0
Table 117. SODR (SIU Output Data) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4301C for SIU0 and 0x4401C for SIU1.
15--0
Serial Output Data Bit 15--0 Field Serial Output Data Description Write-only 16-bit serial output data. The SIU optionally compresses the data in SODR before latching it into the output shift register. The user program controls this optional compression by configuring the OFORMAT[1:0] field (SCON0[9:8]--Table 103 on page 185). R/W W Reset Value 0
196
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 118. STAT (SIU Input/Output General Status) Register The memory address for this register is 0x4301E for SIU0 and 0x4401E for SIU1.
15--8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Bit 15--8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Field Reserved OUFLOW IOFLOW OFERR IFERR SODV Reserved SIBV SIDV
OUFLOW Value 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
IOFLOW
OFERR
IFERR Description
SODV
Reserved
SIBV R/W
SIDV Reset Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Reserved--write with zero. Output underflow error has not occurred. Output underflow error has occurred. Input overflow error has not occurred. Input overflow error has occurred. Output frame error has not occurred. Output frame error has occurred. Input frame error has not occurred. Input frame error has occurred. SODR does not contain valid data. SODR contains valid data. Reserved--write with zero. SIB does not contain valid data. SIB contains valid data. SIDR does not contain valid data. SIDR contains valid data.
R/W R/Clear R/Clear R/Clear R/Clear R R/W R R
The programmer clears this bit by writing it with 1. Writing 0 to this bit leaves it unchanged. The SIB register is an intermediate register that holds the contents of the input shift register and is not user accessible.
Table 119. FSTAT (SIU Input/Output Frame Status) Register The memory address for this register is 0x43020 for SIU0 and 0x44020 for SIU1.
15 14--8 7 6--0
OACTIVE Bit 15 Field OACTIVE Value 0 1
OFIX[6:0]
IACTIVE Description
IFIX[6:0] R/W R Reset Value 0
No output channels have been processed. At least one output channel has been processed following output section reset (ORESET(SCON2[10]) = 0). (Distinguishes the first (index 0) and last (index n x 8) output subframes.) 14--8 OFIX[6:0] 0--127 Channel index of the next enabled output channel. 7 IACTIVE 0 No input channels have been processed. 1 At least one input channel has been processed following input section reset (IRESET(SCON1[10]) = 0). (Distinguishes the first (index 0) and last (index n x 8) input subframes.) 6--0 IFIX[6:0] 0--127 Current input channel index.
R R
0 0
R
0
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
197
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 120. OCIX0--1 and ICIX0--1 (SIU Output and Input Channel Index) Registers
Register OCIX0 OCIX1 ICIX0 ICIX1 Address SIU0 SIU1 0x43030 0x44030 0x43032 0x44032 0x43040 0x44040 0x43042 0x44042 Description Output channel index for the active even subframe. Output channel index for the active odd subframe. Input channel index for the active even subframe. Input channel index for the active odd subframe. See Table 121 Table 121 Table 122 on page 199 Table 122 on page 199
Table 121. OCIX0--1 (SIU Output Channel Index) Registers See Table 120 for the memory addresses of these registers.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Channel Mode (Each bit is mapped to a logical channel in the active subframe.)
OCIX0
OCIX1
Subframe 0 15 14 13 Subframe 2 47 46 45 Subframe 4 79 78 77 Subframe 6 111 110 109 Subframe 1 31 30 29 Subframe 3 63 62 61 Subframe 5 95 94 93 Subframe 7 127 126 125
15 14 13
12 44 76 108 28 60 92 124
12
11 43 75 107 27 59 91 123
11
10 42 74 106 26 58 90 122
10
9 41 73 105 25 57 89 121
9
8 40 72 104 24 56 88 120
8
7 39 71 103 23 55 87 119
7
6 38 70 102 22 54 86 118
6
5 37 69 101 21 53 85 117
5
4 36 68 100 20 52 84 116
4
3 35 67 99 19 51 83 115
3
2 34 66 98 18 50 82 114
2
1 33 65 97 17 49 81 113
1
0 32 64 96 16 48 80 112
0
Frame Mode (Each bit is circularly mapped to four logical channels.)
OCIX0
OCIX1
15 47 79 111 31 63 95 127
14 46 78 110 30 62 94 126
13 45 77 109 29 61 93 125
12 44 76 108 28 60 92 124
11 43 75 107 27 59 91 123
10 42 74 106 26 58 90 122
9 41 73 105 25 57 89 121
8 40 72 104 24 56 88 120
7 39 71 103 23 55 87 119
6 38 70 102 22 54 86 118
5 37 69 101 21 53 85 117
4 36 68 100 20 52 84 116
3 35 67 99 19 51 83 115
2 34 66 98 18 50 82 114 R/W R/W
1 33 65 97 17 49 81 113
0 32 64 96 16 48 80 112
Bit 15--0
Value 0 1
Description (SIU0) Use DMAU channel SWT0 for output to the logical channel shown above. Use DMAU channel SWT1 for output to the logical channel shown above.
Description (SIU1) Use DMAU channel SWT2 for output to the logical channel shown above. Use DMAU channel SWT3 for output to the logical channel shown above.
Reset Value 0
If the number of logical channels per frame is one (OFLIM[6:0] (SCON2[6:0]) = 0) in frame mode, bits 1 and 0 of OCIX0 (OCIX0[1:0]) must be programmed with the same value.
198
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.16 Serial Interface Unit (SIU) (continued)
4.16.15 Registers (continued) Table 122. ICIX0--1 (SIU Input Channel Index) Registers See Table 120 on page 198 for the memory addresses of these registers.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Channel Mode (Each bit is mapped to a logical channel in the active subframe.)
ICIX0
ICIX1
Subframe 0 15 14 13 Subframe 2 47 46 45 Subframe 4 79 78 77 Subframe 6 111 110 109 Subframe 1 31 30 29 Subframe 3 63 62 61 Subframe 5 95 94 93 Subframe 7 127 126 125
15 14 13
12 44 76 108 28 60 92 124
12
11 43 75 107 27 59 91 123
11
10 42 74 106 26 58 90 122
10
9 41 73 105 25 57 89 121
9
8 40 72 104 24 56 88 120
8
7 39 71 103 23 55 87 119
7
6 38 70 102 22 54 86 118
6
5 37 69 101 21 53 85 117
5
4 36 68 100 20 52 84 116
4
3 35 67 99 19 51 83 115
3
2 34 66 98 18 50 82 114
2
1 33 65 97 17 49 81 113
1
0 32 64 96 16 48 80 112
0
Frame Mode (Each bit is circularly mapped to four logical channels.)
ICIX0
ICIX1
15 47 79 111 31 63 95 127
14 46 78 110 30 62 94 126
13 45 77 109 29 61 93 125
12 44 76 108 28 60 92 124
11 43 75 107 27 59 91 123
10 42 74 106 26 58 90 122
9 41 73 105 25 57 89 121
8 40 72 104 24 56 88 120
7 39 71 103 23 55 87 119
6 38 70 102 22 54 86 118
5 37 69 101 21 53 85 117
4 36 68 100 20 52 84 116
3 35 67 99 19 51 83 115
2 34 66 98 18 50 82 114 R/W R/W
1 33 65 97 17 49 81 113
0 32 64 96 16 48 80 112
Bit 15--0
Value 0 1
Description (SIU0) Use DMAU channel SWT0 for input from the logical channel shown above. Use DMAU channel SWT1 for input from the logical channel shown above.
Description (SIU1) Use DMAU channel SWT2 for input from the logical channel shown above. Use DMAU channel SWT3 for input from the logical channel shown above.
Reset Value 0
If the number of logical channels per frame is one (IFLIM[6:0](SCON1[6:0]) = 0) in frame mode, bits 1 and 0 of ICIX0 (ICIX0[1:0]) must be programmed with the same value.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
199
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
has the frequency and duty cycle of CKI. The DSP16411 consumes less power if clocked with CKI.
!
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.17 Internal Clock Selection
The DSP16411 internal clock can be driven from one of two sources. The primary source clock is an on-chip programmable clock synthesizer that can be driven by an external clock input pin (CKI) at a fraction of the required instruction rate. The clock synthesizer is based on a phase-lock loop (PLL). The terms clock synthesizer and PLL are used interchangeably. Section 4.18, beginning on page 201, describes the PLL and its associated pllcon, pllfrq, pllfrq1, and plldly registers in detail. Note: Internal clock functions for the DSP16411 are controlled by CORE0 because the registers pllcon, pllfrq, pllfrq1, and plldly are only available to programs executing in CORE0. Figure 54 illustrates the internal clock selection logic that selects the internal clock (CLK) from one of the following two source clocks:
!
PLL: The PLL generates a source clock with a programmable frequency. If the PLL is selected as the source clock, fCLK has the frequency and duty cycle of the PLL output fSYN.
After device reset, the default source clock signal is CKI. The programmer can select the PLL as the source clock by setting the PLLSEL field (pllcon[0]--see Table 124 on page 202). Before selecting the PLL as the clock source, the user program must first enable (power up) the PLL by setting the PLLEN field (pllcon[1]), and then wait for the PLL to lock. See Section 4.18, beginning on page 201, for details. Table 123 summarizes the selection of the two source clocks as a function of the PLLSEL field. Table 123. Source Clock Selection
PLLSEL (pllcon[0]) 0 1 fCLK fCKI fSYN Description CKI pin PLL
CKI: This pin is driven by an external oscillator or the pin's associated boundary-scan logic under JTAG control. If CKI is selected as the source clock, CLK
Internal Clock Selection Logic
PLLSEL (pllcon[0]) CKI fCKI 0 SYNC MUX 1 fCKI PLL fSYN fCLK CLK
PLLEN (pllcon[1])
CLOCK SELECTION LOGIC
The multiplexer is designed so that no partial clocks or glitching occurs.
Figure 54. Internal Clock Selection Logic
200
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
(fPD), and for the output frequency of the voltage-controlled oscillator (fVCO). The M[5:0], N[3:0], and P fields must be programmed to values such that the fSYN, fPD, and fVCO frequencies are within the required ranges specified in Table 188. The following equations specify fPD and fVCO: f CKI f PD = ------------N+1 2(M + 2) f VCO = f CKI x ---------------------N+1
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.18 Clock Synthesis
Figure 55 is a block diagram of the clock synthesizer, or phase-lock loop (PLL). The PLL is powered by two supplies: VDD1A and VDD2A. CORE0 enables, selects, and configures the PLL by writing to four registers: pllcon, pllfrq, pllfrq1, and plldly (see Section 4.18.3 on page 202). pllcon is used to enable and select the PLL clock synthesizer (see Section 4.17 on page 200). pllfrq and pllfrq1 determine the frequency multiplier of the PLL (see Section 4.18.1 on page 201). Before selecting the PLL as the clock source, the user program must first enable (power up) the PLL by setting the PLLEN field (pllcon[1]) and then wait for the PLL to lock. plldly is used for PLL LOCK flag generation (see Section 4.18.2 on page 201). 4.18.1 PLL Operating Frequency The PLL-synthesized clock frequency is determined by the fields of the pllfrq and pllfrq1 registers. The synthesized clock frequency is calculated as: M+2 fSYN = fCKI x ------------------------------------( N + 1)( P + 1) where:
!
4.18.2 PLL LOCK Flag Generation The DSP16411 does not provide a PLL-generated status flag that indicates when the PLL has locked. Instead, a user-programmable register, plldly (Table 127 on page 202), and an associated delay counter is used for this purpose. If the pllcon register is written to enable the PLL, the DSP16411 loads the delay counter with the value in plldly. The DSP16411 decrements this counter for each subsequent cycle of the DSP input clock (CKI). When the counter reaches zero, the LOCK status flag is asserted. The state of the LOCK flag can be tested by conditional instructions (Section 6.1.1 on page 226) and is also visible in the alf register (Table 144 on page 235). The LOCK flag is cleared on reset or by a write to the pllcon register. The PLL requires 0.5 ms to achieve lock. The application software should set the plldly register to a value that produces a minimum delay of 0.5 ms. The register setting needed to achieve this delay is dependent on the frequency of the input clock (CKI). The programmed value for plldly that results in a countdown delay of 0.5 ms is the following: plldly = 500 x fCKI where fCKI is the input clock frequency in MHz. See Section 4.18.4 on page 203 for a PLL programming example that includes the use of plldly.
M is the multiplier in the VCO to phase detector feedback path. It is determined by the programming of the M[5:0] field (pllfrq[5:0]). N controls the input divider and is determined by the programming of the N[3:0] field (pllfrq1[3:0]). P controls the output divider and is determined by the programming of the P field (pllfrq1[8]).
!
!
Table 188 on page 277 specifies the timing requirements for fSYN, for the phase detector input frequency
CKI
fCKI
/(N + 1)
fPD
PHASE DETECTOR
CHARGE PUMP
fVCO VCO
/(P + 1)
/2 PLLEN (pllcon[1])
fSYN
N[3:0] (pllfrq1[14:11])
/2(M + 2)
P (pllfrq1[8])
VDD1A VSS1A
M[5:0] (pllfrq[5:0]) PLL
VDD2A VSS2A
Figure 55. Clock Synthesizer (PLL) Block Diagram Agere Systems Inc. Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 201
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.18 Clock Synthesis (continued)
4.18.3 PLL Registers Table 124. pllcon (Phase-Lock Loop Control) Register Note: pllcon is accessible in CORE0 only.
15--2 1 0
Reserved Bit 15--2 1 0 Field Reserved PLLEN PLLSEL Value -- 0 1 0 1
PLLEN Description Reserved--write with zero. Disable (power down) the PLL. Enable (power up) the PLL. Select the CKI input as the internal clock (CLK) source. Select the PLL as the internal clock (CLK) source.
PLLSEL R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0 0
Table 125. pllfrq (Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control) Register Note: pllfrq is accessible in CORE0 only.
15--6 5--0
Reserved Bit 15--6 5--0 Field Reserved M[5:0]
M[5:0] R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0
Value Description -- Reserved--write with zero. 4--48 Defines M, which determines the feedback clock divider control setting (2(M + 2)). The value for M must ensure the requirements in Table 188 on page 277 are met.
Table 126. pllfrq1 (Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control 1) Register Note: pllfrq1 is accessible in CORE0 only.
15--9 8 7--4 3--0
Reserved
P
Reserved
N[3:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W R/W 0 0
Bit Field Value Description 15--9 Reserved -- Reserved--write with zero. 8 P 0--1 Defines P, which determines the VCO output divider control setting (P + 1). (For a value of fSYN of 240 MHz or less, P must be set to 1.) 7--4 Reserved -- Reserved--write with zero. 3--0 N[3:0] 0--4 Defines N, which determines the reference clock divider control setting (N + 1). The value chosen for N must ensure the requirements in Table 188 on page 277 are met.
Table 127. plldly (Phase-Lock Loop Delay Control) Register Note: plldly is accessible in CORE0 only.
15--0
DLY[15:0] Bit 15--0 15--0 DLY[15:0] Value -- Description The contents of DLY[15:0] are loaded into the PLL delay counter after a pllcon register write. If PLLEN (pllcon[1]) is 1, the counter decrements each CKI cycle. When the counter reaches zero, the LOCK flag for both CORE0 and CORE1 is asserted. R/W R/W Reset Value 0x1388
The state of the LOCK flag can be tested by conditional instructions (Table 138 on page 226) and is also visible in the alf register (Table 144 on page 235). The LOCK flag is cleared by a device reset or a write to the pllcon register.
202
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.18 Clock Synthesis (continued)
4.18.4 PLL Programming Example The following code example illustrates the recommended PLL programming sequence which must be run on CORE0 only. It assumes the following parameters:
! ! ! !
CKI = 30 MHz. The required PLL output frequency (fSYN) is 285 MHz. fVCO = 570 MHz. The PLL multiplier is 9.5 (M = 17, N = 1, and P = 0).
As specified in Table 188 on page 277, the maximum PLL lock time (tL) is 0.5 ms, or 15,000 CKI cycles. pllcon=0x0000 plldly=15000 pllfrq=0x0011 pllfrq1=0x0001 pllcon=0x0002 // // // // // // // Turn off the PLL Set countdown delay = 0.5 ms (500 x 30 = 15,000) M=17 P=0, N=1 Turn on PLL (DSP16411 automatically loads delay counter from plldly) Wait for pllcon write to complete
4*nop pllwait: if lock goto pllon // Wait for delay countdown to complete goto pllwait pllon: pllcon=0x0003 // Select PLL as CLK source 4.18.5 Powering Down the PLL
Clearing the PLLEN field (pllcon[1]) powers down the PLL. Do not power down the PLL (do not clear PLLEN) if the PLL is selected as the clock source (PLLSEL (pllcon[0]) = 1). The PLL must be deselected as the clock source prior to or concurrent with powering down the PLL. See Section 4.20, beginning on page 205, for general information on power management. Caution: Do not power down the PLL (PLLEN = 0) while it is selected as the clock source (PLLSEL = 1). If this occurs, the device freezes because it has no clock source and cannot operate. To recover from this condition, the RSTN, TRST0N, and TRST1N pins must be asserted to reset the device. 4.18.6 Phase-Lock Loop (PLL) Frequency Accuracy and Jitter Although the average frequency of the PLL output has almost the same relative accuracy as the input clock, noise sources within the DSP16411 produce jitter on the PLL clock. The PLL is guaranteed to have sufficiently low jitter to operate the DSP16411. However, if the PLL clock is used as the clock source for external devices via the ECKO pin, do not apply this clock to jitter-sensitive devices. See Table 188 on page 277 for the input jitter requirements for the PLL. Note: Jitter on the ECKO output clock pin does not need to be taken into account with respect to the timing requirements and characteristics specified in Section 11, beginning on page 276.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
203
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
Table 128 specifies the selection of the ECKO pin as a function of the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields (ECON1[3:0]). After reset, the ECKO output pin is configured as CLK/2 and CLK is configured as CKI. Therefore, after reset, ECKO is configured as CKI/2. The logic that controls the ECKO pin is illustrated in Figure 56 on page 206. If the application does not require a clock on the ECKO pin, the user can program ECKO as logic low during initialization to reduce power consumption. Note: Although ECON1 can be accessed by either core, the programmer should select only one core (such as CORE0) to control the ECKO pin.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.19 External Clock Selection
The ECKO pin can be programmed using the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields (ECON1[3:0]--Table 61 on page 112) to select one of the following outputs: 1. CLK/2: The internal clock CLK divided by 2. 2. CLK/4: The internal clock CLK divided by 4. 3. CLK: The internal clock CLK. 4. CKI: The buffered CKI pin. 5. ZERO: Logic low. Table 128. ECKO Output Clock Pin Configuration
ECKOB[1:0] ECON1[3] ECON1[2] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 ECKOA[1:0] ECON1[1] ECON1[0] 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 X X X X X X
State CLK/2 CLK CKI 0 Reserved Reserved CLK/4
ECKO Pin Description Frequency of CLK divided by two. Frequency of CLK. Input clock pin. Logic zero. -- -- Frequency of CLK divided by four.
Default after reset. After reset, CLK = CKI, so ECKO = CKI/2. CLK is the internal (core) clock. See Section 4.17 on page 200 for details.
204
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
The DSP16411 includes additional mechanisms for saving power that are independent of standby mode: 1. CORE0 can temporarily select the CKI pin as the source clock to the cores and peripherals by clearing the PLLSEL field (pllcon[0]--see Table 124 on page 202). To save additional power, CORE0 can temporarily disable (power down) the PLL by clearing the PLLEN field (pllcon[1]). 2. CORE0 can drive the ECKO1 pin low by programming the ECKOA[1:0] field (ECON1[1:0]--see Table 61 on page 112) to 0x3 and the ECKOB[1:0] field (ECON1[3:2]) to 0x0. 3. Each core can power down one or both of its timers (set timer0,1c[6]). See Section 4.10 on page 53 for details. Prior to entering standby mode, CORE0 can perform any of the above steps to save additional power. Prior to entering standby mode, CORE1 can direct CORE0 to perform steps 1 and 2, and CORE1 can perform step 3 directly. (See Section 4.5 on page 38 for information on core-to-core communication.) An interrupt causes the associated core to exit standby mode and immediately service the interrupt. If the program running in CORE0 selects the CKI pin as the source clock before entering standby mode, that clock is selected as the source clock immediately after the core exits standby mode. Likewise, if the program running in CORE0 disables the PLL before entering standby mode, the PLL is disabled immediately after the core exits standby mode. Assuming the PLL is the source clock for normal operation, the CORE0 program must re-enable and then reselect the PLL after exiting standby mode in order to resume full-speed processing. Only CORE0 can control the PLL and clock selection. Therefore, if CORE1 exits standby mode and needs to resume full-speed execution, it must direct CORE0 to enable and reselect the PLL. Note: If CORE0 selects the CKI pin as the source clock before entering standby mode, the peripherals also operate at the slower rate. This can result in an increased delay for a peripheral to interrupt the core to exit standby mode.
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.20 Power Management
A program running in a core can place that core into low-power standby mode by setting the AWAIT field (alf[15]--see Table 144 on page 235). In this mode, the clock to that core and its associated TPRAM are disabled except for the minimum core circuitry required to process an incoming interrupt or trap. The clock to the peripherals is unaffected. Figure 56 on page 206 illustrates the following:
! ! !
Distribution of CLK to the cores and peripherals. Function of the AWAIT field. Interrupts to the core used to exit low-power standby mode. ECKO pin selection logic (see Section 4.19 on page 204 for details).
!
If a core is in low-power standby mode, program execution in that core is suspended without loss of state. If an interrupt that was enabled by that core occurs or if a trap occurs, the core clears its AWAIT field, exits lowpower standby mode, resumes program execution, and services the interrupt or trap. See Section 4.4.5 on page 30 and Section 4.4.6 on page 31 for information on enabling interrupts. If the DMAU accesses the TPRAM while the associated core is in standby mode, the clock to the TPRAM is re-enabled for that access. However, if the core goes into standby mode while an access to a memory component is in progress, it locks out the DMAU from accessing that component. To prevent locking out the DMAU, the user program must use the macro SLEEP_ALF () in the 16411.h file. The 16411.h file is included with the Agere software generation system (SGS) tools. Using SLEEP_ALF () guarantees that the core completes all pending memory accesses before entering standby mode. SLEEP_ALF () expands to the following: .align goto .+1 alf=0x8000 3*nop
1. Although ECON1 can be accessed by either core, the programmer should select only one core (such as CORE0) to control the ECKO pin. The programmer is responsible for developing a protocol between CORE0 and CORE1. Intercore coordination is not part of the DSP16411 hardware.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
205
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.20 Power Management (continued)
Power Management and Clock Distribution
CLK
CKI
/2
CLK/2
MUX
ECKO
/4
CLK/4 0
2 ECKOB[1:0], ECKOA[1:0] (ECON1[3:0])
SYNC GATE
AWAIT (alf[15])
SYNC GATE
AWAIT (alf[15])
CLOCK
TPRAM0
CLOCK
TPRAM1
CORE0 CLK INTERRUPT LOGIC DMINT[5:4] MXI[9:0] SIGINT, PTRAP MXI[9:0] XIO XIO SIGINT, PTRAP TIME0 TIME1 INT[1:0] PHINT MGIBF CLK
CORE1
INTERRUPT LOGIC DMINT[5:4] TIME0 2 TIMER0_1 INT[1:0] MGIBF PHINT TIME1 TIMER1_1
10
10
2
IMUX0
IMUX1
2
2
TIMER0_0
TIMER1_0
2 MGU0 SIU0 DMAU PIU
2 MGU1 SIU1
SEMI
INT[1:0] CLK is described in Section 4.17 on page 200. The IMUX is described in Section 4.4.2, beginning on page 28.
Figure 56. Power Management and Clock Distribution
206
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
4 Hardware Architecture (continued)
4.20 Power Management (continued)
Wake-up latency is the delay from the time that the core exits standby mode (due to an interrupt) to the time that the core resumes full-speed execution. The wake-up latency is dependent on the configuration of clocks prior to entering standby mode, as summarized in Table 129. The programmer must ensure that the wake-up latency is acceptable in the application. Table 129 also illustrates the trade-off of wake-up latency vs. power consumption. Disabling the PLL during low-power standby mode results in the minimum power consumption and highest wakeup latency. See Section 10.3 on page 272 and Section 11.2 on page 278 for details on power dissipation and wake-up latency for various operating modes. Table 129. Wake-Up Latency and Power Consumption for Low-Power Standby Mode
Source Clock Selected In Standby Mode PLL CKI Pin Status of PLL In Standby Mode Enabled Enabled Disabled Wake-Up Latency Latency vs. Power Consumption Trade-Off
3 PLL cycles 3 CKI cycles 3 CKI cycles + PLL lock-in time
Minimum wake-up latency (highest power) -- Minimum power (highest wake-up latency)
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
207
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
5 Processor Boot-Up and Memory Download
The state of the EXM pin at the time of reset determines whether CORE0 and CORE1 boot from their internal boot ROMs or from external memory, as specified in Table 130. Table 130. Core Boot-Up After Reset
State of EXM Pin on Rising Edge of RSTN EXM = 0 EXM = 1 CORE0 Begins Executing Code From IROM0 (address 0x30000) EROM (address 0x80000) CORE1 Begins Executing Code From IROM1 (address 0x30000) EROM (address 0x80000)
Table 131 summarizes the contents of the internal boot ROMs: IROM0 and IROM1. The contents of IROM0 and IROM1 are identical. Table 131. Contents of IROM0 and IROM1 Boot ROMs
Address or Address Range 0x30000 0x30004--0x303FF 0x30800--0x308FF 0x30FFE--0x30FFF Reserved for HDS code. Boot routine. Processor type: 0x00000005. Code Instruction: goto 0x30800 (boot routine).
If the cores boot from their internal boot ROMs, then they execute a boot routine that is described in Section 5.1. This routine simply waits for an external host to download code and data into the TPRAMs via the PIU. When the download is complete, the boot routine causes each core to branch to the first location in its TPRAM. If the cores boot from EROM, then the user must place a boot routine for both cores into EROM prior to reset. Section 5.2 on page 209 outlines a boot routine that downloads code and data into the TPRAMs via the DMAU and then causes each core to branch to the first location in its own TPRAM. Note: After the deassertion of RSTN and during the execution of the boot routine, the clock synthesizer (PLL) is disabled and the frequency of the internal clock (CLK) is the same as the input clock pin (CKI).
5.1 IROM Boot Routine and Host Download Via PIU
CORE0 and CORE1 boot from IROM0 and IROM1 if the EXM pin is low when RSTN is deasserted. The boot routine in IROM0 is identical to that in IROM1. The routine polls for the PHINT interrupt condition1 in the ins register (Table 154 on page 242) to determine when the external host has completed downloading to TPRAM via the PIU. While the cores wait for PHINT to be set, the host can download code and data to any of the memory spaces in the Z-memory space, summarized below:
!
Internal memory and I/O: -- TPRAM0 -- TPRAM1 -- Internal I/O (includes SLM and memory-mapped peripheral registers) External memory and I/O: -- EIO space -- ERAM space -- EROM space
!
1. Interrupts remain globally disabled during execution of the boot routine, and the PHINT interrupt condition is detected by polling.
208
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
5 Processor Boot-Up and Memory Download (continued)
5.1 IROM Boot Routine and Host Download Via PIU (continued)
The host accesses DSP16411 memory by executing commands that cause the PIU to use the DMAU bypass channel for downloading. See Section 4.15.5 on page 147 for details. When the host has completed the download, it asserts the PHINT interrupt and sets the PHINT interrupt pending status field (ins[13]--see Table 154 on page 242) by writing the HINT field (PCON[4]--see Table 75 on page 136). After each boot routine detects the assertion of PHINT, it branches to the first location of TPRAM (TPRAM0 for CORE0 and TPRAM1 for CORE1). The boot routine is shown below: .rsect ".rom" goto PUPBOOT // Address 0x30000 // Branch to boot routine.
// Other Vectors, HDS code, and Production test code go here. .rsect ".PowerUpBoot" PUPBOOT: pollboot: // Address 30800
pt0=0 a0=ins a0 & 0x0000002000 if eq goto pollboot r0=0x41000 a0=0x0010 ins=0xffff *r0=a0 a0=0; r0=0 goto pt0
// Check ins[PHINT]. // Wait for ins[PHINT] to be set. // Point to the PCON register. // // // // Clear pending interrupts in ins. Write PCON to clear HINT bit. Cleanup. Jump to user code.
5.2 EROM Boot Routine and DMAU Download
CORE0 and CORE1 both boot from EROM at address 0x80000 if the EXM pin is high when RSTN is deasserted. The cores access EROM via the SEMI, and the SEMI interleaves the accesses so that CORE0 executes the instruction at address 0x80000 first, then CORE1 executes the instruction at address 0x80000 next, etc. The user must place a boot routine for both cores into EROM prior to reset. This boot routine can contain instructions to download code and data from ERAM to internal memory (TPRAM0 and TPRAM1) via the DMAU. The download can be performed either by both cores or by one core while the other core waits. In either case, the boot routine must distinguish whether CORE0 or CORE1 is executing it. It does this by reading the processor ID (pid) register (Table 157 on page 242). CORE0's pid register contains 0x0 and CORE1's pid register contains 0x1. After determining the processor ID, the boot routine can branch to the correct boot procedure for that core. Once the download is complete, both cores can terminate their boot procedures by executing the following instructions: pt0=0x0 nop goto pt0 This causes CORE0 to begin executing instructions at address 0x0 of TPRAM0 and CORE1 to begin executing instructions at address 0x0 of TPRAM1.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
209
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference
The DSP16411 instruction set consists of both 16-bit and 32-bit wide instructions and resembles C-code. Table 132 defines the seven types of instructions. The assembler translates a line of assembly code into the most efficient DSP16411 instruction(s). See Table 134 on page 218 for instruction set notation conventions. Table 132. DSP16411 Instruction Groups
Instruction Group MAC F Title (If Applicable) F1 TRANSFER F1E TRANSFER if CON F1E Description The powerful MAC instruction group is the primary group of instructions used for signal processing. Up to two data transfers can be combined with up to four parallel DAU operations in a single MAC instruction to execute simultaneously. The DAU operation combinations include (but are not limited to) either a dual-MAC operation, an ALU operation and a BMU operation, or an ALU/ACS operation and an ADDER/ACS operation. The F1E instructions that do not include a transfer statement can execute conditionally based on the state of flags. Special functions include rounding, negation, absolute value, and fixed arithmetic left and right shift operations. The operands are an accumulator, another DAU register, or an accumulator and another DAU register. Some special function instructions increment counters. Special functions execute conditionally based on the state of flags. ALU instructions operate on two accumulators or on an accumulator and another DAU register. Many instructions can also operate on an accumulator and an immediate data word. The ALU operations are add, subtract, logical AND, logical OR, exclusive OR, maximum, minimum, and divide-step. Some F3E instructions include a parallel ADDER operation. The F3E instructions can execute conditionally based on the state of flags. Full barrel shifting, exponent computation, normalization computation, bit-field extraction or insertion, and data shuffling between two accumulators are BMU operations that act on the accumulators. BMU operations are controlled by an accumulator, an auxiliary register, or a 16-bit immediate value. The F4E instructions can execute conditionally based on the state of flags. Data move instructions transfer data between two registers or between a register and memory. This instruction group also supports immediate loads of registers, conditional register-to-register moves, pipeline block moves, and specialized stack operations. Pointer arithmetic instructions perform arithmetic on data pointers and do not perform a memory access. The control instruction group contains branch and call subroutine instructions with either a 20-bit absolute address or a 12-bit or 16-bit PC-relative address. This group also includes instructions to enable and disable interrupts. Some control instructions can execute conditionally based on the state of processor flags. Cache instructions implement low-overhead loops by loading a set of up to 31 instructions into cache memory and repetitively executing them as many as 216 - 1 times.
Special Function
if CON F2 ifc CON F2 if CON F2E ifc CON F2E F3 if CON F3E
ALU
BMU
F4 if CON F4E
Data Move and Pointer Arithmetic Control
--
--
Cache
--
Executes in one instruction cycle in most cases. A dual-MAC operation consists of two multiplies and an add or subtract operation by the ALU, an add or subtract operation by the ADDER, or both. See Section 6.1.1 on page 226 for a description of processor flags.
210
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
See the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual for a detailed description of:
! ! ! !
The instruction set Pipeline hazards1 Instruction encoding formats and field descriptions Instruction set reference
Table 133 on page 212 lists the entire instruction set with its cycle performance and the number of memory locations required for each. Figure 57 is an illustration of a single row of the table and a description of how to interpret its contents.
INSTRUCTIONS ARE GROUPED INTO CATEGORIES (ONE OF SEVEN). F TITLE (IF APPLICABLE). FLAGS AFFECTED BY THIS INSTRUCTION. QUANTITY OF PROGRAM MEMORY USED BY THE INSTRUCTION. (EITHER 1 OR 2 16-bit WORDS).
Instruction ALU Group
Flags szlme
Cycles Out In 1 1
Words
aD = aS OP aTE, pE
INSTRUCTION SYNTAX.
(F3)
szlm-
1
THE NUMBER OF INSTRUCTION CYCLES USED WHEN THE INSTRUCTION IS EXECUTED OUTSIDE OF THE CACHE. THE NUMBER OF INSTRUCTION CYCLES USED WHEN THE INSTRUCTION IS EXECUTED INSIDE OF THE CACHE. A DASH (--) INDICATES THE INSTRUCTION IS NOT CACHABLE.
szlme corresponds to the LMI (s), LEQ (z), LLV (l), LMV (m), and EPAR (e) flags. If a letter appears in this column, the corresponding flag is affected by this instruction. If a dash appears in this column, the corresponding flag is unaffected by this instruction. In the example shown, the instruction affects all flags except for EPAR. For MAC group instructions with both an ALU/ACS operation and an ADDER or BMU operation, the ALU/ACS result affects the LMI, LEQ, LLV, and LMV flags, and the EPAR flag is unaffected.
Figure 57. Interpretation of the Instruction Set Summary Table Table 134 on page 218 summarizes the instruction set notation conventions for interpreting the instruction syntax descriptions. Table 135 on page 219 is an overall replacement table that summarizes the replacement for every upper-case character string in the instruction set summary table (Table 133 on page 212) except for F1 and F1E in the MAC instruction group. Table 136 on page 222 describes the replacement for the F1 field, and Table 137 on page 224 describes the replacement for the F1E field.
1. A pipeline hazard occurs when a write to a register precedes an access that uses the same register and that register is not updated because of pipeline timing. The DSP16000 assembler automatically inserts a nop in this case to avoid the hazard.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
211
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 133. Instruction Set Summary
Instruction Multiply/Accumulate (MAC) Group Y F1 xh,l = Y F1 yh,l = Y F1 a h,l = Y F1 Y = yh,l F1 Y = aTh,l F1 yh = aTh F1 yh = Y F1 if CON F1E F1E yh,l = aTEh,l F1E aTEh,l = yh,l F1E y = aE_Ph F1E aE_Ph = y xh,l = YE F1E yh,l = YE F1E aTEh,l = YE F1E aE_Ph = YE F1E YE = xh,l F1E YE = yh,l F1E YE = aTEh,l F1E YE = aE_Ph F1E r0 = rNE + jhb F1E yh = *r0 YE F1E F1E F1E F1E F1E y = aE_Ph F1E yh = aTEh F1E aTEh = yh yh,l = YE F1E yh,l = YE F1E YE = yh,l F1E yh = YE F1E YE = a6_7h F1E YE = a6h F1E YE = a6h F1E Flags szlme szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme Cycles Out In 1 1 Words
1
xh = X xh = X
1+XC 1 1 2
xh,l = XE aTEh,l = XE aE_Ph = XE x h = XE x h = XE xh = XE a4h = XE xh = XE xh = XE a4_5h = XE xh = XE xh = XE a4h = XE
1+XC
XC is one cycle if XAAU contention occurs and zero cycles otherwise. XAAU contention occurs frequently for these instruction types and can only be avoided by use of the cache. For this transfer, the postincrement options *rME and *rME-- are not available for double-word loads. The - (40-bit subtraction) operation is encoded as aDE =aSE +IM16 with the IM16 value negated. For conditional branch instructions, the execution time is two cycles if the branch is not taken. The instruction performs the same function whether or not near (optional) is included. Not including the N instructions.
212
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 133. Instruction Set Summary (continued)
Instruction Multiply/Accumulate (MAC) Group (continued) r0 = rNE+jlb F1E yh = *r0 j=k F1E Special Function Group if CON aD = aS>>1,4,8,16 ifc CON aD = aS>>1,4,8,16 if CON aD = aS ifc CON aD = aS if CON aD = -aS ifc CON aD = -aS if CON aD = ~aS ifc CON aD = ~aS if CON aD = rnd(aS) ifc CON aD = rnd(aS) if CON aDh=aSh+1 ifc CON aDh = aSh+1 if CON aD = aS+1 ifc CON aD = aS+1 if CON aD = y,p0 ifc CON aD = y,p0 if CON aD = aS<<1,4,8,16 ifc CON aD = aS<<1,4,8,16 if CON aDE = aSE>>1,2,4,8,16 ifc CON aDE = aSE>>1,2,4,8,16 if CON aDE = aSE ifc CON aDE = aSE if CON aDE = -aSE ifc CON aDE = -aSE if CON aDE = ~aSE ifc CON aDE = ~aSE if CON aDE = rnd(aSE,pE) ifc CON aDE = rnd(aSE,pE) if CON aDE = rnd(-pE) ifc CON aDE = rnd(-pE) if CON aDE = rnd(aSE+pE) ifc CON aDE = rnd(aSE+pE) if CON aDE = rnd(aSE-pE) ifc CON aDE = rnd(aSE-pE) Flags szlme k = XE XE (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) (F2E) szlme szlme szlme szlme szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlme szlme szlme szlme szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- Cycles Out In 1+XC 1 Words
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
XC is one cycle if XAAU contention occurs and zero cycles otherwise. XAAU contention occurs frequently for these instruction types and can only be avoided by use of the cache. For this transfer, the postincrement options *rME and *rME-- are not available for double-word loads. The - (40-bit subtraction) operation is encoded as aDE =aSE +IM16 with the IM16 value negated. For conditional branch instructions, the execution time is two cycles if the branch is not taken. The instruction performs the same function whether or not near (optional) is included. Not including the N instructions.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
213
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 133. Instruction Set Summary (continued)
Instruction Special Function Group (continued) (F2E) if CON aDE = abs(aSE) ifc CON aDE = abs(aSE) (F2E) CON aDE = aSEh+1 (F2E) if ifc CON aDEh = aSEh+1 (F2E) (F2E) if CON aDE = aSE+1 ifc CON aDE = aSE+1 (F2E) (F2E) if CON aDE = y,pE ifc CON aDE = y,pE (F2E) (F2E) if CON aDE = -y,-pE ifc CON aDE = -y,-pE (F2E) (F2E) if CON aDE = aSE<<1,2,4,8,16 ifc CON aDE = aSE<<1,2,4,8,16 (F2E) ALU Group aD = aS OP aTE,pE (F3) aD = aTE,pE - aS (F3) aD = FUNC(aS,aTE,pE) (F3) aS - aTE,pE (F3) aS&aTE,pE (F3) (F3E) if CON aDE = aSE OP pE,y (F3E) if CON aDE = aSE OP aTE (F3E) if CON aDE = pE,y-aSE (F3E) if CON aDE = FUNC(aSE,pE,y) CON aDE = FUNC(aSE,aTE) (F3E) if (F3E) if CON aSE - pE,y (F3E) if CON aSE&pE,y (F3E) if CON aSE - aTE CON aSE&aTE (F3E) if aDPE = aSPEaTPE (F3E) if CON aDEE = aSEEaTEE if CON aDE = aSE+aTE else aDE = aSE-aTE (F3E) aDE = aSEh,l OP IM16 (F3 with immediate) aDE = IM16-aSEh,l (F3 with immediate) aSEh,l - IM16 (F3 with immediate) aSEh,l & IM16 (F3 with immediate) Flags szlme szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlme szlme szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- szlm- Cycles Out In 1 1 Words
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
XC is one cycle if XAAU contention occurs and zero cycles otherwise. XAAU contention occurs frequently for these instruction types and can only be avoided by use of the cache. For this transfer, the postincrement options *rME and *rME-- are not available for double-word loads. The - (40-bit subtraction) operation is encoded as aDE =aSE +IM16 with the IM16 value negated. For conditional branch instructions, the execution time is two cycles if the branch is not taken. The instruction performs the same function whether or not near (optional) is included. Not including the N instructions.
214
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 133. Instruction Set Summary (continued)
Instruction BMU Group aD = aS SHIFT aTEh,arM aDh = exp(aTE) aD = norm(aS, aTEh,arM) aD = extracts(aS,aTEh) aD = extractz(aS,aTEh) aD = inserts(aS,aTEh) aD = insertz(aS,aTEh) aD = extract(aS,arM) aD = extracts(aS,arM) aD = extractz(aS,arM) aD = insert(aS,arM) aD = inserts(aS,arM) aD = insertz(aS,arM) aD = aS:aTE aDE = extract(aSE,IM8W,IM8O) aDE = extracts(aSE,IM8W,IM8O) aDE = extractz(aSE,IM8W,IM8O) aDE = insert(aSE,IM8W,IM8O) aDE = inserts(aSE,IM8W,IM8O) aDE = insertz(aSE,IM8W,IM8O) aDE=aSE SHIFT IM16 if CON aDE = aSE SHIFTaTEh,arM if CON aDEh = exp(aTE) if CON aDE = norm(aSE,aTEh,arM) if CON aDE = extracts(aSE,aTEh) if CON aDE = extractz(aSE,aTEh) if CON aDE = inserts(aSE,aTEh) if CON aDE = insertz(aSE,aTEh) if CON aDE = extract(aSE,arM) if CON aDE = extracts(aSE,arM) if CON aDE = extractz(aSE,arM) if CON aDE = insert(aSE,arM) if CON aDE = inserts(aSE,arM) if CON aDE = insertz(aSE,arM) if CON aDE = aSE:aTE Flags szlme (F4) (F4) (F4) (F4) (F4) (F4) szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme Cycles Out In 1 1 Words
1
(F4)
szlme
(F4) (F4 with immediate)
szlm- szlme
1
1
2
(F4 with immediate)
szlme
(F4 with immediate) (F4E) (F4E) (F4E) (F4E) (F4E) (F4E)
szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme szlme
1
1
2
(F4E)
szlme
(F4E)
szlm-
XC is one cycle if XAAU contention occurs and zero cycles otherwise. XAAU contention occurs frequently for these instruction types and can only be avoided by use of the cache. For this transfer, the postincrement options *rME and *rME-- are not available for double-word loads. The - (40-bit subtraction) operation is encoded as aDE =aSE +IM16 with the IM16 value negated. For conditional branch instructions, the execution time is two cycles if the branch is not taken. The instruction performs the same function whether or not near (optional) is included. Not including the N instructions.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
215
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 133. Instruction Set Summary (continued)
Instruction Data Move and Pointer Arithmetic Group RAB = IM20 RA = IM4 RAD = RAS if CON RABD = RABS RB = aTEh,l aTEh,l = RB RA = Y Y = RA RAB = YE YE = RC RAB = *sp++2 *sp--2 = RC sp--2 *sp = RC push RC pop RAB r3--sizeof(RAB) RA = *(sp+IM5) *(sp+IM5) = RA RAB = *(RP+IM12) *(RP+IM12) = RC RAB = *(RP+j,k) *(RP+j,k) = RC RY = RP+IM12 RY = RP+j,k RAB = *r7 r7 = sp+IM11 *r7 = RC r7 = sp+IM11 YE = xh xh = XE Flags szlme -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Cycles Out In 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Words
2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1
2 2
2 2
1 2
1 1 1+XC
1 1 1
2 2 2
XC is one cycle if XAAU contention occurs and zero cycles otherwise. XAAU contention occurs frequently for these instruction types and can only be avoided by use of the cache. For this transfer, the postincrement options *rME and *rME-- are not available for double-word loads. The - (40-bit subtraction) operation is encoded as aDE =aSE +IM16 with the IM16 value negated. For conditional branch instructions, the execution time is two cycles if the branch is not taken. The instruction performs the same function whether or not near (optional) is included. Not including the N instructions.
216
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 133. Instruction Set Summary (continued)
Instruction Control Group near goto IM12 near call IM12 if CON goto IM16 if CON call IM16 far goto IM20 far call IM20 if CON goto ptE if CON call ptE if CON call pr tcall icall IM6 if CON return ireturn treturn ei di Cache Group do K {N_INSTR} redo K do cloop {N_INSTR} redo cloop Flags szlme -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Cycles Out In 3 3 3 3 -- -- -- -- 1 Words
1 2
3 3 3 1
-- -- -- 1
-- -- -- --
1 2 1 2
-- -- -- --
1 1 1 1
XC is one cycle if XAAU contention occurs and zero cycles otherwise. XAAU contention occurs frequently for these instruction types and can only be avoided by use of the cache. For this transfer, the postincrement options *rME and *rME-- are not available for double-word loads. The - (40-bit subtraction) operation is encoded as aDE =aSE +IM16 with the IM16 value negated. For conditional branch instructions, the execution time is two cycles if the branch is not taken. The instruction performs the same function whether or not near (optional) is included. Not including the N instructions.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
217
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 134 defines the symbols used in instruction descriptions. Some symbols and characters are part of the instruction syntax, and must appear as shown within the instruction. Other symbols are representational and are replaced by other characters. The table groups these two types of symbols separately. Table 134. Notation Conventions for Instruction Set Descriptions
Symbol Part of Syntax Meaning 16-bit x 16-bit multiplication resulting in a 32-bit product. Exception: if used as a prefix to an address register, denotes register-indirect addressing, e.g., *r3. **2 Squaring is a 16-bit x 16-bit multiplication of the operand with itself, resulting in a 32-bit product. + 40-bit addition . - 40-bit subtraction. ++ Register postincrement. -- Register postdecrement. >> Arithmetic right shift (with sign-extension from bit 39). << Arithmetic left shift (padded with zeros). >>> Logical right shift (zero guard bits before shift). <<< Logical left shift (padded with zeros; sign-extended from bit 31). & 40-bit bitwise logical AND . | 40-bit bitwise logical OR . ^ 40-bit bitwise logical exclusive-OR. : Register shuffle. ~ Ones complement (bitwise inverse). () Parentheses enclose multiple operands delimited by commas that are also part of the syntax. {} Braces enclose multiple instructions within a cache loop. _ The underscore character indicates an accumulator vector (concatenation of the high halves of a (underscore) pair of sequential accumulators, e.g., a0_1h). lower-case Lower-case characters appear as shown in the instruction. Angle brackets enclose items delimited by commas, one of which must be chosen. Mid braces enclose one or more optional items delimited by commas. Replaced by either + or -. UPPERUpper-case characters, character strings, and characters plus numerals (e.g., M, CON, and CASE IM16) are replaced. Replacement tables accompany each instruction group description. F Titles Represents a statement of a DAU function: F1 MAC. F1E Extended MAC. F2 Special function. F2E Extended special function. F3 ALU. F3E Extended ALU. F4 BMU. F4E Extended BMU. *
Not Part of Syntax (Replaced)
The ALU/ACS and ADDER perform 40-bit operations, but the operands can be 16 bits, 32 bits, or 40 bits. In the special case of the split-mode F1E instruction (xh =aSPEh yh, xl=aSPElyl, aDE=aSEE+p0+p1, p0=xh**2, p1=xl**2), the ALU performs two 16-bit addition/subtraction operations in parallel. Note that this symbol does not denote compound addressing as it does for the DSP16XX family.
218
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 135. Overall Replacement Table
Symbol Used in Instruction Type(s) F1, F2, F3, F4 F1 Replaced By Description
aD aS aT a aDE aSE aTE
a0 or a1 (DSP16XX-compatible)
F1E, F2E, F3/E, F4/E F1E, F3/E, F4/E, data move F1E, F3E F3E
a0, a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, or a7
D indicates destination of an operation. S indicates source of an operation. T indicates an accumulator that is the source of a data transfer. indicates an accumulator other than the destination accumulator. D indicates destination of an operation. S indicates source of an operation. T indicates an accumulator that is either an additional source for an operation or the source or destination of a data transfer. E indicates the extended set of accumulators. D indicates destination of an operation. S indicates source of an operation. T indicates an accumulator that is either an additional source for an operation or the source or destination of a data transfer. The first E indicates an even accumulator that is paired with its corresponding paired extended (odd) accumulator, i.e., the matching aDPE, aSPE, or aTPE accumulator. The second E indicates the extended set of accumulators. P indicates an odd accumulator that is paired with an even extended accumulator, i.e., the matching aDEE, aSEE, or aTEE accumulator. E indicates the extended set of accumulators. An accumulator vector, i.e., the concatenated 16-bit high halves of two adjacent accumulators to form a 32-bit vector. One of the four auxiliary accumulators. Conditional mnemonics. Certain instructions are conditionally executed, e.g., if CON F2E. See Table 138 on page 226.
aDEE aSEE aTEE
aDPE - 1 a0, a2, a4, or a6 aSPE - 1 a0, a2, a4, or a6 aTPE - 1 a0, a2, a4, or a6
aDPE aSPE aTPE aE_Ph
F1E, F3E F3E F1E
aDEE + 1 a1, a3, a5, or a7 aSEE + 1 a1, a3, a5, or a7 aTEE + 1 a1, a3, a5, or a7 a0_1h, a2_3h, a4_5h, or a6_7h
arM CON
FUNC IM4
F4, F4E F1E, F2, F2E, F3E, F4E, control, data move F3, F3E data move
ar0, ar1, ar2, or ar3 mi, pl, eq, ne, lvs, lvc, mvs, mvc, heads, tails, c0ge, c0lt, c1ge, c1lt, true, false, gt, le, oddp, evenp, smvs, smvc, jobf, jibe, jcont, lock, mgibe, mgobf, somef, somet, allf, or allt max, min, or divs 4-bit unsigned immediate value (0 to 15) 4-bit signed immediate value (-8 to +7) 5-bit unsigned immediate value (0 to 31) 6-bit unsigned immediate value (0 to 63) 8-bit unsigned immediate value (0 to 255) 11-bit unsigned immediate value (0 to 2047)
IM5 IM6 IM8O IM8W IM11
data move control F4 data move
One of three ALU functions: maximum, minimum, or divide-step. Signed/unsigned status of the IM4 value matches that of the destination register of the data move assignment instruction. Added to stack pointer sp to form stack address. Vector for icall instruction. Offset and width for bit-field insert and extract instructions. The BMU truncates these values to 6 bits. Added to stack pointer sp to form stack address.
The size of the transfer (single- or double-word) depends on the size of the register on the other side of the equal sign. These postmodification options are not available for a double-word load except for a load of an accumulator vector.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
219
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 135. Overall Replacement Table (continued)
Symbol Used in Instruction Type(s) control data move and pointer arithmetic IM16 control F3, F4 control, data move 16-bit signed immediate value (-32,768 to +32,767) 20-bit unsigned immediate value (0 to 1,048,576) 20-bit signed immediate value (-524,288 to 524,287) 1 to 127 or the value in cloop 1 to 31 +, -, &, |, or ^ p0 or p1 pt0 or pt1 Replaced By Description
IM12
12-bit signed immediate value (-2048 to +2047)
IM20
K N OP pE ptE RA RAD RAS
cache F1, F1E, F3, F3E F2E, F3, F3E F1E, control, data move data move
PC-relative near address for goto and call instructions. Postmodification to a general YAAU pointer register to form address for data move. Added to the value of a general YAAU pointer register, and the result is stored into any YAAU register. Offset for conditional PC-relative goto/call instructions. Operand for ALU or BMU operation. Absolute (unsigned) far address for goto and call instructions. For data move instructions, the signed/unsigned status of the IM20 value matches that of the destination register of the assignment instruction. For the do K {N_INSTR} and redo K cache instructions. 40-bit ALU operation. One of the product registers as source for a special function or ALU operation. One of the two XAAU pointer registers as address for an XE memory access (see XE entry in this table). One of the main core registers that is specified as the source or destination of a data move operation. The subscripts are used to indicate that two different registers can be specified, e.g., RAD = RAS describes a register-to-register move instruction where RAD and RAS are, in general, two different registers. One of the secondary registers that is specified as the source or destination of a data move operation. This set includes core and off-core registers.
RB
RAB RABD RABS
RC rM
a0, a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7, a0h, a1h, a2h, a3h, a4h, a5h, a6h, a7h, a0l, a1l, a2l, a3l, a4l, a5l, a6l, a7l, alf, auc0, c0, c1, c2, h, i, j, k, p0, p0h, p0l, p1, p1h, p1l, pr, psw0, pt0, pt1, r0, r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7, rb0, rb1, re0, re1, sp, x, xh, xl, y, yh, or yl core a0g, a1g, a2g, a3g, a4g, a5g, a6g, a7g, a0_1h, a2_3h, a4_5h, a6_7h, ar0, ar1, ar2, ar3, auc1, cloop, cstate, csave, inc0, inc1, ins, pi, psw1, ptrap, vbase, or vsw off-core cbit, imux, jiob, mgi, mgo, pid, pllcon, pllfrq, pllfrq1, plldly, sbit, signal, timer0, timer1, timer0c, timer1c Any of the RA or RB registers Any one of the registers in the main (RA) or second(see rows above) ary (RB) sets of registers that is specified as the source or destination of a data move operation. The subscripts are used to indicate that two different registers can be specified. Any of the RA registers or any of the core RB Any core register that is specified as the source of a registers (see rows above) data move operation. F1, r0, r1, r2, or r3 One of four general YAAU pointer registers used for a data move Y-memory access (see Y entry in this table).
The size of the transfer (single- or double-word) depends on the size of the register on the other side of the equal sign. These postmodification options are not available for a double-word load except for a load of an accumulator vector.
220
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 135. Overall Replacement Table (continued)
Symbol Used in Instruction Type(s) F1E, data move F1E data move and pointer arithmetic F1 F1 F1 Y data move F1E, data move F1E XE F1E, data move F1E YE Replaced By Description
rME
r0, r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, or r7
rNE RP RY
r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, or r7 r0, r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, or sp r0, r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7, sp, rb0, rb1, re0, re1, j, or k *pt0++ or *pt0++i *rM, *rM++, *rM- -, or *rM++j rM++, rM- -, or rM++j *rM, *rM++, *rM- -, or *rM++j *ptE, *ptE++, *ptE--, *ptE++h, or *ptE++i ptE++, ptE--, ptE++h, ptE++i, or ptE++2 *rME, *rME++, *rME--, *rME++j, or *rME++k rME++, rME--, rME++j, rME++k, rME++2, or rME--2
X Y
XE
YE
One of eight general YAAU pointer registers used for a YE memory access (see YE entry in this table). E indicates the extended set of pointer registers. One of seven general YAAU pointer registers used for a table look-up pointer update. One of seven general YAAU pointer registers or the YAAU stack pointer. Any one of the YAAU registers, including the stack pointer, circular buffer pointers, and increment registers. A single-word location pointed to by pt0. A single-word location pointed to by rM. Modification of rM pointer register (no memory access). A single- or double-word location pointed to by rM. A single-word or double-word memory location pointed to by ptE. Modification of ptE pointer register (no memory access). A single-word or double-word memory location pointed to by rME. Modification of rME pointer register (no memory access).
The size of the transfer (single- or double-word) depends on the size of the register on the other side of the equal sign. These postmodification options are not available for a double-word load except for a load of an accumulator vector.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
221
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 136 defines the F1 instruction syntax as any function statement combined with any transfer statement. Two types of F1 function statements are shown: the MAC (multiply/accumulate) type and the arithmetic/logic type. The MAC type is formed by combining any two items from the designated ALU and Multiplier columns. The arithmetic/logic type is chosen from the items in the designated F1 Arithmetic/Logic Function Statement column. Table 136. F1 Instruction Syntax
Combine Any F1 Function Statement with Any Transfer Statement F1 MAC Function Statement-- Transfer Statement Combine Any Items in Following Two Columns: ALU Multiplier aD = aS p0 (no ALU operation) p0 = xh * yh (no multiply operation) Y
Cycles (Out/In Cache)
1/1 1/1 1/1 1 + XC/1 1/1
16-Bit Words 1
F1 Arithmetic/Logic Function Statement (ALU) aD = aS OP y aS - y aS & y nop (no F1 function statement)

x, y, a h, l = Y Y = y, aTh, l yh = Y, aTh xh = X
(no transfer)
Not including conflict, misalignment, or external wait-states (see the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual). This Y transfer statement must increment or decrement the contents of an rM register. It is not necessary to include the * before the rM register because no access is made to a memory location. Leave the ALU column blank to specify no ALU operation, the multiplier column blank to specify no multiply operation, or both columns blank to specify no F1 function statement. If both columns are left blank and a transfer statement is used (a transfer-only F1 instruction, i.e., yh = *r2 xh = *pt0++), the assembler interprets the F1 function statement as a nop. For this instruction, a D must be the opposite of aD, e.g., if aD is a0, aD must be a1 and vice versa. XC is one cycle if XAAU contention occurs and zero cycles otherwise. XAAU contention occurs frequently for these instruction types and can only be avoided by use of the cache. See the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual. The assembler encodes an instruction that consists of a function statement F1 with no transfer statement as F1 *r0. nop is no-operation. A programmer can write nop with or without an accompanying transfer statement. The assembler encodes nop without a transfer statement as nop *r0.
222
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 137 on page 224 summarizes the syntax for F1E function statements and the following paragraphs describe each class of instruction. Note: Each function statement can be combined with a parallel transfer statement to form a single DSP16411 instruction. General-Purpose MAC Combine any ALU, ADDER, or ALU and ADDER operation from the left column with any single- or dual-multiply operation from the right column. Either column can be left blank.1
Additional General-Purpose MAC These statements are general-purpose. The combinations of operations must be as shown. The first statement clears two accumulators and both product registers. The second statement is the equivalent of the F1 statement aD = p0 p0 = xh * yh except that any accumulator aDE can be specified. The third statement is the equivalent of the F1 statement aD = p0 except that any accumulator aDE can be specified. The fourth statement is a no-operation and, as with all F1E function statements, can be combined with a transfer statement. Special-Purpose MAC for Mixed Precision Combine any ADDER operation or any ALU and ADDER operation from the left column with any dual-multiply operation from the right column. Either column can be left blank.1 These statements are intended for, but are not limited to, mixedprecision MAC applications. Mixed-precision multiplication is 16 bits x 31 bits. Special-Purpose MAC for Double Precision These statements are intended for, but are not limited to, double-precision MAC applications. The combinations of operations must be as shown. Double-precision multiplication is 31 bits x 31 bits. Special-Purpose MAC for Viterbi These statements are intended for, but are not limited to, Viterbi decoding applications. The combinations of operations must be as shown. This group includes ALU split-mode operations. Special-Purpose MAC for FFT This statement is intended for, but is not limited to, FFT applications. ALU These statements are ALU operations. The first three statements in this group are the equivalent of the F1 arithmetic/logic function statements.
Special-Purpose ALU/ACS, ADDER/ACS for Viterbi These statements are intended for, but are not limited to, Viterbi decoding applications. They provide either an ALU/ACS operation with or without a parallel ADDER/ACS operation or split-mode ALU and ADDER operations. The combinations of operations must be as shown. This group includes the Viterbi compare functions. Special-Purpose ALU, BMU These statements are intended for, but are not limited to, special-purpose applications. They provide a BMU operation with or without a parallel ALU operation. The combinations of operations must be as shown.
1. If both columns are left blank and a transfer statement is used, the DSP16000 assembler interprets the F1E function statement as a no-operation (nop).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
223
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 137. F1E Function Statement Syntax
General-Purpose MAC Function Statements--Combine Any Items in Two Columns ALU ADDER Multipliers aDE=aSEp0 p0=xh*yh p0=xh*yh p1=xl*yl aDE=aSEp0p1 aDEE=aSEEp0 aDPE=aSPEp1 p0=xh*yl p1=xl*yh p0=xh*yh p1=xh*yl (no ALU/ACS or ADDER operation) p0=xl*yh p1=xl*yl
(no multiply operation)
Additional General-Purpose MAC Function Statements ADDER aSE=0 p0=0 p0=xh*yh
ALU aDE=0 aDE=p0 aDE=p0 nop
Multipliers p1=0
Special-Purpose MAC Function Statements for Mixed Precision--Combine Any Items in Two Columns ALU ADDER Multipliers aDE=p0+(p1>>15) p0=xh*yh p1=xh*(yl>>>1) aDEE=aSE+aDPE aDPE=p0+(p1>>15) p0=xl*yh p1=xl*(yl>>>1)
(no ALU/ACS or ADDER operation)
(no multiply operation)
ALU
aDEE=aSE+aDPE aDEE=aSE+aDPE aDE=aSE+(p0>>1) aDE=(aSE>>14)+p1 aDE=(aSE>>14)+p1
Special-Purpose MAC Function Statements for Double Precision ADDER Multipliers aDE=aSE+p0+(p1>>15) p0=xh*yh p1=xh*(yl>>>1) aDE=aSE+p0+(p1>>15) aDE=p0+(p1>>15) p0=0 p1=(xl>>>1)*yh aDPE=p0+(p1>>15) p0=0 p1=(xl>>>1)*yh aDE=(p0>>1)+(p1>>16) p0=(xl>>>1)*yh p1=xh*yh aDPE=(p0>>1)+(p1>>16) p0=(xl>>>1)*yh p1=xh*yh p0=xh*(yl>>>1) p0=xh*(yl>>>1) p1=(xl>>>1)*(yl>>>1) p1=(xl>>>1)*(yl>>>1)
DAU flags are affected by the ALU or ALU/ACS operation (except for the split-mode function which does not affect the flags). If there is no ALU or ALU/ACS operation, the DAU flags are affected by the ADDER or BMU operation. If auc0[10] (FSAT field) is set, the result of the add/subtract of the first two operands is saturated to 32 bits prior to adding/subtracting the third operand and the final result is saturated to 32 bits. If auc0[9] = 1, the least significant bit of p1 >> 15 is cleared. This is a 16-bit operation. The DAU stores the result in the high half of the destination accumulator and clears the low half. This split-mode instruction does not affect the DAU flags. Do not set FSAT for this instruction because if FSAT is set, the entire 32 bits are saturated.
224
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
Table 137. F1E Function Statement Syntax (continued)
ALU xh=aSPEh+yh xl=aSPEl+yl xh=aSPEh-yh xl=aSPEl-yl Special-Purpose MAC Function Statements for Viterbi ADDER aDE=aSEE+p0+p1 p0=xh**2 aDE=aSEE+p0+p1 p0=xh**2 aDE=aSE+p0+p1 p0=xh**2 Special-Purpose MAC Function Statement for FFT ADDER aDPE=-aSPE+p1 p0=xh*yh Multipliers p1=xl**2 p1=xl**2 p1=xl**2
ALU aDEE=-aSEE+p0 ALU Function Statements aDE= aSE OP y aSE-y aSE&y aDE=aDEaSE
Multipliers p1=xl*yl
Special-Purpose ALU/ACS, ADDER/ACS Function Statements for Viterbi ALU/ACS ADDER aDEE=cmp0(aSEE,aDEE) aDPE=aDPE+aSPE aDEE=cmp0(aSEE,aDEE) aDPE=cmp0(aSPE,aDPE) aDE=cmp0(aSE,aDE) aDEE=cmp1(aSE,aDEE) aDPE=aDEE-aSE aDEEh=cmp1(aSEEh,aSEEl) aDPEh=cmp1(aSPEh,aSPEl) aDE=cmp1(aSE,aDE) aDEE=cmp2(aSE,aDEE) aDPE=aDEE-aSE aDE=cmp2(aSE,aDE) aDEE=aSEE+y aDPE=aSPE-y aDEE=aSEE-y aDPE=aSPE+y aDEEh=aSEh+yh aDEEl=aSEl+yl aDPEh=aSEh-yh aDPEl=aSEl-yl aDEEh=aSEh-yh aDEEl=aSEl-yl aDPEh=aSEh+yh aDPEl=aSEl+yl Special-Purpose ALU, BMU Function Statements ALU BMU aDEE=rnd(aDPE) aDPE=aSEE>>aSPEh aDE=aSEE>>aSPEh aDE=abs(aDE) aSE=aSE< DAU flags are affected by the ALU or ALU/ACS operation (except for the split-mode function which does not affect the flags). If there is no ALU or ALU/ACS operation, the DAU flags are affected by the ADDER or BMU operation. If auc0[10] (FSAT field) is set, the result of the add/subtract of the first two operands is saturated to 32 bits prior to adding/subtracting the third operand and the final result is saturated to 32 bits. If auc0[9] = 1, the least significant bit of p1 >> 15 is cleared. This is a 16-bit operation. The DAU stores the result in the high half of the destination accumulator and clears the low half. This split-mode instruction does not affect the DAU flags. Do not set FSAT for this instruction because if FSAT is set, the entire 32 bits are saturated.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
225
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.1 Instruction Set Quick Reference (continued)
6.1.1 Conditions Based on the State of Flags A conditional instruction begins with either if CON or ifc CON, where CON is replaced with a condition that is tested. Table 138 describes the complete set of condition codes available for use in conditional instructions. It also includes the state of the internal flag or flags that cause the condition to be true. Table 138. DSP16411 Conditional Mnemonics
CON Encoding 00000 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00110 00111 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111 10000 10001 10010 10011 10100 10101 10110 10111 11000 11001 11010 11011 11100 11101 11110 11111 CON Mnemonic mi pl eq ne lvs lvc mvs mvc heads tails c0ge c0lt c1ge c1lt true false gt le smvs smvc oddp evenp jobf jibe jcont lock mgibe mgobf somef somet allf allt Flag(s) If CON Is True LMI = 1 LMI 1 LEQ = 1 LEQ 1 LLV = 1 LLV 1 LMV = 1 LMV 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1 0 (LMI 1) and (LEQ 1) (LMI = 1) or (LEQ = 1) SLMV = 1 SLMV 1 EPAR 1 EPAR = 1 JOBF = 1 JIBE = 1 JCONT = 1 LOCK = 1 MGIBE = 1 MGOBF = 1 SOMEF = 1 SOMET = 1 ALLF = 1 ALLT = 1 Type Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core Core JTAG JTAG JTAG CLOCK MGU MGU BIO BIO BIO BIO Description Most recent DAU result is negative. Most recent DAU result is positive or zero. Most recent DAU result is equal to zero. Most recent DAU result is not equal to zero. Most recent DAU result has overflowed 40 bits. Most recent DAU result has not overflowed 40 bits. Most recent DAU result has overflowed 32 bits. Most recent DAU result has not overflowed 32 bits. Pseudorandom sequence generator output is set. Pseudorandom bit is cleared. Current value in counter c0 is greater than or equal to zero. Current value in counter c0 is less than zero. Current value in counter c1 is greater than or equal to zero. Current value in counter c1 is less than zero. Always. Never. Most recent DAU result is greater than zero. Most recent DAU result is less than or equal to zero. A previous result has overflowed 32 bits (sticky flag). A previous result has not overflowed 32 bits since SLMV last cleared. Most recent 40-bit BMU result has odd parity. Most recent 40-bit BMU result has even parity. jiob output buffer full. jiob input buffer empty. JTAG continue. PLL delay counter has reached zero. Input message buffer register mgi is empty. Input message buffer register mgo is full. Some false, some input bits tested did not compare successfully. Some true, some input bits tested compared successfully. All false, no BIO input bits tested compared successfully. All true, all BIO input bits tested compared successfully.
All peripheral (off-core) flags are accessible in the alf register. Each test of c0ge or c0lt causes counter c0 to postincrement. Each test of c1ge or c1lt causes counter c1 to postincrement.
226
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
As shown in Figure 58 on page 228, the registermapped registers consist of three types: Data registers store data either from the result of instruction execution or from memory. Data registers become source operands for instructions. This class of registers also includes postincrement registers whose contents are added to address registers to form new addresses. Control and Status registers are used to determine the state of the machine or to set different configurations to control the machine. Address registers are used to hold memory location pointers. In some cases, the user can treat address registers as general-purpose data registers accessible by data move instructions. Table 139 on page 229 summarizes the registermapped registers. It lists all valid register designators as they appear in an instruction syntax. For each register, the table specifies its size, whether it is readable or writable, its type, whether it is signed or unsigned, and the hardware function block in which it is located. It also indicates whether the register is in the core or is off-core. Off-core register-mapped registers cannot be stored to memory in a single instruction. For example, the following instruction is not allowed and will generate an error by the assembler: *r0 = mgi // NOT ALLOWED
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers
DSP16411 registers fall into one of the following three categories:
s
Directly program-accessible (or register-mapped) registers are directly accessible in instructions and are designated with lower-case bold, e.g., timer0. These registers are described in Section 6.2.1. Memory-mapped registers are accessible at a memory address and are designated with upper-case bold, e.g., DSTAT. These registers are described in Section 6.2.2 on page 231. Pin-accessible registers are accessible only through the external device pins and are designated with upper-case bold, i.e., ID. Each JTAG port contains the pin-accessible identification register, ID, described in Table 152 on page 241. This register is accessible via its associated JTAG port.
s
s
Note: The program counter (PC) is an addressing register not accessible to the programmer or through external pins. The core automatically controls this register to properly sequence the instructions. 6.2.1 Directly Program-Accessible (RegisterMapped) Registers Figure 58 on page 228 depicts the directly programaccessible (register-mapped) registers. The figure differentiates core and off-core registers. As the figure indicates, the pllcon, pllfrq, pllfrq1, and plldly registers are available in CORE0 only. Note: There is write-to-read latency associated with the pipelined IDB. The assembler compensates for this. See the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Information Manual for further details.
To store the contents of an off-core register to memory, first store the register to an intermediate register and then store the intermediate register to memory. See the example below: a0h = mgi *r0 = a0h // a0h is intermediate reg. // store mgi to memory
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
227
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.1 Directly Program-Accessible (Register-Mapped) Registers (continued)
DSP16410B Program-Accessible Registers for Each Core
SYS inc0 inc1 ins 20 alf
XAAU pt0 pt1 pi pr vbase cloop cstate 16 20 h i ptrap 20
DAU x y p0 p1 32 a0 a1 a2 j k a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 rb0 rb1 re0 re1 20 auc0 auc1 psw0 psw1 vsw ar0 ar1 ar2 ar3 16 c0 c1 c2 40
YAAU r0 r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 sp 20
csave 32
JTAG jiob 32
MGU signal DSP16000 CORE pid mgi mgo 16 TIMER0 IMUX imux 16 timer0c timer0 16 TIMER1 timer1c timer1 16 BIO sbit cbit 16 16
CLOCKS pllcon pllfrq pllfrq1 plldly 16 CORE0 ONLY
CONTROL & STATUS
ADDRESS
DATA
CORE0
Figure 58. DSP16411 Program-Accessible Registers for Each Core
228
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.1 Directly Program-Accessible (Register-Mapped) Registers (continued) Table 139. Program-Accessible (Register-Mapped) Registers by Type, Listed Alphabetically
Register Name a0, a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7 a0h, a1h, a2h, a3h, a4h, a5h, a6h, a7h a0l, a1l, a2l, a3l, a4l, a5l, a6l, a7l a0g, a1g, a2g, a3g, a4g, a5g, a6g, a7g a0_1h, a2_3h, a4_5h, a6_7h alf ar0, ar1, ar2, ar3 auc0, auc1 c0, c1 c2 cbit cloop csave cstate h i imux inc0, inc1 ins j jhb jlb jiob k mgi mgo p0 p0h p0l p1 p1h p1l pi pid Description Accumulators 0--7 Accumulators 0--7, high halves (bits 31--16) Accumulators 0--7, low halves (bits 15--0) Accumulators 0--7, guard bits (bits 39--32) Accumulator vectors (concatenated high halves of two adjacent accumulators) AWAIT and flags Auxiliary registers 0--3 Arithmetic unit control Counters 0 and 1 Counter holding register BIO control Cache loop count Cache save Cache state Pointer postincrement Pointer postincrement Interrupt multiplex control Interrupt control 0 and 1 Interrupt status Pointer postincrement/offset High byte of j (bits 15--8) Low byte of j (bits 7--0) JTAG test Pointer postincrement/offset Core-to-core message input Core-to-core message output Product 0 High half of p0 (bits 31--16) Low half of p0 (bits 15--0) Product 1 High half of p1 (bits 31--16) Low half of p1 (bits 15--0) Program interrupt return Processor identification Size R/W (Bits) 40 16 16 8 32 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Type data data data data data Core/ Function Signed/ Block Unsigned Off-Core signed core DAU signed core DAU signed signed signed core core core DAU DAU DAU
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 32 16 20 20 16 20 20
20
8 8
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/C R/W R R R/W R/W
c&s data c&s data data control data control control data data control control status data data data data data
unsigned signed unsigned signed signed unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned signed signed unsigned unsigned unsigned signed unsigned unsigned unsigned signed
core core core core core off-core core core core core core off-core core core core core core off-core core off-core off-core core core core core core core core off-core
SYS DAU DAU DAU DAU BIO SYS SYS SYS XAAU XAAU IMUX SYS SYS YAAU YAAU YAAU JTAG YAAU MGU MGU DAU DAU DAU DAU DAU DAU XAAU MGU
32 20
16 16 32 16 16 32 16 16 20 16
R data unsigned W data unsigned R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W address unsigned R c & s unsigned
R indicates that the register is readable by instructions; W indicates the register is writable by instructions. c & s means control and status. Signed registers are in two's complement format. C indicates that the register is cleared and not set. The IEN field (bit 14) of the psw1 register is read only (writes to this bit are ignored). The VALUE[6:0] field (bits 6--0) are read only (writes to these bits are ignored).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
229
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.1 Directly Program-Accessible (Register-Mapped) Registers (continued) Table 139. Program-Accessible (Register-Mapped) Registers by Type, Listed Alphabetically (continued)
Register Name pllcon plldly pllfrq, pllfrq1 pr psw0, psw1 pt0, pt1 ptrap r0, r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, r6, r7 rb0, rb1 re0, re1 sbit signal sp timer0, timer1 timer0c, timer1c vbase vsw x xh xl y yh yl Description Phase-lock loop control (CORE0 only) Phase-lock loop delay control (CORE0 only) Phase-lock loop frequency control (CORE0 only) Subroutine return Program status words 0 and 1 Pointers 0 and 1 to X-memory space Program trap return Pointers 0--7 to Y-memory space Circular buffer pointers 0 and 1 (begin address) Circular buffer pointers 0 and 1 (end address) BIO status/control Core-to-core signal Stack pointer Timer running count 0 and 1 for Timer0 and Timer1 Timer control 0 and 1 for Timer0 and Timer1 Vector base offset Viterbi support word Multiplier input High half of x (bits 31--16) Low half of x (bits 15--0) Multiplier input High half of y (bits 31--16) Low half of y (bits 15--0) Size R/W (Bits) 16 16 16 20 16 20 20 20 20 20 16 16 20 16 16 20 16 32 16 16 32 16 16 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Core/ Function Signed/ Block Unsigned Off-Core control unsigned off-core Clocks Type control control address c&s address address address unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned off-core off-core core core core core core core core off-core off-core core off-core off-core core core core core core core core core Clocks Clocks XAAU DAU XAAU XAAU YAAU YAAU YAAU BIO MGU YAAU Timer Timer XAAU DAU DAU DAU DAU DAU DAU DAU
R/W address unsigned R/W address unsigned R/W c & s W control R/W address R/W data R/W control unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned
R/W address unsigned R/W control unsigned R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W data signed R/W data signed
R indicates that the register is readable by instructions; W indicates the register is writable by instructions. c & s means control and status. Signed registers are in two's complement format. C indicates that the register is cleared and not set. The IEN field (bit 14) of the psw1 register is read only (writes to this bit are ignored). The VALUE[6:0] field (bits 6--0) are read only (writes to these bits are ignored).
230
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.2 Memory-Mapped Registers The memory-mapped registers located in their associated peripherals are each mapped to an even address. The sizes of these registers are 16 bits, 20 bits, or 32 bits. A register that is 20 bits or 32 bits must be accessed as an aligned double word. A register that is 16 bits can be accessed as a single word with an even address or as an aligned double word with the same even address. If a register that is 16 bits or 20 bits is accessed as a double word, the contents of the register are right-justified. Memory-mapped registers have the same internal format as other registers and are different from memory. Figure 59 illustrates three memory-mapped registers.
ADDRESS 0x42060 REGISTER CTL0 16 bits 0x42040 SBAS0 20 bits 0x4206C DSTAT 32 bits
Figure 59. Example Memory-Mapped Registers Note: Accessing memory-mapped registers with an odd address yields undefined results. The memory-mapped registers are defined by name and equated to their even memory addresses in the include file that is provided with the LUxWORKS tools, 16411_mmregs.h. To differentiate the memory-mapped registers for SIU0 and SIU1, 16411_mmregs.h appends the suffix _U0 or _U1 to the register name. For example, 16411_mmregs.h defines SCON0_U0 as the address for the SIU0 SCON0 register and FSTAT_U1 as the address for the SIU1 FSTAT register. Memory-mapped registers are designated with upper-case bold. For example, the 32-bit DMAU status register DSTAT is mapped to address 0x4206C. The code segment example below accesses DSTAT: r0 = 0x4206C nop a0 = *r0 Alternatively: #include "16411_mmregs.h" r0 = DSTAT // Address of DSTAT (DSTAT defined as 0x4206C in 16411_mmregs.h). nop a0 = *r0 // Copy the contents of DSTAT to a0. After the above code segment executes, the register a0 contains the value stored in DSTAT. The peripherals that contain memory-mapped registers are listed below:
s s s s
// Address of DSTAT. // Copy the contents of DSTAT to a0.
DMAU (See Table 140 on page 232). SEMI (See Table 141 on page 233). PIU (See Table 142 on page 234). SIU0 and SIU1 (See Table 143 on page 234). Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions 231
Agere Systems Inc.
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.2 Memory-Mapped Registers (continued) Table 140 summarizes the DMAU memory-mapped registers. These registers are described in detail in Section 4.13.2 on page 67. Table 140. DMAU Memory-Mapped Registers
Type DMAU Status DMAU Master Control 0 DMAU Master Control 1 Channel Control Register Name DSTAT DMCON0 DMCON1 CTL0 CTL1 CTL2 CTL3 CTL4 CTL5 SADD0 DADD0 SADD1 DADD1 SADD2 DADD2 SADD3 DADD3 SADD4 DADD4 SADD5 DADD5 SCNT0 DCNT0 SCNT1 DCNT1 SCNT2 DCNT2 SCNT3 DCNT3 SCNT4 DCNT4 SCNT5 DCNT5 Channel All All All SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 Address 0x4206C 0x4205C 0x4205E 0x42060 0x42062 0x42064 0x42066 0x42068 0x4206A 0x42000 0x42002 0x42004 0x42006 0x42008 0x4200A 0x4200C 0x4200E 0x42010 0x42012 0x42014 0x42016 0x42020 0x42022 0x42024 0x42026 0x42028 0x4202A 0x4202C 0x4202E 0x42030 0x42032 0x42034 0x42036 Size (Bits) 32 16 16 R/W R R/W R/W Type status control control Signed/ Unsigned unsigned unsigned unsigned Reset Value X 0 X
Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Address Destination Address Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count Source Count Destination Count
32
R/W
address
unsigned
X
20
R/W
data
unsigned
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. Any reserved fields within the register are reset to zero. The reindex registers are in sign-magnitude format.
232
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.2 Memory-Mapped Registers (continued) Table 140. DMAU Memory-Mapped Registers (continued)
Type Limit Register Name LIM0 LIM1 LIM2 LIM3 LIM4 LIM5 SBAS0 DBAS0 SBAS1 DBAS1 SBAS2 DBAS2 SBAS3 DBAS3 STR0 STR1 STR2 STR3 RI0 RI1 RI2 RI3 Channel SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 MMT4 MMT5 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 SWT0 SWT1 SWT2 SWT3 Address 0x42050 0x42052 0x42054 0x42056 0x42058 0x4205A 0x42040 0x42042 0x42044 0x42046 0x42048 0x4204A 0x4204C 0x4204E 0x42018 0x4201A 0x4201C 0x4201E 0x42038 0x4203A 0x4203C 0x4203E Size (Bits) 20 R/W R/W Type data Signed/ Unsigned unsigned Reset Value X
Source Base Destination Base Source Base Destination Base Source Base Destination Base Source Base Destination Base Stride
20
R/W
address
unsigned
X
16
R/W
data
unsigned
X
Reindex
20
R/W
data
signed
X
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. Any reserved fields within the register are reset to zero. The reindex registers are in sign-magnitude format.
Table 141 summarizes the SEMI memory-mapped registers. These registers are described in detail in Section 4.14.4 on page 110. Table 141. SEMI Memory-Mapped Registers
Register Name ECON0 ECON1 EXSEG0 EYSEG0 EXSEG1 EYSEG1 Address 0x40000 0x40002 0x40004 0x40006 0x40008 0x4000A Description SEMI Control SEMI Status and Control External X Segment Register for CORE0 External Y Segment Register for CORE0 External X Segment Register for CORE1 External Y Segment Register for CORE1 Size (Bits) 16 16 16 R/W R/W R/W R/W Type Control Control Address Reset Value 0x0FFF 0 0
Some bits in this register are read-only or write-only. With the following exceptions: ECON1[6,4] are a reflection of the state of external pins and are unaffected by reset, and ECON1[5] is set.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
233
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.2 Memory-Mapped Registers (continued) Table 142 summarizes the PIU memory-mapped registers. These registers are described in detail in Section 4.15.1 on page 135. Table 142. PIU Registers
Register Name PCON PDI PDO PA DSCRATCH HSCRATCH Address 0x41000 0x41008 0x4100A 0x41004 0x41002 0x41006 Description PIU Control and Status PIU Data In from Host PIU Data Out to Host PIU Address for Host Access to DSP Memory DSP Scratch Host Scratch Size (Bits) 32 32 32 32 R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R Type c&s data address data Reset Value 0x5 X 0x0 0x0
c & s means control and status. For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. Some bits of PCON are read-only and some bits are writable by either the host or the DSP, but not both.
Table 143 summarizes the SIU memory-mapped registers. These registers are described in detail in Section 4.16.15 on page 184. Table 143. SIU Memory-Mapped Registers
Register Name Address SIU0 SIU1 SCON0 0x43000 0x44000 SCON1 0x43002 0x44002 SCON2 0x43004 0x44004 SCON3 0x43006 0x44006 SCON4 0x43008 0x44008 SCON5 0x4300A 0x4400A SCON6 0x4300C 0x4400C SCON7 0x4300E 0x4400E SCON8 0x43010 0x44010 SCON9 0x43012 0x44012 SCON10 0x43014 0x44014 SCON11 0x43016 0x44016 SCON12 0x43018 0x44018 SIDR 0x4301A 0x4401A SODR 0x4301C 0x4401C STAT 0x4301E 0x4401E FSTAT 0x43020 0x44020 OCIX0 0x43030 0x44030 OCIX1 0x43032 0x44032 ICIX0 0x43040 0x44040 ICIX1 0x43042 0x44042 Description SIU Input/Output General Control SIU Input Frame Control SIU Output Frame Control SIU Input/Output Subframe Control SIU Input Even Subframe Valid Vector Control SIU Input Odd Subframe Valid Vector Control SIU Output Even Subframe Valid Vector Control SIU Output Odd Subframe Valid Vector Control SIU Output Even Subframe Mask Vector Control SIU Output Odd Subframe Mask Vector Control SIU Input/Output General Control SIU Input/Output Active Clock Control SIU Input/Output Active Frame Sync Control SIU Input Data SIU Output Data SIU Input/Output General Status SIU Input/Output Frame Status SIU Output Channel Index for Even Subframes SIU Output Channel Index for Odd Subframes SIU Input Channel Index for Even Subframes SIU Input Channel Index for Odd Subframes Size (Bits) 16 R/W R/W Type control Reset Value 0x0000 0x0400 0x0400 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x8000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000
16 16 16 16 16
R data W R/W c & s R status R/W control R/W control
The SIU memory-mapped register sizes represent bits used. The registers are right-justified and padded to 32 bits (the unused upper bits are zerofilled). c & s means control and status. All bits of STAT are readable, and some can be written with one to clear them.
234
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings Tables 144--168 describe the encodings of the directly program-accessible registers. Table 144. alf (AWAIT Low-Power and Flag) Register
15 14--10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AWAIT Bit 15
Reserved Field AWAIT
JOBF
JIBE
JCONT
LOCK
MGIBE Description
MGOBF
SOMEF
SOMET
ALLF R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
ALLT Reset Value 0 0 X X X 0 X
Value 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
14--10 Reserved 9 JOBF 8 7 6 5 JIBE JCONT LOCK MGIBE
4
MGOBF
3
SOMEF
2
SOMET
1
ALLF
0
ALLT
Core operates normally. Core enters power-saving standby mode. Reserved--write with zero. JTAG jiob output buffer is empty. JTAG jiob output buffer is full. JTAG jiob input buffer is full. JTAG jiob input buffer is empty. JTAG continue flag. The PLL delay counter has not reached zero. The PLL delay counter has reached zero. Core's input message buffer register mgi is full. Core's input message buffer register mgi is empty (waiting to be written by other core). Core's output message buffer register mgo is empty. Core's output message buffer register mgo is full (waiting to be read by other core). Either all the tested BIO input pins match the test pattern, none of the BIO input pins are tested, or all the BIO pins are configured as outputs. SOME false--some or all tested BIO inputs pins do not match the test pattern. Either none of the tested BIO input pins match the test pattern, none of the BIO input pins were tested, or all the BIO pins are configured as outputs. SOME true--some or all tested BIO input pins match the test pattern. Some or all of the tested BIO input pins match the test pattern. ALL false--either no tested BIO input bits match the test pattern, none of the BIO input pins are tested, or all the BIO pins are configured as outputs. Not all (some or none) of the tested BIO input bits match the test pattern. ALL true--either all tested BIO input bits match the test pattern, none of the BIO input pins inputs are tested, or all the BIO pins are configured as outputs.
R/W
X
R/W
X
R/W
X
R/W
X
R/W
X
LOCK is cleared on device reset or if the pllcon register is written. For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
235
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 145. auc0 (Arithmetic Unit Control 0) Register
15--14 13--11 10 9 8 7 6 5--4 3--2 1--0
P1SHFT[1:0] Bit 15--14
Reserved Field P1SHFT[1:0]
FSAT Value 00 01 10 11 0 0 1
SHFT15
RAND
X=Y=
YCLR
ACLR[1:0]
ASAT[1:0]
P0SHFT[1:0] R/W R/W Reset Value 00
Description p1 not shifted. p1>>2. p1<<2. p1<<1. Reserved--write with zero. Disabled when zero. Enable 32-bit saturation for the following results: the scaled outputs of the p0 and p1 registers, the intermediate result of the 3-input ADDER, and the results of the ALU/ACS, ADDER/ACS, and BMU. p1>>15 in F1E operations performs normally. To support GSM-EFR, p1>>15 in F1E operations actually performs (p1>>16)<<1 clearing the least significant bit. Enable pseudorandom sequence generator (PSG). Reset and disable pseudorandom sequence generator (PSG). Normal operation. Data transfer statements that load the y register also load the x register with the same value. The DAU clears yl if it loads yh. The DAU leaves yl unchanged if it loads yh. The DAU clears a1l if it loads a1h. The DAU leaves a1l unchanged if it loads a1h. The DAU clears a0l if it loads a0h. The DAU leaves a0l unchanged if it loads a0h. Enable a1 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Disable a1 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Enable a0 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Disable a0 saturation on 32-bit overflow. p0 not shifted. p0>>2. p0<<2. p0<<1.
13--11 10
Reserved FSAT
R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0
9
SHFT15
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 00 01 10 11
R/W
0
8 7
RAND X=Y=
R/W R/W
0 0
6 5 4 3 2 1--0
YCLR ACLR[1] ACLR[0] ASAT[1] ASAT[0] P0SHFT[1:0]
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0 0 0 00
Saturation takes effect only if the ADDER has three input operands and there is no ALU/ACS operation in the same instruction. After re-enabling the PSG by clearing RAND, the program must wait one instruction cycle before testing the heads or tails condition. The following apply: ! Instructions that explicitly load any part of the x register (i.e., x, xh, or xl) take precedence over the X=Y= mode. ! Instructions that load yh (but not x or xh) load xh with the same data. If YCLR is zero, the DAU clears yl and xl. ! Instructions that load yl load xl with the same data and leave yh and xh unchanged. If enabled, 32-bit saturation of the accumulator value occurs if the DAU stores the value to memory or to a register. Saturation also applies if the DAU stores the low half, high half, or guard bits of the accumulator. There is no change to the contents stored in the accumulator; only the value stored to memory or a register is saturated.

236
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 146. auc1 (Arithmetic Unit Control 1) Register
15 14--12 11--6 5--0
Reserved
XYFBK[2:0]
ACLR[7:2]
ASAT[7:2]
Bit
15 14--12
Field
Reserved XYFBK[2:0]
Value
0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Reserved--write with zero. Normal operation.
Description
R/W Reset Value
R/W R/W 0 000
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ACLR[7] ACLR[6] ACLR[5] ACLR[4] ACLR[3] ACLR[2] ASAT[7] ASAT[6] ASAT[5] ASAT[4] ASAT[3] ASAT[2]
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Any DAU function result stored into a6[31:0] is also stored into x. Any DAU function result stored into a6[31:16] is also stored into xh. Any DAU function result stored into a6[31:16] is also stored into xh, and any DAU function result stored into a7[31:16] is also stored into xl. Reserved. Any DAU function result stored into a6[31:0] is also stored into y. Any DAU function result stored into a6[31:16] is also stored into yh. Any DAU function result stored into a6[31:16] is also stored into yh, and any DAU function result stored into a7[31:16] is also stored into yl. The DAU clears a7l if it loads a7h. The DAU leaves a7l unchanged if it loads a7h. The DAU clears a6l if it loads a6h. The DAU leaves a6l unchanged if it loads a6h. The DAU clears a5l if it loads a5h. The DAU leaves a5l unchanged if it loads a5h. The DAU clears a4l if it loads a4h. The DAU leaves a4l unchanged if it loads a4h. The DAU clears a3l if it loads a3h. The DAU leaves a3l unchanged if it loads a3h. The DAU clears a2l if it loads a2h. The DAU leaves a2l unchanged if it loads a2h. Enable a7 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Disable a7 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Enable a6 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Disable a6 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Enable a5 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Disable a5 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Enable a4 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Disable a4 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Enable a3 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Disable a3 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Enable a2 saturation on 32-bit overflow. Disable a2 saturation on 32-bit overflow.
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
If the application enables any of the XYFBK modes, i.e., XYFBK[2:0] 000, the following apply: Only if the DAU writes its result to a6 or a7 (e.g., a6 = a3+p0) will the result be written to x or y. Data transfers or data move operations (e.g., a6 = *r2) leave the x or y register unchanged regardless of the state of the XYFBK[2:0] field setting. ! If the instruction itself loads the same portion of the x or y register that the XYFBK[2:0] field specifies, the instruction load takes precedence. If the application enables the X=Y= mode (auc0[7] = 1), the XYFBK mode takes precedence. If the application enables the X=Y= mode (auc0[7] = 1), the DAU also writes the y register value into the x, xh, or xl register, as appropriate. If the application enables the YCLR mode (auc0[6] = 0), the DAU clears yl. If the application enables the YCLR mode (auc0[6] = 0) and the instruction contains a result written to a6 and the operation writes no result to a7, the DAU clears yl. If the application enables the YCLR mode and the instruction writes a result to a7, the XYFBK mode takes precedence and the DAU does not clear yl. If saturation is enabled and any portion of an accumulator is stored to memory or a register, the DAU saturates the entire accumulator value and stores the appropriate portion. The DAU does not change the contents of the accumulator.
!
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
237
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 147. cbit (BIO Control) Register
15 14--8 7 6--0
Reserved Bit 15 14--8 Field Reserved MODE[6:0] (outputs)
MODE[6:0]/MASK[6:0] Value 0 0 1
Reserved Description
DATA[6:0]/PAT[6:0] R/W Reset Value 0 0
Reserved--write with zero. R/W The BIO drives the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin to the correR/W sponding value in DATA[6:0]. s If the corresponding DATA[6:0] field is 0, the BIO does not change the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. If the corresponding DATA[6:0] field is 1, the BIO toggles (inverts) the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. The BIO does not test the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] input pin to determine the state of the BIO flags. The BIO compares the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] input pin to the corresponding value in the PAT[6:0] field to determine the state of the BIO flags; true if pin matches or false if pin doesn't match. Reserved--write with zero. R/W s If the corresponding MODE[6:0] field is 0, the BIO drives the corresponding R/W IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin to logic 0.
s s
MASK[6:0] (inputs)
0 1
7 6--0
Reserved DATA[6:0] (outputs)
0 0
0 0
1
s
If the corresponding MODE[6:0] field is 1, the BIO does not change the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. If the corresponding MODE[6:0] field is 0, the BIO drives the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin to logic 1.
PAT[6:0] (inputs)
0
1
If the corresponding MODE[6:0] field is 1, the BIO toggles (inverts) the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. If the corresponding MASK[6:0] field is 1, the BIO tests the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] input pin to determine the state of the BIO flags; true if pin is logic 0 or false if pin is logic 1. If the corresponding MASK[6:0] field is 1, the BIO tests the state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] input pin to determine the state of the BIO flags; true if pin is logic 1 or false if pin is logic 0.
s
An IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is configured as an output if the corresponding DIREC[6:0] field (sbit[14:8]) has been set by the user software. An IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is configured as an input if the corresponding DIREC[6:0] field has been cleared by the user software or by device reset. The BIO flags are ALLT, ALLF, SOMET, and SOMEF. See Table 19 on page 52 for details on BIO flags.
238
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 148. cloop (Cache Loop) Register
15--0
Cache Loop Count Bit Field Description 15--0 Cache Loop Count Contains the count for the number of loop iterations for a do K, redo K, do cloop, or redo cloop instruction. The core decrements cloop after every loop iteration and cloop contains zero after the loop has completed. R/W Reset Value R/W 0
Table 149. csave (Cache Save) Register
31--0
Cache Save Bit 31--0 Field Cache Save Description R/W Reset Value Contains the opcode of the instruction following a do K, redo K, do cloop, or R/W X redo cloop instruction.
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
Table 150. cstate (Cache State) Register
15 14 13 12--10 9--5 4--0
SU Bit 15
EX
LD
Reserved Value 0 1
PTR[4:0] Description
N[4:0] R/W R/W Reset Value 0
Field SU
14
EX
0 1
13
LD
0 1 0 0--30 0--31
12--10 9--5 4--0
Reserved PTR[4:0] N[4:0]
The cache is not suspended--the core is not executing an interrupt or trap service routine that has interrupted or trapped a cache loop. The cache is suspended--the core is executing an interrupt or trap service routine that has interrupted or trapped a cache loop. The core is not executing from cache--it is either loading the cache (executing iteration 1 of a cache loop) or it is not executing a cache loop. The core is executing from cache--it is executing iteration 2 or higher of a cache loop. The core is not loading the cache--it is either not executing a cache loop or it is executing iteration 2 or higher of a cache loop. The core is loading the cache--it is executing iteration 1 of a cache loop. Reserved--write with zero. Pointer to current instruction in cache to load or execute. Number of instructions in the cache loop to load/save/restore.
R/W
0
R/W
0
R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0
After execution of the first do K or do cloop instruction, N[4:0] contains a nonzero value.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
239
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 151. imux (Interrupt Multiplex Control) Register
15--14 13--12 11--10 9--8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
XIOC[1:0] Bit
Reserved Field
IMUX9[1:0] Controls Multiplexed Interrupt XIO
IMUX8[1:0] Interrupt Selected
IMUX7 IMUX6 IMUX5 IMUX4 IMUX3 IMUX2 IMUX1 IMUX0 Description R/W Reset Value R/W 00
Value
15--14
XIOC[1:0]
13--12 11--10
Reserved IMUX9[1:0]
-- MXI9
9--8
IMUX8[1:0]
MXI8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IMUX7 IMUX6 IMUX5 IMUX4 IMUX3 IMUX2 IMUX1 IMUX0
MXI7 MXI6 MXI5 MXI4 MXI3 MXI2 MXI1 MXI0
00 01 10 11 0 00 01 10 11 00 01 10 11 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 (logic low) DMINT4 DMINT5 Reserved -- INT3 POBE PIBF Reserved INT2 POBE PIBF Reserved SIINT1 DDINT2 SOINT1 DSINT2 SIINT0 DDINT0 SOINT0 DSINT0 DDINT2 DDINT3 DSINT2 DSINT3 DDINT0 DDINT1 DSINT0 DSINT1
-- DMAU interrupt for MMT4. DMAU interrupt for MMT5. Reserved. Reserved--write with zero. Pin. PIU output buffer empty. PIU input buffer full. Reserved. Pin. PIU output buffer empty. PIU input buffer full. Reserved. SIU1 input interrupt. DMAU destination interrupt for SWT2 (SIU1). SIU1 output interrupt. DMAU source interrupt for SWT2 (SIU1). SIU0 input interrupt. DMAU destination interrupt for SWT0 (SIU0). SIU0 output interrupt. DMAU source interrupt for SWT0 (SIU0). DMAU destination interrupt for SWT2 (SIU1). DMAU destination interrupt for SWT3 (SIU1). DMAU source interrupt for SWT2 (SIU1). DMAU source interrupt for SWT3 (SIU1). DMAU destination interrupt for SWT0 (SIU0). DMAU destination interrupt for SWT1 (SIU0). DMAU source interrupt for SWT0 (SIU0). DMAU source interrupt for SWT1 (SIU0).
R/W R/W
0 00
R/W
00
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The XIOC[1:0] field controls the XIO interrupt for the other core.
240
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Each JTAG port has a read-only identification register, ID, as defined in Table 152. As specified in the table, the contents of the ID register for JTAG0 are 0x1C815321 and the contents of the ID register for JTAG1 are 0x0C815321. Table 152. ID (JTAG0--1 Identification) Registers
31--28 27--19 18--12 11--1 0
DEVICE OPTIONS Bit 31--28 27--19 18--12 11--1 0 Field DEVICE OPTIONS ROMCODE PART ID AGERE ID One
ROMCODE Value 0x1 0x0 0x190 0x15 0x190 1
PART ID Description JTAG0--device options. JTAG1--device options. ROMCODE of device. Part ID--DSP16411. Agere identification. Logic one.
AGERE ID R/W R
One
Reset Value 0x1 0x0 0x190 0x15 0x190 1
Table 153. inc0 and inc1 (Interrupt Control) Registers 0 and 1
19--18 17--16 15--14 13--12 11--10 9--8 7--6 5--4 3--2 1--0
inc0 INT1[1:0] INT0[1:0] DMINT5[1:0] DMINT4[1:0] MXI3[1:0] MXI2[1:0] MXI1[1:0] MXI0[1:0] TIME1[1:0] TIME0[1:0] inc1 MXI9[1:0] MXI8[1:0] MXI7[1:0] MXI6[1:0] MXI5[1:0] MXI4[1:0] PHINT[1:0] XIO[1:0] SIGINT[1:0] MGIBF[1:0]
Field
INT0--1[1:0] DMINT4--5[1:0] MXI0--9[1:0] TIME0--1[1:0] PHINT[1:0] XIO[1:0] SIGINT[1:0] MGIBF[1:0]
Value 00 01 10 11
Description Disable the selected interrupt (no priority). Enable the selected interrupt at priority 1 (lowest). Enable the selected interrupt at priority 2. Enable the selected interrupt at priority 3 (highest).
R/W R/W
Reset Value 00
See Table 5 on page 28 for definition of MXI0--9 (IMUX0--9).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
241
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 154. ins (Interrupt Status) Register
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
MXI9
9
MXI8
8
MXI7
7
MXI6
6
MXI5
5
MXI4
4
PHINT
3
XIO
2
SIGINT
1
MGIBF
0
INT1 Field MXI0--9 PHINT XIO SIGINT MGIBF INT0--1 DMINT4--5 TIME0--1
INT0 Value 0
DMINT5
DMINT4
MXI3
MXI2
MXI1
MXI0
TIME1 R/W R/Clear
TIME0 Reset Value 0
Description Read--corresponding interrupt not pending. Write--no effect.
1
Read--corresponding interrupt is pending. Write--clears bit and changes corresponding interrupt status to not pending.
See Table 5 on page 28 for definition of MXI0--9 (IMUX0--9).
Table 155. mgi (Core-to-Core Message Input) Register
15--0
Message Input Bit 15--0 Field Message Input Description Full-duplex message buffer that holds the input data word. R/W Reset Value R 0
Table 156. mgo (Core-to-Core Message Output) Register
15--0
Message Output Bit 15--0 Field Message Output Description Full-duplex message buffer that holds the output data word. R/W Reset Value W 0
Table 157. pid (Processor Identification) Register
15--0
PID Bit 15--0 Field PID Value 0x0000 CORE0 0x0001 CORE1 Description Processor identification to allow the software to distinguish whether it is running on CORE0 or CORE1. R/W R Reset Value 0x0000 CORE0 0x0001 CORE1
242
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 158. pllcon (Phase-Lock Loop Control) Register Note: pllcon is accessible in CORE0 only.
15--2 1 0
Reserved Bit 15--2 1 0 Field Reserved PLLEN PLLSEL Value -- 0 1 0 1
PLLEN Description Reserved--write with zero. Disable (power down) the PLL. Enable (power up) the PLL. Select the CKI input as the internal clock (CLK) source. Select the PLL as the internal clock (CLK) source.
PLLSEL R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0 0
Table 159. pllfrq (Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control) Register Note: pllfrq is accessible in CORE0 only.
15--6 5--0
Reserved Bit 15--6 5--0 Field Reserved M[5:0]
M[5:0] R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0
Value Description -- Reserved--write with zero. 4--48 Defines M, which determines the feedback clock divider control setting (2(M + 2)). The value for M must ensure the requirements in Table 188 on page 277 are met.
Table 160. pllfrq1 (Phase-Lock Loop Frequency Control 1) Register Note: pllfrq1 is accessible in CORE0 only.
15--9 8 7--4 3--0
Reserved
P
Reserved
N[3:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W 0 R/W R/W 0 0
Bit Field Value Description 15--9 Reserved -- Reserved--write with zero. 8 P 0--1 Defines P, which determines the VCO output divider control setting (P + 1). (For a value of fSYN of 240 MHz or less, P must be set to 1.) 7--4 Reserved -- Reserved--write with zero. 3--0 N[3:0] 0--4 Defines N, which determines the reference clock divider control setting (N + 1). The value chosen for N must ensure the requirements in Table 188 on page 277 are met.
Table 161. plldly (Phase-Lock Loop Delay Control) Register Note: plldly is accessible in CORE0 only.
15--0
DLY[15:0] Bit 15--0 15--0 DLY[15:0] Value -- Description The contents of DLY[15:0] are loaded into the PLL delay counter after a pllcon register write. If PLLEN (pllcon[1]) is 1, the counter decrements each CKI cycle. When the counter reaches zero, the LOCK flag for both CORE0 and CORE1 is asserted. R/W R/W Reset Value 0x1388
The state of the LOCK flag can be tested by conditional instructions (Table 138 on page 226) and is also visible in the alf register (Table 144 on page 235). The LOCK flag is cleared by a device reset or a write to the pllcon register.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
243
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 162. psw0 (Processor Status Word 0) Register
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8--5 4 3--0
LMI Bit 15 14 13 12 11
LEQ Field LMI LEQ LLV LMV SLLV
LLV
LMV Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 -- 0 1 --
SLLV
SLMV
a1V
a1[35:32] Description
a0V
a0[35:32] R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset Value X X X X 0
10
SLMV
9 8--5 4 3--0
a1V a1[35:32] a0V a0[35:32]
Most recent DAU result is not negative. Most recent DAU result is negative (minus). Most recent DAU result is not zero. Most recent DAU result is zero (equal). Most recent DAU operation did not result in logical overflow. Most recent DAU operation resulted in logical overflow. Most recent DAU operation did not result in mathematical overflow. Most recent DAU operation resulted in mathematical overflow. Previous DAU operation did not result in logical overflow. Sticky version of LLV that remains active once set by a DAU operation until explicitly cleared by a write to psw0. Previous DAU operation did not result in mathematical overflow. Sticky version of LMV that remains active once set by a DAU operation until explicitly cleared by a write to psw0. The current contents of a1 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a1 are mathematically overflowed. Reflects the four lower guard bits of a1. The current contents of a0 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a0 are mathematically overflowed. Reflects the four lower guard bits of a0.
R/W
0
R/W R/W R/W R/W
X XXXX X XXXX
In this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. ALU/ACS result or operation if the instruction uses the ALU/ACS; otherwise, ADDER or BMU result, whichever applies. ALU/ACS result if the DAU operation uses the ALU/ACS; otherwise, ADDER or BMU result, whichever applies. The ALU or ADDER cannot represent the result in 40 bits or the BMU control operand is out of range. The ALU/ACS, ADDER, or BMU cannot represent the result in 32 bits. For the BMU, other conditions can also cause mathematical overflow. The most recent DAU result that was written to that accumulator resulted in mathematical overflow (LMV) with FSAT = 0. Required for compatibility with DSP16XX family.
244
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 163. psw1 (Processor Status Word 1) Register
15 14 13--12 11--10 9--7 6 5--0
Reserved Bit 15 14 13--12
IEN Field
IPLC[1:0] Value 0 0 1 00 01 10 11
IPLP[1:0]
Reserved
EPAR
a[7:2]V R/W R/W R R/W
Description Reserved--write with zero. Hardware interrupts are globally disabled. Hardware interrupts are globally enabled. Current hardware interrupt priority level is 0; core handles pending interrupts of priority 1, 2, or 3. Current hardware interrupt priority level is 1; core handles pending interrupts of priority 2 or 3. Current hardware interrupt priority level is 2; core handles pending interrupts of priority 3 only. Current hardware interrupt priority level is 3; core does not handle any pending interrupts. Previous hardware interrupt priority level was 0. Previous hardware interrupt priority level was 1. Previous hardware interrupt priority level was 2. Previous hardware interrupt priority level was 3. Reserved--write with zero. Most recent BMU or special function shift result has odd parity. Most recent BMU or special function shift result has even parity. The current contents of a7 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a7 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a6 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a6 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a5 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a5 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a4 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a4 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a3 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a3 are mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a2 are not mathematically overflowed. The current contents of a2 are mathematically overflowed.
Reset Value
0 0 00
Reserved IEN IPLC[1:0]
11--10
IPLP[1:0]
9--7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved EPAR a7V a6V a5V a4V a3V a2V
00 01 10 11 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
R/W
XX
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
X X X X X X X X
In this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. The user clears this bit by executing a di instruction and sets it by executing an ei or ireturn instruction. The core clears this bit whenever it begins to service an interrupt. Previous interrupt priority level is the priority level of the interrupt most recently serviced prior to the current interrupt. This field is used for interrupt nesting. The most recent DAU result that was written to that accumulator resulted in mathematical overflow (LMV) with FSAT = 0.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
245
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 164. sbit (BIO Status/Control) Register
\
15
14--8
7
6--0
Reserved Bit 15 14--8 Field Reserved DIREC[6:0] (Controls direction of pins) Reserved VALUE[6:0] (Current value of pins) Value X 0 1 X 0 1
DIREC[6:0]
Reserved Description
VALUE[6:0] R/W Reset Value R/W 0 R/W 0
Reserved--writing to this field has no functional effect. Configure the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin as an input. Configure the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin as an output. Reserved--value is read-only and is undefined. The current state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is logic 0. The current state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is logic 1.
7 6--0
R R
0 P
For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset. This field is read-only; writing the VALUE[6:0] field of sbit has no effect. If the user software toggles a bit in the DIREC[6:0] field, there is a latency of one cycle until the VALUE[6:0] field reflects the current state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin. If an IO0,1BIT[6:0] pin is configured as an output (DIREC[6:0] = 1) and the user software writes cbit to change the state of the pin, there is a latency of two cycles until the VALUE[6:0] field reflects the current state of the corresponding IO0,1BIT[6:0] output pin. The IO0,1BIT[6:0] pins are configured as inputs after reset. If external circuitry does not drive an IO0,1BIT[n] pin, the VALUE[n] field is undefined after reset.
Table 165. signal (Core-to-Core Signal) Register
15--11 1 0
Reserved Bit 15--11 1 0 Field Reserved SIGTRAP SIGINT Value 0 0 1 0 1 Description Reserved--write with zero. No effect. Trap the other core by asserting its PTRAP signal. No effect. Interrupt the other core by asserting its SIGINT interrupt.
SIGTRAP R/W W W W
SIGINT Reset Value 0 0 0
Note: If the program sets the SIGTRAP or SIGINT field, the MGU automatically clears the field after asserting the trap or interrupt. Therefore, the program must not explicitly clear the field.
246
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 166. timer0c and timer1c (TIMER0,1 Control) Registers
15--7 6 5 4 3--0
Reserved Bit 15--7 6 5 Field
PWR_DWN Value 0 0 1 0 1
RELOAD
COUNT Description
PRESCALE[3:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0 0
Reserved PWR_DWN RELOAD
4 3--0
COUNT PRESCALE[3:0]
0 1 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
Reserved--write with zero. Power up the timer. Power down the timer. Stop decrementing the down counter after it reaches zero. Automatically reload the down counter from the period register after the counter reaches zero and continue decrementing the counter indefinitely. Hold the down counter at its current value, i.e., stop the timer. Decrement the down counter, i.e., run the timer. Controls the counter prescaler to determine the frefCLK/2 quency of the timer, i.e., the frequency of the clock fCLK/4 applied to the timer down counter. This frequency is a fCLK/8 ratio of the internal clock frequency fCLK. fCLK/16 fCLK/32 fCLK/64 fCLK/128 fCLK/256 fCLK/512 fCLK/1024 fCLK/2048 fCLK/4096 fCLK/8192 fCLK/16384 fCLK/32768 fCLK/65536
R/W R/W
0 0000
If TIMER0,1 is powered down, timer0,1 cannot be read or written. While the timer is powered down, the state of the down counter and period register remain unchanged.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
247
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.3 Register Encodings (continued) Table 167. timer0 and timer1 (TIMER0,1 Running Count) Registers
15--0
TIMER0,1 Down Counter TIMER0,1 Period Register
Bit 15--0
Field
Down Counter
Description
R/W Reset Value
R/W 0
If the COUNT field (timer0,1c[4]) is set, TIMER0,1 decrements this portion of the timer0,1 register every prescale period. When the down counter reaches zero, TIMER0,1 generates an interrupt. both set and the down counter contains zero, TIMER0,1 reloads the down counter with the contents of this portion of the timer0,1 register.
15--0
Period Register If the COUNT field (timer0,1c[4]) and the RELOAD field (timer0,1c[5]) are
W
X
If the user program writes to the timer0,1 register, TIMER0,1 loads the 16-bit write value into the down counter and into the period register simultaneously. If the user program reads the timer0,1 register, TIMER0,1 returns the current 16-bit value from the down counter. To read or write the timer0,1 register, TIMER0,1 must be powered up, i.e., the PWR_DWN field (timer0,1c[6]) must be cleared. For this column, X indicates unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on subsequent reset.
Table 168. vsw (Viterbi Support Word) Register
15--6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved Bit 15--6 5 4 Field Reserved VEN MAX Value 0 0 1 0 1 3 TB2 0 (GSM/IS95compatible mode)
VEN
MAX
TB2
Reserved CFLAG1 CFLAG0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset Value 0 0 0
Description Reserved--write with zero. Disables Viterbi side effects. Enables Viterbi side effects. The cmp0( ), cmp1( ), and cmp2( ) functions select the minimum value from the input operands. The cmp0( ), cmp1( ), and cmp2( ) functions select the maximum value from the input operands. For the single-ACS (40-bit) cmp1( ) function, the traceback encoder stuffs one traceback bit into ar0. For the single-ACS (40-bit) cmp0( ) function, the traceback encoder stuffs one old traceback bit from ar0 into ar1. For the dual-ACS (16-bit) cmp1( ) function, the traceback encoder stuffs CFLAG into ar0 and ar2. For the single-ACS (40-bit) cmp1( ) function, the traceback encoder stuffs two traceback bits into ar0. For the single-ACS (40-bit) cmp0( ) function, the traceback encoder stuffs two old traceback bits from ar0 into ar1. Reserved--write with zero. Previous value of CFLAG0. The traceback encoder copies the value of CFLAG0 to CFLAG1 if the DAU executes a cmp2( ) function and VEN=1. Previous value of CFLAG. The traceback encoder copies the value of CFLAG to CFLAG0 if the DAU executes a cmp2( ) function and VEN=1.
R/W
0
2 1
1 (IS54/IS136compatible mode) Reserved 0 CFLAG1 --
R/W R/W
0 0
0
CFLAG0
--
For the cmp2(aSE, aDE) function, CFLAG = 0 if MAX = 0 and aSE aDE or if MAX = 1 and aSE 248
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.4 Reset States Pin reset occurs if a high-to-low transition is applied to the RSTN pin. Tables 169 through 173 show how reset affects the core and off-core registers. The following bit codes apply:
s s
Bit code * indicates that this bit is unknown on powerup reset and unaffected on a subsequent pin reset. Bit code P indicates the value on the corresponding input pin.
Table 169. Core Register States After Reset--40-Bit Registers
Register a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 Bits 39--0
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
Table 170. Core Register States After Reset--32-Bit Registers
Register csave p0 p1 x y Bits 31--0
**** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** ****
**** **** **** **** ****
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
249
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.4 Reset States (continued) Table 171. Core Register States After Reset--20-Bit Registers
Register h i inc0 inc1 ins j k PC pi pr pt0 pt1 ptrap r0 Bits 19--0
**** **** 0000 0000 0000 **** **** XXXX **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** 0000 0000 0000 **** **** 0000 **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** 0000 0000 0000 **** **** 0000 **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** 0000 0000 0000 **** **** 0000 **** **** **** **** **** ****
**** **** 0000 0000 0000 **** **** 0000 **** **** **** **** **** ****
Register r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 rb0 rb1 re0 re1 sp vbase
Bits 19--0
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 **** 0010
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 **** 0000
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 **** 0000
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 **** 0001
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 **** 0100
PC resets to 0x30000 (first address of IROM) if the EXM pin is 0 at the time of reset. It resets to 0x80000 (first address of EROM) if the EXM pin is 1 at the time of reset.
Table 172. Core Register States After Reset--16-Bit Registers
Register alf ar0 ar1 ar2 ar3 auc0 auc1 c0 Bits 15--0
0000 **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 ****
00** **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 ****
**** **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 ****
**** **** **** **** **** 0000 0000 ****
Register c1 c2 cloop cstate psw0 psw1 vsw
Bits 15--0
**** **** 0000 0000 **** 0000 0000
**** **** 0000 0000 00** **** 0000
**** **** 0000 0000 **** **** 0000
**** **** 0000 0000 **** **** 0000
Table 173. Off-Core (Peripheral) Register Reset Values
Register cbit imux mgi mgo pid (CORE0) pid (CORE1) pllcon jiob Bits 15--0
**** 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
**** **** **** 0000 0000 0000 pllfrq1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 plldly 0000 0000 0000 0001 0011 1000 sbit 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0PPP signal 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 timer0--1 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 timer0--1c 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 **** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
Register pllfrq
Bits 15--0
0000 0000 1000 PPPP 0000 0000 0000
The jiob register is the only peripheral register that is 32 bits; therefore, the bit pattern shown is for bits 31--0.
250
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.4 Reset States (continued) Table 174. Memory-Mapped Register Reset Values--32-Bit Registers
Register DADD0--5 DSCRATCH DSTAT HSCRATCH PA PCON PDI PDO SADD0--5 Bits 31--0
0000 0000 **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0*** 0000 **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0***
**** 0000 **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ****
**** 0000 **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ****
**** 0000 **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ****
**** 0000 **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ****
**** 0000 **** 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ****
**** 0000 **** 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 ****
Table 175. Memory-Mapped Register Reset Values--20-Bit Registers
Register DBAS0--3 DCNT0--5 LIM0--5 Bits 19--0
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
Register RI0--3 SBAS0--3 SCNT0--5
Bits 19--0
**** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** ****
Table 176. Memory-Mapped Register Reset Values--16-Bit Registers
Register CTL0--3 CTL4--5 DMCON0--1 ECON0 ECON1 EXSEG0--1 EYSEG0--1 FSTAT ICIX0--1 Bits 15--0
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
00** 00** 0000 1111 0P1P 0000 0000 0000 0000
**** ***0 0000 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
Register OCIX0--1 SCON0 SCON1--2 SCON3--11 SCON12 SIDR SODR STAT STR0--3
Bits 15--0
0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 00**
0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ****
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ****
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ****
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
251
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
6 Software Architecture (continued)
6.2 Registers (continued)
6.2.5 RB Field Encoding Table 177 describes the encoding of the RB field. This information supplements the instruction set encoding information in the DSP16000 Digital Signal Processor Core Instruction Set Reference Manual. Table 177. RB Field
RB 000000 000001 000010 000011 000100 000101 000110 000111 001000 001001 001010 001011 001100 001101 001110 001111 Register a0g a1g a2g a3g a4g a5g a6g a7g a0_1h inc1 a2_3h inc0 a4_5h pi a6_7h psw1 RB 010000 010001 010010 010011 010100 010101 010110 010111 011000 011001 011010 011011 011100 011101 011110 011111 Register Reserved cloop cstate csave auc1 ptrap vsw Reserved ar0 ar1 ar2 ar3 vbase ins Reserved Reserved RB 100000 100001 100010 100011 100100 100101 100110 100111 101000 101001 101010 101011 101100 101101 101110 101111 Register Reserved Reserved pllfrq1 pllfrq signal cbit sbit timer0c timer0 timer1c timer1 mgo mgi imux pid pllcon RB 110000 110001 110010 110011 110100 110101 110110 110111 111000 111001 111010 111011 111100 111101 111110 111111 Register plldly Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved jiob
RB field specifies one of a secondary set of registers as the destination of a data move. Codes 000000 through 011111 correspond to core registers and codes 100000 through 111111 correspond to off-core (peripheral) registers.
252
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
7 208-Ball PBGA Package Ball Assignments
Figure 60 illustrates the ball assignment for the 208-ball PBGA package. This view is from the top of the package.
1 A
VDD2
2
ED5
3
ED7
4
ED9
5
ED11
6
ED15
7
ED17
8
VSS
9
VDD1
10
ED26
11
ED30
12
ERWN1
13
VSS
14
EION
15
EA1
16
VDD2
A
B
ED3
VDD1
ED6
ED8
VSS
ED14
ED16
ED20
ED25
ED27
ED31
EROMN
ERAMN
EA0
VDD1
EA3
B
C
ED2
ED1
ED4
ED10
ED12
VDD1
ED18
ED21
ED24
VDD2
ED29
ERWN0
VDD2
EA2
EA4
EA5
C
D
VSS
ED0
VDD2
VDD1
ED13
VDD2
ED19
ED22
ED23
VSS
ED28
EACKN
VDD1
EA8
EA7
EA6
D
E
EREQN
ERDY
ESIZE
EXM
EA11
EA10
VSS
EA9
E
F
TDO0
ERTYPE
TRST0N
TCK0
VDD2
VDD1
EA12
EA13
F
G
TDI0
TMS0
VDD2A
VSS2A
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
EA17
EA16
EA14
EA15
G
H
VDD1A
CKI
VSS1A
RSTN
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
ESEG1
ESEG0
EA18
VSS
H
J
VSS
INT2
INT3
TRAP
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
ESEG2
ESEG3
VDD1
ECKO
J
K
SICK0
SIFS0
INT0
INT1
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD2
TMS1
TDI1
K
L
SOCK0
SOFS0
VDD1
VDD2
TCK1
TRST1N
SOD1
TDO1
L
M
SOD0
VSS
SID0
SCK0
SID1
SCK1
SOCK1
SOFS1
M
N
IO0BIT5 IO0BIT4
IO0BIT6
VDD1
PD10
PD6
VSS
PD1
PD0
PRDY
VDD2
PCSN
VDD1
VDD2
SIFS1
VSS
N
P
IO0BIT3 IO0BIT2
IO0BIT0
VDD2
PD11
PD7
VDD2
PD2
POBE
PINT
VDD1
PADD3
PADD1
IO1BIT2
IO1BIT0
SICK1
P
R
IO0BIT1
VDD1
EYMODE
PD14
PD13
PD9
PD5
VDD1
PIBF
PODS
PRWN
VSS
PADD0
IO1BIT4
VDD1
IO1BIT1
R
T
VDD2
VSS
PD15
VSS
PD12
PD8
PD4
PD3
VSS
PRDYMD
PIDS
PADD2
IO1BIT6
IO1BIT5
IO1BIT3
VDD2
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 60. 208-Ball PBGA Package Ball Grid Array Assignments (See-Through Top View)
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
253
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
7 208-Ball PBGA Package Ball Assignments (continued)
Table 178 describes the PBGA ball assignments sorted by symbol for the 208-ball package. For each signal or power/ground connection, this table lists the PBGA coordinate, the symbol name, the type (I = input, O = output, I/O = input/output, O/Z = 3-state output, P = power, G = ground, H = hysteresis .2 V), and description. Table 178. 208-Ball PBGA Ball Assignments Sorted Alphabetically by Symbol
Symbol CKI EA[18:0] 208-Ball PBGA Coordinate H2 H15, G13, G14, G16, G15, F16, F15, E13, E14, E16, D14, D15, D16, C16, C15, B16, C14, A15, B14 D12 J16 B11, A11, C11, D11, B10, A10, B9, C9, D9, D8, C8, B8, D7, C7, A7, B7, A6, B6, D5, C5, A5, C4, A4, B4, A3, B3, A2, C3, B1, C1, C2, D2 A14 B13 E2 E1 B12 F2 Type Description I External Clock Input. O/Z SEMI External Address Bus, Bits 18--0.
EACKN ECKO ED[31:0]
EION ERAMN ERDY EREQN EROMN ERTYPE
ERWN0 ERWN1 ESEG[3:0] ESIZE
C12 A12 J14, J13, H13, H14 E3
EXM E4 EYMODE R3 INT[3:0] J3, J2, K4, K3 IO0BIT[6:0] N3, N1, N2, P1, P2, R1, P3 IO1BIT[6:0] T13, T14, R14, T15, P14, R16, P15 PADD[3:0] P12, T12, P13, R13 PCSN N12 PD[15:0] T3, R4, R5, T5, P5, N5, R6, T6, P6, N6, R7, T7, T8, P8, N8, N9 PIBF R9 PIDS T11 PINT P10 POBE P9 PODS PRDY PRDYMD PRWN R10 N10 T10 R11
O/Z SEMI External Device Acknowledge. O/Z Programmable Clock Output. I/O SEMI External Memory Data Bus, Bits 31--0. (If the SEMI interface is not used, ED[31:0] can be statically configured as outputs by asserting the EYMODE pin.) O/Z SEMI Enable for External I/O. O/Z SEMI External RAM Enable. I SEMI External Memory Device Ready. I SEMI External Device Request for EMI Interface. O/Z SEMI Enable for External ROM. I SEMI EROM Type Control: If 0, asynchronous SRAM mode. If 1, synchronous SRAM mode. O/Z SEMI Read/Write, Bit 0. O/Z SEMI Read/Write, Bit 1. O/Z SEMI External Segment Address, Bits 3--0. I SEMI External Memory Bus Size Control: If 0, 16-bit external interface. If 1, 32-bit external interface. I External Boot-up Control for CORE0. I SEMI External Data Bus Mode Configuration Pin. I External Interrupt Requests 3--0. I/O BIO0 Status/Control, Bits 6--0. I/O BIO1 Status/Control, Bits 6--0. I PIU Address, Bits 3--0. I/H PIU Chip Select. I/O PIU Data Bus, Bits 15--0. O I/H O PIU Input Buffer Full Flag. PIU Input Data Strobe. PIU Interrupt Request to Host. PIU Output Buffer Empty Flag. PIU Output Data Strobe. PIU Host Ready. PRDY Mode. PIU Read/Write.
O I/H O I I/H
These pins include bus hold circuits. If BHEDIS (ECON1[12]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, the bus hold circuits on EA[18:0], ESEG[3:0], and ED[31:0] are activated. If BHPDIS (ECON1[13]) = 0, the bus hold circuits on PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0] are activated. The bus hold circuits are enabled and activated (BHEDIS = BHPDIS = 0) during and after reset. Activated bus hold circuits affect the electrical characteristics of the associated pins. See Section 10.1, beginning on page 268, and Table 183 on page 267 for details. Negative-assertion.
254
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
7 208-Ball PBGA Package Ball Assignments (continued)
Table 178. 208-Ball PBGA Ball Assignments Sorted Alphabetically by Symbol (continued)
Symbol RSTN SCK0 SCK1 SICK0 SICK1 SID0 SID1 SIFS0 SIFS1 SOCK0 SOCK1 SOD0 SOD1 SOFS0 SOFS1 TCK0 TCK1 TDI0 TDI1 TDO0 TDO1 TMS0 TMS1 TRAP TRST0N TRST1N VDD1 VDD2 VSS 208-Ball PBGA Coordinate H4 M4 M14 K1 P16 M3 M13 K2 N15 L1 M15 M1 L15 L2 M16 F4 L13 G1 K16 F1 L16 G2 K15 J4 F3 L14 A9, B2, B15, C6, D4, D13, F14, J15, L3, N4, N13, P11, R2, R8, R15 A1, A16, C13, D3, D6, F13, K14, L4, N11, N14, P4, P7, T1, T16, C10 A13, A8, B5, D1, D10, E15, G7, G8, G9, G10, H7, H8, H9, H10, H16, J1, J7, J8, J9, J10, K7, K8, K9, K10, K13, M2, N7, N16, R12, T2, T4, T9 H1 H3 G3 G4 Type Description Device Reset. External Clock for SIU0 Active Generator. External Clock for SIU1 Active Generator.
I/H I/H I/H
I/O/H SIU0 Input Clock. I/O/H SIU1 Input Clock. I I
SIU0 Input Data. SIU1 Input Data.
I/O/H SIU0 Input Frame Sync. I/O/H SIU1 Input Frame Sync. I/O/H SIU0 Output Clock. I/O/H SIU1 Output Clock. O/Z SIU0 Output Data. O/Z SIU1 Output Data. I/O/H SIU0 Output Frame Sync. I/O/H SIU1 Output Frame Sync. I/H I/H I I O/Z I I I/O I I P P G
JTAG Test Clock for CORE0. JTAG Test Clock for CORE1. JTAG Test Data Input for CORE0. JTAG Test Data Input for CORE1. JTAG Test Data Output for CORE1. JTAG Test Mode Select for CORE0. JTAG Test Mode Select for CORE1. TRAP/Breakpoint Indication. JTAG TAP Controller Reset for CORE0. JTAG TAP Controller Reset for CORE1. Power Supply for Internal Circuitry (1.2 V nominal). Power Supply for External (I/O) Circuitry (3.3 V nominal). Ground.
O/Z JTAG Test Data Output for CORE0.
VDD1A VSS1A VDD2A VSS2A
P G P G
Power Supply 1 for PLL Circuitry (1.2 V nominal). Ground 1 for PLL Circuitry. Power Supply 2 for PLL Circuitry (3.3 V nominal). Ground 2 for PLL Circuitry.
These pins include bus hold circuits. If BHEDIS (ECON1[12]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, the bus hold circuits on EA[18:0], ESEG[3:0], and ED[31:0] are activated. If BHPDIS (ECON1[13]) = 0, the bus hold circuits on PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0] are activated. The bus hold circuits are enabled and activated (BHEDIS = BHPDIS = 0) during and after reset. Activated bus hold circuits affect the electrical characteristics of the associated pins. See Section 10.1, beginning on page 268, and Table 183 on page 267 for details. Negative-assertion.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
255
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
8 Signal Descriptions
Figure 61 shows the interface pinout for the DSP16411. The signals can be separated into nine interfaces as shown. Following is a description of these interfaces and the signals that comprise them.
DSP16411 Pinout by Interface
SYSTEM AND EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACE
EA[18:0] ED[31:0] ERWN0 ERWN1 ERTYPE ESEG[3:0] EION ERAMN EROMN ERDY EREQN EACKN ESIZE EXM EYMODE
SCK0 SICK0 SID0 SIFS0 SOFS0 SOD0 SOCK0 SCK1 SICK1 SID1 SIFS1 SOFS1 SOD1 SOCK1 TCK0 TDI0 TDO0 TMS0 TRST0N TCK1 TDI1 TDO1 TMS1 TRST1N
SIU0 INTERFACE
SIU1 INTERFACE
SYSTEM INTERFACE
RSTN CKI ECKO INT[3:0]
DSP16411
JTAG0 INTERFACE
TRAP
JTAG1 INTERFACE
PIU INTERFACE
PADD[3:0] PD[15:0] PCSN PIDS PODS PRDY PRDYMD PRWN PINT PIBF POBE
IO0BIT[6:0] IO1BIT[6:0]
BIO INTERFACE
VDD2 VDD1 VSS VDD1A VSS1A VDD2A VSS2A
POWER SUPPLY
These signals contain bus hold circuits. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details.
Figure 61. DSP16411 Pinout by Interface
256
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
8.2 BIO Interface
IO0BIT[6:0]--BIO Signals: Input/output. Each of these pins can be independently configured via software as either an input or an output by CORE0. As outputs, they can be independently set, toggled, or cleared. As inputs, they can be tested independently or in combinations for various data patterns. IO1BIT[6:0]--BIO Signals: Input/output. Each of these pins can be independently configured via software as either an input or an output by CORE1. As outputs, they can be independently set, toggled, or cleared. As inputs, they can be tested independently or in combinations for various data patterns.
8 Signal Descriptions (continued)
8.1 System Interface
The system interface consists of the clock, interrupt, and reset signals for the processor. RSTN--Device Reset: Negative assertion input. A high-to-low transition causes the processor to enter the reset state. See Section 4.3 on page 23 for details. CKI--Input Clock: The CKI input buffer drives the internal clock (CLK) directly or drives the on-chip PLL (see Section 4.17 on page 200). The PLL allows the CKI input clock to be at a lower frequency than the internal clock. ECKO--Programmable Clock Output: Buffered output clock with options programmable via the ECON1 register (see Table 61 on page 112). The selectable ECKO options are as follows:
!
8.3 System and External Memory Interface
Note: The SEMI data and address buses (ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0]) contain internal bus hold circuits. If BHEDIS (ECON1[12]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, these bus hold circuits are activated. If BHEDIS = 0 and neither the SEMI nor an external device is driving these buses, the bus hold circuits hold them at their previous valid logic level. This eliminates the need for external pull-up or pull-down resistors on these pins. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. ED[31:0]--Bidirectional 32-Bit External Data Bus: Input/output. The external data bus operates as a 16-bit or 32-bit data bus, as determined by the state of the ESIZE pin:
!
CLK/2: A free-running output clock at half the frequency of the internal clock. (This is the default selection after reset.) CLK/4. CLK: A free-running output clock at the frequency of the internal clock. CKI: Clock input pin. ZERO: A constant logic 0 output.
! !
! !
INT[3:0]--External Interrupt Requests: Positive assertion inputs. Hardware interrupts to the DSP16411 are edge-sensitive, enabled via the inc0 register (see Table 153 on page 241). If enabled and asserted properly with no equal- or higher-priority interrupts being serviced, each hardware interrupt causes the core to vector to the memory location described in Table 9 on page 33. If an INT[3:0] pin is asserted for at least the minimum required assertion time (see Section 11.7 on page 283), the corresponding external interrupt request is recorded in the ins register (see Table 154 on page 242). If both INT0 and RSTN are asserted, all output and bidirectional pins are put in a 3-state condition except TDO, which 3-states by JTAG control. TRAP--TRAP/Breakpoint Indication: Positive pulse assertion input/output. If asserted, the processor is put into the trap condition, which normally causes a branch to the location vbase + 4. Although normally an input, this pin can be configured as an output by the HDS block. As an output, the pin can be used to signal an HDS breakpoint in a multiple processor environment.
If defined as a 32-bit bus (ESIZE = 1), the SEMI uses ED[31:0]. If the cores or the DMAU attempt to initiate a 16-bit transfer, the SEMI drives ED[31:16] for accesses to an even address or ED[15:0] for accesses to an odd address. If defined as a 16-bit bus (ESIZE = 0), the SEMI uses ED[31:16] and 3-states ED[15:0]. If the cores or the DMAU attempt to initiate a 32-bit transfer to or from external memory, the SEMI performs two 16-bit transfers.
!
If the SEMI is not performing an external access, it 3-states ED[31:0]. If the EYMODE pin is tied high, ED[31:0] are statically configured as outputs (see description of EYMODE below). ED[31:0] contain internal bus hold circuits. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
257
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
!
8 Signal Descriptions (continued)
8.3 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
EYMODE--External Data Bus Mode: Input. This pin determines the mode of the external data bus. It must be static and tied to VSS (if the SEMI is used) or VDD2 (if the SEMI is not used). If EYMODE = 1, the external data bus pins ED[31:0] are statically configured as outputs (regardless of the state of RSTN) and must not be connected externally. If EYMODE = 0, either external pull-up resistors are needed on ED[31:0], or the bus hold circuits must be enabled (BHEDIS (ECON1[12]) must be cleared). See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. EA[18:1]--External Address Bus Bits 18--1: Output. The function of this bus depends on the state of the ESIZE pin:
!
If the external data bus is configured as a 16-bit bus (ESIZE = 0), the SEMI places the least significant bit of the 19-bit external address onto EA0.
After an access is complete and before the start of a new access, the SEMI continues to drive EA0 with its current state. The SEMI 3-states EA0 if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin). EA0 contains an internal bus hold circuit. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. ESEG[3:0]--External Segment Address: Output. The external segment address outputs provide an additional 4 bits of address or decoded enables for extending the external address range of the DSP16411. The state of ESEG[3:0] is determined by the EXSEG0, EYSEG0, EXSEG1, and EYSEG1 registers for a CORE0 or CORE1 external memory access. Refer to Section 4.14.1.5 on page 106 for more details. If the DMAU accesses external memory, the SEMI places the contents of the ESEG[3:0] field of the SADD0--5 or DADD0--5 register onto the ESEG[3:0] pins (see Table 37 on page 77 for details). If the PIU accesses external memory, the SEMI places the contents of the ESEG[3:0] field of the PA register onto the ESEG[3:0] pins (see Table 80 on page 138 for details). ESEG[3:0] retain their previous state while the SEMI is not performing external accesses. The SEMI 3-states ESEG[3:0] if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin). ERWN[1:0]--External Read/Write Not: Output. The external read/write strobes are two separate write strobes. In general, if driven high by the SEMI, these signals indicate an external read access. If driven low, these signals indicate an external write access. However, the exact function of these pins is qualified by the value of the ESIZE pin:
!
If the external data bus is configured as a 32-bit bus (ESIZE = 1), the SEMI places the 18-bit external address onto EA[18:1]. If the external data bus is configured as a 16-bit bus (ESIZE = 0), the SEMI places the 18 most significant bits of the 19-bit external address onto EA[18:1].
!
After an access is complete and before the start of a new access, the SEMI continues to drive EA[18:1] with its current state. The SEMI 3-states EA[18:1] if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin). EA[18:1] contain internal bus hold circuits. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. EA0--External Address Bus Bit 0: Output. The function of this bit depends on the state of the ESIZE pin:
!
If the external data bus is configured as a 32-bit bus (ESIZE = 1), the SEMI does not use EA0 as an address bit: -- If the selected memory component is configured as asynchronous1, the SEMI drives EA0 with its previous value. -- If the selected memory component is configured as synchronous1, the SEMI drives a negativeassertion write strobe onto EA0 (the SEMI drives EA0 with the logical AND of ERWN1 and ERWN0).
If ESIZE = 0 (16-bit data bus), ERWN1 is always inactive (high) and ERWN0 is an active write strobe. If ESIZE = 1 (32-bit data bus), ERWN0 is the write enable for the upper (most significant) 16 bits of the data (ED[31:16]) and ERWN1 is the write enable for the lower (least significant) 16 bits of the data (ED[15:0]).
!
The SEMI 3-states ERWN[1:0] if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin).
1. The EROM component is synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is logic 1. The ERAM component is synchronous if YTYPE field (ECON1[9]) is set. The EIO component is synchronous if the ITYPE field (ECON1[10]) is set. ECON1 is described in Table 61 on page 112.
258
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
at least 4 CLK cycles before the end of the access and the enable must be programmed for at least 5 CLK cycles of assertion (via the YATIME, XATIME, or IATIME field of ECON0--see Table 60 on page 111). The SEMI ignores the state of ERDY prior to 4 CLK cycles before the end of the access. The access is extended by 4 CLK cycles after ERDY is driven high. The state of ERDY is readable in the EREADY field (ECON1[6]--see Table 61 on page 112. Note: If ERDY is not in use by the application or if all external memory is synchronous, ERDY must be tied high. EREQN--External Device Requests Access to SEMI Bus: Negative-assertion input. An external device asserts EREQN low to request the external memory bus for access to external asynchronous memory. If the NOSHARE field (ECON1[8]--see Table 61 on page 112) is set, the DSP16411 ignores the request. If NOSHARE is cleared, a minimum of four cycles later the SEMI grants the request by performing the following:
!
8 Signal Descriptions (continued)
8.3 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
ERAMN--ERAM Space Enable: Negative-assertion output. The external RAM enable selects the ERAM memory component (external data memory). For asynchronous accesses, the SEMI asserts ERAMN for the number of cycles specified by the YATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[7:4]--see Table 60 on page 111). For synchronous accesses, the SEMI asserts ERAMN for one ECKO cycle1. ERAM is configured as synchronous if the YTYPE field (ECON1[9]--see Table 61 on page 112) is set. The SEMI 3-states ERAMN if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin). EROMN--EROM Space Enable: Negative-assertion output. The external ROM enable selects the EROM memory component (external program memory). For asynchronous accesses, the SEMI asserts EROMN for the number of cycles specified by the XATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[3:0]--see Table 60 on page 111). For synchronous accesses, the SEMI asserts EROMN for one ECKO cycle1. EROM is configured as synchronous if the ERTYPE pin is high. The SEMI 3-states EROMN if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin). EION--EIO Space Enable: Negative-assertion output. The external I/O enable selects the EIO memory component (external memory-mapped peripherals or data memory). For asynchronous accesses, the SEMI asserts EION for the number of cycles specified by the IATIME[3:0] field (ECON0[11:8]--see Table 60 on page 111). For synchronous accesses, the SEMI asserts EION for one ECKO cycle2. EION is configured as synchronous if the ITYPE field is set (ECON1[10]--see Table 61 on page 112). The SEMI 3-states EION if it grants a request by an external device to access the external memory (see description of the EREQN pin). ERDY--External Device Ready for SEMI Data: Positive-assertion input. The external READY input is a control pin that allows an external device to extend an external asynchronous memory access. If driven low by the external device, the SEMI extends the current external memory access that is already in progress. To guarantee proper operation, ERDY must be driven low
1. If any memory component is configured as synchronous, ECKO must be programmed as CLK/2 or CLK/4 (see the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields (ECON1[3:0]--Table 61 on page 112). 2. If any memory component is configured as synchronous, ECKO must be programmed as CLK/2 or CLK/4 (see the ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields (ECON1[3:0]--Table 61 on page 112).
First, the SEMI completes any external access that is already in progress. The SEMI 3-states the address bus and segment address (EA[18:0] and ESEG[3:0]), the data bus (ED[31:0]), and all the external enables and strobes (ERAMN, EROMN, EION, and ERWN[1:0]) until the external device deasserts EREQN. The SEMI continues to drive ECKO. The SEMI acknowledges the request by asserting EACKN.
!
!
The cores and the DMAU continue processing. If a core or the DMAU attempts to perform an external memory access, it stalls until the external device relinquishes the bus. If the external device deasserts EREQN (changes EREQN from 0 to 1), four cycles later the SEMI deasserts EACKN (changes EACKN from 0 to 1). To avoid external bus contention, the external device must wait for at least ATIMEMAX cycles3 after it deasserts EREQN (changes EREQN from 0 to 1) before reasserting EREQN (changing EREQN from 1 to 0). The software can read the state of the EREQN pin in the EREQN field (ECON1[4]--see Table 61 on page 112).
3. ATIMEMAX is the greatest of IATIME(ECON0[11:8]), YATIME (ECON0[7:4]), and XATIME (ECON0[3:0]).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
259
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
SOD0--External Serial Output Data: Output. By default, data is driven onto the SOD0 pin on a rising edge of the output bit clock (SOCK0) during a selected and unmasked channel. During inactive or masked channel periods, SOD0 is 3-state. SICK0--Input Bit Clock: Input/output. SICK0 can be an input (passive input clock) or an output (active input clock). The SICK0 pin is the input data bit clock. By default, data on SID0 is latched on a falling edge of this clock, but the active level of this clock can be changed by the ICKK field (SCON10[3]--Table 113 on page 191). SICK0 can be configured via software as an input (passive, externally generated) or an output (active, internally generated) via the ICKA field (SCON10[2]) and the ICKE field (SCON3[6]--Table 106 on page 188). SOCK0--Output Bit Clock: Input/output. SOCK0 can be an input (passive output clock) or an output (active output clock). The SOCK0 pin is the output data bit clock. By default, data on SOD0 is driven on a rising edge of SOCK0 during active channel periods, but the active level of this clock can be changed by the OCKK field (SCON10[7]). SOCK0 can be configured via software as an input (passive, externally generated) or an output (active, internally generated) via the OCKA of SCON10[6]) and the OCKE field (SCON3[14]). SIFS0--Input Frame Synchronization: Input/output. The SIFS0 signal indicates the beginning of a new input frame. By default, SIFS0 is active-high, and a low-to-high transition (rising edge) indicates the start of a new frame. The active level and position of the input frame sync relative to the first input data bit can be changed via the IFSK field (SCON10[1]) and the IFSDLY[1:0] field (SCON1[9:8]--Table 104 on page 186), respectively. SIFS0 can be configured via software as an input (passive, externally generated) or an output (active, internally generated) via the IFSA field (SCON10[0]) and the IFSE field (SCON3[7]). SOFS0--Output Frame Synchronization: Input/output. The SOFS0 signal indicates the beginning of a new output frame. By default, SOFS0 is active-high, and a low-to-high transition (rising edge) indicates the start of a new frame. The active level and position of the output frame sync relative to the first output data bit can be changed via the OFSK field (SCON10[5]) and the OFSDLY[1:0] field (SCON2[9:8]--Table 105 on page 187), respectively. SOFS0 can be configured via software as an input (passive, externally generated) or an output (active, internally generated) via the OFSA field (SCON10[4]) and the OFSE field (SCON3[15]).
8 Signal Descriptions (continued)
8.3 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
Note: If EREQN is not in use by the application, it must be tied high. EACKN--DSP16411 Acknowledges External Bus Request: Negative-assertion output. The SEMI acknowledges the request of an external device for direct access to an asynchronous external memory by asserting EACKN. See the description of the EREQN pin on page 259 for details. The software can read the state of the EACKN pin in the EACKN field (ECON1[5]--see Table 61 on page 112). ESIZE--Size of External SEMI Bus: Input. The external data bus size input determines the size of the active data bus. If ESIZE = 0, the external data bus is configured as 16 bits and the SEMI uses ED[31:16] and 3-states ED[15:0]. If ESIZE = 1, the external data bus is configured as 32 bits and the SEMI uses ED[31:0]. ERTYPE--EROM Type: Input. The external ROM type input determines the type of memory device in the EROM component (selected by the EROMN enable). If ERTYPE = 0, the EROM component is populated with ROM or asynchronous SRAM, and the SEMI performs asynchronous accesses to the EROM component. If ERTYPE = 1, the EROM component is populated with synchronous ZBT SRAM and the SEMI performs synchronous accesses to the EROM component. EXM--Boot Source: Input. The external execution memory input determines the active memory for program execution after DSP16411 reset. If EXM = 0 when the RSTN pin makes a low-to-high transition, both cores begin execution from their internal ROM (IROM) memory at location 0x30000. If EXM = 1 when the RSTN pin makes a low-to-high transition, both cores begin execution from external ROM (EROM) memory at location 0x80000. If the cores begin execution from external ROM, the SEMI arbitrates the accesses from the two cores.
8.4 SIU0 Interface
SID0--External Serial Input Data: Input. By default, data is latched on the SID0 pin on a falling edge of the input bit clock (SICK0) during a selected channel.
260
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
SIFS1--Input Frame Synchronization: Input/output. The SIFS1 signal indicates the beginning of a new input frame. By default, SIFS1 is active-high, and a low-to-high transition (rising edge) indicates the start of a new frame. The active level and position of the input frame sync relative to the first input data bit can be changed via the IFSK field (SCON10[1]) and the IFSDLY[1:0] field (SCON1[9:8]), respectively. SIFS1 can be configured via software as an input (passive, externally generated) or an output (active, internally generated) via the IFSA field (SCON10[0]) and the IFSE (SCON3[7]). SOFS1--Output Frame Synchronization: Input/output. The SOFS1 signal indicates the beginning of a new output frame. By default, SOFS1 is active-high, and a low-to-high transition (rising edge) indicates the start of a new frame. The active level and position of the output frame sync relative to the first output data bit can be changed via the OFSK field (SCON10[5]) and the OFSDLY[1:0] field (SCON2[9:8]--Table 105 on page 187), respectively. SOFS1 can be configured via software as an input (passive, externally generated) or an output (active, internally generated) via the OFSA field (SCON10[4]) and the OFSE field (SCON3[15]). SCK1--External Clock Source: Input. The SCK1 pin is an input that provides an external clock source for generating the input and output bit clocks and frame syncs. If enabled via the AGEXT field of SCON12[12]--Table 115 on page 195), the clock source applied to SCK1 replaces the internal clock (CLK) for active mode timing generation of the bit clocks and frame syncs. The active level of the clock applied to this pin can be inverted by setting the SCKK field (SCON12[13]).
8 Signal Descriptions (continued)
8.4 SIU0 Interface (continued)
SCK0--External Clock Source: Input. The SCK0 pin is an input that provides an external clock source for generating the input and output bit clocks and frame syncs. If enabled via the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]-- Table 115 on page 195), the clock source applied to SCK0 replaces the internal clock (CLK) for active mode timing generation of the bit clocks and frame syncs. The active level of the clock applied to this pin can be inverted by setting the SCKK field (SCON12[13]).
8.5 SIU1 Interface
SID1--External Serial Input Data: Input. By default, data is latched on the SID1 pin on a falling edge of the input bit clock, SICK1, during a selected channel. SOD1--External Serial Output Data: Output. By default, data is driven onto the SOD1 pin on a rising edge of the output bit clock, SOCK1, during a selected and unmasked channel. During inactive or masked channel periods, SOD1 is 3-state. SICK1--Input Bit Clock: Input/output. SICK1 can be an input (passive input clock) or an output (active input clock). The SICK1 pin is the input data bit clock. By default, data on SID1 is latched on a falling edge of this clock, but the active level of this clock can be changed by the ICKK field (SCON10[3]--Table 113 on page 191). SICK1 can be configured via software as an input (passive, externally generated) or an output (active, internally generated) via the ICKA field (SCON10[2]) and the ICKE field (SCON3[6]--Table 106 on page 188). SOCK1--Output Bit Clock: Input/output. SOCK1 can be an input (passive output clock) or an output (active output clock). The SOCK1 pin is the output data bit clock. By default, data on SOD1 is driven on a rising edge of SOCK1 during active channel periods, but the active level of this clock can be changed by the OCKK field (SCON10[7]). SOCK1 can be configured via software as an input (passive, externally generated) or an output (active, internally generated) via the OCKA field (SCON10[6]) and the OCKE field (SCON3[14]).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
261
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
active state of this pin is determined by the state of the PRDYMD pin. The state of PRDY is valid only if the PIU is activated, i.e., if PSTRN is asserted. (See Section 4.15.2.1 on page 140 for a definition of PSTRN.)
!
8 Signal Descriptions (continued)
8.6 PIU Interface
Note: The PIU data and address buses (PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0]) contain internal bus hold circuits. If BHPDIS (ECON1[13]--Table 61 on page 112) = 0, these bus hold circuits are activated. If BHPDIS = 0 and neither the PIU nor an external device is driving these buses, the bus hold circuits hold them at their previous valid logic level. This eliminates the need for external pull-up or pull-down resistors on these pins. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. PD[15:0]--16-Bit Bidirectional, Parallel Data Bus: Input/output. During host data reads, the DSP16411 drives the data contained in the PIU output data register (PDO) onto this bus. During host data writes, data driven by the host onto this bus is latched into the PIU input data register (PDI). If the PIU is not selected by the host (PCSN is high), PD[15:0] is 3-state. PD[15:0] contain internal bus hold circuits. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. PADD[3:0]--PIU 4-Bit Address and Control: Input. This 4-bit address input is driven by the host to select between various PIU registers and to issue PIU commands. Refer to Section 4.15.5 on page 147 for details. If unused, these input pins should be tied low. PADD[3:0] contain internal bus hold circuits. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. POBE--PIU Output Buffer Empty Flag: Output. This status pin directly reflects the state of the PIU output data register (PDO). If POBE = 0, the PDO register contains data ready for the host to read. If POBE = 1, the PDO register is empty and there is no data for the host to read. The host can read the state of this pin any time PCSN is asserted low. The state of this pin is also reflected in the POBE field of the PCON register. PIBF--PIU Input Buffer Full Flag: Output. This status pin directly reflects the state of the PIU input data register (PDI). If PIBF = 0, PDI is empty and the host can safely write another word to the PIU. If PIBF = 1, PDI is full with the previous word that was written by the host. If the host issues another write to the PIU while PIBF = 1, the previous data in PDI is overwritten. The host can read this pin any time PCSN is asserted low. The state of this pin is also reflected in the PIBF field (PCON[1]--Table 75 on page 136). PRDY--PIU Host Ready: Output. This status pin directly reflects the state of the previous PIU host transaction. It is used by the host to extend the current access until the previous access is complete. The 262
If PRDYMD = 0, PRDY is active-low. If PRDY = 0, the previous host read or host write is complete, and the host can continue with the current read or write transaction. If PRDY = 1, the previous PIU read or write is still in progress (PDI is still full or PDO is still empty) and the host must extend the current access until PRDY = 0. If PRDYMD = 1, PRDY is active-high. If PRDY = 1, the previous host read or host write is complete, and the host can continue with the current read or write transaction. If PRDY = 0, the previous PIU read or write is still in progress (PDI is still full or PDO is still empty) and the host must extend the current access until PRDY = 1.
!
PINT--PIU Interrupt: Output. Can be set by the DSP16411 to generate a host interrupt. If a core sets the PINT field (PCON[3]--Table 75 on page 136), the PIU drives the PINT pin high to create a host interrupt. After the host acknowledges the interrupt, it must clear the PINT field (PCON[3]). PRDYMD--PIU Ready Pin Mode: Input. Determines the active state of the PRDY pin. Refer to the PRDY pin description above. If unused, PRDYMD should be tied low. PODS--PIU Output Data Strobe: Input. Function is dependent upon the host type (Intel or Motorola). If unused, PODS must be tied high:
!
Intel mode: In this mode, PODS functions as an output data strobe and must be connected to the host active-low read data strobe. The host read transaction is initiated by the assertion (low) of PCSN and PODS. It is terminated by the deassertion (high) of PCSN or PODS. Motorola mode: In this mode, PODS functions as a data strobe and must be connected to the host data strobe. The active level of PODS (active-high or active-low) is determined by the state of the PIDS pin. A host read or write transaction is initiated by the assertion of PCSN and PODS. It is terminated by the deassertion of PCSN or PODS.
!
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
TDI0--JTAG Test Data Input: Serial input signal. All serial-scanned data and instructions are input on this pin. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor. TDO0--JTAG Test Data Output: Serial output signal. Serial-scanned data and status bits are output on this pin. TMS0--JTAG Test Mode Select: Mode control signal that, combined with TCK0, controls the scan operations. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor. TCK0--JTAG Test Clock: Serial shift clock. This signal clocks all data into the port through TDI0 and out of the port through TDO0. It also controls the port by latching the TMS0 signal inside the state-machine controller. TRST0N--JTAG TAP Controller Reset: Negative assertion. Test reset. If asserted low, resets the JTAG0 TAP controller. In an application environment, this pin must be asserted prior to or concurrent with RSTN. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor.
8 Signal Descriptions (continued)
8.6 PIU Interface (continued)
PIDS--PIU Input Data Strobe: Input. Function is dependent upon the host type (Intel or Motorola). If unused, PIDS must be tied high:
!
Intel mode: In this mode, PIDS functions as an input data strobe and must be connected to the host active-low write data strobe. The host write transaction is initiated by the assertion (low) of PCSN and PIDS. It is terminated by the deassertion (high) of PCSN or PIDS. Motorola mode: In this mode, the state of PIDS determines the active level of the host data strobe, PODS. If PIDS = 0, PODS is an active-high data strobe. If PIDS = 1, PODS is an active-low data strobe.
!
PRWN--PIU Read/Write Not: Input. Function is dependent upon the host type (Intel or Motorola). In either case, PRWN is driven high by the host during host reads and driven low by the host during host writes. PRWN must be stable for the entire access (while PCSN and the appropriate data strobe are asserted). If unused, PRWN must be tied high.
!
8.8 JTAG1 Test Interface
The JTAG1 test interface has features that allow programs and data to be downloaded into CORE1 via five pins. This provides extensive test and diagnostic capability. In addition, internal circuitry allows the device to be controlled through the JTAG port to provide on-chip, in-circuit emulation. Agere Systems provides hardware and software tools to interface to the on-chip HDS via the JTAG port. Note: JTAG1 provides all JTAG/IEEE 1149.1 standard test capabilities including boundary scan. TDI1--JTAG Test Data Input: Serial input signal. All serial-scanned data and instructions are input on this pin. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor. TDO1--JTAG Test Data Output: Serial output signal. Serial-scanned data and status bits are output on this pin. TMS1--JTAG Test Mode Select: Mode control signal that, combined with TCK1, controls the scan operations. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor. TCK1--JTAG Test Clock: Serial shift clock. This signal clocks all data into the port through TDI1 and out of the port through TDO1. It also controls the port by latching the TMS1 signal inside the state-machine controller.
Intel mode: In this mode, PRWN is connected to the active-low write data strobe of the host processor, the same as the PIDS input. Motorola mode: In this mode, PRWN functions as an active read/write strobe and must be connected to the RWN output of the Motorola host processor.
!
PCSN--PIU Chip Select: Negative-assertion input. PCSN is the chip select from the host for shared-bus systems. If PCSN = 0, the PIU of the selected DSP16411 is active for transfers with the host. If PCSN = 1, the PIU ignores any activity on PIDS, PODS, and PRWN, and 3-states PD[15:0]. If unused, PCSN must be tied high.
8.7 JTAG0 Test Interface
The JTAG0 test interface has features that allow programs and data to be downloaded into CORE0 via five pins. This provides extensive test and diagnostic capability. In addition, internal circuitry allows the device to be controlled through the JTAG port to provide on-chip, in-circuit emulation. Agere Systems provides hardware and software tools to interface to the on-chip HDS via the JTAG port. Note: JTAG0 provides all JTAG/IEEE 1149.1 standard test capabilities including boundary scan. Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
263
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
8 Signal Descriptions (continued)
8.8 JTAG1 Test Interface (continued)
TRST1N--JTAG TAP Controller Reset: Negative assertion. Test reset. If asserted low, TRST1N resets the JTAG1 TAP controller. In an application environment, this pin must be asserted prior to or concurrent with RSTN. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor.
8.9 Power and Ground
VDD1--Core Supply Voltage: Supply voltage for the DSP16000 cores and all internal DSP16411 circuitry. Required voltage level is 1.2 V nominal. VDD2--I/O Supply Voltage: Supply voltage for the I/O pins. Required voltage level is 3.3 V nominal. VSS--Ground: Ground for core and I/O supplies. VDD1A--Analog Supply Voltage: Supply voltage 1 for the PLL circuitry. Required voltage level is 1.2 V nominal. VSS1A--Analog Ground: Ground 1 for analog supply. VDD2A--Analog Supply Voltage: Supply voltage 2 for the PLL circuitry. Required voltage level is 3.3 V nominal. VSS2A--Analog Ground: Ground 2 for analog supply.
264
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
9 Device Characteristics
9.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Stresses in excess of the absolute maximum ratings can cause permanent damage to the device. These are absolute stress ratings only. Functional operation of the device is not implied at these or any other conditions in excess of those given in the operational sections of the data sheet. Exposure to absolute maximum ratings for extended periods can adversely affect device reliability. External leads can be bonded and soldered safely at temperatures of up to 235 C. Table 179. Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter Voltage on VDD1 with Respect to VSS Voltage on VDD1A with Respect to VSS Voltage on VDD2 with Respect to VSS Voltage on VDD2A with Respect to VSS Voltage Range on Any Signal Pin Junction Temperature (TJ) Storage Temperature Range Min -0.3 -0.3 -0.3 -0.3 VSS - 0.3 -40 -40 Max 1.7 1.7 4.2 4.2 VDD2 + 0.3 VSS + 4.0 115 150 Unit V V V V V C C
During a transition, the voltage on an input pin can be outside the range of this specification for a short time duration (less than or equal to 1.0 ns). See Table 183 on page 267 for details.
9.2 Handling Precautions
Although electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection circuitry has been designed into this device, proper precautions must be taken to avoid exposure to ESD and electrical overstress (EOS) during all handling, assembly, and test operations. Agere employs both a human-body model (HBM) and a charged-device model (CDM) qualification requirement in order to determine ESD-susceptibility limits and protection design evaluation. ESD voltage thresholds are dependent on the circuit parameters used in each of the models, as defined by JEDEC's JESD22-A114 (HBM) and JESD22-C101 (CDM) standards. Table 180. Minimum ESD Voltage Thresholds Device DSP16411 Minimum HBM Threshold 2000 V Minimum CDM Threshold 1000 V
9.3 Recommended Operating Conditions
Table 181. Recommended Operating Conditions
Maximum Internal Clock (CLK) Frequency 285 MHz Minimum Internal Clock (CLK) Period T 3.5 ns Junction Temperature TJ (C) Min Max -40 115 Supply Voltage VDD1, VDD1A (V) Min Max 1.15 1.25 Supply Voltage VDD2 (V) Min Max 3.0 3.6
The ratio of the instruction cycle rate (fCLK) to the input clock frequency (fCKI) is 1:1 without the PLL selected. With the PLL selected, the ratio of fCLK to fCKI is the PLL output frequency (fSYN) and is determined by the programming of the PLL as defined in Table 4.18.1 on page 201. The maximum input clock (CKI input pin) frequency is defined in Table 188 on page 277.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
265
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
9 Device Characteristics (continued)
9.3 Recommended Operating Conditions (continued)
9.3.1 Package Thermal Considerations The maximum allowable ambient temperature, TAMAX, is dependent upon the device power dissipation and is determined by the following equation: TAMAX = TJMAX - PMAX x JA where PMAX is the maximum device power dissipation for the application, TJMAX is the maximum device junction temperature specified in Table 182, and JA is the maximum thermal resistance in still-air-ambient specified in Table 182. See Section 10.3 on page 272 for information on determining the maximum device power dissipation. Table 182. Package Thermal Considerations
Device Package 208 PBGA 208 PBGA 208 PBGA Parameter Maximum Junction Temperature (TJMAX) Maximum Thermal Resistance in Still-Air-Ambient (JA) Maximum Junction-to-Case Thermal Resistance (JC) Value 115 27 8.0 Unit C C/W C/W
WARNING: Due to package thermal constraints, proper precautions in the user's application must be taken to avoid exceeding the maximum junction temperature of 115 C. Otherwise, the device performance and reliability is adversely affected.
266
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements
Electrical characteristics refer to the behavior of the device under specified conditions. Electrical requirements refer to conditions imposed on the user for proper operation of the device. The parameters below are valid for the conditions described in the previous section, Section 9.3 on page 265. Note: The specifications in Table 183 are preliminary and subject to change. Table 183. Electrical Characteristics and Requirements
Pins All inputs except CKI CKI input All inputs (undershoot or overshoot during a transition) All inputs except TMS0, TMS1, TDI0, TDI1, TRST0N, TRST1N, ED[31:0], EA[18:0], ESEG[3:0], PD[15:0], and PADD[3:0] TMS0, TMS1, TDI0, TDI1, TRST0N, and TRST1N Parameter Low-Input Voltage High-Input Voltage Low-Input Voltage High-Input Voltage Low-Input Voltage High-Input Voltage Low-Input Leakage Current High-Input Leakage Current Low-Input Leakage Current High-Input Leakage Current Low-Input Leakage Current High-Input Leakage Current Low-Input Bus Hold Current High-Input Bus Hold Current Low-Input Bus Hold Toggle Current Symbol VIL VIH VIL VIH VIL VIH Condition Steady State Steady State Time Duration 1.0 ns VIL = 0 V, VDD2 = 3.6 V VIH = VDD2, VDD2 = 3.6 V VIL = 0 V, VDD2 = 3.6 V VIH = VDD2, VDD2 = 3.6 V VIL = 0 V, VDD2 = 3.6 V VIH = VDD2, VDD2 = 3.6 V VIL = 0.8 V, VDD2 = 3.0 V VIH = 2.0 V, VDD2 = 3.0 V VIL = 0 to VDD2, VDD2 = 3.6 V Min -0.3 0.7 x VDD2 -0.3 2.8 VSS - 1.0 -- -10 -- -100 -- -10 -- -75 75 -225 Max 0.3 x VDD2 VDD2 + 0.2 0.3 x VDD2 VDD2 + 0.2 -- VDD2 + 1.0 -- 10 -- 10 -- 10 -- -- 225 Unit V V V V V V A A A A A A A A A
IIL
IIH
IIL
IIH
ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0] with BHEDIS = 1; PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0] with BHPDIS = 1 ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0] with BHEDIS = 0; PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0] with BHPDIS = 0
IIL
IIH
IKIL
IKIH IKTOGGLE
This specification allows for input signal voltages outside the range of the steady-state values specified in this table and outside the range of the absolute maximum ratings (see Table 179 on page 265) for a short time duration (less than or equal to 1.0 ns). BHEDIS is ECON1[12] (Table 61 on page 112) and BHPDIS is ECON1[13]. If BHEDIS = 0 (default after reset), the bus hold circuits for ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0] are enabled. If BHEDIS = 1, these bus hold circuits are disabled. If BHPDIS = 0 (default after reset), the bus hold circuits for PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0] are enabled. If BHPDIS = 1, these bus hold circuits are disabled. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for details. The input bus hold current is the current supplied by an active bus hold circuit to the bus signal. To avoid unnecessary bus hold power consumption for active bus hold circuits, an external device must drive the bus signal pins to valid logic levels (less than 0.8 V or greater than 2.0 V). The input bus hold toggle current is the current that must be provided by an external device to change the state of a signal that is being held by an active bus hold circuit.
Note: Table 183 continues on page 268.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
267
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor 10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
Table 183. Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
Pins All outputs except ECKO Parameter Low-Output Voltage High-Output Voltage Output low (ECKO) Output high (ECKO) All 3-state outputs Low-Output Voltage High-Output Voltage Low-Output 3-State Current High-Output 3-State Current Input Capacitance Symbol VOL VOH
VOL VOH
Data Sheet May 2003
IOZL IOZH CI
Condition IOL = 4.0 mA IOL = 50 A IOH = -4.0 mA IOH = -50 A (IOL = 4.0 mA) (IOL = 100 A) (IOH = - 4.0 mA) (IOH = - 100 A) VIL = 0 V, VDD2 = 3.6 V VIH = VDD2, VDD2 = 3.6 V --
Min -- -- 2.4 VDD2 - 0.2 -- -- VDD2 -0.7 VDD2 - 0.2 -10 -- --
Max 0.4 0.2 -- -- 0.4 0.2 -- -- -- 10 5
Unit V V V V V V V V A A pF
All inputs
10.1 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels for Bidirectional Signals and Unused Inputs
Except for the SEMI and PIU data and address bus pins, the DSP16411 does not include any internal circuitry to maintain valid logic levels on input pins or on bidirectional pins that are not driven. For correct device operation and low static power dissipation, valid CMOS levels must be applied to these input and bidirectional pins. Failure to ensure full CMOS levels (VIL or VIH) on pins that are not driven may result in high static power consumption and possible device failure. Any unused input pin must be pulled up to the I/O pin supply (VDD2) or pulled down to VSS according to the functional requirements of the pin. The pin can be pulled up or down directly or through a 10 k resistor. Any unused bidirectional pin, statically configured as an input, should be pulled to VDD2 or VSS through a 10 k resistor. 10.1.1 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels on the SEMI Interface The SEMI data and address buses (ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0]) include internal bus hold circuits that are enabled during reset and are enabled by default after reset. These bus hold circuits can be disabled by setting the BHEDIS field (ECON1[12]--Table 61 on page 112). If the bus hold circuits are enabled, external pull-up/down resistors are not needed on ED[31:0], EA[18:0], or ESEG[3:0]. If the SEMI interface is unused in the system, the EYMODE pin can be connected to VDD2 to force the internal data bus transceivers on ED[31:0] to always be in the output mode. If the SEMI interface is used in the system, the EYMODE pin must be connected to VSS.
268
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
10.1 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels for Bidirectional Signals and Unused Inputs (continued)
10.1.1 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels on the SEMI Interface (continued) Table 184 summarizes the effect of the EYMODE pin and the BHEDIS field. Table 184. Effect of EYMODE Pin and BHEDIS Field
EYMODE BHEDIS Field Pin 0 0 Application/Description Typical application for which the SEMI is being used with external memory devices. The bus hold circuits are enabled, eliminating the need for external pull-up or pull-down resistors on ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0]. Depending on the application, pull-up resistors may be needed on other SEMI output pins. The SEMI is used with external memory devices. Because the bus hold circuits are disabled, external pull-up or pull-down resistors are needed for ED[31:0]. Depending on the application, pull-up or pulldown resistors may also be needed for EA[18:0], ESEG[3:0], and other SEMI output pins. The SEMI is not used in the system, i.e., there are no external devices attached to the SEMI pins. External pull-up or pull-down resistors are not needed on any SEMI pins.
0
1
1
X
BHEDIS is bit 12 of the ECON1 register (Table 61 on page 112). If an external device asserts the EREQN pin to gain control of the SEMI interface, the SEMI 3-states ED[31:0], EA[18:0], ESEG[3:0], and
other SEMI output pins (see Table 53 on page 103 for details). In this case, ED[31:0], EA[18:0], and ESEG[3:0] must be held at valid logic levels, either by the bus hold circuits or by external pull-up/down resistors. The other 3-stated output pins are active-low and must be externally pulled up to VDD2, their inactive state. Specifically, pull-up resistors are needed on ERAMN, EROMN, EION, and ERWN[1:0].
For pull-up or pull-down resistors, the value of the resistors should be selected to avoid exceeding the dc voltage and current characteristics of any device attached to the pin. The value of the pull-up resistors on ED[31:0] depends on the programmed bus width, 32-bit or 16-bit, as determined by the ESIZE pin. It is recommended that any 16-bit peripheral that is connected to the external memory interface of the DSP16411 use the upper 16 bits of the data bus (ED[31:16]). This is required if the external memory interface is configured as a 16-bit interface. For the following configurations, 10 k pull-up or pull-down resistors can be used on the external data bus:
s s s
32-bit SEMI with no 16-bit peripherals 32-bit SEMI with 16-bit peripherals connected to ED[31:16] 16-bit interface (ED[31:16] only)
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
269
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
10.1 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels for Bidirectional Signals and Unused Inputs (continued)
10.1.1 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels on the SEMI Interface (continued) If the DSP16411's external memory interface is configured for 32-bit operation with 16-bit peripherals on the lower half of the external data bus (ED[15:0]), the external data bus (ED[31:0]) should have 2 k pull-up or pull-down resistors to meet the rise or fall time requirements of the DSP164111. The different requirements for the size of the pull-up/pull-down resistors arise from the manner in which SEMI treats 16-bit accesses if the interface is configured for 32-bit operation. If configured as a 32-bit interface and a 16-bit read is performed to a device on the upper half of the data bus, the SEMI latches the value on the upper 16 bits internally onto the lower 16 bits. This ensures that the lower half of the data bus sees valid logic levels both in this case and also if the bus is operated as a 16-bit bus. However, if a 16-bit read operation is performed (on a 32-bit bus) to a 16-bit peripheral on the lower 16 bits, no data is latched onto the upper 16 bits, resulting in the upper half of the bus floating. In this case, the smaller pull-up resistors ensure the floating data bits transition to a valid logic level fast enough to avoid metastability problems when the inputs are latched by the SEMI. 10.1.2 Maintenance of Valid Logic Levels on the PIU Interface The PIU data and address buses (PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0]) include internal bus hold circuits that are enabled during reset and are enabled by default after reset. These bus hold circuits can be disabled by setting the BHPDIS field (ECON1[13]--Table 61 on page 112). If the bus hold circuits are enabled, external pull-up/down resistors are not needed on PD[15:0] and PADD[3:0]. If the bus hold circuits are disabled, external pull-up/down resistors are needed on PD[15:0] and are also needed on PADD[3:0] if the external host is not driving PADD[3:0] continuously. The value of the resistors should be selected to avoid exceeding the dc voltage and current characteristics of any device attached to the pin.
1. The 2 k resistor value assumes a bus loading of 30 pF and also ensures IOL is not violated.
270
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
10.2 Analog Power Supply Decoupling
The PLL has two sets of analog power and ground pins (VDD1A, VDD2A, VSS1A, and VSS2A) that are separate from the digital power and ground pins (VDD1, VDD2, and VSS). To minimize ground bounce and supply noise on the analog supplies, additional filtering should be provided for VDD1A and VDD2A as illustrated in Figure 62. For each analog supply, a three-terminal EMC (electromagnetic coupling) filter is connected from the digital supply to its corresponding analog supply. The EMC filter is TDK (R) part number ACF451832-332-T, or equivalent. In addition, two decoupling capacitors (10 F tantalum in parallel with a 0.01 F ceramic) are connected from each analog supply pin to its corresponding ground pin. The EMC filter and capacitors should be placed as close to the VDD1A (VDD2A) pin as possible. VSS1A and VSS2A are connected to the main ground plane, VSS. This recommendation is subject to change and may need to be modified for specific applications depending on the characteristics of the supply noise.
DSP16411 VSS1A VDD1A VDD1 VSS VDD2 VDD2A VSS2A
0.01 F EMC FILTER EMC FILTER
0.01 F
10 F
10 F
VDD1 SUPPLY
VDD2 SUPPLY
Figure 62. Analog Supply Decoupling
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
271
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
10.3 Power Dissipation
The total device power dissipation is comprised of two components:
s s
The contribution from the VDD1 and VDD1A supplies, referred to as internal power dissipation. The contribution from the VDD2 supply, referred to as I/O power dissipation.
The next two sections specify power dissipation for each component. 10.3.1 Internal Power Dissipation Internal power dissipation is highly dependent on operating voltage, core program activity, internal peripheral activity, and CLK frequency. Table 185 lists the DSP16411 typical internal power dissipation contribution for various conditions. The following conditions are assumed for all cases:
s s s
VDD1 and VDD1A are both 1.2 V. All memory accesses by the cores and the DMAU are to internal memory. SIU0 and SIU1 are operating at 30 MHz in loopback mode. An external device drives the SICK0--1 and SOCK0--1 input pins at 30 MHz, and SIU0--1 are programmed to select passive input clocks and internal loopback (the ICKA field (SCON10[2]--Table 113 on page 191) and OCKA field (SCON10[6]) are cleared and the SIOLB field (SCON10[8]) is set). The PLL is enabled and selected as the source of the internal clock, CLK. Table 185 specifies the internal power dissipation for a CLK frequency of 285 MHz.
s
Table 185. Typical Internal Power Dissipation at 1.2 V and 285 MHz
Type
Low-power Standby Typical
Worst-case
Condition Core Operation The AWAIT field (alf[15]) is set in both cores. Both cores repetitively execute a 20-tap FIR filter. Both cores execute worst-case instructions with worst-case data patterns.
DMAU Activity The DMAU is operating the MMT4 channel to continuously transfer data.
Internal Power Dissipation (W) at CLK = 285 MHz 0.27 0.82
The DMAU is operating all six channels (SWT0--3 and MMT4--5) to continuously transfer data.
1.49
To optimize execution speed, the cores each execute the inner loop of the filter from cache and perform a double-word data access every cycle from separate modules of TPRAM. This is an artificial condition that is unlikely to occur for an extended period of time in an actual application because the cores are not performing any I/O servicing. In an actual application, the cores perform I/O servicing that changes program flow and lowers the power dissipation.
The internal power dissipation for the low-power standby and typical operating modes described in Table 185 is representative of actual applications. The worst-case internal power dissipation occurs under an artificial condition that is unlikely to occur for an extended period of time in an actual application. This worst-case power should be used for the calculation of maximum ambient operating temperature (TAMAX) defined in Section 9.3.1 on page 266. This value should also be used for worst-case system power supply design for VDD1 and VDD1A.
272
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
10.3 Power Dissipation (continued)
10.3.2 I/O Power Dissipation I/O power dissipation is highly dependent on operating voltage, I/O loading, and I/O signal frequency. It can be estimated as: CL x VDD2 2 x f where CL is the load capacitance, VDD2 is the I/O supply voltage, and f is the frequency of output signal. Table 186 lists the estimated typical I/O power dissipation contribution for each output and I/O pin for a typical application under specific conditions. The following conditions are assumed for the data in the table:
s s s s s s s s s s s
VDD2 is 3.3 V. CLK is 285 MHz. The load capacitance for each output and I/O pin is 30 pF. Data assumes 32-bit synchronous SEMI operation for maximum bandwidth. SEMI accesses are 50% read, 50% write cycles. On SEMI write cycles, only 1/2 of the ED[31:0] pins change state in a given cycle. For CLK <= 240 MHz, ECKO = CLK/2. For CLK > 240 MHz, ECKO = CLK/4. Memory strobes alternate; EROM-ERAM-EIO. PSTRN is access rate to PIU, assumed to be 30 MHz. All I/O bits have been programmed as outputs.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
273
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
10.3 Power Dissipation (continued)
10.3.2 I/O Power Dissipation (continued) For applications with values of CL, VDD2, or f that differ from those assumed for Table 186, the formula on page 273 can be used to adjust the I/O power dissipation values in the table. Table 186. Typical I/O Power Dissipation at 3.3 V and 285 MHz
Internal Peripheral SEMI Pin(s) Type No. of Pins 32 2 1 18 4 1 1 1 1 14 16 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 Effective Signal Frequency (MHz) ECKO = CLK/4 ECKO/4 ECKO/4 ECKO/4 ECKO/2 ECKO/2 ECKO/6 ECKO/6 ECKO/6 ECKO/1 1 30 1 30 30 30 8 8 8 0.03 0.03 I/O Power Dissipation (mW) ECKO = CLK/4 93 11.6 5.8 209.5 46.6 3.9 3.9 3.9 23.3 4.57 78.41 0.33 9.8 9.8 9.8 5.23 5.23 5.23 0.02 0.02
BIO0--1 PIU
SIU0--1
ED[31:0] ERWN[1:0] EA0 EA[18:1] ESEG[3:0] EROMN ERAMN EION ECKO IO0--1BIT[6:0] PD[15:0] PINT PIBF POBE PRDY SICK0--1 SOCK0--1 SOD0--1 SIFS0--1 SOFS0--1
I/O O O O O O O O O O I/O O O O O O O O O O
274
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
10 Electrical Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
10.3 Power Dissipation (continued)
10.3.2 I/O Power Dissipation (continued) Power dissipation due to the input buffers is highly dependent upon the input voltage level. At full CMOS levels, essentially no dc current is drawn. However, for levels between the power supply rails, especially at or near the threshold of VDD2/2, high current can flow. See Section 10.1 on page 268 for more information. WARNING: The device needs to be clocked for at least seven CKI cycles during reset after powerup (see Section 11.4 on page 280 for details). Improper reset may cause unpredictable operation leading to device damage.
10.4 Power Supply Sequencing
The DSP16411 requires the internal and I/O supplies to be powered up and down in a set sequence. The I/O supply (VDD2 and VDD2A) should be powered up before the core supply (VDD1 and VDD1A). Alternatively, the supplies can be powered up simultaneoulsy, provided that the core supply never exceeds the I/O supply by more than 0.6 V. When powering down the device, the core supply should be powered down before the I/O supply. If this is not possible, the supplies may be powered down simultaneously, provided that the core supply never exceeds the I/O supply by more than 0.6 V.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
275
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Charateristics and Requirements
Timing characteristics refer to the behavior of the device under specified conditions. Timing requirements refer to conditions imposed on the user for proper operation of the device. All timing data is preliminary and subject to change, and is valid for the following conditions: TJ = -40 C to +115 C (See Section 9.3 on page 265.) VDD2 = 3.3 V 0.3 V, VSS = 0 V (See Section 9.3 on page 265.) Capacitance load on outputs (CL) = 30 pF, except for ECKO. Load on ECKO output is a 50 transmission line. Note: Circuit design and printed-circuit board (PCB) layout can have a significant impact on signal integrity and timing of high speed designs such as the DSP16411 SEMI. For maximum SEMI performance:
s s s s
Minimize loading on the buses and ECKO output clock. Keep PCB traces as short as possible. Add terminations where necessary to maintain signal integrity. Verify design performance through simulation. An IBIS model for design simulation is available through your Agere Systems field application engineer or sales representative.
Output characteristics can be derated as a function of load capacitance (CL). All outputs: 0.025 ns/pF dt/dCL 0.07 ns/pF for 10 CL 100 pF. For example, if the actual load capacitance on an output pin is 20 pF instead of 30 pF, the maximum derating for a rising edge is (20 - 30) pF x 0.07 ns/pF = 0.7 ns less than the specified rise time or delay that includes a rise time. The minimum derating for the same 20 pF load would be (20 - 30) pF x 0.025 ns/pF = 0.25 ns. Test conditions for inputs:
s s s
Rise and fall times of 1.5 ns or less. Timing reference levels for CKI, RSTN, TRST0N, TRST1N, TCK0, and TCK1 are VIH and VIL. Timing reference level for all other inputs is VM (see Table 188).
Test conditions for outputs (unless noted otherwise):
s s s s
Capacitance load on outputs except for ECKO (CL) = 30 pF. The load on ECKO is a 50 transmission line. Timing reference level for all other outputs is VM (see Table 188). 3-state delays measured to the high-impedance state of the output driver.
Unless otherwise noted, ECKO in the timing diagrams is the free-running CLK (ECON1[3:0] (Table 61 on page 112 ) = 0x1).
VM -
5-8215 (F)
Figure 63. Reference Voltage Level for Timing Characteristics and Requirements for Inputs and Outputs Table 187. Reference Voltage Level for Timing Characteristics and Requirements for Inputs and Outputs
Abbreviated Reference VM Parameter Reference Voltage Level for Timing Characteristics and Requirements for Inputs and Outputs Value 1.5 Unit V
276
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.1 Phase-Lock Loop
Table 188 specifies the timing requirements and characteristics of the phase-lock loop (PLL) clock synthesizer. See Section 4.18, beginning on page 201,, for general information on the PLL. The PLL must be programmed so that the timing requirements in Table 188 are met. Table 188. PLL Requirements
Symbol fSYN -- fVCO fPD tL fCKI fCKI Parameter PLL Output Frequency Range Input Jitter at CKI VCO Output Frequency Range (VDD1A = 1.2 V) Phase Detector Input Frequency Lock Time CKI Frequency with PLL Enabled CKI Frequency with PLL Disabled Min 125 -- 500 10 -- 10 0 Max 285 100 1000 66 0.5 66 66 Unit MHz ps-rms MHz MHz ms MHz MHz
The PLL is disabled (powered down) if the PLLEN field (pllcon[1]--Table 124 on page 202) is cleared, which is the default after reset. The PLL is enabled (powered up) if the PLLEN field (pllcon[1]) is set.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
277
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.2 Wake-Up Latency
Table 189 specifies the wake-up latency for the low-power standby mode. The wake-up latency is the delay between exiting low-power standby mode and resumption of normal execution. See Table 4.20 on page 205 for an explanation of low-power standby mode and wake-up latency. Table 189. Wake-Up Latency
Condition Wake-Up Latency PLL Deselected During PLL Enabled and Selected During Normal Execution Normal Execution 3T 3T + tL 3T 3T
Low-power Standby Mode (AWAIT (alf[15]) = 1)
PLL Disabled During Standby PLL Enabled During Standby
The PLL is deselected if the PLLSEL field (pllcon[0]) is cleared, which is the default after reset. The PLL is selected if the PLLSEL field (pllcon[0]) is set. The PLL is disabled (powered down) if the PLLEN field (pllcon[1]) is cleared, which is the default after reset. The PLL is enabled (powered up) if the PLLEN field (pllcon[1]) is set. T = CLK clock cycle (fCLK = fCKI if PLL deselected; fCLK = fCKI x ((M + 2)/((D + 2) x f(OD))) if PLL enabled and selected). tL = PLL lock-in time (see Table 188 on page 277).
278
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.3 DSP Clock Generation
t1 t3 VIH- CKI VIL- t5 ECKO VOH- VOL- t6
5-4009(F).i
t2
t4
Figure 64. I/O Clock Timing Diagram Table 190. Timing Requirements for Input Clock
Abbreviated Reference t1 t2 t3 Parameter Clock In Period (high to high) Clock In Low Time (low to high) Clock In High Time (high to low) Min 20 9 9 Max -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns
The device is fully static. t1 is tested at 100 ns input clock. The memory hold time is tested at 0.1 s. If the PLL is selected, the maximum CKI period is 100 ns.
Table 191. Timing Characteristics for Output Clock
Abbreviated Reference t4 t5 t6
T = internal clock period (CLK).
Parameter Clock Out High Delay (low to low) Clock Out Low Delay (high to high) Clock Out Period (high to high)
Min -- -- T
Max 10 10 --
Unit ns ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
279
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.4 Reset Circuit
The DSP16411 has three external reset pins: RSTN, TRST0N, TRST1N. At initial powerup or if any supply voltage (VDD1, VDD1A, or VDD2) falls below VDD MIN1, a device reset is required and RSTN, TRST0N, TRST1N must be asserted simultaneously to initialize the device. Note: The TRST0N and TRST1N pins must be asserted even if the JTAG controller is not used by the application.
VDD MIN VDD1, VDD1A RAMP t146 RSTN, TRST0N, TRST1N VIH VIL t10 OUTPUT VOH PINS VOL t11
t8 t153
CKI When both INT0 and RSTN are asserted, all output and bidirectional pins (except TDO, which 3-states by JTAG control) are put in a 3-state condition. With RSTN asserted and INT0 not asserted, EION, ERAMN, EROMN, EACKN, ERWN0, and ERWN1 outputs are driven high. EA[18:0], ESEG[3:0], and ECKO are driven low.
Figure 65. Powerup and Device Reset Timing Diagram Table 192. Timing Requirements for Powerup and Device Reset
Abbreviated Reference t8 t146 t153
T = internal clock period (CKI).
Parameter RSTN, TRST0N, and TRST1N Reset Pulse (low to high) VDD1, VDD1A MIN to RSTN, TRST0N, and TRST1N Low RSTN, TRST0N, and TRST1N Rise (low to high)
Min
7T 2T
--
Max -- -- 60
Unit ns ns ns
Table 193. Timing Characteristics for Device Reset
Abbreviated Reference t10 t11 Parameter RSTN Disable Time (low to 3-state) RSTN Enable Time (high to valid) Min -- -- Max 50 50 Unit ns ns
Note: The device needs to be clocked for at least seven CKI cycles during reset after powerup. Otherwise, high currents may flow.
1. See Table 181 on page 265.
280
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.5 Reset Synchronization
t24 CKI VIH- VIL-
t126 RSTN VIH- VIL-
EROMN (EXM = 1)
FETCH OF FIRST INSTRUCTION BEGINS
5-4011(F).i
Note: See Section 11.9, beginning on page 285, for timing characteristics of the EROMN pin.
Figure 66. Reset Synchronization Timing Table 194. Timing Requirements for Reset Synchronization Timing
Abbreviated Reference t126 t24
T = internal clock period (CKI).
Parameter Reset Setup (high to high) CKI to Enable Valid
Min 3 4T + 0.5
Max T/2 - 1 4T + 4
Unit ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
281
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.6 JTAG
t155 t13 TCK0, TCK1 VIH VIL t15 t16 TMS0, TMS1 VIH VIL t17 t18 VIH TDI0, TDI1 VIL t19 t20 TDO0, TD01 VOH VOL
5-4017(F).d
t12 t14
t156
Figure 67. JTAG I/O Timing Diagram Table 195. Timing Requirements for JTAG I/O
Abbreviated Reference t12 t13 t14 t155 t156 t15 t16 t17 t18 Parameter TCK Period (high to high) TCK High Time (high to low) TCK Low Time (low to high) TCK Rise Transition Time (low to high) TCK Fall Transition Time (high to low) TMS Setup Time (valid to high) TMS Hold Time (high to invalid) TDI Setup Time (valid to high) TDI Hold Time (high to invalid) Min 50 22.5 22.5 0.6 0.6 7.5 5 7.5 5 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns V/ns V/ns ns ns ns ns
Table 196. Timing Characteristics for JTAG I/O
Abbreviated Reference t19 t20 Parameter TDO Delay (low to valid) TDO Hold (low to invalid) Min -- 0 Max 15 -- Unit ns ns
282
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.7 Interrupt and Trap
ECKO t21 INT t22
ECKO is the free-running CLK, i.e., ECON1[3:0] = 0x1. INT is one of INT[3:0] or TRAP.
Figure 68. Interrupt and Trap Timing Diagram Table 197. Timing Requirements for Interrupt and Trap
Abbreviated Reference t21 t22
T = internal clock period (CLK).
Parameter Interrupt Setup (high to low) INT/TRAP Assertion Time (high to low)
Min 8 2T
Max -- --
Unit ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
283
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.8 Bit I/O
t144 ECKO t29 IOBIT (OUTPUT) t28 t27 IOBIT (INPUT) DATA INPUT VALID OUTPUT
Figure 69. Write Outputs Followed by Read Inputs (cbit = IMMEDIATE; a1 = sbit) Timing Characteristics Table 198. Timing Requirements for BIO Input Read
Abbreviated Reference t27 t28 Parameter IOBIT Input Setup Time (valid to low) IOBIT Input Hold Time (low to invalid) Min 10 0 Max -- -- Unit ns ns
Table 199. Timing Characteristics for BIO Output
Abbreviated Reference t29 t144 Parameter IOBIT Output Valid Time (high to valid) IOBIT Output Hold Time (high to invalid) Min -- 1 Max 9 -- Unit ns ns
284
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.9 System and External Memory Interface
In the following timing diagrams and associated tables:
s
The designation ENABLE refers to one of the following pins: EROMN, ERAMN, or EION. The designation ENABLES refers to all of the following pins: EROMN, ERAMN, and EION. The designation ERWN refers to: -- The ERWN0 pin if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The ERWN1 and ERWN0 pins if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high. -- The ERWN1, ERWN0, and EA0 pins if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high, and if the memory access is synchronous. The designation EA refers to: -- The external address pins EA[18:0] and the external segment address pins ESEG[3:0] if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The external address pins EA[18:1] and the external segment address pins ESEG[3:0] if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high. The designation ED refers to: -- The external data pins ED[31:16] if the external data bus is configured as 16 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic low. -- The external data pins ED[31:0] if the external data bus is configured as 32 bits, i.e., if the ESIZE pin is logic high. The designation ATIME refers to IATIME (ECON0[11:8]) for accesses to the EIO space, YATIME (ECON0[7:4]) for accesses to the ERAM space, or XATIME (ECON0[3:0]) for accesses to the EROM space.
s
s
s
s
ECKO t102 ENABLE t112 ERWN ECKO reflects CLK, i.e., ECON1[3:0] = 0x1. t113 t103
Figure 70. Enable and Write Strobe Transition Timing Table 200. Timing Characteristics for ERWN and Memory Enables
Abbreviated Reference t102 t103 t112 t113 Parameter ECKO to ENABLE Active (high to low) ECKO to ENABLE Inactive (high to high) ECKO to ERWN Active (high to low) ECKO to ERWN Inactive (high to high) Min 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Max 3 3 3 3 Unit ns ns ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
285
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.9 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
11.9.1 Asynchronous Interface
ECKO
t122 EREQN t122 t123 ED t129
t127 EA
ENABLES t128 EACKN t124 ECKO reflects CLK, i.e., ECON1[3:0] = 0x1. t125
Figure 71. Timing Diagram for EREQN and EACKN Table 201. Timing Requirements for EREQN
Abbreviated Reference t122 t129 Parameter EREQN Setup (low to high or high to high) EREQN Deassertion (high to low) Min 5 ATIMEMAX Max -- -- Unit ns ns
ATIMEMAX = the greatest of IATIME(ECON0[11:8]), YATIME (ECON0[7:4]), and XATIME (ECON0[3:0]).
Table 202. Timing Characteristics for EACKN and SEMI Bus Disable
Abbreviated Reference t123 t124 t125 t127 t128 Parameter Memory Bus Disable Delay (high to 3-state) EACKN Assertion Delay (high to low) EACKN Deassertion Delay (high to high) Memory Bus Enable Delay (high to active) EACKN Delay (high to low) Min -- 4T 4T 5 -- Max 6 -- 4T + 3 -- 3 Unit ns ns ns ns ns
If any ENABLE is asserted (low) when EREQN is asserted (low), then the delay occurs from the time that ENABLE is deasserted (high). (The SEMI does not acknowledge the request by asserting EACKN until it has completed any pending memory accesses.) T = internal clock period (CLK).
286
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.9 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
11.9.1 Asynchronous Interface (continued)
ATIME = 3
ECKO t90 ENABLE t92 ED t91 EA READ ADDRESS READ DATA t93
t95 ERWN
ECKO reflects CLK, i.e., ECON1[3:0] = 0x1.
Figure 72. Asynchronous Read Timing Diagram (RHOLD = 0 and RSETUP = 0) Table 203. Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Read Operations
Abbreviated Reference t92 t93 Parameter Read Data Setup (valid to ENABLE high) Read Data Hold (ENABLE high to invalid) Min 5 0 Max -- -- Unit ns ns
Table 204. Timing Characteristics for Asynchronous Memory Read Operations
Abbreviated Reference Parameter t90 ENABLE Width (low to high) t91 Address Delay (ENABLE low to valid) t95 ERWN Activation (ENABLE high to ERWN low)
T = internal clock period (CLK). RSETUP = ECON0[12]. RHOLD = ECON0[14]. WSETUP = ECON0[13].
Min (T x ATIME) - 3 -- T x (1 + RHOLD + WSETUP) - 3
Max -- 2 - (T x RSETUP) --
Unit ns ns --
Note: The external memory access time from the asserting of ENABLE can be calculated as t90 - (t91 + t92).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
287
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.9 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
11.9.1 Asynchronous Interface (continued)
ATIME = 2 ECKO t90 ENABLE t99 ERWN t96 t101 IDLE ATIME = 2
t98
EA
WRITE ADDRESS t100 t97 t114
READ ADDRESS
ED
WRITE DATA
READ DATA
ECKO reflects CLK, i.e., ECON1[3:0] = 0x1. The idle cycle is caused by the read following the write.
Figure 73. Asynchronous Write Timing Diagram (WHOLD = 0, WSETUP = 0) Table 205. Timing Characteristics for Asynchronous Memory Write Operations
Abbreviated Reference t90 t96 t97 t98 t99 t100 t101 t114

Parameter ENABLE Width (low to high) Enable Delay (ERWN high to ENABLE low) Write Data Setup (valid to ENABLE high) Write Data Deactivation (ERWN high to 3-state) Write Address Setup (valid to ENABLE low) Write Data Activation (ERWN low to low-Z) Address Hold Time (ENABLE high to invalid) Write Data Hold Time (ENABLE high to invalid)
Min (T x ATIME) - 3 T x (1 + WHOLD + RSETUP) - 3 (T x ATIME) - 3 -- T x (1 + WSETUP) - 3 T - 2 x (1 + WHOLD ) - 3 T T-3
Max -- -- -- 3 -- -- -- --
Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
T = internal clock period (CLK). WHOLD = ECON0[15]. RSETUP = ECON0[12]. WSETUP = ECON0[13].
288
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.9 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
11.9.2 Synchronous Interface
ECKO
t102 ENABLE
t103
ERWN
EA
READ ADDRESS t106
READ ADDRESS t107 t105
WRITE ADDRESS
ED
READ DATA t104
READ DATA
WRITE DATA t108
ECKO reflects CLK/2, i.e., ECON1[3:0] = 0x0.
Figure 74. Synchronous Read Timing Diagram (Read-Read-Write Sequence) Table 206. Timing Requirements for Synchronous Read Operations
Abbreviated Reference t104 t105 Parameter Read Data Setup (valid to high) Read Data Hold (high to invalid) Min 3.0 1 Max -- -- Unit ns ns
Table 207. Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Read Operations
Abbreviated Reference t102 t103 t106 t107 t108
T = internal clock period (CLK).
Parameter ECKO to ENABLE Active (high to low) ECKO to ENABLE Inactive (high to high) Address Delay (high to valid) Address Hold (high to invalid) Write Data Active (high to low-Z)
Min 0.5 0.5 -- 0.5 T - 3
Max 3 3 3.5 -- --
Unit ns ns ns ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
289
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.9 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
11.9.2 Synchronous Interface (continued)
ECKO t102 ENABLE t112 ERWN t107 EA t106 ED ADDRESS t109 DATA t111 t110 t113 t103
ECKO reflects CLK/2, i.e., ECON1[3:0] = 0x0.
Figure 75. Synchronous Write Timing Diagram Table 208. Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Write Operations
Abbreviated Reference t102 t103 t106 t107 t109 t110 t111 t112 t113 Parameter ECKO to ENABLE Active (high to low) ECKO to ENABLE Inactive (high to high) Address Delay (high to valid) Address Hold (high to invalid) Write Data Delay (high to valid) Write Data Hold (high to invalid) Write Data Deactivation Delay (high to 3-state) ECKO to ERWN Active (high to low) ECKO to ERWN Inactive (high to high) Min 0.5 0.5 -- 0.5 -- 0.5 -- 0.5 0.5 Max 3 3 3.5 -- 3.5 -- 2.5 3 3 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
290
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.9 System and External Memory Interface (continued)
11.9.3 ERDY Interface
ATIME SEMI SAMPLES ERDY PIN END OF ACCESS (UNSTALLED) N x T END OF ACCESS (STALLED)
ECKO 4T ENABLE t115 ERDY N x T 4T t121 t115
ATIME must be programmed as greater than or equal to five CLK cycles. Otherwise, the SEMI ignores the state of ERDY. T = internal clock period (CLK). N must be greater than or equal to one, i.e., ERDY must be held low for at least one CLK cycle after the SEMI samples ERDY. ECKO reflects CLK, i.e., ECON1[1:0] = 1.
Figure 76. ERDY Pin Timing Diagram As indicated in the drawing, the SEMI:
s
Samples the state of ERDY at 4T prior to the end of the access (unstalled). (The end of the access (unstalled) occurs at ATIME cycles after ENABLE goes low.) Ignores the state of ERDY before the ERDY sample point. Stalls the external memory access by N x T cycles, i.e., by the number of cycles that ERDY is held low following the ERDY sample point.
s s
Table 209. Timing Requirements for ERDY Pin
Abbreviated Reference Parameter t115 ERDY Setup to any ECKO (low to high or high to high) t121 ERDY Setup to ECKO at End of Unstalled Access (low to high) Min 5 4T + 5 Max -- -- Unit ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
291
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.10 PIU
t65 t60 PSTRN t61 PADD[3:0] t67 t62 t60
t66 PRWN t63 PD[15:0] t64
t68 PIBF t69 PRDY t74
PSTRN is the logical OR of the PCSN input pin with the exclusive NOR of the PIDS and PODS input pins, i.e., PSTRN = PCSN | (PIDS ^ PODS). It is assumed that the PRDYMD pin is logic low, configuring the PRDY pin as active-low.
Figure 77. Host Data Write to PDI Timing Diagram Table 210. Timing Requirements for PIU Data Write Operations
Abbreviated Reference t60 t61 t62 t63 t64 t65 t66 t67 t74 Parameter PSTRN Pulse Width (high to low or low to high) PADD Setup Time (valid to low) PADD Hold Time (low to invalid) PD Setup Time (valid to high) PD Hold Time (high to invalid) PSTRN Request Period (low to low) PRWN Setup Time (low to low) PRWN Hold Time (high to high) PSTRN Hold (low to high) Min max (2T, 15) 3 3 8 0 max (5T, 30) 0 0 1 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
T is the period of the internal clock (CLK). Time to the falling edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs last. Time to the rising edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs first.
Table 211. Timing Characteristics for PIU Data Write Operations
Abbreviated Reference t68 t69 Parameter PIBF Delay (high to high) PRDY Delay (low to valid) Min 1 1 Max 7 7 Unit ns ns
Delay from the rising edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs first.
292
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.10 PIU (continued)
t65 t60 PSTRN t61 PADD[3:0] t71 PD[15:0] t70 POBE t69 PRDY PSTRN is the logical OR of the PCSN input pin with the exclusive NOR of the PIDS and PODS input pins, i.e., PSTRN = PCSN | (PIDS ^ PODS). It is assumed that the PRDYMD pin is logic low, configuring the PRDY pin as active-low. t74 t72 t73 t62 t60
Figure 78. Host Data Read from PDO Timing Diagram Table 212. Timing Requirements for PIU Data Read Operations
Abbreviated Reference t60 t61 t62 t65 t74 Parameter PSTRN Pulse Width (high to low or low to high) PADD Setup Time (valid to low) PADD Hold Time (low to invalid) PSTRN Request Period (low to low) PSTRN Hold (low to high) Min max (2T, 15) 3 3 max (5T, 30) 1 Max -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns
T is the period of the internal clock (CLK). Time to the falling edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs last.
Table 213. Timing Characteristics for PIU Data Read Operations
Abbreviated Reference t69 t70 t71 t72 t73 Parameter PRDY Delay (low to valid) POBE, PRDY Delays (valid to low) PD Activation Delay (low to low-Z) POBE Delay (high to high) PD Deactivation Delay (high to 3-state) Min 1 0.5T - 1 1 1 1 Max 7 0.5T + 2.5 8 7 8 Unit ns ns ns ns ns
Delay from the falling edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs last. Delay from the rising edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs first.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
293
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.10 PIU (continued)
t65 t60 PSTRN t61 PADD[3:0] t67 t62 t60
t66 PRWN t63 PD[15:0] t64
t68 PIBF t69 PRDY t74
PSTRN is the logical OR of the PCSN input pin with the exclusive NOR of the PIDS and PODS input pins, i.e., PSTRN = PCSN | (PIDS ^ PODS). It is assumed that the PRDYMD pin is logic low, configuring the PRDY pin as active-low.
Figure 79. Host Register Write (PAH, PAL, PCON, or HSCRATCH) Timing Diagram Table 214. Timing Requirements for PIU Register Write Operations
Abbreviated Reference t60 t61 t62 t63 t64 t65 t66 t67 t74 Parameter PSTRN Pulse Width (high to low or low to high) PADD Setup Time (valid to low) PADD Hold Time (low to invalid) PD Setup Time (valid to high) PD Hold Time (high to invalid) PSTRN Request Period (low to low) PRWN Setup Time (low to low) PRWN Hold Time (high to high) PSTRN Hold (low to high) Min max (2T, 15) 3 3 8 0 max (5T, 30) 0 0 1 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
T is the period of the internal clock (CLK). Time to the falling edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs last. Time to the rising edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs first.
294
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.10 PIU (continued)
Table 215. Timing Characteristics for PIU Register Write Operations
Abbreviated Reference t68 t69 Parameter PIBF Delay (high to high) PRDY Delay (low to valid) Min 1 1 Max 7 7 Unit ns ns
Delay from the rising edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs first.
t65 t60 PSTRN t61 PADD[3:0] t75 t71 PD[15:0]
5-7853 (F)
t60
t62
t73
PSTRN is the logical OR of the PCSN input pin with the exclusive NOR of the PIDS and PODS input pins, i.e., PSTRN = PCSN | (PIDS ^ PODS).
Figure 80. Host Register Read (PAH, PAL, PCON, or DSCRATCH) Timing Diagram Table 216. Timing Requirements for PIU Register Read Operations
Abbreviated Reference t60 t61 t62 t65 Parameter PSTRN Pulse Width (high to low or low to high) PADD Setup Time (valid to low) PADD Hold Time (low to invalid) PSTRN Request Period (low to low) Min max (2T, 15) 3 3 max (5T, 30) Max -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns
T is the period of the internal clock (CLK). Time to the falling edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs last.
Table 217. Timing Characteristics for PIU Register Read Operations
Abbreviated Reference t71 t73 t75 Parameter PD Activation Delay (low to low-Z) PD Deactivation Delay (high to 3-state) PD Delay (low to valid) Min 1 1 -- Max 8 8 10 Unit ns ns ns
Delay from the falling edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs last. Delay from the rising edge of PIDS, PODS, or PCSN, whichever occurs first.
For host register read cycles, the time to valid data is defined by parameter t75. PRDY is guaranteed by design to always reflect the ready state (as determined by the PRDYMD pin) during these accesses.
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
295
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU
t30 t31 SICK t34 SIFS t34 SID t33 t35 B0 B1 t36
5-8033 (F)
t32
t33
B2
B0
Note:
It is assumed that the SIU is configured with ICKA(SCON10[2]) = 0 for passive mode input clock, ICKK(SCON10[3]) = 0 for no inversion of SICK, IFSA(SCON10[0]) = 0 for passive mode input frame sync, IFSK(SCON10[1]) = 0 for no inversion of SIFS, IMSB(SCON0[2]) = 0 for LSB-first input, and IFSDLY[1:0](SCON1[9:8]) = 00 for no input frame sync delay.
Figure 81. SIU Passive Frame and Channel Mode Input Timing Diagram
Table 218. Timing Requirements for SIU Passive Frame Mode Input
Abbreviated Reference t30 t31 t32 t33 t34 t35 t36 Parameter SICK Bit Clock Period (high to high) SICK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SICK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) SIFS Hold Time (high to low or high to high) SIFS Setup Time (low to high or high to high) SID Setup Time (valid to low) SID Hold Time (low to invalid) Min 19.2 9 9 9 9 0.5 8 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Table 219. Timing Requirements for SIU Passive Channel Mode Input
Abbreviated Reference t30 t31 t32 t33 t34 t35 t36 Parameter SICK Bit Clock Period (high to high) SICK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SICK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) SIFS Hold Time (high to low or high to high) SIFS Setup Time (low to high or high to high) SID Setup Time (valid to low) SID Hold Time (low to invalid) Min 19.2 9 9 9 9 0.5 8 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
296
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
t37 t38 SOCK t41 SOFS t42 SOD B0 B1 t43
5-8034 (F)
t39
t40
t41
t40 B0
Note:
It is assumed that the SIU is configured with OCKA(SCON10[6]) = 0 for passive mode output clock, OCKK(SCON10[7]) = 0 for no inversion of SOCK, OFSA(SCON10[4]) = 0 for passive mode output frame sync, OFSK(SCON10[5]) = 0 for no inversion of SOFS, OMSB(SCON0[10]) = 0 for LSB-first output, OFRAME(SCON2[7]) = 1 for frame mode output, and OFSDLY[1:0](SCON2[9:8]) = 00 for no output frame sync delay.
Figure 82. SIU Passive Frame Mode Output Timing Diagram
Table 220. Timing Requirements for SIU Passive Frame Mode Output
Abbreviated Reference t37 t38 t39 t40 t41 Parameter SOCK Bit Clock Period (high to high) SOCK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SOCK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) SOFS Hold Time (high to low or high to high) SOFS Setup Time (low to high or high to high) Min 19.2 9 9 9 9 Max -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns
Table 221. Timing Characteristics for SIU Passive Frame Mode Output
Abbreviated Reference t42 t43 Parameter SOD Delay (high to valid) SOD Hold (high to invalid) Min 1 0 Max 7.5 -- Unit ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
297
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
t37 t38 SOCK t41 SOFS t42 SOD B0 B1 t43
5-8032 (F)
t39
t40
t41 t44
t40 B0 B1
Note:
It is assumed that the SIU is configured with OCKA(SCON10[6]) = 0 for passive mode output clock, OCKK(SCON10[7]) = 0 for no inversion of SOCK, OFSA(SCON10[4]) = 0 for passive mode output frame sync, OFSK(SCON10[5]) = 0 for no inversion of SOFS, OMSB(SCON0[10]) = 0 for LSB-first output, OFRAME(SCON2[7]) = 0 for channel mode output, and OFSDLY[1:0](SCON2[9:8]) = 00 for no output frame sync delay.
Figure 83. SIU Passive Channel Mode Output Timing Diagram
Table 222. Timing Requirements for SIU Passive Channel Mode Output
Abbreviated Reference t37 t38 t39 t40 t41 Parameter SOCK Bit Clock Period (high to high) SOCK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SOCK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) SOFS Hold Time (high to low or high to high) SOFS Setup Time (low to high or high to high) Min 19.2 9 9 9 9 Max -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns
Table 223. Timing Characteristics for SIU Passive Channel Mode Output
Abbreviated Reference t42 t43 t44 Parameter SOD Delay (high to valid) SOD Hold (high to invalid) SOD Deactivation Delay (high to 3-state) Min 1 0 -- Max 7.5 -- 12 Unit ns ns ns
298
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
t76 t77 SCK t78
Figure 84. SCK External Clock Source Input Timing Diagram Table 224. Timing Requirements for SCK External Clock Source
Abbreviated Reference t76 t77 t78 Parameter SCK Bit Clock Period (high to high) SCK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SCK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) Min 25 10 10 Max -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
299
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
t45 t46 SICK t47
SIFS t48 SID B0 t49 B1 t50
5-8029 (F)
B2
B0
Note:
It is assumed that the SIU is configured with ICKA(SCON10[2]) = 1 for active mode input clock, ICKK(SCON10[3]) = 0 for no inversion of SICK, IFSA(SCON10[0]) = 1 for active mode input frame sync, IFSK(SCON10[1]) = 0 for no inversion of SIFS, IMSB(SCON0[2]) = 0 for LSB-first input, and IFSDLY[1:0](SCON1[9:8]) = 00 for no input frame sync delay.
Figure 85. SIU Active Frame and Channel Mode Input Timing Diagram
Table 225. Timing Requirements for SIU Active Frame Mode Input
Abbreviated Reference t45 t49 t50 Parameter SICK Bit Clock Period (high to high) SID Setup Time (valid to low) SID Hold Time (low to invalid) Min 19.2 3 8 Max -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns
The active clock source is programmed as either the internal clock CLK or the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]). The period of SICK is dependent on the period of the active clock source and the programming of the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]). The application must ensure that the period of SICK is at least 19.2 ns.
Table 226. Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Frame Mode Input
Abbreviated Reference t46 t47 t48 Parameter SICK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SICK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) SIFS Delay (high to high) Min TAGCKH - 2 TAGCKL - 2 TCKAG - 2 Max TAGCKH + 2 TAGCKL + 2 TCKAG + 2 Unit ns ns ns
TAGCKH and TAGCKL are dependent on the programming of the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]) and the period of the active clock source. TCKAG is the period of the active clock source. The active clock source is programmed as either the internal clock CLK or the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]).
300
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
Table 227. Timing Requirements for SIU Active Channel Mode Input
Abbreviated Reference t45 t49 t50 Parameter SICK Bit Clock Period (high to high) SID Setup Time (valid to low) SID Hold Time (low to invalid) Min 19.2 3 8 Max -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns
The active clock source is programmed as either the internal clock CLK or the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]). The period of SICK is dependent on the period of the active clock source and the programming of the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]). The application must ensure that the period of SICK is at least 19.2 ns.
Table 228. Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Channel Mode Input
Abbreviated Reference t46 t47 t48 Parameter SICK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SICK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) SIFS Delay (high to high) Min TAGCKH - 2 TAGCKL - 2 TCKAG - 2 Max TAGCKH + 2 TAGCKL + 2 TCKAG + 2 Unit ns ns ns
TAGCKH and TAGCKL are dependent on the programming of the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]) and the period of the active clock source. TCKAG is the period of the active clock source. The active clock source is programmed as either the internal clock CLK or the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
301
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
t51 t52 SOCK t53
SOFS t55 SOD B0 B1 t56
5-8030 (F)
t54 B2 B0
Note:
It is assumed that the SIU is configured with OCKA(SCON10[6]) = 1 for active mode output clock, OCKK(SCON10[7]) = 0 for no inversion of SOCK, OFSA(SCON10[4]) = 1 for active mode output frame sync, OFSK(SCON10[5]) = 0 for no inversion of SOFS, OMSB(SCON0[10]) = 0 for LSB-first output, OFRAME(SCON2[7]) = 1 for frame mode output, and OFSDLY[1:0](SCON2[9:8]) = 00 for no output frame sync delay.
Figure 86. SIU Active Frame Mode Output Timing Diagram
Table 229. Timing Requirements for SIU Active Frame Mode Output
Abbreviated Reference t51 Parameter SOCK Bit Clock Period (high to high) Min 19.2 Max -- Unit ns
The active clock source is programmed as either the internal clock CLK or the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]). The period of SOCK is dependent on the period of the active clock source and the programming of the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]). The application must ensure that the period of SOCK is at least 19.2 ns.
Table 230. Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Frame Mode Output
Abbreviated Reference t52 t53 t54 t55 t56 Parameter SOCK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SOCK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) SOFS Delay (high to high) SOD Data Delay (high to valid) SOD Data Hold (high to invalid) Min TAGCKH - 2 TAGCKL - 2 TCKAG - 2 0 -3 Max TAGCKH + 2 TAGCKL + 2 TCKAG + 2 3 -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns
TAGCKH and TAGCKL are dependent on the programming of the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]) and the period of the active clock source. TCKAG is the period of the active clock source. The active clock source is programmed as either the internal clock CLK or the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]).
302
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
t51 t52 SOCK t53
SOFS t55 SOD B0 t56 B1 t57
5-8028 (F)
t54 B0
Note:
It is assumed that the SIU is configured with OCKA(SCON10[6]) = 1 for active mode output clock, OCKK(SCON10[7]) = 0 for no inversion of SOCK, OFSA(SCON10[4]) = 1 for active mode output frame sync, OFSK(SCON10[5]) = 0 for no inversion of SOFS, OMSB(SCON0[10]) = 0 for LSB-first output, OFRAME(SCON2[7]) = 1 for frame mode output, and OFSDLY[1:0](SCON2[9:8]) = 00 for no output frame sync delay.
Figure 87. SIU Active Channel Mode Output Timing Diagram
Table 231. Timing Requirements for SIU Active Channel Mode Output
Abbreviated Reference t51 Parameter SOCK Bit Clock Period (high to high) Min 19.2 Max -- Unit ns
The active clock source is programmed as either the internal clock CLK or the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]). The period of SOCK is dependent on the period of the active clock source and the programming of the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]). The application must ensure that the period of SOCK is at least 19.2 ns.
Table 232. Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Channel Mode Output
Abbreviated Reference t52 t53 t54 t55 t56 t57 Parameter SOCK Bit Clock High Time (high to low) SOCK Bit Clock Low Time (low to high) SOFS Delay (high to high) SOD Data Delay (high to valid) SOD Data Hold (high to invalid) SOD Deactivation Delay (high to 3-state) Min TAGCKH - 2 TAGCKL - 2 TCKAG - 2 0 -3 -- Max TAGCKH + 2 TAGCKL + 2 TCKAG + 2 3 -- 5 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns
TAGCKH and TAGCKL are dependent on the programming of the AGCKLIM[7:0] field (SCON11[7:0]) and the period of the active clock source. TCKAG is the period of the active clock source. The active clock source is programmed as either the internal clock CLK or the SCK pin, depending on the AGEXT field (SCON12[12]).
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
303
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
t80 t81 SCK t84 SIFS t83 BN - 1 t85 ICK B0 t86 B2 B4 t83 t82
SID
ICK is the internal active generated bit clock shown for reference purposes only. Note: It is assumed that the SIU is configured with ICKA (SCON10[2]) = 1 for active mode input clock, I2XDLY (SCON1[11]) = 1 for extension of active input bit clock, IFSA (SCON10[0]) = 1 and AGSYNC (SCON12[14]) = 1 to configure SIFS as an input and to synchronize the active bit clocks and active frame syncs to SIFS, IFSK (SCON10[1]) = 1 for inversion of SIFS, IMSB (SCON0[2]) = 0 for LSB-first input, IFSDLY[1:0] (SCON1[9:8]) = 00 for no input frame sync delay, AGEXT (SCON12[12]) = 1 for SCK pin as active clock source, SCKK (SCON12[13]) = 1 for inversion of SCK, and AGCKLIM[7:0] (SCON11[7:0]) = 1 for an active clock divide ratio of 2.
Figure 88. ST-Bus 2x Input Timing Diagram Table 233. ST-Bus 2x Input Timing Requirements
Abbreviated Reference t80 t81 t82 t83 t84 t85 t86 Parameter SCK Clock Period (low to low) SCK Clock Low Time (low to high) SCK Clock High Time (high to low) SIFS Hold (low to low or low to high) SIFS Setup (low to low) SID Setup (valid to high) SID Hold (high to valid) Min 60 30 30 30 20 5 20 Max -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
304
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
11 Timing Characteristics and Requirements (continued)
11.11 SIU (continued)
t80 t81 SCK t84 SIFS t83 SOD BN - 1 t89 B0 t58 OCK B2 B4 t83 t82
OCK is the internal active generated bit clock shown for reference purposes only. Note: It is assumed that the SIU is configured with OCKA (SCON10[6]) = 1 for active mode output clock, IFSA(SCON10[0]) = 1 and AGSYNC (SCON12[14]) = 1 to configure SIFS as an input and to synchronize the active bit clocks and active frame syncs to SIFS, OFSA(SCON10[4]) = 1 for active output frame sync, IFSK(SCON10[1]) = 1 for inversion of SIFS, OMSB(SCON0[10]) = 0 for LSB-first input, OFSDLY[1:0](SCON2[9:8]) = 00 for no output frame sync delay, AGEXT (SCON12[12]) = 1 for SCK pin as active clock source, SCKK (SCON12[13]) = 1 for inversion of SCK, and AGCKLIM[7:0] (SCON11[7:0]) = 1 for an active clock divide ratio of 2.
Figure 89. ST-Bus 2x Output Timing Diagram Table 234. ST-Bus 2x Output Timing Requirements
Abbreviated Reference t80 t81 t82 t83 t84 Parameter SCK Clock Period (low to low) SCK Clock Low Time (low to high) SCK Clock High Time (high to low) SIFS Hold (low to low or low to high) SIFS Setup (low to low) Min 60 30 30 30 20 Max -- -- -- -- -- Unit ns ns ns ns ns
Table 235. ST-Bus 2x Output Timing Characteristics
Abbreviated Reference t89 t58 Parameter SOD Delay (low to valid) SOD Hold (high to invalid) Min 1 0 Max 25 -- Unit ns ns
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
305
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
12 Appendix--Naming Inconsistencies
Table 236 lists the inconsistencies for pin names between this document and the LUxWORKS debugger. Table 236. Pin Name Inconsistencies
Data Sheet PRDY PRDYMD ERDY Debugger PREADY PREADYMD EREADY
Table 237 lists the inconsistencies for register names between this document and the LUxWORKS debugger. Table 237. Register Name Inconsistencies
Data Sheet ECON0 ECON1 Debugger ECN0 ECN1
306
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
13 Outline Diagram--208-Ball PBGA
All dimensions are in millimeters.
17.00 0.20 A1 BALL IDENTIFIER ZONE + 0.70 15.00 - 0.05
+ 0.70 15.00 - 0.05 17.00 0.20
0.61 0.06
0.80 0.05
1.91 0.21 1.56 SEATING PLANE 0.20
0.50 0.10
SOLDER BALL 15 SPACES @ 1.00 = 15.00 1.00
T R P N M L K J H G F E D C B A
+ 0.07 0.63 - 0.13
15 SPACES @ 1.00 = 15.00
A1 BALL CORNER
1
2
34
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5-7809 (F).b
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
307
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
clock bit 154, 159, 161 phase-lock loop (see clock, PLL) PLL 200 clock synthesizer (see clock, PLL) code boot 43 HDS 43 control block 19 control registers (see registers, control) counters 20
14 Index
Symbols
- 218 -- 218 & 218 ( ) 218 * 218 **2 218 + 218 ++ 218 : 218 << 218 <<< 218 >> 218 >>> 218 [ ] 14 ^ 218 _ (underscore) 218 { } 218 | (pipe) 218 ~ 218 218 218 218
D
DAU 19, 20 DMAU channel bypass 86, 135 DMAU channels MMT 64, 86, 90 memory-mapped registers 91 SWT 64, 83, 84, 87, 154 memory-mapped registers 88
E
exponent computation 225
A
absolute value (see function, abs) ACS 19 ALU/ACS 223 arithmetic unit control registers (see register, auc0; register, auc1) auc0 (see register, auc0) auc1 (see register, auc1)
F
flag ALLF 50, 52, 226 ALLT 50, 52, 226 LOCK 226 MGIBE 39, 40, 226 MGOBF 39, 40, 226 SOMEF 50, 52, 226 SOMET 50, 52, 226 flags conditional instruction 226 PIU PIBF 136 POBE 136 function cmp0 20, 225 cmp1 20, 225 cmp2 20, 225 min 225 functions side effects 20
B
BMU 223 boot program 23 bus XAB 42 XDB 42 YAB 42 YDB 42 ZEAB 42 ZEDB 42 ZIAB 42 ZIDB 42
G
guard bits 229
C
cache 210 instruction 19 circular buffers 20 308
H
h (see register, h) Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions Agere Systems Inc.
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor K
k (see register, k)
14 Index (continued)
holding register (see register, c2)
I
i (see register, i) instruction di 25, 30, 31 ei 25, 30, 31 icall IM6 25, 34 ireturn 25, 30, 32 treturn 25, 32 instruction cache 19 instruction set 210 instructions ALU group 210 ALU/ACS 223 BMU 223 BMU group 210 cache group 210 conditional 226 control group 210 data move and pointer arithmetic group 210 MAC 223 MAC group 210 not cachable 211 notation conventions 14, 218 F titles 218 lower-case 218 UPPER-CASE 218 special function group 210 interrupt DMINT4 41 DMINT5 41 MGIBF 39, 40 PHINT 30, 153 PINT 30 priority assigning 31 SIGINT 39 SIINT 160 software 34 SOINT 161 interrupt multiplexer (IMUX) 28 interrupts 25 hardware 27, 28 PIU 153 ireturn (see instruction, ireturn)
M
macro SLEEP_ALF () 205 memory addressing register-indirect 20 CACHE1 43 EIO 43, 111 ERAM 43, 111 EROM 43, 111 IROM0 43, 208 IROM1 43, 208 shared local (SLM) 43, 47, 49 TPRAM0 43, 48 TPRAM1 43, 48 X- space 42 Y- space 42 Z- space 42 memory-to-memory channels (see DMAU channels, MMT) MGU0 38 MGU1 38 modes of operation channel 154 frame 154
N
notation (see instructions notation conventions)
P
PC (see register, PC) pi (see register, pi) pin CKI 257 EA0 106, 258 EACKN 103, 260 ECKO 205, 257 EION 104, 124, 259 ERAMN 104, 124, 259 ERDY 103, 120, 259 EREQN 103, 259 EROMN 106, 107, 124, 259 ERTYPE 102, 116, 124, 260 ESIZE 102, 106, 109, 124, 260 EXM 23, 102, 208, 260 PCSN 139, 140, 143, 145, 263 PIBF 139, 142, 148, 262 PIDS 139, 140, 143, 145, 263 PINT 30, 139, 142, 153, 262 POBE 139, 142, 143, 148, 262 309
J
j (see register, j)
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
SICK[1:0] 156, 159, 161 SID[1:0] 156, 159, 168 SIFS[1:0] 156, 159, 162 SIU 156 SOCK[1:0] 156, 160, 161 SOD[1:0] 156, 160, 168 SOFS[1:0] 156, 160, 162 postincrement (see registers, postincrement) powerup reset 249 pr (see register, pr) psw0 (see register, psw0) psw1 (see register, psw1) pt0 (see registers, pointer, coefficient (X space, (pt0--pt1))) pt1 (see registers, pointer, coefficient (X space, (pt0--pt1))) ptrap (see register, ptrap)
14 Index (continued)
P (continued)
pin (continued) PODS 139, 140, 143, 145, 262 PRDY 139, 142, 143, 148, 262 PRDYMD 139, 142, 262 PRWN 139, 140, 145, 263 RSTN 23, 208, 257 SCK0 261 SCK1 261 SICK0 260 SICK1 261 SID0 260 SID1 261 SIFS0 260 SIFS1 261 SOCK 160 SOCK0 260 SOCK1 261 SOD0 260 SOD1 261 SOFS0 260 SOFS1 261 TCK0 263 TCK1 263, 264 TDI0 263 TDI1 263 TDO0 263 TDO1 263 TMS0 263 TMS1 263 TRAP 25, 34, 39, 257 TRST0N 23, 263 TRST1N 23, 264 pins 267, 268 EA[18:0] 106, 124, 138 EA[18:1] 258 ED[31:0] 106, 124, 257 ERWN[1:0] 106, 107, 124, 258 ESEG[3:0] 43, 106, 114, 124, 258 INT[3:0] 34, 257 IO0BIT[6:0] 50, 257 IO1BIT[6:0] 50, 257 PADD[3:0] 139, 141, 143, 145, 262 PD[15:0] 139, 141, 143, 145, 262 PIU address and data 141 enable and strobe 140 external interface 139 flags, interrupt, and ready 142 SCK[1:0] 156 SEMI 101 310
R
rb0 (see registers, circular buffer) rb1 (see registers, circular buffer) re0 (see registers, circular buffer) re1 (see registers, circular buffer) register alf 51, 235 AWAIT field 205 auc0 20, 236 auc1 20, 237 c0 20 c1 20 c2 20 cbit 51, 52, 238 DATA[6:0]/PAT[6:0] field 50 MODE[6:0]/MASK[6:0] field 50 cloop 239 csave 239 cstate 239 CTL0--3 74, 83, 84 SIGCON[2:0] field 87 CTL4--5 76, 86 SIGCON[2:0] field 90 DADD0--3 83, 84 DADD0--5 77 DADD4--5 86 DBAS0--3 81, 83, 84 DCNT0--3 79, 83, 85 DCNT4--5 79, 86 DMAU memory-mapped status 69 DMCON0 71, 83, 85, 86 DRUN[1:0] field 87, 88 HPRIM field 93 MINT field 93 SRUN[1:0] field 87 Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
LIM4--5 80, 86 mgi 38, 39, 242 mgo 38, 39, 40, 242 OCIX0--3 198, 198 PA 138 ADD[19:0] field 138 CMP[2:0] field 138 ESEG[3:0] field 138 PAH 138, 145 PAL 138, 145 PC 20, 227 PCON 136, 145 HINT field 30, 153, 209 PINT field 30, 153 PDI 137, 143, 145 PDO 137, 143 pi 20, 25 pid 209, 242 pllcon 200, 201, 202, 243 PLLEN field 203, 205 PLLSEL field 200, 205 plldly 200, 201, 202, 243 pllfrq 200, 201, 202, 243 pllfrq1 200, 201, 202, 243 pr 20 psw0 20, 244 psw1 20, 35, 245 IEN field 30 ptrap 20, 25 rb0 (see registers, circular buffer) rb1 (see registers, circular buffer) re0 (see registers, circular buffer) re1 (see registers, circular buffer) RI0--3 82, 85 SADD0--3 83, 84 SADD4--5 77, 86 SBAS0--3 81, 83, 84 sbit 50, 52, 246 DIREC[6:0] field 50 VALUE[6:0] field 50 SCNT0--3 78, 83, 85 SCNT4--5 78, 86 SCON0 185 IFORMAT[1:0] field 160 IMSB field 159 ISIZE[1:0] field 159 OFORMAT[1:0] field 161 OMSB field 161 OSIZE field 161 SCON1 186 I2XDLY field 162 IFLIM[6:0] field 168 IFSDLY[1:0] field 159, 162 SCON10 191 ICKA field 161 311
14 Index (continued)
R (continued)
register (continued) TRIGGER[5:4] field 94 TRIGGER4 field 90 TRIGGER5 field 90 XSIZE4 field 90 XSIZE5 field 90 DMCON1 72 PIUDIS field 86 RESET[5:0] field 94 DSCRATCH 137, 145 DSTAT 69, 92 DTAT ERR[5:0] field 94 ECON0 111 IATIME field 116, 120, 128 RHOLD field 116, 128 RSETUP field 116, 128 SLKA fields 128 WHOLD field 116, 128 WSETUP field 116, 128 XATIME field 116, 120, 128 YATIME field 116, 120, 128 ECON1 112 ECKO[1:0] field 105 ECKOB[1:0] and ECKOA[1:0] fields 126, 204, 205 EREADY field 120 ITYPE field 124, 126 WEROM field 43 YTYPE field 116, 124, 126 EXSEG0 114 EXSEG1 114 EYSEG0 115 EYSEG1 115 FSTAT 197 h 20 holding (see register, c2) HSCRATCH 137 i 20 ICIX0--3 198 ID 57, 241 imux 25, 28, 240 XIOC[1:0] field 41 inc0 31, 41, 241 inc1 31, 40, 41, 241 ins 32, 37, 242 PHINT interrupt condition field 208 interrupt return (see register, pi) j 20 k 20 LIM0--3 80, 83, 85 Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
Data Sheet May 2003
vbase 20, 32 vector base offset (see register, vbase) Viterbi support word (see register, vsw) vsw 20, 248 registers arithmetic unit control (See also register, auc0; register, auc1) 20 auxiliary 20 circular buffer 20 control 20 counter (See register, c0; register, c1; register, c2) data 227 DMAU memory-mapped 67 address 77 base address 81 channel control 73 destination counter 79 limit 80 master control 71 reindex 82 source counter 78 stride 82 PIU memory-mapped 135 address 138 Data 137 scratch 137 pointer 227 coefficient (X space, (pt0--pt1)) 20 data (Y space, (r0--r7)) 20, 210 postincrement 20 (see also register, h; register, i; register, j; register, k) processor status word (see register, psw0; register, psw1) SEMI memory-mapped control 110 external segment 114 SIU memory-mapped 184 status 227 reset device 23 JTAG controller 24 pin 23 RSTN (see reset, device and reset, pin)
14 Index (continued)
R (continued)
register (continued) ICKK field 159, 161 IFSA field 162 IFSK field 159, 162 IINTSEL[1:0] field 160 OCKA field 161 OCKK field 160, 161 OFSA field 162 OFSK field 160, 162 OINTSEL[1:0] field 161 SIOLB field 168 SCON11 194 AGCKLIM[7:0] field 162 SCON12 195 AGEXT field 162 AGFSLIM[10:0] field 162 AGRESET field 162 AGSYNC field 162 SCON2 187 OFLIM[6:0] field 168 OFSDLY[1:0] field 160, 162 SCON3 188 ICKE field 162 IFSE field 162 OCKE field 162 OFSE field 162 SCON4 189 SCON5 189 SCON6 190 SCON7 190 SCON8 190 SCON9 190 SIDR 87, 160, 196 signal 39, 39, 246 SODR 87, 161, 196 sp 20 STAT 197 IOFLOW field 160 OUFLOW field 161 SIBV flag 159 SIDV flag 160 SODV flag 161 STR0--3 82, 85 subroutine return (see register, pr) timer0, 1 53, 56, 205, 248 timer0, 1c 53, 55, 247 COUNT field 53 PRESCALE[3:0] field 53 PWR_DWN field 53 RELOAD field 53 trap return (see register, ptrap) 312
S
shuffling of accumulators (see operations, shuffling of accumulators) signal PTRAP 39 single-cycle squaring (see squaring, single-cycle) Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
Data Sheet May 2003
DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor
14 Index (continued)
single-word transfer channels (see DMAU channels, SWT) SLM 100 squaring single-cycle 20 status registers (see registers, status) sync frame 154, 161
T
TDM 154 TIMER0_0 53 TIMER0_1 53 TIMER1_0 53 TIMER1_1 53 traceback encoder 20 traps 25 treturn (see instruction, treturn) TRST0N (see reset, device and reset, JTAG controller) TRST1N (see reset, device and reset, JTAG controller)
V
vbase (see register, vbase) vectors accumulator 229 Viterbi decoding 19, 20 side effects 19, 20 support word (see register, vsw) vsw (see register, vsw)
X
XAAU 19, 20, 42 XAAU contention 222
Y
YAAU 20, 42
Agere Systems Inc.
Agere Systems--Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instructions
313
IEEE is a registered trademark of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. ZBT and Zero Bus Turnaround are trademarks of Integrated Device Technology, Inc., and the architecture is supported by Micron Technology, Inc., and Motorola, Inc. 3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola, Inc. MITEL is a registered trademark of Mitel Corporation. TDK is a registered trademark of TDK Electronics Co., Ltd. Corporation.
For additional information, contact your Agere Systems Account Manager or the following: INTERNET: http://www.agere.com E-MAIL: docmaster@agere.com N. AMERICA: Agere Systems Inc., Lehigh Valley Central Campus, Room 10A-301C, 1110 American Parkway NE, Allentown, PA 18109-9138 1-800-372-2447, FAX 610-712-4106 (In CANADA: 1-800-553-2448, FAX 610-712-4106) ASIA: Agere Systems Hong Kong Ltd., Suites 3201 & 3210-12, 32/F, Tower 2, The Gateway, Harbour City, Kowloon Tel. (852) 3129-2000, FAX (852) 3129-2020 CHINA: (86) 21-5047-1212 (Shanghai), (86) 755-25881122 (Shenzhen) JAPAN: (81) 3-5421-1600 (Tokyo), KOREA: (82) 2-767-1850 (Seoul), SINGAPORE: (65) 6778-8833, TAIWAN: (886) 2-2725-5858 (Taipei) EUROPE: Tel. (44) 1344 296 400
Agere Systems Inc. reserves the right to make changes to the product(s) or information contained herein without notice. No liability is assumed as a result of their use or application. Agere, Agere Systems, and the Agere logo are trademarks of Agere Systems Inc. Atlanta, TargetView, and LUxWORKS are trademarks of Agere Systems Inc.
Copyright (c) 2003 Agere Systems Inc. All Rights Reserved
May 2003 DS02-300WINF-1 (Replaces DS02-300WINF)
Listed below are the DSP16411 Digital Signal Processor Data Sheet changes between the April 2002 release and the February 2003 release. Changes Between the April 2002 and February 2003 Release DSP16411 The maximum operating speed increased from 240 MHz to 285 MHz. The core voltage changed from 1.0 V to 1.2 V. The power sequencing requirements changed in Section 10.4, Power Supply Sequencing. The value for the t61 min specification was changed from 5 ns to 3 ns in the following tables: Table 210, Timing Requirements for PIU Data Write Operations Table 212, Timing Requirements for PIU Data Read Operations Table 214, Timing Requirements for PIU Register Write Operations Table 216, Timing Requirements for PIU Register Read Operations The value for the t62 min specification was changed from 5 ns to 3 ns in the following tables: Table 210, Timing Requirements for PIU Data Write Operations Table 212, Timing Requirements for PIU Data Read Operations Table 214, Timing Requirements for PIU Register Write Operations Table 216, Timing Requirements for PIU Register Read Operations The value for the t63 min specification was changed from 6 ns to 8 ns in the following tables: Table 210, Timing Requirements for PIU Data Write Operations Table 214, Timing Requirements for PIU Register Write Operations The value for the t64 min specification was changed from 5 ns to 0 ns in the following tables: Table 210, Timing Requirements for PIU Data Write Operations Table 214, Timing Requirements for PIU Register Write Operations The value for the t68 max specification was changed from 12 ns to 7 ns in the following tables: Table 211, Timing Characteristics for PIU Data Write Operations Table 215, Timing Characteristics for PIU Register Write Operations The value for the t72 max specification was changed from 12 ns to 7 ns in Table 213, Timing Characteristics for PIU Data Read Operations. The value for the t73 max specification was changed from 12 ns to 8 ns in the following tables: Table 213, Timing Characteristics for PIU Data Read Operations Table 217, Timing Characteristics for PIU Register Read Operations The value for the t75 max specification was changed from 16 ns to 10 ns in Table 217, Timing Characteristics for PIU Register Read Operations. The value for the t49 min specification was changed from 5 ns to 3 ns in the following tables: Table 225, Timing Requirements for SIU Active Frame Mode Input Table 227, Timing Requirements for SIU Active Channel Mode Input The value for the t55 max specification was changed from 5 ns to 3 ns in the following tables: Table 230, Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Frame Mode Output Table 232, Timing Characteristics for SIU Active Channel Mode Output The value for the t102 min specification was changed from 0.8 ns to 0.5 ns in the following tables: Table 200, Timing Characteristics for ERWN and Memory Enables Table 207, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Read Operations Table 208, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Write Operations The value for the t103 min specification was changed from 0.8 ns to 0.5 ns in the following tables: Table 200, Timing Characteristics for ERWN and Memory Enables Table 207, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Read Operations Table 208, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Write Operations The value for the t104 min specification was changed from 3.5 ns to 3.0 ns in Table 206, Timing Requirements for Synchronous Read Operations. The value for the t107 min specification was changed from 0.8 ns to 0.5 ns in the following tables: Table 207, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Read Operations Table 208, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Write Operations Page(s) 1, 265, 272--274, 277 1, 255, 264, 272, 277 275 292, 293, 294, 295
292, 293, 294, 295
292, 294
292, 294
292, 295
293 293, 295
295 300, 301
302, 303
285, 289, 290
285, 289, 290
289 289, 290
-2-
Changes Between the April 2002 and February 2003 Release (continued) DSP16411 The value for the t110 min specification was changed from 3.5 ns to 3.0 ns in Table 208, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Write Operations. The value for the t112 min specification was changed from 0.8 ns to 0.5 ns in the following tables: Table 200, Timing Characteristics for ERWN and Memory Enables Table 208, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Write Operations The value for the t113 min specification was changed from 0.8 ns to 0.5 ns in the following tables: Table 200, Timing Characteristics for ERWN and Memory Enables Table 208, Timing Characteristics for Synchronous Write Operations Modifications to ECKO clock frequencies supported by the SEMI for synchronous and mixed asynchrounous/synchronous operation. Refer to Section 4.14.4.2. This is due to a design exception that was described in the DSP16411 SEMI Design Exception advisory (AY03-007WINF). Figure 39, PIU Functional Timing for a Register Read and Write Operation, was modified to clarify the behavior of the PRDY pin when a host controller performs a read of PIU control registers. Notes were added to Table 85, Summary of Host Commands, and Table 217, Timing Characteristics for PIU Register Read Operations, to clarify the behavior of the PRDY pin when a host controller performs a read of PIU control registers. The input capacitance specification for all inputs in Table 183, Electrical Characteristics and Requirements, was changed from 10 pf to 5 pf. In Section 11, Timing Charateristics and Requirements, the test condition for inut rise and fall times was changed from 4 ns to 1.5 ns or less. The typical power dissipation data in Table 185, Typical Internal Power Dissipation at 1.2 V and 285 MHz, and Table 186, Typical I/O Power Dissipation at 3.3 V and 285 MHz, was modified to reflect the increase in the maximum core frequency of 285 MHz. Page(s) 290 285, 290
285, 290
112
146 147, 295
267, 268 276 272, 274

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of DSP16411

	To Download DSP16411 Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .